IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) /> <° 1.0 1.1 I M£ 12.0 122 m 1.25 1.4 1.6 ^- 6" ^ ► ^.^* % '^'"'f/ % Photograpijic Sdences Corporation 23 WEST MAIN STREET WEBSTER, N,Y. 14580 ( 71 «) 87^-4503 ^ '%'■ CIHM/ICMH Microfiche Series. CIHIVI/ICMH Collection de microfiches. Canadian Institute for Historical Microreproductions / Institut Canadian de microreproductions historiques Technical and Bibliographic Notaa/Notoa techniques at bibliographiquas Tha Institute has attempted to obtain the best original copy available for filming. Featurea of thia copy which may be bibliographically unique, which mey alter any of the imagea in tha reproduction, or which may significantly change the uaual method of filming, are checked below. □ Coloured covera/ Couverture de couleur |~n Covera damaged/ D D D D Couverture endommagAa □ Covers restored and/or laminated/ Couverture reataurie et/ou palliculAe □ Cover title mieaing/ Le titre de couverture manque pn Coloured mapa/ Ca^tea g^ographiquae en couleur Coloured ink (i.e. other than blue or black)/ Encra da couleur (i.e. autre que bleue ou noire) pn Coloured platea and/or iiluatrationa/ Planchaa et/ou iiluatrationa 9n couleur Bound with other material/ RelM avac d'autrea documents PTj Tight binding may cauaa shadows or distortion along interior margin/ La re liure serrie peut cauaer de I'ombre ou de la diatoraion la long da la marga intiriaura Blank laavaa added during restoration may appear within the text. Whenever possible, these have been omitted from filming/ II se peut que certainae pages biar.shes ajouties lors d'une restauration apparaiaaant dana la taxte. maia, lorsque cela itait possible, ces pagaa n'ont pea it* fiimAaa. Additional commanta:/ Commentairee suppiimentairaa.- L'Inatitut a microfilm* le meilleur exemplaire qu'il lui e *ti possible de se procurer. Les dAtaiis de cet exemplaire qui sont peut-4tre uniques du point de vue bibliographique. qui peuvent modifier une image reproduite. ou qui peuvent exicer une modification dans la mithoda normaie de filmage sont indiquis ci-dessous. T tc r~n Coloured pages/ D This Item is filmed at the reductiossibie image/ Lee pagaa totaloment ou pertieilement obacurciaa par un feuillet d'errata. une pelure, etc., ont iti filmies A nouveau de fa^on i obtanir la meilleure image possible. be rig rei mi 10X 14X 18X ^w « 22X 26X aox y 12X 16X 20X 24X 28X 32X T^pilFP«f The copy filmed here hat been reproduced thanka to the generoaity of: National Library of Canada L'exemplaire filmA fut reproduit grAce A la g^nAroaitA de: BibliothAque nationale du Canada The images appearing here are the beat quality possible considering the condition and legibility of the original copy and in keeping with the filming contract specifications. Les images auivantes ont 4tA reproduites avec le plus grand soin, compte tenu de la condition et de la nettetA de I'exempleire film*, et en conformity avec les conditions du contrat de filmage. Original copies in printed paper covers are filmed beginning with the front cover end ending on the last page with a printed or illustrated impres- sion, or the back cover when appropriate. All other original copies are filmed beginning on the first page with a printed or illustrated impres- sion, and ending on the last page with a printed or illustrated impression. Les exemplaires originaux dont la couverture en papier est imprimte sont filmfo en commen^ant par le premier plat et en terminant soit par la dernlAre page qui comporte une empreinte d'impression ou d'illustration, soit par le second plat, salon le cas. Tous les autres exemplaires originaux aont filmte en commenpant par la premlAre page qui comporte une empreinte d'impression ou d'illustration et en terminant par la dernlAre page qui comporte une telle empreinte. The last recorded frame on each microfiche shall contain the symbol — »- (meaning "CON- TINUED"), or the symbol ▼ (meaning "END"), whichever applies. Un des symboles suivants apparattra sur la dernlAre image de cheque microfiche, selon le cas: le symbols -^ signifie "A SUIVRE", le symbols ▼ signifie "FIN". Maps, plates, charts, etc., may be filmed at different reduction ratios. Those too large to be entirely included in one exposure ar» filmed beginning in the upper left hand corner, left to right and top to bottom, as many frames as required. The following diagrams illustrate the method: Les cartea, planches, tableaux, etc., peuvent Atre filmte A des taux de reduction diff Arents. Lorsque le document est trop grand pour Atre reproduit en un seul clichA, 11 est filmA A partir de Tangle supArieur gauche, de gauche A droite, et de haut en bas, en prenant le nombre d'images nAcessaire. Les diagrammes suivants illustrent la mAthode. 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 ^ i^.' ■ i. Fl i^ULES, Nechssti FROA TR ' ^;f .^ SOLO OF THE / /^ J^' FKENCH GROUNDED UPON THE DECISIONS THE FRENCH ACADEMY •, WHEREIN ALL THE NEdlsSART i- \ UULES, 0B8ERVATI0x\S, AND EXAMPLES, Exhibited in a Manntr finiircly New, ^f-v,t BrjOHJiPERRIN. I !" Necessnria^pnerisy Jucitnda seniLus. ** Quintil. ^. .., ., / — . I , , , 1 . ^i iit tA' i ' ' . im • Ill J II ■ I III I I III 1 I iiiii |, mm ■ 1 FROM THE THIHTEENTIi LONDON EDIT, CARCrULLir IlETIsio BY ▲ rTBAiHIER 0F THE fRENCH lUlclcplkiE., *■»» ■#. k:P. IS-?: MONTREAL ; '%' '•^i '''■ .1 'it >. !»■■ 1 Mmi 'III .»' 1 . " ' ^^^^K PRTN^'EO 4^Y iIaI -SOLD WUOLFSAIB AKD >RI.TAIt. AT TUB BOOXITpifltt i^. a§,4iS^ /'ail/'* Street. ^ «^ ;, . >^^^ 181t« idtiH %*' \ ii: • *■«> ^%; '4H ■k .tt. v.. )1. ^ s ^ '■* v4 '..'' za iv. ;<):i; «^': 'nt'-^i^ » Itoi j<' £ ■■r^A3:'[A0 T--; ■/' .1 ^ ^ • f /■: .? tj. » • > ij'«f ■? ■> -TMr" ti, « i»'. .,* .jnltnifjr- i..'jl :f! ■^'i .««'' ':m-- *»• rf ?■ -«• ■ .» t<^ »•; i«> -.i-i*:"- ,?*.i- ■ I ■ % .r^-: 'ilp.. .«,i/ ■f^"' J^-f 5Jh' .■' *rt*i.;, ar'-^'w. v^^ ;**!,#■ • f ■■V: r«' ;iaW;;:.;ij*^A-. ifiio H i>*fui^-rf M -.•*.:*;: _■ v.* -;. r-..,^. • -'^^y- nohJessi flaiterii kiHf U voi gut Ji i i rhemt d Vomit ^ Vtnrii ^u'U n VHamm terrevi rieuses > f lie la h Fius fa Tout Grano I * W * i • ■■■-■■■'■ ■ «M - l>tl\ MILORD LYTTELTON. <,'x:-.. ■■■ ''4- *."• * *'" \ ^ , ' -1^ ', '■ ■ , - « V, J' " ■ t , "' » ^ • i' ■ /■ ■ , l-'^\ '•», HONSEIGNBTUR, ,^,, 4. y# n^ debuterai pat par h p^negyrique de la tickle sse de voire natssance, et ae voire rang : la ficUterie ayant epuise toutes lei fiouvel/es manures de Imf hi Crtmdit ta uuU ^ui mi rem pour celehrer V6i quaUtU ptmnmlkiy c*ti( d^^in h* f stiff au* Jt him H voin Pdirii la ghht d^Opphudlr ii Thomnil^ Etati W ttffhiller privf df^ii Mijfsfe, d Pcrnifmenf^di h Soiiftf Royale, Fiuf faites plus^ M0NS1I6N1U% voms V emhellissez, Toui les faUnts Ittteraires sont rehaussti en votke^ Grahdeur par h-fiotection qthtUe 0^corde avx (!■ -^; * ^ DEDICATION. -r V Sciences it aux Artu lie plus ^rand plaisir pour I'hommr de Leitref^ est d^incdurager'- ttut ce q^ti pent contribuer a la Ultirature : c'est Ic x^ractire ^^stsfiC" /// dji grand homme ; c*est le voire ^ Monseigneur, qui fte recherchez pas les louangesy et qui faites tout ct qu'il faui pour hj meriter, y, II ne fn*aumt done pas cte facile di trvuifef u>t^ ' -"■■-'■ " ■ , , ■ ^ "■ autre Meiine aiitti celibre par la tuperimti reeonnut de ton esprit, psur lui presenter cet' ouvrage, eammi m un Jugt ecfSire et judicieux/ qui connolt toutet let heautes reelles de la langue Fratifiuff, el dont Yap- probation ^ntraim •naturelkment, fille du public : mon 4mbition sera tonjsuri de miriur la voire, et d'etre, Mver le plus profond respect y ,• . . '" "' ,, ■^■ -v" (/ ■' . ■ If MbN^IGNEirR, 4 W^l^W^L' \y^ VoTRE Grandeur, treQ kiimkle et tres obelssant Scrviteur^ PBRRIN 1X4 * ,/ • ■ - ■ . ^\il^)i:.-i^ [,.^ ' i ? '- ■ '.'iv * ■«♦ ■ *t* * PREFACE. > ). .Mvr..?vV ■*>■-■ •A^, -■•i*y/-*'*F"''V'> tt« . wu fective in this pofnt, though of the utmost import- ance. In order to jdo it all the )u9tice in my power,- I llt^vc fuUy conju^tpd, both in French and Eng- lish, six. regular verbs i and aW those that are irregu- lar, in an alphabetical manne^. These arc followed by/partfcular ofcseryaiions >ipon defective j^erbs^^ and maiii^r of ^onji^gating tbein. *hciMrd part containi^ the theory a»d practice of e Freii^ lajoguage \ the former coraprchending. ihe rul**' of syntax, witl^ many •, new observations,. i{lust*aijj|||y proper examples ; aiid the latter giving separa!f€^fid diitinct exemplifications of the rules itn^^o^iSiimtions after each part of speech,. for the solar's impf#cmcnt» l^Precepts and^facticc, rulcsandexamples, must go- hand in hs^, to impart a thorough knowledge of ■ any tongue what^|i. A* Jo the French language,, ihflfconly way fo|j|lit^fupii by becoming t\eH acq^i^nted with it's rules,, and then to read pro-^ per book s,^x>r Cftmexse *v ith. those wh^ speak it in it's PltEPACB. 9$^- ^ purtty ; but •either reading nor confcrifttton m\\k ever enable him to fpeak w write it with propriety anti elegance^ if he m wholly uflac^naiate^ with it*» fufidimenttl princtpiet^ ' Is the fourth part are exhibited the practical trre-f ^ gaUritiea of the French TongiiB^ alphabetically d«i« posed, with the appropriate uses of particiilar wordi- and phrasesy warranted by the most approved au- thors, and especially by the decisions of the Fvench AcADBMr. It is needless to point out the great uti- Kty of these important articles to those who Jiave made a considerable progress in the language, since they manifestly contain the most elegant suid curtpus of all the French idioms : some of the rest are inter- ^ spersed among the rules and observations exempli* tied in the third part of this work ; and, to rendejr the present undertaking more beneficiajl^^ I have in' every j>art of it^ and particularly in the (Conjugation of the verbs, not only ia the orthography, but in other respects, had a due regard to the regulations of. the ACADIMY. Thus I have given a short account of niy gram- matical performance,' which » far from being an easy task. A Grammar for the use of schools constst#«of such a variety of parts, and some of them sb^ miAlClplBf and intricate, that it is a very difiicuU mlMer%l|i| render it at once concise and cc^pffjs^ive, ana! adapt it to the meanest ca».iv cities. Tlie subject perr haps may be deemed low and vulgar ; hi^liSt^pi oi^ serves, that there is intenui labor ; that , smcA ^^ub- jects require pains and * application. ^j^tf/5»fif?totalsqi assures us that such works plus hakmt operis fu4m ^teniationis : that they arc laborious, though not splendid j productions. ii ^ » General utility was the objec| I principally re- garded in the essecution of my ^4e sign. 1 have omitted no necessary rules or observatitm^s : those that I have inserted arc just, and Hlustrao^ by pro-, per examples y while, at the same time|,#. have had <# nik PREFACE^ i bttvixyin view, at far ai it could be pursued without obfcurity and confuiion ' But, though I have taken aN the care in n^y power to render the following^ sheets correct, I make no doubt, that unavoidable errours have escaped- my ^ utmost attention ; for my own experience confirms the truths of what Mr. Pa/i asserts in the following words : •' WI*o«T«r thinks • fkoItUts pieoe to mc,- ** Thiftk« wliHt ne'er wm, nor U, nor •'er sItNit be/' However, if, upon a candid and impartial exami- nation, the prefent should be found a well-conducted undertaking, I am not without hbpfs, that my invo- luntary crronrs will be favoured with the reader's in- dulgence ; which Horace represents as a reasonable practice, in these lines : . ye*um >.bt phira n'rent-^-~'^y non eg9pauch * Offendar vmculU^ quas aut incurhfuditf , Aut humana parutn cavit nature, • ... . ^ ■-..> -/ I^, B. Iii this Edition, the less essential rules are Planted ip a smaller ty|.eil an the moru import uir, tliat d^grhcirl^ir may perCMvt! «hof Eicrcisee^ both of wHlch aie^ numbered in like- manaer, ■ ■■if .... ...... y .0 t CONTENTS P REUMINARr OhservatiMt Of Pr09uncl§tton ' PART L C*AP. I. * CITAP. IV. ,\ t - ,-^ / f CHAP. III^ An AJphahi^al Llit of many oftbt Frnuk Attjertivtti $ath agrmng^H Gtndtr nnd Numbir wiib a difirtnt^ Sui^an/ivi, to iUfutratt Us Mitmiug 4: - . CHAP/lV. J'Lhf of At^ictltiii mih^.tb^ Manner of tbtlr hhg plaeed'iiforiof'afior ihnr BnbitantiveSf and • their Sij» niJkation.fH eiiher ease -• < « • CHAP. V. Of the Marhi and Pointe uted in morittng Fr(n(k^\ CHAP. VI. , ik Of Accent* made vse of in tvriting French . A Vocabulary^ French and English Famili^f^ and eaey JDiaUguv for Toung JBeglnaern^^ RART U. CHAP I. \d short Analysis of the, Parts ofSfee^k « CHAF. II i^ \^f Genders^ - • ^' ' % *• W^the.,Fs)rmttti9n^fthe FeminmJGeader of-^e^^m 6 m SI ST 51 £6 V QOk :i ! r ' -i'- PAtE. dt M * CONTENm CHAP. IV. 0/ th§ Formatiott of th§ Plurml of Nouni CHAP. V. ' ^kt DtiUntion of Ko*tns . • ^ • 6% ,^^,^CHAP. VI. -:;rt-^^:-;: ;:,-"• "■-"•^ Of Pronouns Sbct. I. 0/* Pwsonal Pfnoum 9lCT. ll« Q/" Possessive Pronouns filCT. III. ©Z' Demonstrative Pront)ttns > l^^m^i^ gy SiCT. IV. Of Relative Pronoums -\-/m]^W-'m^^ 70 8ect. V. 0^ Inttrrofative Pronouni'-'i.JW-^mf'^^^it^yjf^ ib. •ict. VI, 0/ Indejiniti Pronitma ^m^'W^--^'^ ^t €6 ib. j58 C&JiP. Vll. n Prelimhgfy Dhgfvationf -^^^^^^'.^'l^^^p lb; Conjugation if the jiuxinary f^erhi '^?f|ikis^M#*^'* ^S Conjugation of the Reguhr Worhi • • 77 Termination if the Primitive Tenses of the Regular Verhs lb, Coiyvgation rf the Irregular J^fTbs^ eilphahticaSy '8B Particular Ohserwttions «^ ^mr Ver^^ t^fij 'kfec^ live and their Manner of being conjugated wim4td)f «» , iJlphabetical Order '. - . . . 141 ^«iv. I SiSCT. I] ^scx. I Ii£!r. I' gift. V test. V SWT. VJ 4 PART l[U'm:U^n.?:^^ M '^ CHAP, h y-'?m:-M^'^i0 Rules and ThiVegTi Praftici ^eoryjmidto Practice ^■^m^^^tiy^--^}^^^mmu^4'j ^les inKmservsitions upon the ArMes ^r^-^-m^^^^ ib. n Rules Rules aM {^hervaticns vj>§n the Articles rxempV^ed pr the Scholar* s Practice |^ 'l^l^i^-l " '^ ^^ CHAP. II. Ruhs and Ohsef^ations upon Noum Rules and Ohservail0s upon Nouns tstemplifnd for the ScholssrU Prsmte. '■:'^^iJii^U . '4iimm^'.i:^^l^ ".!?'■•; ♦- 51 .'■■fi:r^iil^?^Hi- \^^ Riulei hm if$n ' f^rm o un *- , ■»'?''& i ' a«i Ruhs and S«CT. I. SXCT. II PAtE. 61 €6 ib. 69 ■^■^^ ib. ^ P^<' lb. 77 &h ib. 8B 14i ..»>-^''iii? V tki ib. 151 il S«CT. II. Fosttsim§ Pronomns m • ^Mr'>. ' If^ Pttsitiivi Frtmowu 9i»mfiifiid for th» Seh^U i»r4 Pr^efici * :r> -*«i^ti^-;:;>* ', 178 £scT. Hit JDtm9fu$ratht ProM^ms • » 188 ^«£a^'/ Ptfoctm- ■■< :•• . ' • ISS- 11119. IV. - Jfttlatim Prtmimr^ ^" f *. , - *• . r . |f$ A^tMAMvfPfo»Mm;fmmfif/kd/^ Schtl* Slit. V. InUrrtjgati^te Prtnermt - - 191 Jnffrrofofivi Pttfn^miMumfUfid for tbf Scholar' t Practke . 19^ S&CT. VI. Indpmite or ittd$*$rnitti^ PimouHT^ 194 '\V ''^\Jnmt$rmmatf Pronomi eietm^fjhi fir thi Scholar** Practk$ 4^^^ - W9 gjiCT. VII. Tht Supplying Pronouns^ le, •», y, 308 .»vAf; ^^'?S' Pronmi fitmpliJUd fir *h$ : ■ Scholar's Practtc§ - • t99 JtuUs and Ohfrvationj upon thi Digrm of Cmparifon fi% Th$Degrm of Cmpartfon exemplified for th* Sckilaf's [^ Pra(tie9 ni^^^ . . • .» ,„. 21'"" • -.v:.. V: m4yM:,y k;^',-^c^ '.i^iK -^^^^c^i^v^^^^v ;#^?*^^ r.f ■^i-y:-.'- k'- ,. CHAP. V. * „ IhJ-:.r. Ruki ami tkif^nifmi vjntn P^orU S«CT. 1. Tht Uu of Tenses * ,. .' 224 71^^ TWr/w of Ferh exemplified fir the SehoU ar's Praetibt ' - - w 2f 8 S»CT. II, The Use of the Su^netive Mood -^ ft I If he Safymctivt Mood fmrnfiUM fir tht Sthofars Practief >" ",. «I4 Sect. III. ThtGowmmentofVerhs • ^ f40 T^ Ooistrrment of Ftrh ettempHfi^il^ tht * • SMars PracOct « * 243 / ■ .■ ')■; ■*»* m ILtt CONTBNTS. p. I I' •i I' I l". ! ' CHAP. VL V^?.^i^^;^'n:'*^" Rules and Ohservaiions vpon Impefsonat^Verhs **^ *, 249 Ruks and Observations upon Imptrsdnql Verbs exemplified for the Scholar s Practice » *W » * P-p^v V^ j* l . 25^^ CHAP. VII. ivAt^,;; ■. i';\tv:ft?,*; *' 1^78 Farther Remeirks upon the Prepositions a and Aq . 23 i ^ii^j /W Qbservatibns upon Prepositions exemplified for ihe Sehiar^s Practice ....mv* -..;,.-,...«,u-„^ >^«>-;'-;,.>^82 -♦-r J; ^i ■# ■s«-' .•• 7..II «■'.;%■ 5,.M •. iiy v\rV« CHAP. X. Observatioi^upon the Conjunctions •! «»^ qMe - 293 TAff Gonjunciien quQ memplifisd for the Scholar's Praetice ^94 '^Mfei .ItfeS TART. »V, v^ IT %■ ' ^■* I' Practical Irregularities ef the French Tongue, edphabetim tally disposed *Mth the appropriate Uses of particular Words md Phrases, warranted by the most approved Jtuthor^md especially by the Decisions of the FufiNCH :f-^ 11 ■ 256 ■ ■ '..■ . ib. 71 «5(J X ex' S60 .^^^"■■•o<;::1i:; GRAMMAR :f« 'it: ?v. ^t«- 'fv-" ;..,ir PRENC^n T9WGCE. 4»i!if* '*^i-->M i^J v-«. .ft^^^ «^l?"*#irt;*^M ;' e » iif ,1.^..^.v; Peuuhvart OsSERtATXO^irS* GRAMMAR if a collection of obfervations, to whick the manner of speskiog or vkTiliog, used in a lao- [uage, may be reduced. This definition explains the nature of Oratnmar in giy. sral, and agrees both wtih the dead aiM] living languages. Towever, to hare a clear and exact idea of the Faehtch [rammar, we may d^ne H ia the following manner : The French Grammar is a collection of obserTatioos Irawn from approved custom, to which the manner of speaking or >. riting French may be red<<.ced. First, The Frenib Grammar it a collecihn rf v.?» ■ The VOWELS, As tkey are^{MronoQnced io spelling ■ 'iSifi^^ANOr'-ER SCALl.' •, Cj 6j 6, i, Of Uy on ^^, JJ-4, The CONSONANTS. ^.^ftei^i h, c, lilr, g, fc, j, k, I, 111,0, p, q,/r, s, t, V, X, z. 'mC'.- % vv^- The abflie chartcters may 'be prooonnced according to the EnglisFwai:, of b^ agnaiing'to tb^«i>y fowel either before or afteif yM^ ■IMMMl.t J 1.^ IN order to give a just and exact idea of the pronuneia. tion of a language, it is principally necessary to dis-- tinguish, as clearly as possible, aii the different sounds us^ lit the language, without any regard to the letters made u^c of to express those sounds ; because a language, as French, ENCLisn^ &c. may tsxpress different sounds by the same chatacteffi and the S9>m« .sounds by diifertnt 'Characters. ':. ■ ,• .:v ^v^ivr . ., ■Xh'-'-k^ .;*;-:> ■U'P^ ■'*»-.^! ^<^i»/ir ' ' The Premh im^ SoUn^i, with ihaingtuh' Worth In which the ttttnt Sounds artfimnd* .a^^: I.! ■ (O a, ail (2) e, < (3) 6, (4) hf orS, CD| (6) i, in (6) 0, OQ (7) u, (8) eu, un, . ■■i^- '--^i rr-- i?:: iiOi do am T ery^ irh«t, aniuiBk answer , •'.■;:.:. #dic't' t' -K'^^'i rbb^'wB^ . x"k:ri he ■ ^"^4 ro, to»|ue ^v Cttrate, CtfdosUy this souoct is panting in English ^| B, that tl^jB^oiind ill each English word does not fully answer to' the nicety dl^ the French pronunciation, it being impossible to find such English vordsas havestrictly ^he same sound as in French ; it may, however," be sufficient for our purpose, to haye shown^ as nearly as possible, the affinity of the French and English sounds. ^ The simple sounds include the true French prcmuncia. tioQ, There is no child but will easily, and in a short time, acquire it, if the master take care to mAke .him pro« nounqe these simple soands projierly, and je1a the ct^t^So* nants to them ; in which consists the wl&le and only art of reading French. ■I i ii i yv. fj Hi }; i 4 A ORAMMAA OF TUB The compound toundi will easily be formed by tkii practice, as, From the sixth and fourth sounds we haTC these : rooi, /, or me ; foi, faiih* ; by adding an r, noir, blcuk ; boire, to drink. From the sixth and fifth, these : foin, hay ; moins, test / point, not at all. From the sixth and r, or, gotd i fort, Ortn^ i b«rd, brim ; port, harbour. From the ninth and r, court, shori j cour, a yard. From the eighth and r, fleur, ajlower s beurre, butkr. Froc) (he eighth and liquid /, deuil, mourning ; feuiUe, a leaf. From the fourth and liqeid /, soleil, the iun i pareil, kh> From the fimi %nd liquid /, mall, § mall $ iventaU, « fan, The same may be laid of all other combinatloni, N. B. At all timet, wh«o • r/ansoaant follow! ^e nim* pie sound, the compoand if itrdo|;er and niore open ; at, Jfeur^ bturrtf or^ ^rt, kc, *Oniaoh oeeaiioni, tbt fisth and (durth are looadcd i>p qwickljr, thftt it ii not cu«y to dj»tinguiib them from tbe ninth and frst sounds. .^ ■:;#t^ ■^l'^'':*'-S 1, CHAP. 11. The SjUfUtds of the Commants, ^^.,,^ K has .;''■:;"' B-"v ::...4;- ■,v^>:i' jSounds.. , has ' : ; t , i :L 1 b, bouquet, a nosegay Ilk, S k, coiFre, « /mai s, cierge, « «i>4ur ^«fl4& g, second, second 2 sh, (English) chocolate, f^** t '■m:^'-^ }^. » k, eciio,£r^« t d, donner, /o ^' «•"/ nommes, nine men> 5 g, gazon, turf k^ bouxg, « hrougi heroine^ a heroine 61}e, « ^#r/ ^ &\f ihriod ; 2 m, mon, mjr chiei<^ a dog Wen aibc, vrry glad , priceptevf) a precephir P, Q, id atniiy* Ml*#*d t»y «*, In AebeghwiHiR of %o#d5, aMi somi^t \\\Lt k, qnatre, /wr R, T, V. m^«- J V 1 oiirpir, a looking gltu* £, rose, a rose *i tj amitie, friendship s, patience^ patience 1 vertu, vtr/v^ 4 ks, sexe, sex gz^ exemple, «ff fxMw^i!; •fl, soixante, xix/y |^^. z, dixidoi^ . 7i&« tenth y^er dix, /m followed by a i/owel. All these lotinds are eireihpHfied hy more words ranged ID their respectiire classes, in my Practice of tAs FrenC« PllOVWIfriATlOir A^rHABETlCALLT EXHIBIT Efl, where you may find wordu in ivbick such Istters are cither proaouaced, t>f dot pronounced* .*.«.fc*^'jftll'^ .•M ■f! .J, r Bt ,1 d A; GRAMMAR OF THE CHAK ni; ^!^C*;'? *• Ah AlphMbeHeal Lui pf many of'the Freiuh AJtjtcttwt; eMch' agreeing in Gtnder and Number mith a ^ijj^rent SuiitMtivt t§ illustrate kt Meaning, ^ > . t*!*.'-. Ob8. Those adjectifM marked thus- ;( are geBcraUyj phicedliefore their Substantifes. Adjectives, Gender of i;'; i! Stibstantive». ABJECTE, F aboDinable, JVl acadftffiiquf^ acari&tre, admirable, ' adverse, . alfabie; affaire, aflfectees, affirmatif, Sgee, avtreable, as;rc9te, aigrelettfy ^pabie, alse, alimentairey alizes, ^ alphabetique, altier, anbigue ambititiuzy atndre, .4 ..J : amortiss arn'Mireuse, asphibu!vgi4u v^anatOTDiqufe; M F F F F M r M F F M F F M F M F M F M F F F condition, an^ abject conditiom crime, an abominable crime ezercice, aw academical exerclte-' humour, a petulent temper invention, a- nvonderful invention- partie« an advene party demoiseiic, amiable lady: homme, ' a busy man roanibres, affected manner* ton, a positive tone — y'ea^ef an elderly tvidovf surpriw, an agreeable surprise^ fruit, Wild fruit sauce, a sourish, sauce filfe, a lovely girl OUT rage, an easy worhh ^^ ,v, pen slop, an alimony ^u vents, trade winds liste, alphabetical list homine, a proud man parole, an ambiguous word ;, projet, an ambitious project .f^^ boii>8un, a bitter drink :,i^u4<' rente, a redeemable reiti fiile, an amorous girl exprission, an ambiguous expres* siott dlssectign, gn anatomical dissection ^t** ''•' M'jtctivett |; ancieoi Anglicaaey- •aimtles^ annuelle, anodlns, anonyme, ani^atique» antique, app^tisiaote, ^pre, aquiiin, arbitraire, arp.entine,- ardent, argil leu ie, aromatique, atrabilairey FRENCH TONGUE. Gender of SabiUhtive^. ■•<'«» aTtifi<;ieni) Attique, avail tageuZ) aveuglci . j^y* '^ auriculaire, ausldie, authentiqije} M' tmi,- an •ncient friend F ^iiie, the ehunh of England F facult^f,' the eeniiittve facultiei F pensipBr iajmir/fK/^n/ion M rtoidd4Bt, anodyne remedies . M livre, an anonymous Booh F filie, dhanee town * M chlUeau, an antique eattle^ ' F Tiande, savoury meat M fruit, harsh fruit M o«iy an aquiline nose We powroir, an ariitrary poiwer F Toix, a clear voice M charbOD, a turning coal F terre, clayey ground F her be, an aromatic herb / M tetopei-aueDr an atrahilarious- ot ^Qx^^m^^ , melancholy temperameni -' M detour, an artful eutasion M scl , pe^e, genteel raillery iioste, an advantageous post- chcral, a blind horse tetnoin, or */»r witness ^^" M M M F- F mine, an-austtre mien )oi, atf authentic law V fir be, tnrauxiUAry verb auxiliairt,,.,^, ,.^^ BacT^qae^l^vv^^v;F chanson, a- drinking sotfg-'^ badine, *- ■ ^ bai, bar bar e^ basse,. "J beau, Wgue, 4ynvtfe 4^*^ humeur, a ivanton humour l^^^M- cheval, a bay horse :!s;;ii:W.M:i^'f'' F MCtieu,^ a bdrbarous actiofk' F chambrr', a ground room M tapis, a fne carpet --C.--7 ^l C'^i'ant, a stammering chi belliqneuse, ,j^0 |F nation, a warlike natm bienseante, 4*a\F parole, a decent word biieux, \s^ tcmperani«/ii, a biUous constitution bissextile, ^ aon^t», the leap pa^ bitumineuse, F mati^re^ bituminous matter t' < u \'¥ 4dj0ctireii biiarre, blmnehi^ biM, bloBdfy boUe«x# • t kon» borgne^. boitu, - boUniquf, bourbeux, bourru, brave, ^ brillant, br&lant, bruoe, brute, « brvyaetey burlcsQjie^ Calamiteuiy calleusoyv . calomoieuXy eandi, ffapable, capricieiise, eiftieux^ casuelle, cat^goriqne, catholiqueyiv^. eaTalidres, carerneuse^ caustique, c^:^bre, celeste, ^ chatouillmEy chand, cbas^e, . a ■■ chasTe^ *J A GJlABCMAJt OF THE M mpiAtf A-mkimikul mind F >eli6mfse, mskamhirt H rvban, ^^kkrHbon M cfaeveas, /K^/ AoiV M elMTal, m iume h^ne if* TW, ^09dmme F fenne, i4tr€, on estbarotic plaster M auteui.. a celebrated author bko, ikybhte temps, i(o/ weather M M M li* main ^ r. f — ^vttrnt nana T t^te, ethddhad franca TONOOE. I Adjectif ti* I chdre, chiiiiiriqu«9 chirurgicalet drcoijyH^taf circulairey clair, coloMiIe, combu8tibl4b conmode^ comma 0, compae(f| cofflj>Ut| OODfUMi eonjfcturale) eonjogal^ cooscieMitHiy conskl^rabky constant, conti^gieBMy fompUatf cootinnel, contraire, coQtraiictQUe^ coHTenable^ cordifUc, , corporelle^ correct, cruel, curieui| of iahilnKifcs. M cJlApeaiiy Stdmrbai M |Nr«(jati A ehimirual prtyeel jF coadttltey mpory hehmmut F \tUt% a circular Uttef F itttue, « ealosiml ttatut F mati^^i €mnhkfthh mtOtm^ F naiioa, m wtmement bouu M pite) S^4ommm price M fiorpa, dtmnptut body M tralti^ mtmnpUit trtat'ut F Uie, stmfiutdidia F ^QAOniisance, tonjieturaH Udge F Wliti, ^ygalJJeB^ M o^ociMt, j4i totueimikm . ii^VEvT*. il tbkii) # tmuidtt^ahh tttatt Jl a^ii, ^samiani friend F JDaladie, mtonU^ous M -AKgaiity rtmly money M bruit, MmmtinuMl noise F i^soIutioB, « tontrary reeoluiim F noavdlc, moniradictory nevM logement, a convenient lodging^ li^eu r, # tordiai Hqmr puiiiiioo, wrporal puniibmeut Ottvrage, m torrett work tcNirmmt, m eruei torment M 3 M M 5.i-> Dang^reaX) decent, |p5^^. decisiTe^ delicate. '"^^ delicieasep demonstrative, deraisonoable, M iabkaui « tunous picture M paasngQ, m dangerom passeu^ M habiliameiit, mJecentdreS F lenl^pce, decisive sentence F ^i^sACj^ dmmiy meat F pAire^ M doHeitiu pedl^ F PMBfe, s -dimoiutraiime proof . F demande, em unreasonable request \% (■'1 i:lt, 10 Msigr^able A GRAMMAR OF THE Oendkr of SulMtaative*. il«MfaBtagcuM, d^dirable, despotiqae, derote, ^ . diffamatoire, diiBcile, t <*»«"*> diligeot, .s diferct, disgraeieiii, dispendieitset F i>lact, 'fhe buff lace ¥ ooi. versa* l(Mi, dua£^itahU €9n*tr\ M jour, an ilt fakd day ' F flituatlon, a ditadvantageom tttt Hon F parolf , «n immodest word M bien, a desirable blessing M pouToir, desp9tic power V femme, a devout woman > M li ueUe, m defamatory libel F langup, a difficult tongue '^^^^i^ M mag^istrat) a worthy magis4rate %mM ^colier. a eUligent scholar M ami, et discreet friend • M 6tat, et disagreeable situatidte F guerrtfy an expensive war diiUoctife^ ■■''^' F «iarqiie, « distinctive mark docte, dogmatiqvt, domiDicale, doulourevse, douce, droite, /i doaey ' durable^ M profMseur, alearnei profetsof M Btylej a dogmatical style F oraiion, the Lord s prayer F condition, a grievous condition F odeur, a eweet'SmelUng odour F main, the right hand F pierre, » hard stoat F protp^riti^, lasting prosperity Ecclesiastfque, ^C0DOB!iey effectif, efficacC} v^js'.'f'i.'! ^iastique ^legact, «n tV.em^aiaue. • • • / ■ enijii^J'yteatique, F digoit^, em eeclesiasticed ^gnity M mari, a- saving husband * M heritage, area! J' *! ^ . M moyen, an effir v. '^at ■ •■■ -«v^^-»i^^ cfficiente,. Ti^\ F cause, an ejicii.i. .^use .«*^*fj affroyable, M inceodie, a dreadful fire M corps, an elastic body M- compliment, an elegant eomphi ment F figure, ememhkmaiical fgurs M rem^e, an emollient meeRcine M baUy tf/w^ Ardkftf , »r*^'i^^ ;'4^i•^■i;?^-■ IJ?* djNtivcf. ipiriqaei' i«r)iique, ifaatio, [lignnatiqaty ivieui| )iiCOpfl|y \ pistoliire, [clusif. FRENCir TONGUE. \\ M B^deciOy a qmri'Joe/tr F deOMniN, ttn tnergttical petUlot^ M dilCOli rs, H ^Uli A discourtt t ^ F prop^sitio.i, 4m gni^matkal ^tp§k F icmMpe, a wMe woeek , M Ariiiaily am tnviow tradesman f^i^j^> • M nu%^..a thick chwd tri F MaUdie, an epidendial disorder > ' M proc^y ^ Off mttieaW lawsuit ^^v i . If palaiav ^ a kUA^)t pdlact If peSiBfy on epu poHn t'^ ' 14 »tjr»e, .tpisfJnry style M droit, 4M sstckuive right [p^ditify ' , M <^IBF(^9 an estftditicus clerk iptrt, ipressifi iquls, V itilrienrt ttnordinairey [abaleup% . pie, ,. ^rineuse, itidieuse, [taf, norable, liorL I fausse, Irme. Nee, . rtile, l^le. \1 U-lJii. M nidccin, an alle physician M mot, im expressive wrd M aeU, « JUif/jr i/irA F partie, /A* exttriotipart *> , M ^vdoement, an extraordinary efteni'^'''^ \ F dilT^rence, .« very gnat difer^'% ..tnu -^ P histfire, a Jkhuloue story ^9%ii4' F laagne, an easy language Wi projet, a/antaetical project t F dartre, ^i white tetter F •oci6i«, /I fastidious society ;; i ' " r; ;• SI moment, anuiUuchy moment F occasipD, a favourable opportunity . -M pUisir, a darling pleasure <^^.*^f» F nourelie, false news , ,, ' ,iii^*. M pilicr, ii>m/i«ii^^ ^J^y?^V^^^ ^ F "Wte, afiree heast^''^''^ "'^'^-\r^v--'tiU^.'.' F profiaqe, a fertile frovinct f M aoiaat, m faithful lover ^ . M homme, a AoHghty man Xi^iiimM- rmive ten$c _. Hit '//"' ^jtti'-i^ .J* , .^i^ sv:^ ^ 'i -*. i**ii?f!??r^ f^- '% %% I . ki ^ 1 ^ \w ill; If Adjcctivcst A GMJLMIUSROB THl Gi|IMi«|(Of ' wUSMMInWCfl* ■:H .i4^ I. fixe, flafqae#^> flatteur, fortuity frais, 1 francy ,*r^ Jt^ri Fran9oife9 fraodule«% friandy * -li***- froid, *" frugale^ friToIe, fruitier, fnn^bre fuoette. M coiwlisafr, » fanning eourtier^i^^'^ ¥ ttaii^ ill hmbk :, . ,-#te M cas, i ^msre chance ? U iflr, /oo/'m^ < M'flrWtMv fin loilH .-^■:'^---im '9 moitf^ a Fumthfa^ioH *^i If eivmiserce, a fraudulenHradf M pMy a tbmtfpye'' - "i^ ivm^'y, cMweatlM^ ;';:.■ t^^^v-- lit eoi»te> a fiivolbut story t'>*t*^*: :"l' M wIk Ci a/ruktrie -■■.mfjn ^v\s^i mF orai»oii, is finermf sermon V^ a^^^ r^#^ •vesturey m fotul ' adventure Gafante9,1|i;r'"": J^iWal^la^f^ giktte! manners t^'^'P] gatoche, ^V'^ i^^ main, the^ left band %Wi3nj f ^nwevvy «i<^** » * F maitre, a generous mastar'^-^^^^f^ f^ir-phi*pw^ . F carte, ' « mi^^^^^.^?i^^v/ /i»-« '^^^ g^ometriquey F d6inoiM^rat!on, a geometrical demoti' - ;;' strathn gloriease, r»^F^ enlrtprit-*- ag^rious undertiMi^'" Gothlque, *«^*rF lettre, bktekkfter fiacieuz, -*% vy|i|> coiiipii«ient, p handsome eon^B^^ gramniaticalfl^ F r^]p{le» a grammatteul rule X graody in-?^jm ||^ vm-ger, ahtrge orchard gras, ;'Ufcirfe§^ V .W JMilion, ttfathant grave, t-jvy F dikMMrolio, a grave gait grenui At 4pfl^ afnWectr of corn \ gros, M paqiiat, a large' handle grotesqueSi P figi>re»y grotesque ^gures gu^able^. iW*»ft 'li^ riviere, afiroihle river guerrieiv|l "^^vM pevple^ a^nxfarlike people guttnrale, , ti«^ F l^ttw* ^» trutfursl letter i Habile* ^ M ocTrier, on M worhaan yiT', ■• « ■;>i'! ji^vf .r,;/»i]£5!jj 'Ip-^^' 'Vv • r.-'H^:. f a^NCfi TONGiUE. IS I idje«tiv«i. babituel, I hardie, I harmonieuM;, X had«B, konorifl^ti«| IhomidC) |lII«gitiiD«, jillicitei^ jiilastre,- latiinaire, limmodei^ei limiiiodilste^ |iinpardoonabl«9 limparfait^ |impen^traM% Inbprenabfe, jimpraticable) |b{)fdpre, limprudcat ptyiufente) paccasHit^s, ncomparable, nconstanf, RcentcstaMe, >^ctrrigibl«, ncroyabie, ncurablb, Ddigeot, Ni:.cipliMkb^ Nispeo'taibX}, 'Chetiilcr of Sabstantives. 'V*r M Jr«iix^ .^fierce tyes ' bjet, ^ hateful 4ihject F antrepfise, a Hold mdertak'mg :¥ pl^riode, ^n harmonious psritd ¥ niontagtie, « high mountain W a«(ioB, Hd heroic action M litre, an honourS/e title . M Imge, t»et linen # misey ^'d hyfdct'uieul mien M jMNitorr, an illegal ^ower M 'COtftrat, Aa i/Z^r^a/ contract \P ismitl«, na illusitious iamilp M bcMibaur, imi^inary happiness M 4emp8, /Ime immemorial W . paMioA, din immoderate passkn ¥ posture, aw immodest portwe F fauCe, an unpardonable fault M vu^af0) 4^a imperfect work *• M M aacret, mn impenetrable seoret ▼ille^ im ^rhpregmtble city chemiu^ an impassable road terme, ^ improper term 4 1 moun* 4. M «vis^ >an imprudent advice F conversatioa, a chameful ^^^Mvifsam ition ■*• moAtagQf , an inaccessible lain F beaa^, ^n incomparable beauty M amour, >inc6nstant love F verity, ^n incontestible triit% • M gap^ot), j,» incorrigible lad t F nouvelle, incredible news F maladie, tm incurable sicinesM^ M auteUT, an infdigent author ^ M mang^f^ indigestible victuals M ^c«lierj rfn nnrtf/y schek^ M ^tfoitf OH indispensable duty %.. fi : l# f M' ''^:;:S* .'•»■ 14/ ' tAHjectifes. A GRAMMAll OF THE tvdubitable, in6piiisab)e| itf^viuble^ Gender of SubstantiveB. ,*»«>JM.. " M siicc^s, uttdouhted. success ' , ;^^;, F source, an inexhaustible source ' \ >, ^.'M Daufra^e, tm .unavoidaljt ship -4/ ■:—!r:^%^'H^>M wreck ,\'^ • ' ^^^, inf^od^jh^^-s.y F ren(e, arent charge ^ ,' fylfwoin iofinie, ;.ulw-: F vbligation, an infitUte olUgatton ing^nieuse, \^; F invvntioo, an ingenious invention inhabitable, 4^« F roaison, an uninhabitable bou4f_ ^ iuhumaine, F durel^, inhuman rigour * ,.,14 4. inimitable, ti^Asa'M sculpteur, an inimitable carver^^^ inintelli^ible. F proposition, an unintelligible pro* iBique, iDJurleuse, " inquiet, insatiable, insolvaLbie, insouteoable, position F action, a wicked action i\ V: .'.%. F parole, , an injurious expression -tUtM' M esprit, an unquiet mind i>^;r" M a p pet it, an unsatiable appetite i^i j; M d6bi.teu,r, an insolvent debtor F opinion, an unwarrantable epi- M ani, an intimate friend 1 4 F qualite, an intrinsic quality F conTentioii, an invalid agree* ,.:-i'^--u. ' . ment .r:*' ^l' ■ ^^. -J'^.- ,1^?- .' F amitie, an unchangeable frienS\ ship F imagination, an inventive imagina- tion M courage, an invincible courage ■ -, M attachement, an inviolable attach'\ .^i«t-v;tl .;, . tl\ent . r , ^ ,\^^i^■w^^ht^li\■ M travail, a useless labour \ 3«-ti*iHn^ M arr^t, an irrevocable decreerfp}, iRditiairej'r^l^ ,1" a^trologie, judicial astrology .r^a intime, - intrins^.juei .;. ioTalidc inTariable, ll^ventiTe, invincible, ioTiolable, inutile,' irievocabi*, ,\ isabtile, , \ W jofeuse, ^ Judai'que, ^'Wi FRENCH TONGUE. 15 AiSjectMrei. judicieuT, juridique, ^ juste, justificative^: Gender of •••1 SiHiifiuntivM. .nm^ff'.pM'^''' M philosophc, aJiJicious philosophemt F cooviction, a Itgal conviction M jufem^t, a jutt judgment t '■-* ' F pidce, a voucher . ^^ Laborieuxy M jardinier, a laborious gardener ^ ^tt labourablCj-A^- ' F terre, armble land Iac#nique,^ '^f|^ M style, a laconic ttyJe fjftM^s^jS* j; laide, 4v^i^ M figure, an ugly face ^?s|ii#^ ', lamentable, V' M cx'u - a lamentable shriek '. >> Ian go u reuse, languissBRte, . large, lascif, wv«;: •, lent, »- Hcentieuse, ^vW Ucite, limitrophe,-^ liquid^,., ; litierale, . liti£jeux|. llride, tJoog,. ^ lugubre^ l/rique, P M M F ■/iTi*?/ rf' F situation, a languishing situation F sante, weak be^th rue, « ^roii.M discourSy s lung Jiscourse hi pnsinet^ a heavy lurJen ■ J" :,Vi ','•..>. ''i%0iyS^:^ .»«.; :-'':-i«i iDdlKcr,, tf Incrativc tradi Magique, nagnltique, majestueux, maigre, inaju scale, maiencontreux, iaalingre^> T V{' inalicieuse, Etaipropres, malsaine, Qanifeste, ^ts M specf acfe, a nmumful specSack x; F- poesie^ lyric poetry j:^v Bf art, magic art F vertu,'- magnetical virtue M port, .« majestic carriage .rj^^ M nouton, ^m/i mutton F lettre, 41 r j^i/^i/ letter M .momeot, %t^i.. ^VV', *?■ &# '*'! I 'I ill'i ll ill:sr i liiii 5 I ,M!' Ni AdjeethrM, IMMMIldSy maricafeuxy. marin, maritinesy martUley mat^ridley. maternelley mat rice, X mauTaisfy. mechaa^uoy :^ m^ciiantey. m^icinale, m^laiichoHqii^ m^iodieuso,. m^rnorable^ nesquiiie) , Bi^thodiq^uf, niilitaire, min^rale^ > ^ mobiiiaire,^ JBodeste, modique^ ^ mpellcux^ momentau^^. roonotone) anontagQei^z^ ^ morne^ iDortelle, muojcipat, muDicipala^ musical, mutuel, inythoIo|)q«e^ il GRAHMAR OF THE JVatal, Gm^ of 1.. SabiUiitiveAt v_<'^'. » I* F F M W F F F H F tF F F lit F ^ F F M F M M M ^F M F M F M 91 M '!! terrain, wtatrtiy ground ,j^ I'lHi moBiite, ^teammsier |MttN«ncea» m^nUime foviet^t .: iotr6pidt<6, warlike tntrej^i^tf- anbttance, m nmtenMl tvi^mett ^tU^ tcndrcsBe, a motkerfy tendefnuttt ^r-^^ igliM^ A&a HM/i&jr f^»r«^ ... . «>. !l Plt&uae, skmdmcuse .^*.=Ui^i^%^'^?f'lv Vt, mmeebameal art V^- '•r/"-;%v:f ^ ct^atu re, ai wished sreaiwa ^ j >.« i? • pc^iaBy, a medicinal draught ,t • < luimeiM', , « wielanfholy humour > tf^ voiii^ a mfikdiout voice V'nl ^ v^neiBitu t, 41 memorable ewnft ^^;iil ^««n«lnif, etdnginets M^4 dM«9UTS, « methodical ditpourse- a«ad4ini<*y a military academy, aaii, mmiaeral water .>'''■*' llisD, a pereaaal estiU§ .r' ;VA| fibUe, a modest girl '\ \ pvU, « moderate price , /^ drap, « «^ eutsiantial cloth plaiatir, a maaeentarypleasurei\ ,u^^^lt^v .?«'^ m^^ ,; ■!'v'.;^f ^^';-^V/ *• ^<.:^'« Bt<»''it.»'i ■ «*#»•?: *^tv .-,..:- i ^i4<^ *«^j • Adjective!. |niturel| oaval, navigable! IneifeuY^ Inet, IneuTe, noire^ |aonchftlant, lotoire, || noavelEB^ lObliqae^ .. ibsc^ne, )bstractif^ .l.^^- [occulte, »culaire^. -' - briferanto, mit, ' y ID piques, lympiea^ wercuse^ v )pini4tre, Dpulente, ragea% orgu'tlleux, pristine), itrageux, / Paicnne^ pacifiqne, |)Mique, paretseuse f :i >fr ITRsEWCH TO»GUE. Geodtr. of Sabiiaotivcs. v M pobetuifti^ « natural IncUnatim M: combisCy oesea/jghi K rirJAte^ « navigM river «{««»«»' {^K I'""'*'. F Ciondlitioa, a necessary con Jit on M' vetffe, a (Joan, glass P parnaquev a i«w w/^ F eitlotte^ ihch breeches M<. d.iJ4?, particuUeri pateotes, paternal, path^tique^ patrimouiafy pattu, p^danteS| p^uale, penates, pendabh?!- penibie, perceptible, p6reinptoirpy perDicieax, perp6tue), personnelle, , pertinente^ pesant, philosopaley philosophique, pleine, poetique, pointilleux, poissonneuXy polie, polyglotte, pompeuz, ponctuel, poi'eux, ^ posthume, poudreux, poussif, pr^alabiei .. precieuse) precis, precoceSj * prefixe, - /••f. A M soin, particular care F lettres, letters patent M deroir, fatherly duty M toD, . a pathetic tfiae ^'^ M bieD) a patrimoniat estate M pigeon, a rough' footed pigeert F maoi^res, pedantic manners F loi, a penal law M dieux, household gods M eas, a hanging 4natter M ouvrage, a tfiilsom/work F faitssette, an evident untruth M argument, a peremptory proof M jeu , a pernicious game ' M tourment, a perpetual torment F faute, a pergonal fault F repiiquc, apatinentreply (d'si/j M paquet, <3 i^avy d^t/n^/r . ; ' M mou choir, a small handkerchief . F pierrp, the philosopher' s stone ^'--' F question, a philosophical questiat^ F bouteille, a full bottle M style, a poetical style M critique, a captious critic . ^ M ^tan^, a fish pond 'well stored y^ F nation, a polite nation ^ -^ F Bible, a polyglot Bible ^'^y^^K ' M equipage, a pompous equipage " M homme, ii punctual man - *[ M bois, porous ^ood -^ M ouvragc, a posthumous work M souliers, ^dasty shoes ■ . M cheval, a brohen winded horse ^ F conventiov}, a previous agreen^n^ F pier re, a precious stone • M jour, a determinate day r [ 'M fruits, early fruit F hcurc, a^xed ktar ' ,•#' ^ FRENCH TONGUE. > A A(5j«cHvef. ' Gender of ' Sabfttaiitives.'') ^r^iinioaire, iprematar^, Ipresomptueuse^ Iprincipalei ■probable) Iprobl^matiqiie^ I ■• ' ;'■'- Iprochain, Iprodigieax, Iprofond) IprolUe, 1 1 prompte^ pabiicy poerily F observaf i'oiii M Mprlt, an untimely nvit ^-^^'^^p^' F jetinesie, presumptuous youthi' '**t^' F 6tude, ihl chief study -<=^ ?f«^ M fifentlment, a p'robHle opinitm'- ''^. F proposition^ a problematical proposi, .^^^ \ ttort y[ priolcBips, """^^ifif/ spring. - ♦^:"*^f M colosse, a prodigious colossufi ' » M f08s6 a deep ditch. ^.^^V-f^ M discours, aproUic discourse, ^^•^•^*'** F colore, sudden anger. ^ M affront, a public affront. M amnsemeot, chilJuh amusement » ■«- Qaadraogulaite, F plaee, a square plate. qaerelleasr, F femine, a quarrelsome wife, ' Ifluotidien, . M pain,- daily bread. ,,»„,, ^*y . ptahghc, a rough' plank, '-' F dematfdc, ^ reasonable demand. M coors, a rapid stream M oiseau, an uncommon bifd ,v;*^ ,M sujet, a rebellious subject \F pfaip, a recent wound ^, • i F fideiite, riciprocal Jidelity ' ^ f ' ^ F lecture, an entertaining lecture: 'V^^^^ ^ F morf, a dreadful death ::!>** F per^e, a real loss M officier, /j half pay officer # Rabotense,' raisonnabl^i rapide, lare, rebel le, recente, reciproque, recreative^ redoutable, reelle, reforme, regulier, remarquable, reprehensible^ re^peetueuse^ riche, I ridicule j njjoreusCi [ro^al, ~ * M plan, a regular plan " F enseigne, a remarkable sign ' M precede, a hlamable preu^ng F leipunse, a respectful answi^ 4^} F robe, a rich gown "* l^j M habiilemeor, a ridiculous drettl,^^.^s F peine, a rigorous punishnnta' c,^-^. r, M palais, aroyalpJace :>*'"---' ^ '^ !^^¥ :Sf '^^^^HB'' S-JB ™> ;fi '^^^m ^H '*':f m !l ! 1 ii l\\ fbui, • ^ * robicond^ ^ rade, roiueuse, '*' ruitique, A GitAMrMAIl 01^ TQlT 't. Salique, langidinairei^ satiriquCi ■'_ satraat^ sausage, scabr«use| sec, scienti/iqiie^ scorbutiqueif « secret, , ^ s^ditieux, ''"' sempiteroelUji s^rieuse^ s^v^ve, similaire, sincere, '■ ' •inistre, soigneuxj Qsaierr M r F M M oii' S^8t«Ildv«B. ▼In, tej Hflne chc?eux, rettfSay vis age J a rudd^fMOi hiver, a hard 'w'tnfr dl{)eN9P^ 4^ rumoui cxptniif' fie. cetufitrji lifi .V J ;;''^A i^*i. Jolide, fpltl Haire, lolvabia, •ombre, ^ soluble, somptueuz, :tsat, ipacieux, . sj)ecieui^ M F • •;k W F F M M »l M M F M F M m m p ■- i*Ji ierrtf taitdjf grtund conduHe, ^4^d.ent twduef^ tt\x\iy, nuiri fruit loi,. tie SuGf loflu.K^ . cpsqulraA^,, ablood.ihirsljf coiti , ■>•■ ^ .^-^ r^utror .•:*_;,,.■ illiit, «l satxficfil tirole ou Ttajfj:, a learned tvori ' '■'■^' ' canard) 4 wild duek entreprhe,, n dangerous under* :—' - , taiir^ Huge, <;«ry /«»«!» . * ; W pr^fti cr, m learned pre/ace * 't' maiadie, a scerbuffc disorder art, a secret art ^crit, « seditious wrhinj^ ^ '.. vieille, «» o/d coaman T^primaadf, 4 sarious reprimand toDj a severe tont son, n sinular sound ami, « sincere fiiend presage, ^in unlucky omen jardinier, a carefpl gardener fdadeffleat, u solid foundation vie, a retired life di§biteur, a solvent debtor matiD^c, a gloomy morning probtdme, a soluble problem repas, « sumptuous meal marche, a silly bargain jardjo, a spacious garden pr6t«ite^ M spciws pretext «-"--. • 1 <:■■■! VRBNCK TQNiOUe;. m jeotives, Gflndctof lubK tma reit .-ii<>M(,vJ» K rtpMi. 4^ tpLmdid repast ,, A-itfltiv ' If iul^re» ^Uffrentree .>!.•/ r^tv '♦*'' '|^ ^"^^ iptritueniei ktudieuK M ^colidr, a stuMws scholar ^^^v/ |n blime, , ^^ J| il^lf), « iiiAfivfr iiry^ ibreptic«|^ ^^ aj| 4Ji|^ lecincte, . s^t ',.-. F uuAyfie^ 4 siori analysts ■''■^%f... |uffisant, ^v .^,: H t^mQianage, a sujicunt testltmvf' | lapcrbe, , .. |^^ 1^ a-magmficeni huild'wg 4v^ iperstitieustf F pi^i4<>«'T. a sufinvtitious^ practise^. ':i iroaturely,. M *M(i^) 0, supertuOtiral sign V!r facite,, ^ ]i ^m M »ai§in», kt9^ grapes .... .^i^t«?l^: .;/■: ^rafre^ kodre [irrible^ ., Je, lidej kl^rable,. mueux^. -,: kuffue, nenoal r.:' jiomphaly bultueuse,' [rbiilentey. irque, [rattniquey. llterieuTy J|kl «oiiil)#t, (ffttuB €omhat -.Mi*'" JH pottkf, St tender tiUiM ?T^;k: i^; Hi; tW Aifewtm/»# ^*i;- '-• - -. ..v'^t> '??■ li liitre^ mftarfnliarec ^.-^^u? 11 »«l, iknisrakle ifuil ' ■.-^<^^' , JH; viMwa^ # minding rivul9l^:vi.i^- ^j?? ; • V-FllAie, ^hn§kf.Mge /^"^t-f^- ' # . H b«il|^ 41 kascforAree years ^ ; -, ' j r , M arc, a triumphal arth ;V r ^ : " f F compagirie, a tumultuous eom^ F r^publique, a turbulent republic ,^|%j F religion, the Turiish 'religion *** ^ M pouToir, tyrannical power >iK !' '■ '(I r-*^ rorme 7- M examen, a> farther examination M coDsentement, ^s i;nanimOU» sent M rapport, et uniform report^ : ;f C»«' .s«^-. . .;■ '^r^. iSil fi- ^ Illii: lit! A S3 Adjectives. A GRASIMAR OF TIIfT |t>GcniM!r tff - Subttanthres. ^ < »fl«^ M fy unique, : •«>"y'^« - M ftls, «« ow'Ek J*? universeltty. F connlKssanee, umversMl inotJli^dgt argentCi F n^ocnif^, a pressing necessity • utile, "'"^ F ^touwerief o tsitful discovery Vague, F'«||iiifteatioti, avaguesignijcatfinr Taillant, _ . M g^n^rtf), MvaUant general « '^ ▼aine, vj.V.'M F pien&ee, a vain'ikougbt ^ J^' Talide, <^5^ M contraf) a vsilid contract Tariable, "f'* vf M tWp«, variable weather >v>3^j5'*>ii ^ Taste, 'At5i*A I? prairie, a large meadow ,J»*^i'^* ▼eninieux,. 'at M rcj|)tile, m venomous repute t'-^^^^*"^ Tert,'v.isu'»^ WO'; 2W tapis, a gt'cen carpet « V 6 reuse, i«V-|^ F pom me, a maggoty apph feriUique,-1*''> • M gazettier, anhotiest neiusturker vertueuse, F fcmme, m virtuous woman Tiagdre, >*'n \v F /pension, an annuity **' ▼ictorieuse, F arn«©e, a victorious army vide, ^i M pot, an emptf'Pot 1 t^^ t vieax, niW M pon** an aU bridge TigoureuS^t^ ' ' F defense, a-i^itorbus defense visible, F eclipse, ^ a visible eclipse < vocale, ' 4,.%^' F musi^ie,- vocal music . <9i'^;' volagtfy ^ ' F j«tiiMM9», JUkkyutb tft?*!/. i' v^loutaifo^ M MeMrtre a wHfil-mMrder «/^t4^i< ' ^^rrale, > , F^ noii»<4le, < mw wmm ▼ulgaire^ - ar^j":^ ip. opinion, « vulgar opinion' *^ '' ■ ^4le, V- wtl .A:i 1 lif prodiealeur^ a jwtf/ow preachti(^ ! V» i .t. ^d^.:;'^'^-^ ly^^'t-i ft . ^'^X i^^%-^!^-^>i>^ •.'a -.'?t/.,;.;,r>»v-V^ e • i List before either ■jUSTeI :t i-.-f juste d^fei bas prix has van ise in(kre laigre chj rive doule ^OD home means n man. pauvre hoi {rand homi ertaine dg lage.femmi irosse femi plant hoo |lf grand m plaisant ho p>"'-^i "y^ "'^ hiiain homi |furieux ani laort.bpis, • In other J** kfli.I a'ijju *l^,-Ji'3M- I > AV';f|**^'n'.>. . ^^*"'CHAP' IV. **'**""^ ^'^ ^''^'■'*1^■''i5i. List of jidject\vM with the Manntr of their biinp placed before or after their juhetantiiw, Mnd their Signification in either CMC, ^^^ ^ -::%..yg*^;. -. .'......ilV- UST£ priiy « reasonable homme jidifie, ajutt man, rate '^^^ juste defense, a jt/i/ defence, action jnsta, «yW action. bas prix, «/ a /ow rate. action baiie, a mean action* bas vtntre, the lower part les Pays.bat*, the low coun* . Itfthebelfy, [ ^\: {::.'^'' tries. ^- - lae ibftre d6Ii1)eri4(ion, m'it- du fruif llnvr, W/« /mi/. ' ! ture deliberation. ** jaigre chdre, j>oor/ir^ Tiande maigre, lean meat, ';'■ me Aouleur, a shai'p pain- esprit t If, a lively wit. ^^ ^OD homme, a man who homme boo, a good natured means no harm^ or a simple >*= > =* • ,„^^^ man. .^ , pauvre homme; iL sorry feU Jictnine paufre, a poor manl^ low [rand homme, a great man, homue grand, a tall man:^^'* ertaine oouvelie, a certain nourelle certainc, true •* au- piece of news, '-—-i^ thentie intelligence. lage.femmp, a midwife ; .-_ femmesage, a prudent, womon. (rossefemme, a large wofkhn. femme grosse, a woman with child plant homme, a complete l^omme galant, a man fond fe -'^^H. gentleman ^ ^^A^^^^r* ^^^, ^^, llfl grand monde, /;6ff great air grand, a noble mien ' ;* "'"■'-'''• world.'- * ^ -^vU^'H--;'-^'.:.:- .r-^^-'';:i'r^ |plaisant hd'mne, ^i/i impertu homme plajkaut/ n pieatam nent fellow man 't^^ hilain homme, a disagreeable homme vilain, a niggardly I man. fellow Ifurieux animal, a large crea* animal furieuz, aisrce crea^ .-■^.XV^-^-' ture--' -'■■■-' ■,.^:;^M{--^.,.f^ure. laort-bois, wood of no value, bois^morl:, dead trees. * Ta other «ase, speaking of countriesi the adjective goei before, aa* Pc ktu.I a'l^uedoc, ia basse Normmidie, la bat$e Saxe, la haute Saz«, la mise Autnche, le has Rhin, le haxit Hhm, ^o, ^ 'i';- t'i '■''i' 'i t ikfihAMmn, m tm ' -f Borie-etu, the tuaier adt cau nortt, jlamRrug 'Wittr* htiom of the sta. ^•n df oite ligne, jtwaight alof^* l|f a« droite, s ttrmifit luu, iMttt^s^viu^ jt^tyrtxm* homtat iune. Mt kon fr»nc-fal^9 mh ^Muanatif arbre franc, dkUH^dftii *aU. rtBl trtt iiruiiB&« \ktm^ naked /ruth. iiarcliabdiM f ruiehe, nurchiutdUe franctilUC) Vlr hvefJtfi, boorftfoU Tmoc^. « /r## at. ftMse-cour, 'em inner yard. io\t bats«> ^ low voice r jfpgrg du Uauii clair clear lanun, mon^ iiii douz>sejhir^ a gentle kq biUct-douz, alovetetterX AvkX9mml^f& me dura mater.- Tiandedare^ iougt) meat fauji frats, tx/raordinary exm cheval faldx, a stumlti* penies horse , fin toatois, ^ sly canning feU diattuuit fio, a right. diamoid\ f*l espoir, a foolish hope. pelittrefou, amadpainter,\ fpt amour, iCt^id poete^on, amadptet. ' |6 baut boat, the upper end, la clrauDbre haute, r;^ «// house enasplamrs, pocket-money , jaoib^s Menues, jma// j/(;sJ der Ugs. I in olIectMe^cen dance, a Tte mg^le, oH easy life. ^ '^ ^.^-dalleompliance. ^ i Ics piles coil feu rs, the green visage p^lte, a pale f ice, .'..1 . iiCKHeiS, ffouge^hord^ .« hamper. ^' .">: ^88> ytnK rouges^ hlo9d-4h ■1. FRENCH TONGCE. irtufeogorffl^ a ntm nJ- coale«r rovf t, s reJ fhw hreasi canpagae, tut optnjuld t dottn tm, $h9m whti lotfoclriofy toundddetrvu toM|W mIB| hettUhy «»mi« thif niBsraiBiNiy jtvui/r^MM jagmtiit Mia iound jmjg* Hunt V9urs ™ tr§tMi itHkh ratsoDy m wimk rtatm Vk%t f«lb1e, injaiuy yalMfloirey vaimjUrjf horame vbIo, mvim^lorktu nhlt Mttf #ffOfi/ i##r acte dottblfl^ d^^lUaU •{ m mmtk^ Im f if rcMeatlnco^ « /fvr^ del yeui Tift, tparkUm tju ttemtmbranct rive doaleur, mtfMHftoM chtifu\ ^\ty ameltluomg i§rst fif-argeot, fuici^iiiwr couleur vive, a /itw/f cofwr mine voix, i|)r word of mouth teiat Tif, njlorld complexum knne rteolntion, tfjfrfii iv- muraiile ferme, «/r» wM i9hiion ! Tastes desteini, ^reat de- un esprit TMte^ m gnatj^im mWe moda, sn old feuhion vin Tienx, efdvtMt ▼arte jennesse, youthful bois Tart, ^rani «(;o«J iBe Tarte r^ponie, m sharp fruit vert, unripe fruii answer pDe T^te r^nrimavde, « pois Terts, green peeue sharp reprimand II Yart galant, a brisk gal una ikit verte, « hare* I AiKf hrmned feliovP [pre combat, « ^rtw/ combat nn esprit Ikpra, am attstere man | tendra jeunesse, /^fM&r l'%e Cendre, /^mdSrr <^e rfgre repas, pitiful cheer itftmv utaiere, a l^ren toil mure autcur a pitiful author ^*y-^'> tnai^ra, a poor style [roide atiiae, « cold loot Tiande froide, cold meat Bpte poDvoir, full power discoMfs ample, s ^ffsie £E^^. course I plai forte raiioD, j^ow much nisen fbrte, a- strong rjeason Sti-S # ■u*' m-' i w *i! 30 ^^ite- A GRAMMAR OF THE CHAP. Y. f:f'^f<^nsnit«8 the l^ast purts of a Moieuce, jiDU btopb tke,f««)iler'i^' voice tHl he cao count A semfiD^oii ^jw ;]^m/ n -uik ^rgule, ■(;) separates larger portlous of n m uiei.ce. At ^Am the reader must stop till he can conn* two* "■^^^,' A coioo^^i^M jfftmtt^ {:.) narks the Vircest divisions, of which a sebu!ic« is susceptible. At this the reader nmst stop till he can 'Conoi A&ny. iSemicolons aodfioloni are sometimes, but improperly, used promiscuousJy. A period, «r'full point, uit feint {.) is used V7 hen the sentence i^ fully endftd^ ^nd requires a|>ause tiU the reader . can count ^l»*. ■ .., '■ VSU^ ^ ,V ,:.< K«r.vy4 »4- l'.' A flote of ioterrogalion un point JintetrogatiQUj (?) is used lu asking a <|tuestioo. *' A note of addsication, ma point dtuhmratim^ (!) is ased when we admire, wish, or wonder : it iserves also to ex- press seme f ioient passion. - An apostrophe, une i^tnphe, (*) is set «ver the place itrhere (pme letter ib Jefc out ; as, i^amour, instead of le amour, 7owtf.* A hyphen, un firet, oa vn trait dvni^ ^ A parenthesis, me pereatkesgy ( ) indudes sorae^htng Ot tt^Msary to the seii«e, but brought in to explain or Itustrate It, aid is very Seldom used. A dimresis, wn tremg, ( " ) parts tw.o vowels coming to- * These twu vowels, a* Ct wlien (he aeit word begiiM tvith t| irowel or an h not pronoanced, are leit oot in French ia the fol- iowing words : La, la, je. me, tc, se, de, c*, n', |a f •!♦.;*•''- )&-'-j-Ct nw-niit-i ■.■.'»,..,^. , - -(fir»-x^ if^'^ "'' '." ■ '.'^fo,.-#i,f»^-!E? -'«%^ .SVf. i)' FRENCH TONGUE. «r if has, la, the, ^, at or t9. H, there* get her, and sij^niti^s their making twa syllAblet^ as SvSii 9iQH roi d^Isfiel, Saul King of liraii: . It is likewise placed over e at the ead of cihrtufi woi^ds ending in jrtftf, to express that iheymtist be prooounced gUi and But as in fatigm^ Exi aigH'i^ the femintae of atgu, sharp ; cigju'i^ heuilock. Tliere tee sereral other' Qotes used by authors and printers ; bat it wou4d be needless to troii^bie the> learner here with any. " ;..,^^',^^«^'v,,..,„:-^ .^i^ '^«rs»lb^ ■'.. ..■ ^.' Obs. I. li la,- ce, sutfer'ttoeMsiou before onte, oniiemet ami ; neither in the iraperative mood* as; laissez-ie alter, let him go ; except when followed' imitMdiately by*^n or y, as, laissez I'y alf^r, let him go thither. Ob8.il iSratfffersr an elision only ^fo re ii ot t7s/ Obs. III.- JUr there, and qui^mht, are never contracted. Ob«. IV. E'mgrandeis contracted in some words beginning with a consonant, asi grand'm^re, gnindmivther, a grand^^eine, with much ado, ^'C. ^ -■' CHAP. VL ''''>r'^^:'y^^'^'^^^^^ C^ Accents made use ef tnivrlting French, ■'f*'^^:' N accent is a note put over a Towe), at the end of a syllable or word, to denote it*8 eouod^> quaitlfy, natur^y or signification^' An accent is either acute, e^, C) > E^y^t^i^y^t C) i or ci rcu mfle X , elreonftexe, ( " > • - , The first is placed upon ry when it has a slender smitid ; as in Hi, the summer >' except in th« words of the second person plural, because in tbese^ ^ is joined with %, as, vous ain>*«, y^/ov^,. The second accent is sometimes put upon e^ when \i has an open sound ; as in saVi^re, saltmseller ; in sometoc^ nosyllabhes, ending with an Sy pr^», netur, itei, vcryt ""^ * also at the end of words of more than one &yUab)e> as pTogvcif progress^ apr^», after. It is used in the last^ case, when an s follows. This accent is likeirise used to distinguish articles, ad. Tcrbs, 7erbs, prepQsltlQQ!^ aid conjtsnctioss, as, io i^e following words : ' ^ .T '•'I? ■m , . .. if,'?'!' '* '(■ .(I h :i] i; '■:f ■4/ '1 U • ; i ] :-4^' fS ■.■>>. A GRAMMAR OF THE ¥\ i I de U^ •/ or from the. de«, some, qf^ %x from th, fi, eome- on, •n, or. de.1k, theneeJ d^s-qne» ai $oon «r* 01&, where. 1 f'^^y •' N. B. Compovndfl follow the same role, it, U.fiaQt, above ; li.ba«(, down fhere^ iehw { li.dessut, a^on /l^ ,• | l*A.dfcpsotiF, ttmierf that, down there ; de.l&, tleoce g par. U, #i(/i# way ; celui-ii, ceii«.ii, that This acccDt is nerer. placed in the begiooiiig or fo fk€{ middle of words, when an e is followed by a coosonaat, with which it makes a syllable. The third is placed commonly upon a long T0wc1,.as| in ^|Ei;e, age ; (Vte, a feoit ; and particularly upon those which were formerly snelt with an j, as inabime, «i| nhyss ; les no* res, eiiri. ^c. . ^^^ In some monosyilabieti, as iii vrSt^ a mast, Atthc^nd of some words ending with t^ as In for^t, a forest* In the third person sinoolar of the preterite subjunctive, as, qa*il pariit, that he might speaks to di<«titigttisli the subjunctive from the indicattvc^, ii paria, i^ j^oir. Observe that verbs of the first conjugation take a /, beside the accent, in the conjunctive mood, and ocMie io ttie indicative : but all other verbs Jiavc a I ia tha iodica. live and subjunctive moods. ^-^ t^m- f^: >m Cardinal Num- bers. 1, 2, one. tWJt 3, three^ Ay four. "^ ^5, Jive. , 6, itx. 7, 8, 9. 30, ii, |2^ twelve. I3y thirteen. -.1. ,*>ml*.' seven, eight. nine, ten. :# Numerical Letters. I. II. V\\. iV. 1r. VI I r. IX. ;f; >4- ■ ...Hi' f^fe VW •. n ...ii ^-"^ J'*-* ^rf #^ xn. l^es Noinbres CarUiaaux. nil. deux* trois. quatre. cioq* six. sept. huit. neuf. dix. onze. douze. trnzf. M. t^V ^^'' «♦ rafiXCH TONGOEA \\^ fourteen, l^yjlftecn. :m^,-: 16, sixteen, ■^:^'>i^^,) c 17, seventeen, #*j/] 18, eighteen. 19, nineteen. ^0, tttfittiy. 2t, twenty -one. 33, twenty tw§. and so on to '^j. 50, M/r/y. 31i thirty one, $1, thirty tw9i . and bo oil to j,,^ 40i ff^iy- ' f^ i 4r, y«>r/y o«f. 42, /or/jf /wa, i \i aixi !io on to /:. 51, ^jr o»tf. ' ■ 62, j^ty two. '^ii^''^' aod so on to *'" 6i>, jix/y o«tf. 6.'. stMiymtwo. and so Oil ta *^ 70, seventy, j7i, seventy om. |72> seventy 'two. ami 30 on to 1 80, «^% 8', aff^'jf ©«* aMii >u on to 190, ninety 9i, ninety cne. ' ^ [92, ninety tw9^ n\,{.\ b«>- I (o J 100, offtf hundred. |200, /W3 hundred. 30O; three hundred. XIV. -:?^K:r. xv.ri-vv/; XVII. XVIll. XIX* . XX. xxr. xxrr* ^xx. xxxr. JUXIl. XLL XLil. .;i t. , v-^ Lf. LH. "mte'.'^;. , ,^ J- . .:/ ->«■!# jtf,^* . .g -.,<»*m#:* ■^:jiS- LX/. LXil. LXX. Lxxr..^i; LXXII. LXXX. LXX XI. LXXXil. XC. XCI. XCII. % c. cc. ccc. D 2 qualofiftf!,^ >M-*\^ „ quince. :^vi;^i^'^»- ;■ seize. -i^jCv'. ; dii«sept.V:mii^-?' -|^>5*f- dix-hiiit*;;^^, w'...'^'5/ ▼Ingt. ▼in4t.ft«uR4^^A ▼ingt.deas. ,.t trentc' v-;.;»- .^;.. ■ trente. *-uD.?v^^4^^ tfeiite.dettx«vai if^^a^ qu^iantt). >$i* &; ■ quarante. idcccc, 1000, oM/iiott/diKl. M, erCIC. mille. Thes& ntinbers ne?er vary their termiiiatioB, eicept trn, which makes mum (he feminioe ; cent, which fnaketl f^x or €iiit ia the piural ; tniile is writtt;n fni/, when wil wi ite the date of the year ; ia this case c^nf dues nftj vary ; as, I 1796, w^ thotttmd /<. MDCCXCVI, nil sept^cest ven hundred snd ^ quatre.?tegt-seiae. Hinety^fixJ^i r- A..;|PI^;^:^: 6U1, sixth,' mu 7 th, seventh. Mi^- 8th, eighih, ^0^-- 9tb, ninth . ^''^^ ?f lOfh, tenth ■ »' ^ lUh. eleventh, » I' l^th, /z<;fj^^. ''J/; ■^Aailij thirteenth. .1^ t Les Nombrss OapfKAutJ ler. premivry M. premiere, Fj ,* 2d. second, M. seconde, FJ ^ ;>> 3e. troisi^me, M. & F. .i|> 4e. quatridoic. 5e. cinqui^e* 6e. sixi^ine, '^i^^^^ss^- 7e. sepiititne. p^^i^~ ;• ^ &»*. huitifeuriev ^V^^V ^ 9e. ueuvieine* '^*>- lOe. dixictne. ' *' He. onzitto)©. 12(-. douzii^miu # * 13c. ticizidme. FftmCH TONCUE- m |l4tli, fivrfantii ^' ^ . i4t; ^atorztdMff.^ 1)5th, ^fteeiith. I5e. quinzi^iMr MWh, xiV»# I fff . dix-neu vidme* - , *«( >)pin |$Oth, tlifentieth: -^-'m^V ^e. TUigtidiiie. |si8f| twmty.JIrtfi ^v ^v 9U. Tingt>l^ttoidaie«r ,: Std, i'mfnty^tecmix vV^ 22e. vitiKUdeuKi^mei • ^ . tp . -.. ,-rf *A* <- ^(v A. '.. « ■-?.■, \ thrice, ot iBree^tmMf ' ^^ .^toia fois.'-'"' fit l%'-^.^'*^t^; /(wr/im^. ^^ '=>i qiiatre fuis. ■ r -^ lir// or in the Jirst f lace* premi^reoieot, ou en premier i.?^>i lieu. • ,^i . ..Ai^- -^ teconJfyf or m /^ xr^tW secondeme&t, otf en stetHid i place. lieu. tbu-dfy, or m /i^^ ^W troisieaiemeat, ott en troUiil* I pUce me lieu. fourthly^ or in the fourth qnatri^memeni, mt en qua* fiaee, . , .: ^ . - .. : ,, ^.. vi-| tridme lit u. ^ ,^|^«., ^;^:;U, It's* ':#>*■» ^i^) '■'--; ; ., ■, ■^••;>;it5.,J'..SJ|-'^j^ ■ ' ' Thtf Months of the Tear. January^ Janvier. ^ '•'^' ■ '" February y Feirier, \ Marchy Mars. • /Iprih Avril. ^ * /'^y, Mai. ■;*:, --"^ J^" June. Juin. " * Ji//)r, JuiMtt. - r "v;- September^ Septembrc. ;- October Oclobre. November Nov em b re. . December n> l>cceu)bre. ^ < Thursday^ Jcudi. Friday Vend re dl. SaturdMy^ Si^invdi. Sunday^ Diinaaciie* M£rcr«di. ? r«^ »^ The Seasons of the YsAii, The Springs le priotemps* The Summer, J'ete. ^ T^f Auiumn, I'automme. 7y6 i ! lil: I !,' I ! jip m ,M[ m m. m " A GUiLMMAIl OF TH E The FflVft ELBMztfTi. f . Of GeoG&Arat: Firet le (tM. '* f'Uism- -^ i Terms relating to the Eaitij ^ir, I'air. •**/s;K.<*vf Watery I'eau. if-~|:s'ii,.|*0i ,^''*?^r;*'i(i' , ., ThoGAabi1rAll»dtyt8. ^J^ "land one tie. A peninsula t use presqu^U •^■^hc North, le nord, « le ^"™' """ "•""••^ The South y le oiidi, 00 l« 8ud. ||u;wi^ . \ TWFiTE Senses. Terms rclaing to Watu. Sights la tne. * The ocean ^ recean. Hearings ^oulf^ ' - , -^gulf. itn goife. Feelings le toucher. * . ^ A strait, un defrolh TViz/f, leyuAt. V V M ;i>,' ^^^^„„p/^ uii caoal. 5»wtf, l'odorat.^^i: il , ^Azi^, un Fac. A ri*oer^ ubu riviere. The Four Division! of the ^ Of the W«ATHER. f /^, le chatid. i^. %j .,,, Cold, le fr'id. --Z, Rainy \& ^>l«Je. ; Dew, Lft ior^e* ; Haii, la^r^ie. SnoWy la r tijiC, Fi'osi., la ^ ee. nouTelle Thciv. le .'ej^el. lane. Afogmisu^ un brouiUi Thejirst qimrter, pren) ier -^j/orjn wi? -ta^^e. quarter, jlflash of Ughtntng^ a« ecls.w The Jul! moon. plcioe'une. Thunder, je l^ acrr«. T/^f Aw/ quarter, tiernjer The rainboivy i'arc-eu-ciel World. JEuropiy TEurope* {^ jtsia^ rAsie. ».k? jlfrka^ l»Afrique. jimeriea, I'Ameiiquc Of the MooM. The new moon 'U- ■ii^h': quarlier. The wind, Je tciU, .^'.iK^-^JI!^ • ■':. 'rt-iU ."■ FRENCH TONGUE/ m The Aa£i of Min, lirtk. UBaiisioce'. if V "tbildhtBdi Fenfance. - k^ Twthf ia jeaoeiSQ. ? Vu tanhood, la Yirilit^* V; :4 '/iM, la ▼ietllesM. t^ V ' )tathf lanort. ¥^^'V\ Arti and ScisNeit. ivioity^ la th^lo|{ie, ?iikstfby^ la philosepbie. '«^, la loKiqiie. ITo/tfrj/ Philosophy^ la idiy- sique, Pi()r//r, la m^ocioe* '* lurgerjf la chirurgiet. le droit. i^ i , grammar i la grammaire. Ihoricf la rb^toriqiie. I'ofrnr. la poetie. latbmaticsf les naiJ^a. nqnes.. ' i. -f-- 4'*'S hrology^ Pastrologie. Ytronologyt la ehrooologie. irithmtUy Parithm6tique. ^(dtnaryy la g^om^trie. ^graphy^ la g^ograpbie. nrvfjrifi^, Parpentage. VrcJ^f/frlirrr, I'archiCecitife. Jwttficaticn^ les fortifica- (ionti. I'iiv/ftfft'wA, Ka ■a?iga(ioD» ftuk. ta mosique. %nuHryy la ehiinie^^t^\ pn^, la|)eraturttil^-'\ ry^ la «culptUr«* »iijr, la danse. nmi^f icdessckfc, vv.jv «',*•" •i^* The PiiRioM ol^ Tims. An hutmiiiy on laftenf*, ; A moment y an momanti ^ A mmutey une ninute. ^ quarter of 0m tour^ ua quMrt U'hcure. ifa^ mn hour^ une demi* hen re. An boury une henre. ,^ ^ A day, un jour. .!!• The mormngs le matin Noony laidi. "^ Afternoon^ Paprds.midl The evening, le soir. Midnight, minuit. A weeiy une seoiaine.r -^5 A months un raoif. ^^^ A year y un an. w^^* An age, un »lfecl«i ^^ ?;^^^ ^ Eternity, P^ternit^. The heginning, le CommeilM* T'z&e middle, le milieu* The end, lain. v^^ Parts of the Boot* 7^ bead^ la l^tft >^ i! The hair, les che?eax« The face, le visajeei^ ' '*'ff^ The forehead, le front. Tht feature*, lea traits. The eyer-i les y^uz. Theeyehrowty les soarcils. T/^f O'isA'd^, les paiipi^ree.u 7*^ nMTy le aes. I I '^ ;|5 .vm^ .1 . ■.^, •«:Mt; TA jf «^ S5JW /rs/!r, les Bsffisj ! jcuet. Idvrea. The tmatki^ la boackc, »iilE'^ The cheeks, les TAf /<>/, les m. A GRAMMAR OF THE :■!'' The gums ^ \e& |;eiicivei* Thejamt^ U mSchgtre. The throaty le gosier. The ean, let orciilei^ . The chim^ le mentoo^ ■- The neci% le coii. V. jlwigf une perruque. Ghvet^ des gants. . A muf; un manohotn A comb ^ un pei||iie^ A s'Uford^ nne ^|>^e»*. Boots-i «Je» bottes^v The ihouldert, lc9 ^paules. A watch, UMmontra. K -^ AV >. - The arme, ies bias. The elbow, le cotidc. T/6« wr'uty le poignat TAr ^Av^, la maiQ. ^ .«^v' The f tigers, lee d habitr: ^ ^fc ^ ># waistetM^ une TesIeK Tie sleeves^ Jes man ekes* Thebuttmst Ies boutods. Thehmm-bQUiy lesbouton .*ifiS«Nrfe4*.* nidreti^v-^^rii.' . Theptieh^ Ies poches^* • A fob-, uogoisset.. TheUmng\ la doublurd' A shirty uat chemise. •^ >» tj^ ioM;^ me^ t abat A purse y une bourse. Spectaeleii d)M 4iinel fvs. ^ petticoatf u ne j u pe. A gown y^ imtf robfei- Linen, da HngQ. ^if d/r6»^ uit tabiiciK Afaky uu Sveniail. J?Ar' riH^j y d es bou olcs i reille. Apidi une ^plnglOik' // needle^ une aigviUd/ A pincushion y une- pel<»t fwM/ «Mi/f/»i' eair de P0WM, de Id pobdri^ The powder Mx^ la b«t peudri». Ribbons y> des rutans. Jewels, des*bijaux. Scissors, des ciseauz.- Pattens y dee patlns. C/o/i^f dii drap. /.»/. delU'lisUrev Muslite^ de la mom selii Lawn., dii Hooii. Tiltf r»^j^ Ies maiMshett^. Gaume, dela gsze. .^ ^handkircUeft oa v mau. Buckram^ d» bougran choir*. . Stoeiinrsi des ba>s< Garteriy des jarrettecct ^i&0M, des souliersv JBuebhs^ des boufile^.t Dimifyy du basin, Cambki^ d« ca«M^v DruggeU^ dtt'drogitet Raiteeiij de la raM«^« latftring.y du tafetas* lOUSCilOL FRENCH TONOtJE. lOUSSilOLO FvmillTURB. 31 \e eurtfUHif lea ridealix. tioiu*. fit ■w j1 ctmdkttiei^ un chandelier. j1 waxJjgki, nne bougie. Thi'rmfirs. Ics moacbtttes. ' ^ t^f// 0f drawers i une cua-. " v# trmif un coffre. ^ W chtha^ \u cower- ^ ^^ une Ixrfte. turei. j1 (raiMif no bercetii. mty no oreilltr. The fir* y le fea. "^ iirav/ hd ,' Mn9 pailUflse. The heartf^ lefojer. fcatier-Mf un lit -^e T/^^ hellovu^ le konfflet. I^iumes. j1 grotty line grilM* headof the hedy la l^le ^gridir§my an grif. du tic. • a^a'>A ' TAf /ouj^/, les pincettes* /M/^r, le ciel'4ii Mt, The fire ehovel^ la pellC ieeTsfeetp lesf/kda du The poker y le foargbn. lir. ' The ashes y les cendree. hme^ une ma^joa. Thejlamesy la flatnme. If^jv, la taf^iaserie. The smoket la fum^e. livhlng- glass, an miroir. T'/^tf /oo/, la iuie. Matches^ des allttmettes. Tinder^ la ndche. ^ /m/^r boity nne botte jt fubil. ^^inty ane pierre il fusil* TTie steel, le fusils In bri^iuat. A kettky oo chaadron. A poty an put. ^^0/ ltd UQ 6oa?ercl0^ jifishho^k un crocket. ^ /r^v^ un trepied. A skimmer y une ^cumotre. A frying pany Jiae po^lel ^ pudding 'patfy nne tour. fiia/V uue chaise) te^(;. ufltf table. ;ar^/ UB tapiSk tttfie-cloth^ una nappe, ^;, iine assiettc, 9apiinf un scRviette. iiij/'^, un coateao. \fork^ un couteau, jr^n. une cuiller.*'^ telneilary une saii^re. dith, un plat, 1^. i une ecuelle. "*' ( u«n bassin. /««;;/, un essuicmain kttie. une bouteille. jhs, un Terre. t 6re. A spit y une broche. .^ (trkscrewy ua tircbou. A jack, un ton roe* broche. chtiA. ^^ i;se^ A hrmm^ iiu batii* UmmI^i nac cbandeile. A rubber^ un torchon*. <**.■■ - Klfe^*iis, ••n' r ia pr«nouneef«i^ ^J|a.laiai^f8. •' Th'uiUi, des elardooi* AJlowtff una fleufy .^ /ii/i^, una tttlippo., ApmJk^ un eeiUet ^ clove gil/i/hviri ^^fji roioe. fr$Upopfiy^ do co<|ooli««(.| /To^, du boux* A tret, an arbro* A ekru$. UB espaliofr A wall. tree, uo ospaliar. Brumkkty des roaeos^ A thorn, nne 6 pine. Applet^ dm poaiines* Pears % des poireS. Cherries^ des cerises. Plums, des prunes. Almo^y des amandeg. Peaches^ des p^cbet iRff J, *le8 figues. Chestnuts, des cbitaignes. Walnuts, des noii. Hazel nute^ dt4 noisettes^ Filberts y des avoUnes. Oranges^ des oranses. Lemons f des citrous. Grapes ^ du raisin. "GooseberrieSy des groseillei.| Strawberries, des fraisei. Of the Study and Scxooi.. the P«/er. do papier. Blotting paper, dU (irouiMard. Brown paper, du papier tri Gilt paper, du papier doi A quire of paper, BOO msU] de papier. \Atbeltf de pdpi li^ rM» ^ de papi Ipage, leaf. }p'he Marg Tie Ink, \fhe Inkbot 'Jctt$n, •I pen ui Tie slit, 1 penknife, )uit, de I SanJ^ du ^ pounce- Soi ' ksson, 1 [''tfx, de 1 Vilfers, des FA! j/if, your vant. have fk yours, hope you n, '^pay my r< I ob^ you How are all \hey are all ^iody to do I ^tyour serw kd yon A you do ?. ^retiy well. MM. I I. »^QtliCf(.| ipalter. (»' s. lodei. I* iDes. fraisei. Uii4 tilt lapler cri \pier tre saute est-etle ^onne ? A Tous rend re mes dew o Ir. A TOUS ob^ir. Comnient ae portc-t-oii cIms ? TOUS ? Tout le monde 8*jr porte bifp. |Pr6i d ¥008 renjre i^rTicc. pyour serwce j.-j^-;. ?■„• lU^iv'/f/A vntre serf; hopeyounre well ? Upay my respects to you, - > obey you iow are all at home- ? \hey. are all well f uady to do you arty service. .1: "M I I- ■ -«" - ■-■ ^>'>v ' M A GRAMMAR OF TH£ Hi' \r( m I 111' y fi all ytur famijy VftU. f jITowt lo monde flc portc.t.II bicn chi'jt fuus ? PftfealywtU ' ^'^•^^ 'Pttrfailenieiit bivq. '. * /y^'w ii your moihfr 9" your Coiumuiit Sii purti) Madame father f - your s'uttr f ^, -fotre u»^ri5 P—MuilkUuf , ' - t' \ votro p6rc ?-.MaUcmou Idle votre su'ur ? Tou do them mufJ? honour ^ Vous leur faites bien du they are in ^oati hiM> Phonneur ; lis iioBt tyui •'"»'•. ' V en buniie 8an(6. v**-^ I am very iJaJ to tee you in ^o aula bien charm^ de fOUl ^ooJhialfif ., / \_ ', Toir eu bonne sanii, j4nJ / to see you 'i6 '^ Et inoi partiillenient. /am infinitely obliged to you. ^^ vous suis iafinibent ob« J hnmlly thank you, ''" Je ?oui remercie ttis hum* •"'. • :* • blement. lam much indelted to you. Je voua luis bicn rcde?able. J gii>eyou:a thousand thanks. Je tous rends millu gr&CM. Madam ^ yov Jcjt s I do hut Madtmo, fous Tousmoquex j my duty jenu fuis que men dtvoir. Noti* I think on ity how ii A propos, comment se porle ycur brother f Monsieur ? otre frt)re ? Exceedingly <'u:eli Parfaitemrant bIcn. / am very glad of it, J 'en wis bien aiie* Does he ham French > Apprend-il le Francois J Tes. Sir, and my sister Hie- Oui, Monsieur, & ma lujw wits. aussi. Does he go to school ? ' Va-t-il d P^cole ? -i*' h goes to the Academy^ II va d 1' Academic, & ma I i and my sister is at a beard- ^'*"'^ est daos une pettSioQ. *' ing SchocJ. '■■ ■ ..•■;■■••• V ',■■:•>.' / shall he very gfai to tee Je serw bien aise de fes tolf . them at the holy days. aux »acanct8 prochaincfl. Sir^ they will not he Is glad to Monsieur, iis ne seront pas tee you. moius ciiarmes de roui f*i^v « p^frtn- J, f • Toir. ' * y*-.'/^ V«,r ■ Fare^.eL present my hst ret^ Adieu, prfsentfz mes tr^s- /fr/j /o j«?«r father and 'tumbles respects d Moo. mother. '^-j^ »?«ur votre pere 4 & Ma- dame votre m^re. J rt '•%. > t Indeed I Islingt, She fU'ouIi you Ta-morro Ofit'l dy I am ver\ Do not fa 1^0, no, / PaENCII TONGUE. > .19 ►■*w tt.; Tell them I nviU come Mtid tee Dltei lcnr qu« jMrai Ics foir them some day or others iin do CM joiiri. /// // / 1 , C Ah cA, au pliisir. tm, go.d bye. I ^^ ^\ * ^ I'hdnncur. " Slr^ /am ovetjoyed to meet you Monsieur, jc suis ravi do htre. vans rcnuontrer ici. Sir^ you are very lind. MonNieur, vou8 avcz bion do la bdnt^i ^ //ow have you done since I Comment tous ^tei.voiis had the pleasure to see you ? porte dcpus que jc n'ai ru 1« piaiiir de vous voir ? Very weU ; tiank God. Toujours tr^s.bion ; Dieu mcrci. My mother it sick t Ma m^re est malade. Is she ! indeed I am very sor» Kl'c est maladc ! Ko T^rite eyfoi* it, j'on suis trt^s.fjLch^. What is the matter tuitb her ? Qu*cs(.cp qu^clle a ? She has the bead-ach^ Kile a mal d la i^t^. She has the tooth ach. / Kile a mal aun dents, " ^ She has af;ver. Ello a la fii^vrc. ^f; ^ > She has not bun oui »/ doors li y a quinze jours qu'ello this fortnight. n'cst soflie^ / am very sorry f have not Jc suis trds.f^che dc n'avoir time to see her to-day. pas le temps de la voir au- jourd'hui. Whai hinders you ? ^ .s;, Qu'cst-ce qui vous cn^m- •!..w... ■.^,.. /^-w'''i . pC^rhe ? ^-■:., Indeed T cannot : I must go to^^ ferite, i> nc pcox : H Islington faut que jailfe ^ Islington. She 'U'ould le very glad to see KHo ueroit bicn aisc de yoos you yoii^> ."■: Ta.morro© you speak French ? « i*ar!e2-vous FrsD^olS t I speak it a little, ^ Je U p^rle un pen. French is a very useful Ian* Le Francois est une lao^uel • guage. L, tr^s utiie. ::,.Sfri;i.vc::- // is noftt tie universal lon^, C^est aujourd^hul fiii4n^ue| guage. ,} uniTerscHe. The French language it very Le Frjio 9018 est trds-difedle. dijicult The English is still more so. L»Anglois J»e8t tpnco^ Jla*| "''y. vantage. "^^;''^i'''^$^:^ Are you very well versed it^ ^Ste^vous frfen «ariipfj&m the French tongue ? | ^a 'a»gae Fraocojse I Not much ; / am ^ginning Pas b^-aii coup, je ne faia quel to learn it de CQnMnenccr. Do you understand what yoi* Conipreni!«.TOii8ceqiiQ>ouj| read^ ' ^- «sez ?,^^^C^^^ '.^.-w;^-;- | ^«^//^r i(iS«» / can speak. ^ | Mieui qae je ne pari«. / ^0 «o/ wonder at thai : it is J« "« "»'«» «*«"«»« P** • "I always mtier to understand *»* tottjoura plas facile de a language, than tg speak it. cpoiprendre une lan^uej que de la parler. mo teaches yoif frenck f I Q«» «»«-«« <*'» ^«»s enseigne] Mr A."'' ■^-*:t-^' . I Cteat Monsiear A; I know him ih ^& -,,. ....,4,, \1 am afraid cf malting muu' J'ai peur de fatre des Iwxi^s. den '. ■• I / shduld he laughed at- On se m^qtieroH de moi. ' fl» V do not be afraid of he^ PoiDt du tout ; ne cra»gnez ing laughed at, pafl qu'oa 06 moqu« lie 'M 'lit \\>z. ' «.. IV. |/ am going to the Pari, to churchy to the pluy\ to Greenwich-^ to Islington^ Where do you come from ? come from the Parky from church, from the play^ from Xjreeriwichy from Is* lington life. }lVas the King ai the play ? Tes, and the queen too- low do you Jiie ^the English language ? ^he English tongue is very diMcult for Frenchmen to icarn .i*. ^ , ^oyou learn Latin ? have been learning it these two years. ,. -j.^ ^...^U 'W' i" Od allez.yoiis ? Je rais an Pare, i I'^gKge, i la com^die. 4 Grcsawkb^ i IsliDAtoo, &c. ; 5 ' ' D'oii venex-Toos ? '^> Je Yiens du Pare, de I'ei^ise^ d? la comcdie, de Gre«i|^ wicb, d'IsHngtQQ, SiQ, 1 I .!,»" v»v An Leroi:^toit.ilil Klkeoi&edie ? Oui^ & la reiae aussi. Comment trottYes-Toas h laogne Angioise ? Je troufCr q4ie ]*AiifI ■l f'^^^^^^m ■?'w 1 ^^H| lij i n^^l^^ft -J!* [ S^^BwH- H 'i:«i 1 ■ 4% A GRAMM*AR OF THE IVhat do you think o/* Latin f Que peases* fou 9 4« Lttin'f , Sir, f thini, that Latin it Monsieur, je pense qiie le ri^ more iiffictth than French* La^in est pJus difficile qnt . . , leFrtn^uis. .vVv , Tou are rigft^. Vous ave» ratioo; ■ ■''■■"' ^ What French dtuhors do joif Qtieit auteursFran^ii lisesi ■'._ read f * ' ^'X. "y- touBl », -:.->^- «^.'- ^cv- . .,, J read the Adventuret rf Tet' Je Us les AveDtures de Tei^. emcuhus. the A^e of Lew}» matj^ie, le Slide de Louii ^ is XIV. the Hiitory of XlV.rHistoiredeCharlei Charles XII king of Swcm XHy roi de Sudde. den. Do not you read sometimes la Ne liaess-TOorpai quelqncfoFi Fontaine's Fahles ? ks Fables de la Fou(aine^ Tes, Sir, my master told me he Oui, Monsieur, mon mattnj was the best author for fa- m'a dit que c'Stoit le ndl* hies. Icurauteur pour les fables*. I IVhat do you learn by heart ? Qu'appreneS'VOUtparcfleur? / learn the articles, the pro* J'apprends les articles^ ies muns, th verbs, ilfc pronoms-, les Tcrbcs, Ac. Tou pronounce the French very Vous pronoBcez tr^s-bien lei 'u/ell. ' Francois. { ] take a great deal of pains. Je prends beau cou p de peine, Nothing is to be done without On a'a rien sans peiiie. pains* (:■ *: K-\ fl,^ Is it true ? ;7>j, it is true. f #' Do you believe it t It is but too true. Believe me on my tvord. -if f> V. 1- Es(.il trai ? Oui, il est vrai. Le croyez-vous ? II uVst que trop vrai. Croycz moi sur ma parole. I ntfould not tell you a lie for Je ne voudrois pas ?ou.s diK| all the^old in the.^orld. i^m ■#»*v-, , f^ Did you see it ? ^r " IVhy did you not tefftt me ? I can assure you, I believe you. ^W un mensonge pouir toutj Tor du monde. ^ v.f L'a»*'z vous tu ??^Ji[L^>"" Pourquoi ne me Pavez>TOUj| pas dit ? * Je piiis vous assttrei^s Je ?oas crois. ?ii^ ^ FREWCH TONGUE. 43f ■; l» boifffie lieiife»< Jeiie m*y opposerai pas^-^ ' \f GeU D^egt par^rai. *^' I > Vou8 Tous trompes. ''• L'avte.foas cteviD^ i Qui est.ce qui voas I'a d\t f V rl €'Mt qnelqa*in que tou« 3. conuoisses. Eifes.vous sftr de ccia ? i^' Voii» pouTPZ TOQS tromper; Je ne crois pUs que je me troaipe. I) D'^ a rien de cela. Qui est-ce qui •« doute f: ii Je ii*en douterai jamais. i?t I' n'y a point de doute. any^ thing you Je ga^trai tout ce qu'il TOiIf pUira. ji^ffyM ifesi in earnest^ 1/ tpeai in tamest. Wtll beii it. ' nrV not ojfBte itt is not true. ' ■< \Ttu are mistaken-. ■ . > Widyougtuss it ? Who told it you ? \Smehody you knomi < ire you certain of it ? ', . iTou may be mittaien. \I do not believe I am taken Vthtre is no such thing. Who doubts it ? ucan never doubt ii ythere is no doubt of it 1/ will plea '' \J never lay any wager. Je ne fais jamais de fageure. When did you s*t kim^ oir Quaod I'avez-avous tu^ cr mts. her? When did you see them ? < \l saw him last week. Utatv her last msnth* \i have not seen them. \What do you say ? \J tatd nothing at alL \J heard it. Uio not believe swh a story. \ldo not believe it. When did you hear it ? \To day, yesterday , the day before yesterday. \Willyoutellithiin ? ; . \I shall never teliit him. , ?ue ? Qnand les avez-'veus vut ? Je ie viff la 8«iDaiik« passee^ Je )a ?is Ie muis pas&e. Je ne ies ai pas vus. Que dites.votts t Jc n'ai rien dit du tout. Je I'ai Qu'i dire. ». JVe Cfoytz pa5 hq ttl contf» Je ne Ie CMtis pa§ . Quand ravfi.ve^'fWi dire? Aujourd'hui, lli^fc- avaiil- bier,: ^ .J:^.T Le iui dirpz.Tou!i ? Jtt oe Ie luVdirai jamiiliit '■-ta^ VI jDo jrou chuse to drini a dish of tea ? IS'ify I am much obliged to you ; Sauh»fcz«Tiit>iiR pjfi9ndre niie tassf (Ie th^ ? Moo&i«ur, je Tous suit lr^s«. '!-~i. If ",i ■*• 4i n !;' A OaAMSIAIi or TOE ...... 4 ■ ■ %;.:.^ ii?AJ^'^n-.i. ■!,';'>*'■-* ^'»'. ■ ■•/■■ jamais. ■s-^f.i^rrl/iii:*^ 1^^ f 4Cr ffnu miimr 4nA Qiioi ! tous qc proies g^j ^M ^ mais(l«^# tou Hie *afie hettm'^ ^at* Vous aimez p«M.liM' hapt 9' le cafe 7 ^0 you ^mm m^ mevft f Savez-Tous fueififl '%m\ velte ? ihK'm wf Htfthlng m&rtkfmtr Je n'en sait f^dmt ^ id|| digne de tous 6tre rap<| port^e. ' - On ne pari* ^ lien. QHairtf fattetHlttlatiott,| Vous en sourcnea-Tmit ? ftuhtte to kear. Tinrt is M tali tfanyihing. iVi>e» dn y»u eitpeci bim s' JDid you ever know him f J know bim hy reputatiom Do you remember it ? Ns., Sir, I do noi rememfxr it. Non, Mon^eur, je iw m'el| soutiens pas. J'ai ]a Hieraoire 1r^s.mau»| Taise. Vous oublies al>:^»««t. Voul«f-voth8 ffXte. on petlt| tour de promenade ? De tout mon ctsur. Oil irons.novs ? Let us go iiito^ the Pari ; vte A lions an Pare ; flouv y nu\ shall see the king there rons 1« roi. At what clock is he to be A. quelle heure peut-en ti| sMn i ■ • -' - ■-'*■• Toir ? ' «** t^u.^*^/^.>- ■:. jibeut twelve 9 clock Vers midi. ^^^ / should be ^>ery glad to see Je serok biea ahe de ki tdfr.| bim He is a vtrjf_ htmdsome man, C'est un t h>~bewi prince. / shaH be gl^ to see the queen Je serai bien aise dcToir likewise : every body si ia reiwc i tout Id speaks well of her. monde i>n dit du bien. Did yu ever setiihe prince of Avez-Tous jtienats ru fi^4l^s ? «v' , prince de Galles ? / have £ toy bad memory,, Ton fos^et easily . mil you take « little walk ? Witb all wty heoft, fVbither shall we go ? .Hi They say he t^ m handsome On ciii que c'ci|i uu oeai^ yoi^ prince, jeun* prin^ ;• **" ,v ' « .* ' 'v-» ■*■-'■'■■ f*, -'•■^,- ,^ • ■ •* F. ■ ^ ••v. iv.-J". -S^vi •• V .til Tl ..grRBNCH TONaUB. ;t^ 4ft « i^ttk] aimeiii _.,_.. .... „ . -A"- ■ ^■ iralei f^ ffl/f w w/y/wtf ^aiher, II fait tri8.beft« ^tem|>B. ^ ^ ^ "^ ifff »o/ Mieveit wilt tetue Je^iecrois 'pAs^liie H'phiie raining oN tie day Uttg. coMO •cI'Mimtf d'itni. ^ 'i(^ iijr f/ very clear and Hm Le ciel est trds-clfir e^ U^s- rene* ;'■■* ' --••.»' -^ ■ ;■ "•■« sm^mh. *-*»^ <•• » '% ,»»v^- -va.. etre Mp«Bf/S//i/ ihe$eA smsoti 6f the Nous sommes & present fUns year. HvelHMjre^atson. What season do you like best ? Quelle Aaisoo aimez-TOUi tttatlo»,B^ nhk ((f aH the seasons. toutcs Jes sais&nft. ^/ i> sometimes very cdd in ^h II fait quel^iicfola irfi«lfioid spring. ^ , au printemps. Jo not Itie winter at aff.^' ^' Jen^ainfte pas ftu tout Milrer. 9 you not 99 to thtplay ? .. N^allez-Tona dm k la €Qm^« F'v:-:'>s# "*-;tn yi\,i die? '^i.j ^s-^-.v^.^^-: ;,_>-: amu gothithnri$it ew/i^ Je ibis y jailer oe 3clr.' ^' ^ « 1i*« if -IT a^ j^ V It ya iMieibt>tt^f«pl^^ W «>/i^ ie m greet many II y aura un^caod £9&CMiri hint 4t nmd *9 fo ihither J'ai devseiii il»^y aller Mlisi. I' til Vit II. -tmis ? tr^s.maui 3 un t>e(it ade ? r. lOUf y TCN likewise. ^^ '# i / shaii *r »#ry ^ ' It is three quarters after ten. ^'i: '% Neuf Imirei, v»^m%*»-; .', 11 est di:^ hcMirei ptss4ei. II est dii: hearet e( un qui II eit diK heureff %i denial II eit onzs lieures jOMiBi tjuarf. ^■■*^.**''^ -.A' Indeed. I did not think it was Eo T^rile, jr ne cro^oiij .C\ so late, r^, > ,'I i qu'il fat si Urd» .j.^ TJm/ rtf»/ tfwfly j-iw////. latfinps' s'ecoulq afec pidi(^. /Kr are ttever dull in good On no s'linnuie jamus company bonoe compagnie. Let us go and take a walk in AUoDS fair^ UD tpur an the garden, ^ , ,i.;\ n ^ din,* v^:^:'^, , Iff^th all w^ hart. De tout rtion reeur: ffavf^Quany fine Jlowen^itt Awir^yoMtitle bolles tl( jour garden f, , ^^ ^ dans fotre j%rdiM ? Very fine ones. De fort hfWtt, Will you give mi leave /•Voulex^Teot me donnerj , gather some ? " permission d'en cueiilirj Tfiw may gather as many] as Yons ervpoufea cacUtifj ,. you please. taot qn'ii toos plaira. '!}• you choose some fears^ Soubaitez.TOUS clet pi lies pcMBmoC| d«i certi Je ne ssis pis {rap4 amal ^_^ i-.. ■'. ^® fruit.... vi^a^v^ei* ■ Lefusgo home.' lif. is almost Alloy tlilogfi; ilestl)!^ t&ner'time, ^ ^^^., t6r(^en»ps^e diuev* j(re yon hungry f \ ' Atvz.vous faim* ? ^4v^ jM» a good appetite ? A vez.T ous boo appelit ? | I do not knonti whether I shall Je ne sais.pas si jo pour le able to eat any din- diner ; j*|ii tr^bieo ;^ ner ; I breakfasted very jciine* ^; >- heartily. m creates an appdite, L'app^tk rieilt en- ttmugi some fears^ ^ apples f cherries i ^4, I am not fond qf fruit. > , t-Ui IX. ii"^ Lft as sit do^vtt to table ^ ^^ Mettotis-nous 4 iable* /* Srmer ready ? ^ >%# ^ dioer esMl prfet ? ...i«i^3^lttW ' Sfc >■-.',» .^^'^i ::^''''^'l*' ■■ii**". X^ neat it upon the tabU. On a ler? 1. pu are cenmtntoui / Monsieur, Touifaites del c^ ran-, ' nony. V" • "^ tie not make any cert" . \ r^moniei ; (iu giicc, o*ui faites point. do you ehoottio iavtj Que 80uhaiU'z.tou8 ? 'I, ^ V you please. Ce qu'il ? uus piair? /« ... ^0 you hie ibu roasi CommeDt * trouvez-^ous ce jtatf r4tl ? *.. . . ...,. ^"^^^s ~ • u txctoding gOQii^an'd very II est exceiF/ijIif ct tres-t^b. ' ttwfrr. dre, - ^ -^ ;, ^ ^CK /* l4>os!eur, si tous ar^pif, mtthlng to drink* demandez ^ balrc. * donoieat*' -^v^, Vousae mangez pas, i* \ V* -^ . ^jl your pardon / /^ai «^'-% ■\.-i J^l. 'JV : . ' . ■h deje{tae»i ';dOiitrera|'' I K ^t***«S:*lw>e ■^^^>r%iv- '■ ^h?^" .A1#"%^ ."."".t^ ! •,».H ♦i*l 48^ A eitAirifAR OF TFTE I ^i m Givi mt my penknife* do not ue tt. Do not Moi your pmpsr* Who bat any wqfin f \ ' fyhpiooimymistaadfl*'^ .(Qui est.ce mii » tfrifrnc ecritofrr •* •^ '^'; Ddnnez^oi ftidn cairif. Je ne rai pat tu. Do not ihtyourjmpirl'y^^^^^^ Nefttitw point dc pftf^JL ' '' ' i)ui esrt-ce qui a de« paiasi cacheter ? .JfiTty / willpve y,om sotiU' Tenez, je ?a«s en donoi TArf maie a great dtal of noise On- dAt beaucotp d^ bn toeriu^ par.i4. Sir i/dwff la jof«r ^/o^f «m/' AsstyeK.v^'finK st VOt^e pt ie quiet ; . ^ : '^ , et soyoz trati)iiullle; Indeedy / .41/Si/ m/ ^jl'' '# .t^Q T^rite^.je n« dls ttot. earn your tenon, A p p renec ▼ otre I09OII. / Jinoi» it perfectly voett, ' Je ia Jais parfaiteinetit Mi Will you Be j^eased to mah me vmts pl^tti) die me taitltfl aj^n f » . . ^^ , ^ une pJunae ? , 1 ■ ^iWx it good for ttoikng? ' .''''^ CcUp ci on vatjt Hen dri tOo^ Make your pens yoursel/. Taii!«z vos pltimt^ tod?i| /^ifty is your theme so ilUwrit- Pourquoi voire tb^me crU ten ? si mai eorit ? Because the paper sinks, ' - ■ C*«bt que U papier bolt. /t is wet g you must dry it ky H tst Jioiiiide ; il faut le (tkd ihefire.^^,;^ , sficber dtvaiit le fea. What is the Wench fir . . . ? Quel est le Eran^ow de. How dojfou say in French » . f ComflBent At on w JPm 9ois . . . ? Why do you not shut the Poiirqu(Hiiefe|we!|-TO|;s door ? A'"' "' ' ^'''' '^' "'*■; - .. i_ t_ '« w*i Vi»..\ »>i ' i»i««-^-' la porte ? //buHditofen. Je l^ai troMvit 0VT«r4e. .^ J'W stoejkmgt have kfitts in Vos bas aonf 4ro«^. '^ them^f"^' ■■,,,,■ / wi//^i# then^imnded; *" Je les ferai raccommoder. IMAmotmmM^^i»kmifut Je nfy al' pas pris ; ^wM **^ ' ' ' - S^ ■ quandje les at vim, Tim^%•|«t■^^«^^^YP eSi'tepS d^ I'allS^^- ciS- '''^'" cher. jTffwj j«/«. II se fait titd. ^ never go to bed so early, Je ae ma eoucbe jamais 4e, n:-:nwi\'ii^' ^j«i Ivoiiiie keure. pvfhat o'clock doyouriref A quelle heure TOUi lerez- ■voita? ,/-• V hove nofieedMtr.' ^ '' Je n'ai point d'heurtNir«. may sit t^ as long as VouB pouvee feiUer tant \you please / for my part ^ qo*tt tous plairaj^ pour I am going to bed. oioi, je ?ai8 mti^f^^^r. am used to go to bed be - J'ai coutume de ina cou<^e^ {Hmes. i.ii de bonne 'Ibeu^. ,; acanSe. J- .- Attunicz UBQ^i^habdclle. ■,£ fkere are mi sRppers f ' Oil sont nie8^ahtouflj|f^ my m gott^tofetct them, Je m*M rais ies i'stt „* •• \rem t^i etmdie. curtaitu- ^^^icmim^^ M;fil««liez la chfaudelii^ i;^ 1^ Tircz le? rldeaua. ■■sr-' isr- , , ^ ., I lii 50 • A aitAMMItR„Q|; THE r /?• rut fail to wtiJU fne. t\,i Ne man^c^ ^as d« in^er^l. i^ shall come loiner p»tu^ JeviendU«J,pe«l^trf^|jiIu(^ than you choctte que Tous Be voudrrz. 1^9 I dt ^oihe d'raid. Nioa ; n'Ay^ |m» \itnx. Otntl^en and ladies y I tv'ub Messieurs et Mesdanifi, k ^ you a good nj^ht. tous soukaite k; Imui toir. Sir y or Madam* I wish you Monsieur, #« Madam, jtj a ^d nigh\i rest. o : voug »aiUiall0 luie bonni ill Quit. IVhat ! you an a$ed stilt f Qaol ! tom lies cocvrtai lit? Do you sleep ? , ,. Uormez.f oni ? No ; I am dfuah. ? ^^'f ^ Non ; jc suit eveilld. Tou awake me too tarlg i it Voiis m'e^eille% de tropj is ve^y darl yet. , ,, ^ ^j; ^ji g'and fliatin j il ne d .ft. tf/. P** enfcore joui.^ ^^j ,\y T^ottr curtains are drdii^n ; Vos rideaui soot tirls ; toi you do not see the dayj^hi. oe royez pai la clarte di jour. How did you sleep last nigkt f Conmenj^ -avieeb.kTiMit ♦ t*!^ ce**6 ""uit ? I did not sleep a nuiede all the Jo n'ai pas femi I'^il night long. ,-, r toute la oait. iVo mater ; ^fj^'udl gitt m/ N'importe ; je me lererti _^py/estnily, . \ (laas rioataftt* > v '< f, am going to hid the" serwant J® m'eo rais dire au dota lig^^roy^'h ir ;f>^ i4r» al t'Q"® daialre du lea. ^rif^ ffir yowff 'utater f, > Imrn^ Appxirte*, ipoi de Teaii ; 1 WAJ^ my facet my moutAf faut^ue je me lare Uf ■>-f Oil sont mes souliera I Wberearemyf^muf ^ Ou sont mes souliera T^ m^^atj^beaoar. Us sont k la ports^.V:^ KVr:. 'ji *'X|ji* FRENCH TONGUE. 51 Ifam not resdjf to go out* Je nn luh pas encore pr^l i sortir.. \Taie eare to hep a good Aycz^ soin do faire bolt feu Jirtin^'parimtr, dans la sal le. \ftll Mr. A. I am cvming Al)c2dired Mr. A. que je doivnr ihmidiatriy. rais dcsceadrs dans TiDs. \Slr, Imn overjoyed to see Monsieur, je suis ravi dp jott in goord health. row tuir en bonne sante \lam sorry to have made you Je suis /dch^ de tous avoir mjait so hng. fattattendre si long-temps. iNotataH.youjest, jPoh>t du toat, roas vous us go and tuke a wafJti A I ions faire vn tour de pro- : J. !4J ,..'^M"4'-^. )- menacf-e. • . w.. vifUM-^y' '- V '"'■'■ ' -• •• >.'. h s i^iC^ni!. ■to.;:* i»if9*i-^y "inr.; ctr^i?. i. '?*«*-,/ frt t!;;, ;?-:?', -Jii Ji'ji i'y^ .■;»^' •<.." T jli shc^t Analysis of the Parts of Speech. HERE arc, in the French language, ten sorts of words, or parts of Speech, namely, the Auticle;, llreSu3STANtits or Noun^ the Adjective or Aonoum, (he PitoNoUTi, thpe Verb, the Adverb, the pAiyTyerpLfe, \t PftEroSiwok, the COwJONC'rioi*, and the ijjTER- 'Jtcrio»<- ;• '■ '^^ ''P^.n.^^ :.'■■ ■/' " I. The ArtIcle^ is-W Mr orff prefixed to suUstsntites tqt^; oftit them out, and to show how far the s1f'nificati9i^'^ X tends ; as, Me study of history is useful and agreeable ^ etude de Thistoire est utile ct agreab^ : the natui;e of an is unknown to man ; la nature j|^phomme est'^n' onue i rhomme : A bad man ts ibAgrateful tOwirrd ^ed and toward men ^ vn mechant homme est in]|rae nrers Dieu t:t enrers ies hommes : A pHnce is not always happy as the people IbclieTe : un piince ii|est pas tou- rs aussi ji)cureuz que Ic pouple croir. ;^'s" ■ ( :! t ■ •li. ■ il •»' If I .t 1,(33 6t A GRAMMAR OF THE i!;'i vGranaiBriani sdmU of two lorti of articlet ; The definite {the J U^ m. la, f. for the fingular ; ilr/J floral for both geudcrH. ,^ ^^u V h. • tA The indefinite fa or snj vfii m. une^ f. for tbt ilaialirj 4iet instead of quelquety phtsuursy fur the plaral. The «f('finite article, 1st. reitrainii the ligniftcatiom ofi| general apprlUtion ; as /'^tudv de Phistoire cat utile i agreable. La nature de Phomme est incoiinue 4 l*hoini f 2dly. Indicates the gender and number of subataotifci;] and foi this reason is used in French before a noun talii in it's widest sense ; as /etude orne l^esprit ; study adum thi) mind : la nature a beaucoup d'observatcurs, maij elle a peu de confidents ; nature has many obsenren,] but the has feiv contiJants. Les princes ue tout pal| toujoars aussi heureux que /<; uple croit ; princes an ' not ahvay5 ^o happy as the peupiv be)ic?e : let eKcnipla[| instruiseiit ;>lus eople croi^j Nous voyons queiqu^fois d^s priuces tr^s.niatheureuij nc sometiaies see princes Tery uhhappy. Un homine fenle est sujet, coinme un autre humme, a commettri] Jes errcurs et des fautes ; a man of (>eDius is subject, i|l another man, to commit (some) errors and faults. f"^, II. A StiiftsTANTJ^E, or noun, is a word which n^ presiies the natpe^Qf any thing ihat exists, or, that we cofl ceive to be exiitffig ; as, ttic earth,— a housc,-T.roao,-j Peter,— Tirtue,—-.prudcoce. La terrtfj^-^im ifiWJOtti'- I iomPV » -*- Pierre , — vertUy — prudence . To Substantives beioui< ^render, number, and csKi The Ccitder is either maseuHne or feminine j as, le phi la mere^ ; le jardin^ la maisen, Th«rti \h bo neuter in m French IftMi^u ail e. >'he II u The sin ^be plural The cas ^ircumstai A nonn ir ftl, that is ItlleH also- 1 flscrd in Fv itratinn. HI. AnI •^ !?iri>ress $geni: m in bich it is liinaic ; The feminii Ir tVniiiiiitf ) imni* ; but I tio uttcritiiu fn'j/e, une tei IV. The ^vpots th( ft j ai vu ti kff etoit J lek ;.instfj Pronouns lonstrati Mefinite. TJie perse erson ; as, ^w, ///, m. The posse '0 sorts, c riic couji »es; ts, 1 ^^re, nos ; '. fbstantivcs p;, Ics ffi « !ir^^M.».)x-. lUr ; /r/,| I liaialirJ AtioA ofil It utile (il i rhomi ittaotif CI ;| louQ (ak« [tdjr adurn curs, inU|| observer!,! i loot pii| princes ^i CKcniplttl struct moifl iguisli Huflki'l y to prefiii len of ; I siKnificBiii Diber. , and to ooe^ le ; as, [opie croit; ilhcureui homuie ( commcUrtj ibjcct, Ul IS. which n Lt we coi FRENCH TOXGtJK. A3 'J>'he number is either ttHgulay Of plural. Tlie i'mguhr signifies one thinic ; a^, le pire^ U mhe.-^^ ; ^he plural more than one ; as, lei peres, let meres. y *"*■ The case signifies the dlflerant states, or the ^iffcreU' iircumstances of a ooun. A nonn in a proposition it to be coniidered either a» cubjcft or ol> ^ tet, that is to »at/, at governing 4r guverAfil. The governing ciiMr> Ititrd alto- tlia iitfNimp triiie, une Itittefertitt, See chap. Hi, jitigp 60, IV. The Pronoun supplies the plure of a nonn, (tiod vents the unpleasant etlVct of a frequent repetition : >i ;' at vu tnon frere^ il etott trh maladt ; instead of mott ha etoit tres-malatle, 1 Siw my brother, he was very ek ;. instead of my brother was very mcIl. Pronouns are of six kinds, viz. personal, possessive^, onstrative, relative, iuterro|^ative, tftd uu^jroper or definite. .^,v^. , ,; T.ho personal. pronoun is used instead of the name of a rson ; as, jV, tUy ilj m. ; elle^ f. ; for thi; «iiDgiilar ; ncutf uty (7r, 01. ; elleSi f ; for the plural. The possessive pronouns maik possession ; they are oC sorts, conjunctive and absolute. Tiic coujuncti've pronouns are used only with substan. -■ 'p land csKi ires ts, tnon, may met / ton^ ta, tet ; jon^ sa^ its' Yre, not ; voire, vos ; leur, hurt. The s,bsoiuie pronouns are used by themselves, their S ^ /'"Jibstantivcs being understood, as, le mien, la mtinne, lea l.ki. fl-'v t i I ftlij ' 'i'd ter \n ►*v, Ics miennsi ; Ic tien^ la tiennt ; Its itens, lea //Vn- ■i? .1 ilii... 54 A GRAMMAB, OF THE fim\' iUli: 'if ;iil; MS ; le sierii la sienne ; 1«» sieiis, les W^m^i ; Ic notrt, la «c>^, Ics na^rfj ; le vo/r«^ 111 volrv, les votres 4 le ilfttr,^ Ja leuty les /rvr/. * : Fhii demonstrative proncmns are used to particul«rlie{ persons or thiogs, as if pointed at by the finger. The relative pronouns refer to persons or things spoke /of in a fordier part of a sentence. ^ The interrogatiTe pronouns m used in askiog quei.j iipnf, „ J vtf ."■■■■''•. -v.;/?'. The indefinite pronouns are used in a vague sense : at,.] y.' A Verb is a word wnich l^ighinei to Be oir to doH;} a^j' Thomas est stndleox, Thomas is studious ; Thomuj etuAcy Thomas stuSes. "the proper definition of the verb is, that it is a word which sig 6es ffj^rtnaiifin ; foi it's proper office isi to affirm some attribute of the suh ject (^or .noiDinauve) of tbe proposition. But if we join it's priiiC^ BCcidfDtfl, It ma^ thus be d fined : a word which signifies effirmtttm\ with the designation of the person, numhert and'time • which dcfinilitil . sgrees properly will» the verb substauiive to bt (ttre.) But, since pjeif have frequtiitiy united certain attributes to the aifirmation, for \l% M>ke of breTTty ^ the verb (active or neuter) maybe again defintl th^is : a vord signifying the nffirmation of some attribute, with ^he daif\ nation of ptrson, number, and time. J*. •i'y iflvV*' '^^--i-^ I .Verbs arc divhied; first, into tegular and irregular porsudal ttud impiTsonal, \ When a iteru foUuws the rule of it's conjugationj itii| called regular ; but tf it deviates from it, it is called ii 'fvlar.'-' •• i ' ^.^-^^'^-T 1 Perapnal verbs are those which aie conjugated wHh personal pronouns, j^, /«, ii, elle^ ^^»''"\.r:/l':: -'.7:7^'.'':, '- Impersonal verbs &re those which are cohjagiifisd' only in tbe third pci'^on singalar with the pr^ftoun t/, it. ^ Secondly ,;^ verbs are divided into active, passive, neuterJ ^>aBd ptoijy^ ?,s^ *^ FRENCH tongue; ^ «#» A newter vnb is a word denotmg the action of tt^s sot)^ :ct or nomioative, which action remains in the sotrject,' id does not with proprioty admit of ait aecusalive after * i| as^y^j dgrr, I «l«p ; Ueouti, he ruHsi^^ ^'"« >f»'*'«^ f*# The prpiioniaal Terbs receive their namvif^Olll ^b^f injugated with a double prononn, as je me repens^ I rec- ent. There are also two auxiliary cnr helping Terbt^^re, /»^ and avoir, /9 i^w .* these are called auxiliary, from ir M!>ittg io t^o conjugation of other T«»b»."» 4f ;^>w> Four things are Xq be distingniBhed in ret^^s ; theillOdd/s le tense, the iiamber,^ and the perton. The mood expresses the diffei^nt «ianner and uses made Df averb positively, conditionaliy, or in an unspecified lanner. There are five moods*, iotiuitif e, iadicative) god-' itiooal, subjttUfCtive, aftd imperative. 'h ^'^^ »,> ^^ s^ The infinitive is the root of the verb t if expresses th«' iction or passion in an indefinite sense, without any par. ^icular circumstance of time, number, or person. The indicative expresses the action or passion in a direct »r positive manner, in a time present, past, or future. ^e shall have a more precise idea of the indicative in com- jparing it with the subjunctive mood. The conditional expresses the action or passion with de» Bodence on a condition. The subjunctive is a manner of expressing the action or iision with a modified affirmation or negation, always Isupposing another verb, which it follows, or to which it jbeiongs, or some conjunction by which it is governed.* .ii'H ■^5; ,; I . •'■ . * The differences between the indicative and the subjunctive are cbieflr : 1. The tenses of the SDhjcttietive Affirm or denj indtrectij,»l- wajs lapposing another verb affirming or denying directly ; as in (his phrase : I will have you do your duty, je vcux que iMiit;,fassiez votir- devoir. Je vetix is a direct affirmation, and indepeo^eiit^^f.any othcc$ ' whereas que vous fassicz voire devoir is but an iiij^irect 'Affirmation, and depending on the first. 2. Tiie tenses of the siiS^j^^tive are so djr|)«n^- ing on the words or conjunctions that are befo^e'^tbem, that they c«n<» M be separated from tl>era without having an und«termme «?ated, and malce by them«elves, without the hc'p of the conjunction, acie*r and determined stnse ; as, I believe we shaH hare sojne raifl,jVr M' 5t< A GRAMMAR OF THE If""' I? !i J. im Tide imperatife «*i|}rcis«8 tho aciioa or passion by eo«^| wianiis, prohibitions, cie8iras,&c. '^ Thw futUfTe tense has sometimes the sienification of tli imperative nood,.when it comiMndi or fot bMs ; as, tiiaaij shalt iity^ (he Lord thy God, tu aimerai k Sfigneur h>n\ JDuu. The teofes express the period of time, in which an ac.l tion or . passion is, was, or »hall be. They are properly tiiree, the present, the past, and the futurtv Each Cense has two numbers, singular and plural ; aid each number has^ three persons^ VL A Fahticiple partakes somethliig ot the Biitun)| of a 1^erb, andsomcihing ot an adjoctive. Besides the qoAlitj or attribute, Wfylch is the prdpenjr of (Ke nrl'jccj]! tn'C. the participle cxprcss<'s tiwf, together with the coiisjderetioi: o^f ttctmg, or being acted uftm ; whence the participle prtstnt or ^rctivf) aiMtij the participle ptut or paKive, m, Le» kvtiiRMs cr«tu't««nt Qi«u» "Duvmrttinf pu ies hommct, > € Vli. A*n AnvEttB toarlcV tfke tft^rt^iice and circuoul stance of an action or p^sion. VIII. A PaBrosiTiON is a word' placed befure those] nouns and pronouns which it governs, or before somef rerbs, in orderto connect'^ words yac with another)^ aud tvl shoiv the relation between them.' - -5^*^**^^-^^^**^ IX. A Conjunction serves to connect one word vtitlifj another, and sentences with seutences. X. An Imteajsction expresses thie cmotioni- sions of the soul, as jdy, grief, admiration, &c. The lui four parts of speech ate undtcUnable. ,:.;... viv. o 'n^xj,^-:: ^~-, CHAP. XI^.^;. •'^:-v.tv.4:i>:i.,^ Of Cendemti w^^ ■'i^^ give rules for knowing the Gender of iSubsiantifesj would be useless and puzzling. The best and eirsi- est way is Id learn them in a dictionary. And, todeiid,! troii qite nmis Mtroni ie la plait ; take away je crow que, what fcllotiW noas anroHM ae bi pluie, has u dcteriuiueU seiiie, and is ttnde^rstuo^.^;^.>/^.--. vi.i^v..^,;;'-^>. /^«^ togethrj ^ ^; M Croatism soL witctti^iey a cravat or -? |n garde, mc of the guards, «»« g^t^e^ , a inard 1 alsa'" a uck person" s nw^e. g'effe, the rolls, "ne grefle, a grcft of a hits |« guide, a guide. | .. une gujffe, a^^„. "WriHs, ahooi. .,^,^\^!^ nne livre, a pound, 'gueule, jiiAar //« hend^ Ugueule, the mouth of kn cravats. dry.) dog, eat, Ron, iffc. '"8, iris, (a plant) B «ne Iris, /rk,rainhow l«itre^ ^H^/ o/^^. nae loutre, «« ##«> li'.s''^ 7' ; tHl '. ii 00 A GRAMMAR OF THE W ■131; ill If I! 1i.'f Lfll'll:: rigging of a ship- mi Blanche, nt hd^kdU. nne maachey. a t&dve» UR m^moire, a bitl, n mma- la onemoire, memory, randum. un BiCfttcedftcamp, afo/o* la mcstre de camp, the Ji\ ^■'iMky,'^i^^u-:^^nel Q£ho9st4'ii' \ company (^ cf ngifuciU. itm mode, , a mmd, (^ phik*. une mode, afiuhiotuy > ti\ sophicaJ ienk J .;.,>;. ,., tin mdle, a^molg^ m^pttri. > unem6h'^ uoe.paInat«y «t ^r^^nr^ o/^ ,/: •> s paJmtree* Piques, ■ J?tfi/tfr Sunday, ta Pllqiie^. ^^* Passover vn paiaii^e, aemparimtk uae pacalUle^. aipdndldh un peodul^^ a pendulum^ unependuie, , a pendulum wn p4i^feM<^ « period^ # ime p^iio^ :< a period, (\ i$msii^ degree. discourse ) p«rsoiine, no body, any body, une perl.QiMi«, ^e^person^ ^ V\^^ ^(ipadi.(a$ cards) uiid |>»qii.e, Ti.^ _^^^ ^ ^aENCR TONGUE. r • FxMiiirnc. *<-^i 'un beau pimrpr*, {/*« j^'delaponrpreTyHoine, ■^- piu^h cohvr, rioH furple. \ne quadriUe, qmsilrlUe (a unc quadrille, ^uadviiU^ (u ^msme, M cmdc*) troop of hone for aionrt^ ' >^ ..*#ft«fc*-i«i^t*^ i namettt.) in quatfi^mey a fourth part, une quatri^me, a quarte of .»,^i;,»j<> w'^ t^^fci.. ..^»^ ^ sequence of four cards at '■ ' * .]v^'!^' ■ piquet. ■ reclame, 4he xigntB'ttdl la r^cUmt, th* catcb^tvord:' hack a kantri, '^ b laiyre, « xAr^rr, ^z heathen une satire, a x^/V^ fin pot* k soldo, /iSr hdldnce of an (a solde, joljtelr^s pay. If i , accouHi. . .i«W> |d saminc, ii j/f^, a nap, nne sommc, a sum, jasourls, a smile. une ficruris, nmouse, [a triomphe, a triumph, une triomphe, a trump at & a:&t3^^^> »,%!,^lilh*4f- • #;IV>M^-^tV■^.»J•■A•:^^^^' |n trompette, a trumpeiir, ttiiv fronpette, a trumpet. Id tour, a turn^ a triqk^ une tptir, atotver |d teoeur de livres),' ^ hoi- la tenemr d'un acte, the Un^r ieeper, or contetOs ef M>wrhii^» /^ fia§L Ajar:, a vaseL la laac, mud^ ooze, vigoid^y a hat mads tfwHtightfiiii^ vtcwuh* the , wcuna 'UfooitJ',^., 'BuwH^the Peruvian ^he^. la Toilpi, A .«ffi/. , ■ J;,:iv »"« voile, a /oi/i *,« 1 ; ; Rather MAscuLiifB. )4'3 P«ather Feminivb. ■:.!>« fonae, hr^4e^ ;^A*S,:-; alcove," antii^ve me^ ^>^a^"V^^^ Of Ipitaae, Me ^^i^, or /ibf 4iutap»| ij^«A^ •ff/^' i U:l' ■ «i-;-':i ^K ■ 1 f. ^^iJ-.^'' 00 %■'■ A GRAMMAR OF THE lUtiier Maiculini. Ratker Fsminive. docbe adutchy^ ^nigme, i rlJdk. ' './ Episode, tm episode. - idylle, m Uiyl. ■'^^''^''*^ epitiiaUunv, an epUhalami" {^XiiVimrm^^ A^ mui^ram,\ •'/ urn. . I ^plj-jTamiTiiC, an ep'^g r''^, I orgilCy Art (^rjTzn. ^-jf, '^^ orgufr^f-, cfgan^ amnlette, m amulet, parallax 9, paralla%» tSieriaqi:^urff/ tacf]f.ci. horloge, a clock horoscope, a horotcopg, 6f hjnins in cliurcheit, otbe/wice k i» niv^culiu^. t This ,vurd is nt^sculiue in the siugaUr, according to the Faij«ci| 9 a s^-^inx. I CHAP. III. f HI ;.'|t 0/* /iDe FoiuAtioN of the FsMtmHM GEifosi of 'iU'^i^ A^ ■ _^::,- -.^"^'Y GENERAL RyL«^;:i,;o;-v:^,»':foinT!i DJECTIVES take ■In f mnie fe?'the formati^ni of] their feminine ; as, aime, aimee ^ ^crit, fcrite ; conk] tant, cotutante*. Adj^tives ending with an e auifi have no variation in their feminioe, without exceptii»n 1 11,] admiral!>ic, li^. aSmrahiey t, ; fLmlahletm. amiaBltj^ f. Otiier adjectives form their feminine according to theit| f i:rmiu»tion, as in the following Concise Table, Adjectires ending ^*^^^' irim their Fdoudi\« *. (1) /• f/, i^ ^> 0/, 1^ («) V ^' < '^ 'f el Ic, r V ^le, #1!^ 1^ EXCEPTION?^ 1. Crvs. %^^v(«ii^{(i(« ; Turc, Tfimgwe ,' ^ c ^'"t jNiMtf ue ; ca&cVcaifv 2. <^ril, c«^^ .•ubtiUiN#e,i>tt|/i^^ • .'"ite. "^-^^■■l;-'^,#!1 ,.«?■' :■■«' FREWCfl TONGUE. ^ l^,^^^i^\:^m■■^,m ^ -~ • ^n- '^^^^^ "■ fidvoi.jtt'm,\ ■ * '" 1 .J . theFaiitci r, «, 0/, (4) UohW . onne. iuiiutf. VI*-. case. W-. : . ..*' -.* '- -•■* "^ ■ asse, ewc. o«f . '^^ . ,.,, .. .t ^^ ette, o(te. elle. olle. - •011C6. ausf e. v.. A i. T( f W ^ J . ,•,.■? r>.;,r;-./!: M . >« :»ffH. >* Tokn^TJON of the PiuJiJi of j^ouifs* ''^ 'r Q/" /i&* PokMJTioN o/ ^ GENERAL RULE. :,.tji> .-ilv SR of #■ O0N^ tn general form (heir plural by adding an j to '^■ the singular ; as bomme, i&oMm^/^. ^ PoLYSYLLABLKS ending jn «/ in the singular, form [heir plural by changing £he final / into / ; as, enfant, tn» ^*. 4. Rai, rase ; clbs, cloti. i. Secret, secrete ; complet, fomplete ; diacreti disn€(((^.i ipqui«t« |if iwete ; pepiet, rep^*tK ; d^vot, d4vote. M^^Ii* • ,; n«, rKifceil } ert, ^reen ; and oot ciad nud, verd. Secondljt, bftnit, and b^ni»' essed, /di/_';/^w ';> (V Hov fht geijer&l rule. Tbirdly, tori, and not tort, mted,wrw ::. This adjec'^^^e laakcs in it's feminine: Jjoth torfe, awd B'« ; fp 'c say, une coLonae. 'trss, rfe ■ 'J-,, t Aitj c'tir. ^ .... ^^v.. ,. . .... ^Bul, carnaval, '^cal, pnl, r^pa/, and proper n'srnetlcoH^ln^ in <>j!, }ik«* [/iMJ^ p. jrfait, s*>ai/(, follow the general r nit. * . >iti h: '5 62 A GRAMMAR OF THE Nouns ending in au^ eUt eau, ieUf and oUf make their] plural by adding an m to their sinfular*^ . f JV- B. (EW makcH yeux ; aieul, liieux ; gcntithommej ^cntihhommes ; monsieur, messieurs ; uaad»utc, me^dametX jnoHseigroiir, messitgneurs ; ciel, Heaven y make cieu»\ However, wc i>ay, ot:) d^/r de lit^ ttstriK uf bcis ; les (trJ d*un tableau^ the skj of a picturtj des arcii.cn.f///, raiiul bows. ;^",' ,-;-r ,. ■ •■:.:■ 4, - ■ *■'-■'.*•-■ i''.v ^CHAP. V. Of the Declension of Novn9, ,. , , As I hsTC hinted before, the ntmtnative in oouos is IUe| the accusative^ the genitiye is like the ablative ; so wtl shall call the nominative the ^rst case, the genitive tht seco case, and the dative the M/'rJ case. Noiit^^obstantiTe of the masculine gender, and beginniii|] ivilh z consonant* are thus declined : SINGULAR, ^-* •»*« "i;. •.1st. le livre, the book, ' vr f Vd* du livre, of or from the booh. S- i^4^^ '^j^d, au U?re. t9 the b9oi. , -,';t J."t« ',f »-« ■^ >.* ■: ■ PLURAL. 1 i?.:?--; »*^*^f<] • i. t'i'. ]es livrcs, /i^^ i^ooi/. des livres, cf or yrom the books. auY liTrcsy /o the books. Nouns sulistantif e of the feminine gen4cr, aqd be|i IK lib a (0ff/eiMW}f) are thus declined : . . ^ : f e SINGULAR. 1st. in table, the table. ad. de la table, of or from the talle. ^. 4 lA table, ' to the ^le. \ - \ ♦ J til aim, trm, cimtf cvu, tn^tqv,, iicum, Mb0u,f eut laft imp gent fi^-.i-i^?*; FRENCH TONGTE. PLURAL. II i i' j iVk< les tables, the tahbt. des fables, of or from the tables, -. aux tables, to the tablet* . -^^.^ I. • I- .1 . ■. ,. Nouns BubstantiTe of either gender, beginning with a roW, or an h mute, are thus deciined : SINGULAR. Jlst, Vhonme, the man. feh '|. 2d. de rhomme, of or fr^tm the man, ■ 4, -: < ; ;. 3d. i rhozame, to the man* . *" ' ' , PLURAL. ^''., -^^•^-:^. -/ ks iiommes, the men. i^' des kominus, of or from the men, '^f. '''t ,, aux liommesy i» (/^ mm. '- |» '4;^^ "^^ ''^•nns substantive of thouMtfcM/tnr i^endcr, and b«9!n. loi; witba eoHJonatUf are thus 4ecliaid- with the inkJinUi rticle : , SINGULAR;: *• '^km^--^- Jst, \in miroir, a looking- j/ats. ' ' 2d. d*un miroir,. of or from a looking glass, 3d. d ttu miroir, t9 a looking glas, PLURAL. dips miroirsj looking-glasses. ^^"^^ dQ mnairSy ^i^ or from looking glasses, h des uFroirsy to looking glasses. substanUffrof the miMru/m^ «;ender, and biegiu png with » vow^l^ or an ;^ ooutc, arerihus declined : ■■:.^^^ . SINGULAR. .■*<^^':^' tst. uu accident, an accident. Sd, d'un acciden^^ of or from an ac^dsm* 3d*itiJlli accidant, to an accident. -■■-'^'^' " PLtfRAL;-' --v. desaccidens, accidents. ' d^ccideas, of ox from azcidwts^. taafain. >, n>* ^ U' PLURAL. J jj . . '■ J 4. '. % dc8 oisuilks, ♦i»#iit in the flural number, when a, n-oim tubsfantiTe of ihher a,eRdar is: prcccrisd hy ait «4J|«afe'tw beginuiitg with a ronicnanty it is thus dtdtiied : PLURAL. l.st. d« malheurcux accidi^s,, unkappy. accidenU*^ \ -ill, I'MnalhfuretLX ccidens, bf uAhappj accxdenU* ui /iJ. a lie roalheureujk accidensL, to wihapp^. acexdente, "wt Before an adjective beginning with a voti«)»8 (fl&fuidilj^^i^ils :. %d. dtolfiBl^^^ or from ypkn. 9d/AJ^^ ft? ^oAiJv I begtonlnil :.^i. ■ BD h motf, tv^,; a-iti" ^.J(i- - .' sftfltite oil iiig withi] tnU» an h mutt, Viendi* Fa«NCtf T IGUE. .*. (>f '■ *-■ WItiin (hey begin with a vowtlf or an b mute, Ihus : lit. Alexandre, Alexander * 2d. d'Alexandre, tf ot J^^m Alexander. 3d. i Alexandre, to Alexander. Observe : i9om« in Kngliiih, exprcBsrd or understood Lfore a noun takfn in a prtkiv«, scr>ie) «xpr<;9Hed i#. french by 4i«^ d« /«» dRr /'> fpr flhe /ifl^v/<;i.» ands ^ f(# \tpluraly or (b^ fui^jj When the word of the roascuirne gcntier be^itik'^^ffh a' monanU thus :. t^ < 'M/^*. 1st, dii 8cl, some salt. *,. Ji ^l^t^TlV 2d. de scl, ^ or from iom^ t^li, \\^ ^17* ' 3d. a du sel, io some sali. >r ^V^t^l When the irord, either tnascuUoe or fn pain, 3d, a d J bpn pajn, ' id some sooikir^a4* G ? ram SQVM gOfi4\il^iadr 00 A GRAMMAR OF TFTI } 1* •i* t J'.' ^Vsrtkiif ek Afijr* ^.iJhm :rit', 'f .-^.vu*»^AV. CHAP. VI.»r»*i'^''»*»^^* THE! coostraetioa of the proacons being (he moit dtf.j ficiilt ptrt of^our laikguage, I shall here, for (he itki of perspicuity , near)/ foltaw the dlmooiination which er grammarians hafc ghren them, tliough manj of the pro.] iiouns may be looked upon as adjectiv'es. SECTIOX I. ^Wt " .^1 - Of PsKsoNAL Pronovu^, i'->;. **• These are of two kinds : conjunctive and disjanctire.- The first generally precede the verb ; the second commoij Jy follow the verb. The first take no preposition bef them ; the second take in their second cose the prcpc tion de^ and commonly in llicir third caac the prepo)ii{ tioo a. The Conjunctive Pronouns, Aii nouns and prooonns, as we hare hinted beforr, hit three cas«s : the first answering to the NominatWc an Accttsative ; the second to the Genitive and Ablative ; third to the Dative. The three cases of ^the' eonjnncti personal pronouns alone, and the thres cases of ^he thiii person indeterminate, when they take no preposition fore them, do not answer the three cases of other iioussj therefore we shall call the first tiie Nominative case, second the Dative case, and the third the Accusative i< The First Person, num. je, /, Bat. me, to me^ Ace. me, me* PtURAL, •IV -n. nous, wf, Dat. nous, t^uif AcGk nouS) ut. FREIVCII TONGUE. TIm St cond Fcirtoo. W |No«. tu, Mi*, ^^•^ Norn. VOUf^ J»«.;f*j ICC. (e^ the*. Ace. vom, jpom, Tbe Third Perioo Maiouline. V . « \ , ' f9». M) he ox kj ■ " Nom. ilt, li ..••».^- iNom. on, tme^^ they y or people. Wit. sc, /o on't se//*, to himself^ to herrelf, to itself ^ t$ I ihtnuelvest or to one another, -, , -•. |Acc. se, •«#*/ iclf^y himieifj herself i Siitlf themselver^ one another* jit ;,ifl / The Third Person supply iog and governed. u riwi". vU I If ^-.U.i^lJV-'/^-v^i;' ■••"%■ 4a. list. le, k, so, \%d. en, of him^ of hety of k, feme of them, from ^them^ ly them-, with them. ;^ • .,:^ ,5^ .. # |3d. y^ to kf there f thereiti^ in kf in them, mSdut ii or them* 1 Th'k DiSyUNCTIIfS PROKOUKi, v^ ^^ ;■ The First Person; . ' ■•<■........, ^ ' :. ; 'I SmOULAR. pLURALr ; 1 'I A ii i»t. moi, da me. tif nr /*•; 1st. no«8, ^tus. k m moij of or from met 2u. u« nous, 0/ or from ut^ ji, nioi, to me. 3d. 4 Boits, nuOs, . in us. tT * tfeieiiti of mc in this sense, dod of •^'k leJf^^H Yiilgarii m. J-^H m, A GB:AStMJyi or THE ''■n fjrf. (oi, thou . tbciy\ ,, ' Ist. rous, youyy^y t" ^i Sd. d« tvi, 12^ or frmnitt^^d. de toue, ^or/raw^av/ 3(1. i (ttiy i4)t> tithes. :3d. 4 toi, t«ii iojr^. •ViC.. The Third Person Masciltne. \ht. Ini, Aim f ^e, or if, ^ Tit] enx, they them^ 2f|. rte liii, o/'ur/rom^'morf/, 2d. d'cux, o/or /r«« n. .<• r<: ■. The Third Person indetormioat^. I Mi. soi^ himself^ htmlf^ or itself 2d. do soi> o/ or from himself herself y or «^/^jf> 3d. k sui) to himself ^ or tZ/fZ/T. iVW^ ; Their com pounds have tli(^ saoii cases as f belt j BiQi^rfn^Oie, tnyselfy ,v^^^^,? ^nons-rn^roe*, ourselves, toi.m^ine, thyself, K' *' ^„«.,„ ^a»,«« ^yoursehes, kit.tneme, himself., -r: ^\ yourself y 90ioBieine, one's self ,,^j|^, elles-memes, J , ,i?, :- ' ;^ ;^f'\' SECTION II. > -Vmi-^^ ^ 4H i Sing. i;H-'--'±tl Pi«yR* \L. .-;'; Mas. .• '.Fem; C'^W?^^p^'^^>^ ■- ^ \st. mon, m^^^ roes, wy, 2d. de mopy de ma, de mes, of or from my , 3d. ^ moD, 4|Skft, ^ »i»««>v <« »ty. Aft^ tl^c sawii? Dftainncr ^« deciincd, ton. l»i« tes, /^v, ;v son, sa, 8CS, /w or ber^iis^ wnisftn xoarGus. ttflr Ob&trve^ ftrit, theM conjanctiyo preBMUia cMit alimjA efore a noun to which they are joiae4. Obserrc, secondly, the following absoloto ppssessiTC IroaouDs, being, uied by tfaemseU es, are declined fritji th« kfinite'srtide, tbus : *''\^^: «'?-" '^■.-•*,,c' \?^'V''.^ '^i^ 't"i' Of jiasoLutE Poss&siirs Pronouns, . SiNO. ?•',•■ ! ■■^li^»-' ehes, ehes, ''/> ehn\ ■:-m ... ,fi-; ■i^, After the same manner are declined, Masc. Tem,^,- *", *"^ '■: Masc. Ist. leralfta, la mienite^ Ibsl miens. C mitten 'mil 'i dumienv de loi mienne,. des > F. '^ 0/f mffl«^ Ivd d. au mien, h, la mienne, aux j miennes, {/o n^mr. ^ . iticD, la tienne, les tiena, hi ticnnes, thine, '*: ^ Ik isieo, la sienne, les siens, les siennes, bh or hersy ,.,; ^ >D^tre, la ndtre, les ndtJKi^ eurs, , ii p ,M?p , «.^t* .I2I iT6tre, la rdtre, le* vdtrcs^^ j'oi/r/, >t;^ xs t>^-P .tJ> ^*^¥^ tleur, laleur, les lenn,, tieirs. Jur*i <* *^ ^- • ^:-.:^:-:.;o:^- SECTION' IlK.;*^"'-, ••^■^■^^";ff|:.. ,:Jc-Of DsM0N^tR4.TIMR FrONQUN9, " 1"^ .^-S'^^'^.i/" Masc. ' ' ' Fem. k ce, orcef, iefart a ixofWfh cette, /Aix or /^, B. de ce, cr de ctft, dc cette, a/*oj fvam tkk or t6«? H. 4 ce, or a cet, a cette, to thi.s or that, IPluh. : ; ■ ; ^ 1. and F. t ■'vf'i'i. N It. 069, I. de cesi V4C .■ ■•% , /i^«# or t/j(fte, » n- I. ices, :^^:. ,i'-^%-^>x u tJ^^otj^ot^,/ ■' [After the same EjSManer is declined, ^ * Iifo. ."'^ - .•.:'W^;,pLuit. . , ' ceJai, F. celle^j.S*, - r. M.« ceux, F. c^jef, jlc^ft. . |K».^ The iarggQinm ^4!SiX;QSf;«tli:e. pfrb«m|i|$ itt^ tiseA '' h '. I. •^ ri ^vl: I -.s ^ ' ■ 1!' ■■.■»■ i '•■ ' 1 i •■! .. - 70 ;'>^;- A GRAMMAR OF TH£ speaking of persons or things. Ctci and cela are iiwd| speaking of things ooljr, ■■/^"•^i^ii /tefe tf^'v* :■'.<,: Ut. ccci, thui mWt thai, 2d. de ceci, of or from this ^ de cela, ofoTfromihstt 3d, d ceci, to this. d cela, to that. '-. SECTION IV. V Of Rrlatifs Pronouns, ". * , . Most Pronouns in French hare a rHative signification;! lut those which are prOj;}er]y so calted are the foUo'^iog: Sing, and Plur. 1st. qui, qot, Sd. de qui, or donf^ Sd. k qui, 1st. qiioi, qui, que, 2d. de quoi, 9r dont, 2)d. 4 quoi, wAo, whom^ or nvhichy of nvhom or whoiff to whom, ; r ' ^ . ..-..1 _ * -' * W-'- *k ©/" what, or which, to what* ' % K Aftt^r the Siire. Masc. Sing. Fem. Ttt. lequfi, laquelle, which, Sd. duque], de iaqncjlle, of which, . ^ Jd. auqueJ, 4 laqneHe, to which, "" " '* Plur. Masc. Plur. Fem. 1st. teaquels, lesquclics, whkh^ 2d. dcsquels, de.squeUes, of which^ or whose, ^d. auxqueis, auicuelles, to which, v- • .'. >* SECTION V. On lN7EB.R0G4TirS PrONOVNS. ' • -' J«t. qui, who<, or nuhom^ que, "^ what., td. ds qui, of ot from whovi, de quoi, of or from tfih Sd. i^ qui, /o whom»- i quoi, ifo w;?***/. After the saoie manner is declined^ ' ; ' Sin©. _- ' ^ ■ Plur. / ■ - -''-^^ M. q«*l) F. quelle, M. quels, F, quelleSj la/h&f. Thi& nrononM ta aIvmivs foHatred bv a suhstantiiH'. as un, auc FllENCH TONGUE. 71 T * SlN&» MaSC. SiNO. FfM. ^ ■:: • .,^^/V .•?=.:,, ;ri^, |st. lequel, Uquelle, which, '^- i ;^i /v *^lVi^%<,a> l(J. duquel, lie laqiielle, o/or from which y .Ui -r r; Kvil fd. auquel, d laquelle, to which, .- ^t 1j ^ J^.?,:?s>^ >LUR. Masc. Plur. Fbm. * i. 'S^ ' I • II .. 1.1 , "' '. '•■'■» •*■'»'• ' ■ t Ut. Jecquels, lesquelies, whtchf |d. dcs(|uels, desquelles, of or from which ^ ^ id. aiixquels, auxquelles, to which, ' ;S^:i -:V' -IfS '■,!■; ) ■ C.i SECTION YUtn ?,>i«f ?■"■ ;> i':f¥ i^0f »i *W Ojf Lt DBF IV ITS PkONOUNS. SiNO. V > «i: Plur. Maic. aad Fcm. Masc, and Fem* |gt, quelque, qnelqucs, /otn/, J. de quelque,.*! ss';yi de quelques, d^ or yrom /»m«y Id. d quelque, _ ^ quelques, to some. .Mi ■^1 ._. . ".1 Afttr the SHi»e manner are dedipedy * r " ;; ♦^^ i#; juelqa'un, quelqii'uiie, qaclques.uns, quelqueswuneiy ionuy somebody, . . ..^ ^sque, chacuD, chacune, every^ each, licooqae, qui que ce soit, whoever^ un, aiicun, nul, personna, nobody^ len, nothing ; plusieurs, m Femt. V -f- les uncs les autres, one another^ les unes dei aofres, of fine another » )es uoes aux autrcs, to one atwther. I. -mI SiNft. Feii. Pane et I'antrc, Afl(fi&, de Tua et de Taatre, do Tune et de I'autre) of 60^ L a l^ttR et h, Tautre, a Tune et d t'oiitrc, t» W^ n A GRAMMAR OF Til C r -^ Plur. Masc. les uiM et !es autres, des tins et dcs sxitres, uux UD9 et aux autres, Sing. Masc. 1st. I'un ou I'autre, Pl»h. Fem. ' lesMmes ct k« autrM, loth^ dcs uncs tit 4«6 autrcs, ^ boihA auz unes et a«x autres, to M Sing, Fem. i4 . ,. Pune ou Tautra, ihber^ 2d. de 1*UQ ou de I'autrc, ic I'une ou d6 Vautrc, efehhtri 4d. il I'un on a t'antre, 4 Tune ou d Tautra, ioj'$thr. \ ',''■" •- „ ■ I .' 1 ~. v" I Plur. Masc. Plur. Fem. lea uni ou l«s autres, les unts on les autras, either^ des uns ou das autres, des unes ou des autres, ofath Rux uns ou aux autres, «ux fines on «ui autres, to titkX Sing. Masc. "' Sing. Fim. "^^-^ l9t. ni I'un iri {"liiltre, «! I'unc ni I'autre, neithir, 2d. ni dc I'Kn ni dcl'-atttr^, ni de t'une ni de I'aiitN, ofn 3d. m ik Vkn «i #'autra) ni 4 Pune ni i Paiftine, to mitk Plur. Masc. Plur. Fxar. " > ni les uns ni les autres, ni les ones ni les •ant res, neiik ni dcs uns ni des autres, nides unes ni des autrts, o/nid ni aux uos ni ^ux autres, ni aux unes ni aux autres, to '^■■■ y CHAP. VI L Of Verbs. ;»< sl'^ ,t- ■!'J .'.'i^'^*!; * Preliminary Q6tervationsil^m:v vi' . ati: i, j44^L f)«rsonal Terbs are conjugated with ilicse JZa. noun*) ^V J /M, //, or eUcy f«r the slogjilar, and > i>ouSf Or, or elt^s, for the plural. J?« iki\ pronominal verbs are conjugated with these pf noum^je me^ tu te H se, or eflg a ; taut mus^ ■mns^^ MmtK iyiMk* S4 i e, in mgy 1c, st^ is oraitti^d, a^d ati«|i trophetis put in it's place^ when the foUovring word wM^^ Towel. Ifi All active verbs are conjugated id thw tn^n^r vi\ the ac» pRES jant, hM% -'pj^ fhoui FRENCH TONGUE. :^ rs 4. Reflected Terbs, in a reciprocal sense, are used in k}ie plural only ; a?, ih se contrarlenU tl^ey contfadkt one iQOther. b. All actife verbs are conjugated in their compound [cDses by the help oi the auxiliary avoir^ as is likewise the rerb etre. 6. Reflective and reciprocal verbs are always conju. ^atod in their compound tenses by the help of etre s at [fc also these following verbs, allery alordery arriver^ scm |wir/r, decider^ descendre^ entrer^ msnter^ mourir^ tfaitrcy riir, retwfner^ sortir, tomber^ venitj and their derivatlvet, [iccpt wh«n used actively. 7. In all the verbs of the first conjugation, terminating J ger^ e is retained through all the tenses and- moods ?hiocver^ is to be followed by a ox o \ aS, manger to eat, jHgeantf eating ; nouj mangeons, we eat. 8. The compound regular and irrcgalu verbs common, follow the conjugation of the simple, Troin which they [re derived. 9. The termination of the tenses B, D, F, (seepage 78) the same in all verbs, both regular and irregular. 10. Custom requires, that an j, should be added to the ^cond person of the imperative mood'>ia verbs of the first onjtigatiun, whin (hey are Allowed by the particles /i^ ud^y ; as, disposes -en ; penses-y ; vas y ; the Jqitter tgkes [/, when it is foiJowud by en ; as, va-t-en^ . V /^| Conjugation Of the aiixiliHry verb AVOIR, /e l/ave. iNFlNITlVE MOOD. ■ ^ Avoir, to have. .-- Pauticiplkj*. .5 Present. Pasi* - rant IS, , h*ving, - ' '" - I ?.M . /v7:/. i rite, in the ikird person «ingufar df ^11 tt^ift^s Or t<^ef, fflf the feminine, in a',1 verbs ia IK- »»:;;.» a «€ v«ui(4 ^JUfWO . ': f I- ■ it :/->i 74 A GRAMMAR OF THE ■m lilt! 1u avm^t thou hadit^ il avoit, he had. u^- V.i' In*, perfect. Nous avions, we hadj ous aviez, yon had^ lis avuient, thsy-had. Preterit. Nous eumcs, *ivehad, vous eutcs, you had, ils curcnt, they had. J'eu», I hadf tti euS, /i&^u heidstp i\ euiy he had,] '^ ■ ;>,v' .:•;*■■. \:.; ^ ': - :'.- Future. . >''-■■ ■ * ■■■ -. ^■^-'■' - J'aurai, J shall or will i ^ INous aurons, we shall tu auras, thou shah >|pousaure«, you shall il aura, he shall ,^^};. j "^ |ils auront, they shall .CONDITIONAL MOOD. f-r i '"i'j't^ Singular. J*a«rci> ' / should *" tu aurois, ihou shouldst V ^ il aurpit> he should j pLUtiAL. U "3 VoMS aurii ns, we should) , vojs auri'Z, you should | ils auiuicnt, they should) "^ i IMPERATIVE MOOD. aiNGULAR. PluraI.^ Af^, havctkou^ -M^l.^. qu'il ail, /.-r^ ^i?r A^zvf, (|u'€lIo ait, ^':t her have. I Ayonp, let us have^ aycz, have you if . [them ha• iv .. Pr.fjsiAL. iii i;0e Singular. ;/:, q»'e J'aye,. that I may 1 , jNcus ayons, wff w^> /J TU ayies, thou day st \> |jVousay»z, ymmax.. >j il 4it% ^f r«4y ■ aQ- ,.:■■;;,.:,•. V- ■■,;:., :'..::;-"' Pret«if if. - I V01IS euwiez, you m^m HI . i ' >*■-* - -< 't " FRErsrcII TONGUE. ra IH I Now, to have the compound tcnsfs, you need only add, [after each person, tho participle past «r^ for the Frencli, ami had, for the English, through all the teases and mouds ; \»j'ai eut I have had, and sa on. . .; ^^jv Conjugation ' ' ,; Of the anxiliary verb ETRK, to be. r / INFINITIVE MOOD. ' ^' \ .M.. Etre, to be. . :: ■ •':iZ'! '■^■,' '^ ■■1 "' ' -'■ PAtt'ti«;iPLES. ■■■■■^^■:i^K-^3^^..^ [Etant, ^-ini-. Ii^le, been, <•• » ;-\ IXDICATIVF MOOD. Present Tunse. SrNrM/t-AR, jjo sui^, /am, Ita es, /]?>. |J'etois, /wtfj, ' V. tu etois, /Z>#« wast J ' |il etoii, A^ ivas. '-■■■'. r. ^; • *''^.* :*^f >^- .' fefus, I nvass *^' Vous somuies, -zy/? are^ VOUS 6(CS, j;otf «ri::.-,i:i~>''^ iis furent, ikiy 4 vous screz, y^ , shtui \ i. rn ke shall J Jifs seront, tkey dall j tJONDinONAL MOOD. 1 ?:\niir.An. ps-r.;., I should \ •lis seroicati tif\) shkkid J "^ h i *! n-.^" ■> ^ ■"(,;/^v i w '^'■mi A GRAMMAR OF TH£ IMPERATIVE MOOD. SlIfOULAR. '%?> Sols, be thou, i ?• Jfe^i qu'il soit, let htm ie, qu'dle soit, /«/ her be. '''■%:■^^ Plttral.- "'f^5'^- 1Sojon9> /ip/ w l5*, Iqu'ili or qu'eiles soiout, k\ ■■ ,t«. :;. que Singular. Je sois, /^a/ / may in sois, J/60U m^^// il soit, he tnay que J e f ti sse, that I might tu fusse^, thou mightst il fde, he might SUBJUNCTIVE MOOa—. - ^ * Present Tenw. * i que Plural. they, majg J Preterit. /''•'-• '■^>---''' • ■ I Nous fdssioos, iwe might ^ ^ JTOUS fussiez, you might i j lis fussent, they might J que rLUR. 1 jNToui soyons, >^ vous soyez, J |ils soient, tht The compound tenses of this verb are formed hy Owl lulp of tho auxiliary verb a^tt^/r through all it^s tenses aDl| mouds, by adding, after each t>erson and tense, ele fot\ the French, and ken for the English ; w^ j'ai ete^ 1 haW been. &c. yavois etey I had been, &c. and so on. Observe, 1st, the compound tenses ef all other verfc!,L bolh regular and irregular, are formed by the help of theMJ two auxiliary verbs, by adding the participle past of (1)6 \ejb>ouare corjv:gating, after each tense and person the auxiliary verb. For example, to find all tho con pound lenses of the Torb parler, to speak, it's past parti. fipfe fce:ng^<3r/f, you need only ^ut parle^ after the sinJ pl3 tens'Zs of the verb avoir. Observe, Sdly, , are sometimes compouadfl of it'»co9pipQjiiQd t«nse« ; and tho^e ci^njugated tiy the helj of eire^ are oji4y itoA^faunde^ of it's simple tenses. '^^ «»<-»•««>«»•-» ^» »Jk •»«• n<«' I%.rt:iia«« 1 »k< JH^aaM** WJl '»% IV^ «k:^ ^f^mvummr «Mw wtUji' ^MxnAr\n:ttt>A 4^Mf.-o^>n VWWHk 'tWIWPW V* vf A TRBI^CH TONGt;E. f7 vtrb efft ;: ;*f?it»:4i »• Ds ir A GRAMMAR OF THE :^» Unrariable TERMmATIONS in all the CONJUGATIONS. ^ ^^ INDICATIVE MCn.^. Singular. Preseut Tense. Plurai., Alt' ,.0 ; I '' m B. -01/ 1 . "^ -at c. 9. {.is 3. C 'US Vaiiable .as "US »ez -ent 4, J 'int ^mins D. 'tat 'tOIJ .,\\', 'tas Imperfect. -wV .'tons Preterit. -a -dmt: • it - ttet 'Ut '■umet -ittt mintwf Future. -ra "Tons -tez 'dtes 'ties •dies - intes •rfz - «* CONDITIONAL MOOD. mrots • rmt 'notts -rtez *eiettt - erent ' irent -urenl "intent 'Tint • roient F . me Si i" ■I -; ' <; 1.*^ .asse 'A 2 I 'isse SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. ; Present Tense. •«.'"r^'"'l*l|' ■'/":'■ -ions -iez •asses 'isses iH .^ -tons Preterit. -. 'dt "Ossions -^ assies 'it 'issions »issie% mtnt - assent • issent 3. • usse 'Usses .Ut -ussions .iissiez -utsent 4' J 'iasse minsses mint Jnssions -inssiez .inssent INFINITIVE MOOD. Participle Present. H. mont* - V i." ,[.:-4,. >^,^: K. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Variable ;..-•;■ -on j "€«, ■■■<' >'- • Pj>rst Cohiusation. ^ "INFINITIVE MOOD. , ; . Ajim.£r, to htfe. A^im-antj t^img' '1 ;.'■,; lAiiR-0ji fovea. ''\T fuench tongue. . INDICATIVE MOOD. v, Preacnt Tense. Siwoular. PLun*Ti. 79* '•aime, / hve*, |u aimcii, thou lovesty II aimCy he loves. Nous aJmons, we !ovi* ?oua aiDiJZ) you love, iU aimep* tbr hve. yJ tittpertect: raimois, / iHd love + , lu aimois, thou didst love, li aimoit, he did love Nou! vous aiiiiu lis aimoich, -< •).■."■ ve did love", "fou did love, , they did love. Preterit. Taimai, I loved. -' Nous aim^mcs, nve lovedi ju aimas, thou lovedst. ^ rous aimates, you loved, jiaima, he foved^ -,< ils aiinoreut, they loved, - . Future. v< . '•' . f'aimcrai, I shall ornvill love. Nous 9\meToxk^tife shall Jove, |u aimeras, /^ou sbalt love. aimera, he shall love. ?ous aimerez, you shall lovey ils aimcroQt, they shall love^ GONDITIONAL MOOD* i'~ ■" FluIial. ^^^^;J ■:^ SiNGVLAfUt ^aitnerois, I should love. iNous aimerions, tue shy love. lii aimerois, /i6c(/ shouldst love.; voub aimeriez, you should love. '' aimer eit) he should love. M& Aimttro'inQt, the^ should low^ IMPERATIVE MOOIX Lingular. :«^^' PLUftAti Ume, love thou i J jB'il aime, let him love. lu'eile aime, let her love. Aimons, ietMsiove, aimcz, love you,., qu'jl« almeulj iHthpkh^, • Of J 1 u .■■.«r.- '^1 ;i ::-i s^. .li^li^ %:'^. V.s^. IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) 1.0 1.1 liilM 12.5 1.25 1 M ^ ^ 6" - ► ^ 'n /A HiotograpJiic Sciences Corporation -^^■^' 23 WEST MAIN STREET WEBSTER, N.Y. 145S0 (716) 87^-4S03 I •r 1 fiXJlMMAR or THB PraMnt Teoie. J'afase^ - fi(«^ Imajf Im^ iNoms aiaiiooK, #« maf lo4 Frcsegti Tense. Singular. ThV^ktfr^ ^jiwp^ I punisB, l^ !90tfs titntindiis, wtifunhhi tn puniS) jbtmpunishest^ il puiut, te puni^hetf vous punitSiBsit jou^punishi lie puniuenf, thfy pHiimth ItnpeHvei; tu puiiissois, Mo» '| ti puiiissoit, ie didpmitbi^ . jIliB pimittoieAt, Aey did ) ft "[-:-'^ ^ .;.,-^-..;: , jPreterit. ;y'; - V?'*^^' ■;'■■- \ J« putil%^ >/^«^^ " ' ^o«s punlmety «Nrj^«i(^i|r4 Futufiot LNoa9 ptmiMirf ^ ji« >!«# ) FRENCH TONGUE. O^NDITIONAL MOOD. SlirOULAR. PLUftAli* Jt pimirois, I should ") ^IMons pQiiirioiii« we a til puniroU, ihcu thauUa > '1 rovs puniriez,jM» il punlroit^ he should } «,|i}f poniroient, they sh IMPERATIVE MOOa Sjngulab. Plural. Punify punish thou, IPaniflsons, let us punish ^ qa'U puoisf^, let him punish^ IpmiiiBin, punish yoUf [nishM fo^eiie puoisse, let her punish. \qvL*i\a ponisseat^ let them pun* quo StTfiJUNCtlVE MOOD. Present Tense. SrK«utAit. que 'FhtJitAti ' 5foos pnoissioni ^wh^' m 70US punissiez, jou nurf •^ lis punisHeat) they may Preterit. Mte srK«utAit. Je pnnisse, ^at J may ") .4 tu puDiines, iImu iaayst > '| f%pun\taeythatf might 1 ^ Nottl ptifiiMioas, wemi.y^ 'i punlt, i< «^^ J ^U» panissent^ t£i^ mght ) I, TMril Conjofttion. SiC^^^CviNFINlTlYB MOOD* PAJlTlCIVLEi. ?i^E«HTri*. Past. DefftAt, #«iMjr- fDftj «w^ > .-- v> f \ :i<«ill^>* < >*''>i''^- ^^ WtB»A»y eM V ,''^ ' , Je Ten tu Tcn( ii rend Je TCQl ta. ?eD( il vendc Je tent t& fcoct il Teudil Je rendr in Tcndr il fendra [Je^f^nd^ jtUfTeBdrt |il rendroj V«nds, ., Iqi'il veod Iqu'elle re l«c S] IJerendo, |ta rendes, llveodp^ |que h vendiasi e» t them cvtf' \may owe. ^ tay-cwe, lay »nve. Itnirht owe. ]«jA/ ows. rkt oive* FRENCn TONGUE. INDICATIVE MOaB. Prestiot Tease. SiNfiuiAit, Plvral. Je Tends, I sell ^ tu vends, thou selksty ii vends, he sells. Nous Tendons, vue sell^ TOtts Tendez, you sell^ Us Teodffat, ibey seU. ^ "^ 1 ^9 t' M . /' " -^ ,| CVr^ri ^*.v- ' ^^^^ ^■•t. ■ „ 1 WVw] ' A Mil Je Teodois, / did sell. tu. Tendois, thou didst stftf il Tendoity he did sell. Imperfect. Nous Teodionf, we did seS^ TOQS Tendiex, you did stll^ its vendoient, they did tell. JoTendit^ I sold, tk Tcodts, thou soldtti il Teadii, he sold. Preterit. • Nous VendSmet, we ^(deL fous TeoditeS} you sold^ ih Teadireot, they sold. Future. Je Tendrai , / *kpiU seU<, tB Tcndras, thou jhak selly il TendrA, bs s,hail. sell* Nous Teifdrotis, we ibdll sett^ vous Teiidrcz, yousbaff ti ilf ?eadro|»l, ibeysib^tt^ eONDlTIONAIi M001>. y ' BlI^GULAa. PhVRAT.. Je^'v^nd roi», / should sell, taiTendrois, thou sbouldst sell {il vendroit, he shpuld sell. iMPfeR^TIYE MOv^D; Sii»oui/AR. Plural. Nous Teadrit-i'r, we j-k..'. -//^' !'f>us Vvndfi*z, you should sell^ iis iCAinciroietU, they should sell. I V«nd9, geS thou, qi'il reode, let him sell^ qu'elle Tende, let her sell. \ ■hs Yendons, let ut setty rendez, sell you .^ qu'ils Teadent, let them seU* wme SUBJUNCTIVE MpQD. y ; ' Present TCettse. **^ ' SiNOtliEAR. quo PLUB'At* IJo rende, that I may sell y |ttt Tcndes, thou mayst sell, 11 Teadp,^ he may sell. Nous ^i^dions^ 90e imty^^ \ ous TendieE, you iH^^uil^ ils Ti»id«nt, ^^uy nfay ir/4 Ique Ff ctewt. le Teodlsse, thfit I might sell Ittt vendisses, thou nJl^isP r^A Nous Tendis^iuMtM! Tcadijsettfj : ;•« ' i li . I $4^ jk ^iUAUMAti 0f nst I INFINITiVJB HAOOa ^ PARtlVltFLlS. Trad^uiMftt) tramk^ni* jTrid.uit| trmukiid. FMNfrt Tense. ^ \^> SiireuLAR. Plvbal. i^lmdvis, Itrmshaem |;^otfBtradttit«ns, «viriM//i0.Vr ttt tMdult, filiM trtuulatetty hroat tradvlMi, foii trMulati^ tmpuh ti. Pi^teclt, mii9 tt9iAnklmf you tM II i«4railui8fo, thoutrmulaitdti, |y«iM trwHii^taR, \y0» > S , il^nuluieit, ^ tnmtlaud. pis tradaiiireotj they j« Pature. ' > I ITOUI y 5iiis ^ ^liMlain^ Ji» *kali ;radttiroDt^. tiefshaU^ k roiti traiii^Flee, ymHto > | asMs, ion \ shall 'I do \i fRENCH tongue:. A SUBJinjCTIVE MOOD. Present Tense* il I: qne Siivgitlar. que * Plural. J« tradtiiae, that I may 'k < I Nous traduisions, wem.'^^ iVL tradoises, thou mayest > | Ivous traduiiiez, jroti may > | il traduiio, he may J 4: |il8 tradttisent. tbeywiay) h. • f'i- ft^'i ,'»>> i.'\''A que Preterl*. ..,..,,., ^.-, Je trtdubiue, that Inn.l^ |NoaS trfliaisTitaioiii^ wel ^ tu traduisisse?, /i^oti mi^. > | kous traduishsiez, y^u > v U traduisit, kumgbt ) ^ |i(s tredainsieot, they mi, ) S Sixth Conjugation. INFfNlTlVE MOOD. % -^^ "^ Jo-iMPRB, to join,. ■ jiii^^*^?;-:^**'^' PARTIque Preterit. Nous jcigniMioD*, .mm.joiny f ous joignihsiez, j;ott mt joiny i 8 joigaissent, ih::y might join^ dt joignisse, that I might join tu joignisses^^Aott mightstjoin, 11 joigiiit, be might join. CoNJUGATIOir of R£HSCr4tD F'sttBS, A Reflected Verb, as i haTe hinted before, has alwayi 0e bdQTC it's in^nitive ; as, se repentir^ to re}^nt ; but it is (jrnerally an active verb, the action of which returni mpun the agent that produces it. The followtng i>xainpi« ot the first conjugatioa ntxW be sufficient to teach how to conjugate ,an}[ reflected Terb. INFINITIVE MOOD. Sf Leter, torUe, Participles. Present. Past. Se le? ant, rieii^, jLeT^, risen. - ^ INDICATIVE MOOD. ,^ yr^ Present T^nse. Je H^^^ ^ »^.", ' \ = 7. |Koiii iium«'hpti»ia^ ^sft^ {,"• f'.- ,1^ FRENCH TONGUE. SinoulAa. Imperfect. PVLRAIn Je me le? ois, / Jid rite^ tu te Icrois, tbou didst rise, U la levoit, kg tBd ris*. Nous ROUi ler ion?, Wi didfiif, votts vonif\tfkinffiy dtdrisi, ils le lef oicaC^ *iw^ did risgk Je me levai, / rose, tu te levaSi ^^ow didst rise, il se lerAy be did rise* Preterit. Nou8 noi|8 leyames, we rose. rous Y«i>ys levates, you rose^ (Is 8e|be?ere»t, /i&^;y ro/^. Je me Ie?erai^ / shaJl rise, tu te leveraS, /^oti xW/ mr; ' il se levera, he shall rise. F'uturc.^v Nott»nons teTerons, we shall rous Tous IcTcrez, you >i. rise, il se leferont, they shall rise. CONDITIONAL MOOlft* Sii^GULAa. *; Jc me levorois, I should' rise i t» te lererois'^ thou sho. rise^ il se let^rolt, be sbwld rite. PiitJRAL. [rise. Noirs nouy leverions, fqfas no»9 Icvassipns, we mi. rinis ▼•ttiilfas^, jw« mi ri, tltseief asseiif^ ij|» i«^/ rise. k«.-j J>y the A GRAMMAR OF THE pJWBtmkwIU s'm aiier, to go away ; #*m ret9iimer^ (o A reDlati^fiAl Tetb, which is br no IntMW to be ron. fotttidod^lllv a reflected on^, is used ia the plarol only, and conjugated lil&e reflected lerbs with a doable pro. noon. . INFINITIVE MOOD. ABSousiSy to ahfolvi, Paescnt. Fast. Absolfant, ahtoh'mg. lAbsonSi aitofvul* INDICATIVE MOOD. ' Singula a. Plural. J'absous, / aliolve. t u a b sou B , thou ahsolwtt . ii absuuf, I he cAtolves, Nous absoIvoBif, me ahtohe^ fout absoltes, ^ou ahoivtf Us abiolrenf, tity mMw, •■iji>t<\ Imperfect. J'abso!Tois, I did ahtolve. INous absolvions, we did ah. tuabsulvois, thou didftaljolvey oua absolviez, you did ahsol. il absolToit, he ^d absolve. |iis absolyoieat, thay did abiol Future. J'absoudrai, J shall 1 vLVousabsoodions, «;f/A.") ^ fn absondras, Mom jW/ >"5 rouy absoudrei, yousb.?^ il absuudra, h shall ) ^ {iis absoudront, they shall) *| CONDITIONAL MOOD. SiNouii^ti. PlIjral. J'absoudi tu absoudi ii absoudruit^ IMPERATIVE MQOD. SiNGCTLAR. PlVRAIi. IAbsolfotis, tet tit ahsohe. ^b^klvei, Absolve you^ q;4.wab«olvetity let than ah. * WlriH^Ja^ tr&'Mt i* iii»t emigji^MK at IpiiplH.ym will fioe did ah. did ahsol. did abiol /A Ji them dt. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. que SiNOULAR. 4)a« Plural. J'absoUe, th»t J may 1 ^'KVons absoUiont, wi'm tuabsolfM, thorn mayit >^\fo%i ibtolti^, y^ti mny jl abieUe, he may ) *% |i)s altaolveikt^ they may Abstraihe, to alttrady like tr^ir^. AccuKiLLiR, to receivtt like cueiUir. AccoVAiR, /« run to, like tturir. f im liVFINITIVE MOOD. ACQrTRia, to acquire. Participles. Present. Past, Arqueiant, acquiring. {Acquis, acquired. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present Tense. ^ Sjwgular. pLubAL. J'acqtticrs, I acquire y in acqiiicrs, thou acquirnt il acquiert, be acquires. J'aequerois, T did to acqo^rois, thou dtdtt il acqu^roU^ he did Vous acqn6ruDb> %}e acquire^ irotia acqiterez, you acquire* lis ac(][ut^ient, th^ acquire. Impcrftct. *) Ji; Vous arqM^rioa4, lue did ) j >'|^ troiiS acqueriez, you did S' J ^ lis acqueroieat, they did) Preterit. Nous acquimes, v/e aequirejf rous ^-qaiteBf f^i^u acquired, ila acquireot^ tht^ mequired.. J'acqtiis, J acquired. (h arqui.s, thou acquiredft, il %6qa'Hf he acquired. Future. '~.' J'acqaer-riM} / ihall acquire. See p. 78. IX\ CONDITIOI^At'MOOD. \l^w(i\ier»ui\Sf I should acquire, Se<||)^^78* £< iMPEkATiyE MOOD, ^-. , .-.^1 ^'»H|l*|f i^(i^^^ * 1 2 ... .-.f '■ oe A* aUAMMA.lt OF TUB SUBJUNCTIVE MOODi Preft«at TeoM. %ue SiiraoLAR. PbVAAL. j*ac((uiure, thst /may 1 (iMouf aequirioni, wi m f ^ III Acqiii^ei, tiou mayit ^ IJfoas acqueritc, you may ) '\ II acqui^re, he may } §jiii acqui^eot, they may ( ^ que PretariC; J'acquisie, that t might C glNoutaeqaissionf, wrftfi T i tu acquiiiei, tho. mirftt. < '|lrous acqyissiex, you mi. I \ U acquit, he might ( §]il$ acquisseiit, they might (, ^ Admetti.!, to admit f like mettre, ' INFINITIVE MOOa Alliir, to go. >4 Parti CXPLK8* Present; Past«^ Allanty going. I^"^>,^f^^* « INDICATIVE ifboa Preieot TeoA Si MO UL A A. ^ JP^LVRAt. Je Tais, /^, tu V88, thou goeety ^ tR, he goes. r . J'all&fe, J did go. tu allois, thou didst go, tl aiiuit, i&^ <^Wxo« 3%I!Riy /wM/. ;,^tiL aliaf^ thou wentsty % aUtt, he went. JMrav IshaHgo. tu ifaa> thou shaft ge^ ii ir«i be shall go. ■m Nous allons, «;« ^y* tons allfz, ^oti ^#) ills TOOt| WfV ^9. linperfect. ^ - Nous alwQ^ wf i£». ■">- A GRAMMAR QF TUB .k-.l !%■- ".'.j' jT^n'^f?^:' Future. ; Singular. Plural. Isit Joivrt Je m*a.^8i4rai*, I shall sit do tu t'assieras, thou shall sit do ^ 11 s^assi^ra, he ibati W# dawn Noits nous a«»l^roii8, «;< shall vous Tousassierra, jfou/i^ th. ils s*as8ieront, fiv'jf jh. sit do. • Or, Je m'as$cyerai, according to the l^'ftENcii Academy. CONDITIONAL MOOD. /" Singular. - ^ Flvral. / : ' l^ifdoiUm, votis %i>u8 asisi^rii^, veu sh. ils s'assiervtoHf, M^ A. sit d. ■. * , _ ■ " '• ' {',, J down 1 Jc tr»»a«ffe rois*, / should sit tw f'asirierois, thousho. sit do \\ k'MSSi^ruif, he should sit' do Or, je ra'AMCjeiois, ifrid. ' IMPERATIVE MOODiih ?w^X, SINGULAR. PL tTR At. '-■ 1^-- Assieds.toi, sit thou doturty Afiieyotis-nous /»^VA^^ Plural. que [sit doitm, Je in'aWeye, /may sit down Mous nous asseyiotis, w/Wiay tu t'asseycs, thou mayst sit d il »'asse)^ei rr way sit down, qfuc Je tp'assisse, that I m^*it d tn t*a8sii.i>es, //tou mightest sit i\ s'assit, he might sit down VOU3 vous asseycz. j^ott mmr i. lis s*asseyent, ri5/f/ mmfstt d. . » ^'ai* T-V V; r a^- ■^'.tf'tr' -^r^ £j// down. Nous nous assissions, w^r mi. vous ¥ous assissiez, jrov might ih 8 aMissmt, /i^^ m *it dom, Okll 6ramo)arian8 do not agree about (he orlhogca- phy of tbis verb : it has b«ea itec« c^^njugattd accfliidiiig to thePilEWCH ACADEMir, ■-;\'i ^^ppRCNl^ivCy ia fe*wr{MV« prendre, ' ^s k A IX. ti R^ imm^^i like iffss^iU^fi:' Batta \-l \t Joivit tftte shall mth s'tt. ^. tit do. MY. tit Joitm, i, we sk. yeu sh. !■ ., 9^ ■ ?;. ^kifn sit d. sit doivn. i. w/Wiay ?o« way s. ii^ stt d, r/V down, we mi, fou might rMt dOtlt* fUENCH TONGUE. ■in M r- INFINITIVE MOO0. - x^i^ ^ PRCfivT. ;\ •'. i:-i-,^v;, ■ Pi«T» '■•:■•. :;-K^^v. Battant, beating, \ii>^^ Iftattu, ^Mftn. v» > \ r^i -nr' ^J' w Preterit. Jebattifly J beat, ^' Nous battimet) webea$,^i^ t\\ battis, tlou beatnti llbattit, U beta, .■^^p^^jzk '■::'.-^:r-.'-".k^^'. ... Future. ^"^■ Je batt.rai; / shall hiat. Spee p. 7fL D^ CONDITIONAL MOOD. Jebatt.rois, J thmld beat. Seepw7d. E, ^»^t4?a fous battiteS) jw» betttf «t: > ils battirent, . ih^ beat* ii '^i.h^-el .,■*.*•.:. '« -• SlNGULARii^ i Bats, bem^imeks^ qtt*U batte, let him beat. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Plural. BattonS) kt vs beat^ ; .u 4 battez, beat you, ^'' qu'U» ttatteaty let them beta* ;t'; que SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Pcesent Tense. Singula E. PLimAL. j Je batte, that I may beat, til battes, tboa mayst beat, il batte, ie may beat. Nous battioD«^ we nay beat^ roat battiea:, yeu mnybeat^ is battent, they may beat. I^ue Preterit* iu« battwae, Mof / vtight beatMoM hihmumi^ wtf0%Mi tu battisses^ iboumightst beat, lirouc battisfiea, ^ iiig^^,lr<3f , {it battit, i&r i«j^/6/ beat. Us batttMet^, 1% «»t^#^ir. A GRAMMAR OF THE 'MY k; INFINITIVE MOOD. fioiRE, i0.drini. Participles. Fbmcmt. Pa&t* ■ii V BuTaDt, drinking, . '*>^ (Bu, boit,. i&r drinh* Plukal. ■ Nous buYons, vfe drini, 70US birrcz, you drink, lis boivent, t/tey drink* Imperfect. Je buT-ois, J Md drink* See p. 78% B. (K^vr Je buA) J drank y tu hMhydbou drunkest^ II but,. «« «/r«/ii* PrctBrU. .•^ • 1, ( Nous bumcs, mte drttnk^ vous butoicfi, you drank f its burent. $h*idr09k* Future. ^'^ HC ■ / ^'^v - :-'., Je boUral^ / shall drink. See p. 78. D. I . ^^If v;i? t^ '■'■.-■ '^ ' ■ CONDITIOfJAL MOOD. % 1^ Je bouroi^ I should drink* See p. 78. E.- -^I^''' 1^ IMPERATIVE MOOD. )| \ Singular. PLURALi^*^f^^' '^ BuTODS, /r/ tfi drink i buvt'z, drink you ^J^^ qu'llii! boi««nt, knhtm dml,\ Bois, drink thou ^ ,s.Ji q,VL*i\ boive, let him drink. .SUJBJUNCTIVR MOOa *\ ., Free en t Tense, .jb^ qu«' Singular. "^ <* Plural. Je boive, thai Intdy drink. V^nv^ bu vtons, we may Jrinit tu boJveS) thoumayst drink, vous btifiez, you may Jrinh^ it lioife» la may drink, iU baifeat, they may drink. , Pr«terih r*M mi$Uist drink tous bussiez, you might dmi iJ. IP^' i(r.(^j^ «^^« [Hs b u8i>eot. rlrjr mi^i^/ dn ' qow?^ '*S»i, NoaS h^3SS\ tight drlm light dm BOUILLIR, .^ iotU .;--.. PilESBNT. .t| ,,:;i,i^^&>;tty|^U PaST. "ii^ji'^Jj^ii Bouillant^ hoiling^X^^^ inouilli, boiled, 16^4.:^ ' ^ INDICATIVE MOOD. ^ Pre«cat Tuase. Singular. Plural. UT:. ' ' Je boos, / botl^ ^ '' ^ tu boon, /i6(>« boilest, ^^j jj. Nous bouillons, weboUf'} Tous bouillez, j^o» boih^;...,-^.. il» bouilleot. /i6/.j?i,g.r , _^ " CO\piTlONAL MOOD.. '".lr.„... ";^- Je bouilli-rois, / ^/&of Bows, hoilthou, ^^ qu'll bouilie, let him boil. jtt bouille, that / i^jf ioiV, tu bouilles, thou mayst boilf U bottille, h may boil. Nous bouillions, tve may boif, vous bouilliez, you may boH, ^ i'.s bouUlent, tbey may boil. que Prrterit, Je bouilUssc, that /might boil tu bouilUsses, thou mighttt boil, il bouiliit, he might boil. Xous bouilHfsioiMi^ vous bouiriissiez, lis bouillissitot. "»•»• ir» This verbis seldom used, except Ip!^. th« third ;fpi«o' <^ INFINITIVE MOOD. 'r^, w Y CoNCiuRE, to coHchdt* ,. ^i,' "fcMKi^. . - PlSt. CoDclmnt, aonehiMng: "^ iConclii, concludti, '..t^^ •^:.:.^..-;>. INDICATIVE M005. -^-v Present Tense. .:.,... Singular. pLURit." JccoDcliit, J conclude plons cancinoqp, we mn$lud. ti\coocin», thou conchtdest, Irons conclnei, you concludt^ il coirclat^ bsconcludts, {ils concloemt. /£y ceiif/« Ji ■t' I '}.■ >^1:-. ;;i;.:4W Je concIuS; / concluded^ tn conclo9, /ion conciudedst^ il cooclut, i&^ concluded* "■ . ^ ,y . Fnture. J« conclti-raf, />i&e fM} \ FaENCH TONGUE. I "-fj- '•*.! r.' que Singular. :^i.-,v -^.-'.jv^Plural. . ^ • ' "if'.,^- '* :i*/i^ f conclude •r-iP-^^hMTf^*'*:^- [concludtm. tu cooclHMet, oiS| 1 did pickle. See p. 7 S. B. J-KJi- I Je^iConfit, ? ^1 picMedy tu ^01168, ihmp^kltdit^ {il|nfit, ht^ckUif: Future. Jecoafi.rai, I^hdllpiekk. See page 78. D. Nous coniiiBes, we pickled, Tous confites, jo» ptchled, lis coofirenty /^^ pickled, . ■- . yv- CONDITIONAL MOOD. "'";:y |Je coQ&«roiSy J timid pickle. Sec page 7d. £f.'^*^--^f^?f '^ iSlPERATlVB MOOD. ., SlNGUtAR. ■V . FlukAl* **.-^ . vii^ . i-,: ,- ji'Vif, J *:j^** ^- *.;- -'I- -/^ Mlcoafise, lahimpiMcy coofisez, pickle you. qu'lts caafLSCAUleP^hemphkle, K I'i 9a A OJIAMMAR OF TUiB que SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present Tense. ^' • t:'^ Singular. Plural. Je conAse, that I may pickle. tu confiseS) //&o» mayst pickle il confise, j^^ majr pickfc. Nous confisions, we ma pick. vo^s con, •«; 4*w. < INDICATIVE MOOD. i -V ,*^ iJ " .^^: #^ Singular. Je connois, / know, tu cur rois, thou knowest^ il cjunoit, he knows, >< Pjesent Tense. _, r » ► * '.i Plural. Nous connoissons, we know:, vous coRQdissez, you knowy ils coDDjOissent) they ifltw. Imperfect. Je connoiss-ois, /did know- See page 78* B Je conn us, I knew, tu conn us, ^i&otf knewestf il conaut, he ine^, . Preterit Nous connumes, tioe knew^ vous connutes, you kruWf ils eonnurent, they inevt» Future. Je co&Qoitrai, t thalt know tu connoitms^ thou shalt ktto }\ connoitra. ^ fkali knr "■><^:r-; [ibffw, Nous connoitroDs, we shall Vous connoltrez, ymt sh. kno. eottiioitroiit, they th, km* Mis ^.•.-vl- .U\ \a pick, |p pickle y puili. ^pickle, le might light pic. night pic* 'i ..pi"-*;'- ' we inoWf knonuf kfl9W. m ktunoy \iunoy we shaJi sb. kno. tk,kn»* •f I FRENCft TONGUE. ' io ^ CONDITIONAL MOOD. , f SrNGULAR. • Plural. Je connoUrois, / shou. inottf, tti conno)lrois, thou sh. know. il connoitroit, he sbo. know. Nous connoitrions, we should ?ous coiino?trieZ', you sh{f. kn. ils connoitroimtf they >h. kno» iMPERATIVE MOOD] Singular. ...;.;;■ Plural. Cotinoissotis, iet us knowy 9onnois9i*z, know you y qu'ils cooaoisscat, let thenCk. Gonnois, know tkou, qu'il coBooisse, let him knoiv S-UBJUNCTIVE MOOD. • ' .Present Tense. Singular. . Plural. \knoWf fliio \knoWf [know, Je connoiflie, ihst- J may Nous coonoUsions, we niay vous connoissiez, you may kn. lis cwiVk%mGi\iy they may kno. til conaoisses, thou mayst kn il conDoisse, he may, know. ^ V ;. ^^ Pretcrili qne . ^ [i«ow.j [^khow^ Je e^nusse, that 1 mightiiloxxB ednnuss!ons, we might tu connusses, thou mi. know,\^ous caoitussitiz, you mi. kno. M conn&f, he might knoto. 'ils counossent, thSy mi. knd'u/. -. .-4.- 'rh^ ', •* V •"' ' 'i •*■ ' 5(8^- Conqui:rtr, tc conquer y like aequeriry CoNSENTiR, to consent ^ like sentir, ^ CoNTENiR, to contain like tenir. «'.'<<'-i:'t fei ;«' ' ■+.,: ^ . CONTRED^ZRK^ to gainsayJ This yerb is conjugated like dire^ except 10 the second person. plural, where it makf^s vous coniredisezi ^.^^ ,^^5^^^. '1 '"'-■>■ J>" 'y.iji.l■ ^ /^' GoNTRETiTNiH, to infringe, like venir* ^"$5; .m-^^- INFINITIVE MOOD. "CcNVAiNCRE, /o convince. .'*■ r "^■■'^-•"^'■^'■••' , Participles.. Present. ^mS;^"?^".. Pa«t/ ■'>^'^' :;/'•■ -t CQR79iQq\jiS^aty convinctng^ iCoajnincUf convinced. *' i I Ill ii 100 - t,i.-* ^!i.._''- S t» A GAAMNfAR OF THE J INDICATIVE MOOD. *" Present Tense. * r Singular. \ j^ r* " Ptu»At. ' Je oonvalncs, / cdnvmee^ :NrOts coBvainqiionsi) wt eon. tvt conraincs, thou couvmeest, il con?aioCy he con'^inces. :foin coarain^iex, yu conv. Us convainquenCy they cenvi. .* r,'^ .^:' ■ Imperfect. ''"^^^I'hn'-.^'' ^^ '> ' ^ '- \ytnce [convin/ie^ * Je convainquois, / did eon- Nous containiintons, nve did to ronvainquois, thou didst e toos conrainqoiez, you dhd c, W coovainquoit) he did tonv lis coavainquoient, they did c, "' >^'."r' T.jv! - Preterit. ^ '.j' ,..,;.-; -^ ' . Je convatnqnifl, / eemjiiieed; iVoiit tfoH^inqtiiMef , we eoti' fu convaincj^iis, then M«vf« tout MWiahiqailef, ywnn, il con? aifi^it, he eo n r v eneeS^ U» Mnvfjivqvlreiit) w^y eon. Future. fvinre Je conrruocrai, / shali con^ Noun coaiaincrons, we shll tu coDTaiocras, ibou shuk co i) con? aincra, he shall conv l^tanimcis Voua coovauicrez, you sh' ao. ils convaincront, they sh, co, '" "^CGNDITIO!?^^ mOOa |^ - Singular. ..vK-m-^-i-k <>'i .,:. PtunAi.. [convince ^ [convince, Je eontaincrois, / should N'ous conTaincrions, «m« ,f/j0. til eonvaiocroii, thou sh con von9 conittincnez, you sho. c. il coDvaincroit, hejho cmvMis cofiv^ncrokiat^ they sh, C9. :■■■■, mm^m^mn. Singular. ^''^'^^*' "^ Plural. - iContalnquonS) let us convin, CouTaincs, 4mn;im*ttteu^ Iconvainquez, ^onotficrjotff ^MU^afCB TONQUE. 1 1 101 -^ .' tUBJUNCTIVB Moaa > "*' BreMBt Tttwe. - ^- ^'^^"^ ^ '' Singular. P^v^al. ' ;/ {eonvlnce^ yoni conVAinqnlbtit, w^ ma^ rous conraioaiiiez, yotf m^.jc. ils convaipqu^t, hS^ m. con. que •• •;■ ''5 \ionvinee. Jc canvalnqae, ^/ / m. Preieoit 'Penst. SiNGuX'ARt Plural* Je conds, / sfmfi *" ^ tu couds, /^oti fewest f il coud, hesewi, ' ^ {i1s coRseDtp ihev iffu^ Jecou^-pis, / did lew* Sw p. 78. B. . t^ ^^i ^Vv: Je cousis, / setufd, ^ -^ '^ tu cousis, ihou sewedsty il cousit, i&tf /f w^ ' Li. N0U« |Cf9ll8f||)Btt| <^^ /#W> voui.con8ite9, jrra sewed^ ils cpasirent. #Afj> ;;«;«'•/* :f'*^ Future. Je coud' m, I dali ecw. See p« 7$ . ) V i.\ ^^ 10ft ^ A GRAMMAR OF THE w ^r^ N. CONDITIONAL MOOa St coud.rol8,.//^A/M«v< 8«e p. 78. £. - IMPERATIVE MOOD;^ ^ ^f . . CouiOM| lei ui ieWf Couds, awtboih qp'il cmse, let bim sew. couies, sew yw-, qu'ils content, lt$ $bmM^ fine SUBJUNCnVE MOOD. ^ Present Tensei Singular. Plural. je couse, tbiat I may tew, ta-couiesy tboo mayst sew, il couse^ ht may uw. Nous consionSy nve may sttu^ vout cousiez^ you may sew, ils cousent, they . may eew. i4 ' . . que Je oou^itse, that I might sew, ta cousisses, thou migitst sew^ il Gousit, ht might sew. Preterit; / J Nous cousissions, we might vous €ouBi»Biez,/oii might sevt. Us cousissenty they migkt sew* . INFINITIVE MOOD. CouKiit, toriin* Participles. -iy-l Prrsent. *;^;A- '•.;■■ Past^ Cosvtnt, running; .^- iGouru, run^ .'.-> ^ INDICATIVE MOOD.^ Present Tense. SiKGVLART. Plural; Je COUTS, J run% INous couruaS) we run^ tu cours, thou runnesi„ jvoas courez, you run, il court, he runst [jls cour^tU, tbty run* ■-.■■■' •■■^- ,1.. ..■■-■ %■■> - 'i -• • Imperfect. \» . ^e cour.ois, / lAW nd.' Seje p. 78. B.. .. '-r^-:^i^y;m-¥W- Preterit.. *■ Je couiriis, I ran% tu couroK, thou rtnmifti U^caurut, i^<:fifcc;,ti . Nous CQ!i;u!&cs, we ran^ TOUS courutes, you ran, itscouruient, they ran* FRBNCH TONGUE. IOSl; lU •*"?/'^ ^ Preieot Teaie. SlNOULAIi. ' r 'r * ''■\- PLUKAt. Courons, htmrun^ cosrez, run you y Gouri) run tboui qtt'il coure, /r^ him run que SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. ' CV^. • r-'^^'V Present Tense. n^'^!^., *vmi|w'3* Je coure, /Aa/ / may run^ tu coures, /^o» mayti run, il coure, /&^ may run^ Ntfus couriunSy wetmiyntny . vous eouricz, jrou nuy n/n,' ils coyreut, tkiy may run^ qae ■-f^^\>u 'I;' Je cournsse, thai I might run tu courusses, thou migbtst run il coui 4t, he might run. PreteriL . ^^^r\ yt^^i. ..•,;rw'^^ • Nous ' cou r nssions, wi mighty V' >us courussiez, yeu might r* Us couTusseat, they might rw^ ; V INFINITIVE MOOD.- ,. . ■ ' ■■■ CouTRiR, to-ieoveri^-*-^'-^^'^^.:p'^^ pRESENTi • ; ^"\ PaS^^ CouTrant, covering. (CouTert, covered^ INDICATIVE MOODr ' Pfesent Tense. Singular. > pLimAL'- ^ J« courre, I covers Nous cOuTToas, we cover* .^.C ■'-•■ ?«,: I'k^ tu couTres, thow coverest, il couvre, he covers^ fous courrez, you cover ^ iis couvrent, thy cover, ^ Tmperfect. JecouTf.ois, J did cover, Sctj p. 7^. W' ■J*. i(M A QfUHUfAK Of Tilfi /I 9i'^Qm.A^, Pr^lefif. Plural. J« oouf rik ' ^^"trf. INQtMl a«¥ff*i9et), ^{§^t^id. tu Co. rii, //>ofi ••'fdjf/, [ytius rouf rites, you covered, il couTrit) he (9mi^fi. Jill ctfiitrkeii^ /% c9vereH. Future. Je couTrUrti, Ifkdil^over. ^ n. f I, D. . ^ CONDITIONAL MOOP. % Je couTri^roii, J should et^r. See p. 78. E. ^ ,^ '■ ■"itA.n r. SiNOULAH. jaiPBRATJVE MOQa. t-l ».:. , Couf re, tovtr thouy <|u'il cu«Tf(f| ht him cover, SUBJUNCTlVjS MOOD. Pluhai. CpMvrfPi, /(T/ w cover f lu'ils cuufreut, ^tbemcQV£r, qu« _ '^^VQVLAR, P^UVRAL. Je couTre, M^i/ / mnjr cover^ iNons courrions, we may cov. tu couvres, thou tnayst cover, ? ous cou? ricz, you may covef, ilnouvre, he may cover, ||il8 couvreot} they may cover. -9u« r^'M)!^. Je couTrisse, ihfit f might tu coutrisses, thoumg. cover y i\ couTiU) he might ^eV^Kr, Nous couvrissions, tve might vous tour rmiez, you might ^o. lis iPpvTJPi^sent, /% mi^i6/ to, INFINITirE MOOD. • CroirE) to heUevt, ^■> , *-' Participles. ^■' Present. - '*V.:' Past. Crojantj believing. ^ ,t, jQro,'* ^^^rW. . ■: -^JB;^- .'1* \, fc- J . ,> .^ ^"'., ••'■'5,., ■ ■■•'•■' ' •'jLf INDICATIVE MOOD. Preseoft Tense. "" SiR^v. 1 Plural. ^ Je ciois,. ;/fr />y» r ' "^ ijNous croyons, we ^(tA^i*^, tu crois, Jhoi^.km w/^ * • WiS croy ez, jroji ^/ir*ur, il crolt, Ik hkm^i J^ ;: ' . pi» CJFoiept, % id«%v. i4K ; 1 covered^ c9vercH • r ■ :vf mdj> cov. I may cover ^ nay cover. J believe, tlievej ifVf' nj} FRENCH TOJ^py?, ImpcrCect. Je croy-ols, /SdieReve. See p. 78. B. ' ^' Preterit.'^ « Je crus, I believe J, I^aus cruroes, nue beUeved^ tu cruS) thou believedstf froas crytei, you I'Hevedy il crut, Ar believed: |Ui crurent^ /ijtf/ beHtvid, Future. „ . '^! Je croi.r»i, /7i& AR.-'^> a ^**i "«* ^:*' Plural, i^; v - ' "r ■ .4 .. « ' l€T«^«tt&) Jet m MSev^ v ' v -w .. Crois, believe thou, Icroyez, beKeve you, i|u'il croie, let kimiilikvt» |4**Uf or4M«ot, ^«/ /y6#« ^/iVw. .jjL3t; SUBJUNCTIVE MOOO»iva^na J^Mtetit Tenie. que StVflM^LAR. PLr»»ilS.^^ fiiKV^ «k V^kkf, iha/t i mojf, beSe^tt, ^^ntmr^fio— «(w my 4»- tu croies, thou Wiayit believcy vous croyiex, jr«ti maybelievet i\croie, he mayttiMKUk. < ^Is «Miea^ they may believe^ Mous crtasslon^. we might. 4e< J :. il que \^'■ Tous erttssi-i Freterit.- Je crus, Iirewy tu crus, thou grewestf i\ crut, hegre'ut.. - h ^. f^yW «" Fotiire. ^y^ Nous crames, me grewy 7.QUS crutes, you greto^ aU crurent, they grewi .^'^• Jecroit-rai, J: shall grow. Seep. 78'. D. CONOITIONAL MOOD. > Je croU-jfoiS) I should grow. See p. 78. E. Y.t IMPERATI VB M OOD. ii ; * ,, Singular.. « , G rolfl, /row thctr^ /• i. j|uUl croi#tfiB| let bim- ^^ . ''':■■'•■ • 'i^'- Pcefcnt- Tense, . ' ^ ■ ' i(v'<^"^ Singular. Plvral. Y * Je croissc, that J may grow, ^oixscToissioaSf we may grovrA X ,'ta croisses, tkou mayst growi vous croUsicz, vou i»<5[y/r#«i,[ if* li croisse, iar may girow^. Us croisseot, //Wjf iw^j' groiu. Jueille, gu'il cuell r -r one / lijcHi preterit. >5T» i^ , , / Je crusse, that I might grow \ ^v *" crusses, thou mightst grow iVous^crussions, we might ^m vous crussiez, you might grom #' U cr^tj he might grow. * [ils crusseut, /i^ej mi^^/^ j^roic. |.s^ INFINITIVE MOOD. 1^. •' ,.'" '^"..Jifci' 'f^. ^ , \ - >--. CuBiLLiR, to gather ^ PARTfCIPLBfr. ; '~ti/; lue Si Je cueille, fu cueilles cueille, Mueillisj! ^" Presrnt. CueU-Uat, gatkeringi ^^■«i Past. jCueilliy gtitheved'. s .1 FRENQH TONCUR. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present Tense. Singular. Plural. yV.'>!rv-.j-">- vv. i 'rl^ Je cueille, /gather, tu cucil les, /i{>0u gath(restj il cueille^ be gathers. Nous cueillons, we gather^ 70US cueillez, you gather^ ils cueiileoty /Airjr gather* I,'. ■<, '.V Imperfect. I Je cueill.bis, / Md gather. See p. 78. B* . Preterit. ^ '■' 7.'\ >** Ijecueillis, J gaiheredy Itn cueiliia, /iSsu gatheredsty lil cueiliit, ^r gathered. Noos Ctteillimes, w^ giobered^ V0U8 cueillites, ^«ii gathered, ils cucillirent, //^ry gathered. •'. r'>-^r-^^> ,t.-j- Future. ■^--, " \ |Je cueilleVrai, I shall gather, See p. 78. D« CONDITIONAL. MOOD. |Je cueille-rob) I should gather. See p. 78. £• IMPERATIVE MOOD. Singular. Plural. ' j'\t'i Mi Jueille, gather thou, lu'il cueillt', let him gather. Cueil I OQS, let ui ga ther, cueilleZ) gather you ^ qu'iis cueilient, let th, gather. m , SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. . Present Tense. SiNGULAiti Plural. I*; ' Je cueille, that I may gather, rather^ ' ' ht vroiuwt ^"®'^'®'*> *^°^ maystgati 7.ht LM '"""«> ^' '^^y i-^^"-- Nous cueiliions, we m gather, V ou s cueil liez , you may gather, iis cueilient, tAey isuyi gather. .nv.VH<»> Preterit, t^- I?:'-/ ■J , [gather, that I might m fecueilHsge 111 caeillisses, thou mighfst ga. ^cutillH, he might gather. ' ■-l't--^Mt^.:iS^her. Nou<5 cuelfHsslofis, we might ' 70US cueiUisslez, you m gather, iis cucillisseati they m. gather* imii, ., n ' 1 '^ftn m^ ! 14 lOB ^.^^^ Bech^an't^ Jecaying, lOTlKITIVfi MOOD. J)i6oalK)iR, to decay ^ to deckne* Partici*pl£S. l*AST. iD^chu, decayed. f i INDICATIVE MOOD. . Present Tense. Singular. Plural* Je d^chois, / decay^ iNous dechoyons, we deeajy tii,4iM«i9, 4iou idiisye^fy yous d6<3M^reB, wou duay^ Preterit. Jed6chu8, I decayedt iUHous d^chumes, not decay tdy in dechus, ibouJecayjtdsty J von s de chutes, you decayed y il dechut) ^^ decayed* ^iis d^diureirt, thy decayed. ,.i ' . / J w < » Fotufte. Je dechcr-rat, t tbali dacay, See p. 78. D. ^' ***" COTlVDlTlOTf AL MOOD. '^' ' . >» Je dec]ier«kroi&) J should ^qy. See p. 78. £. * V ■-•i^- que SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present Tense. Singular. Plural. Je dechoie, that I may decay. tu dechoies, thou mayst decay ^ il d^cboicj he may decay* Jils d4choient, ibey may decay * ^fou8 dechoyions, wemayde* vous d^choyiez, you may dec. Je di&di«ii68e, fn^ht'decay. Bee p. 7S. G. 9. De'coutriR} to diuo^mr^ tike couvrtr. ^, .,.;.. JOe'mettre, to remove, like mettre _';!; ! *" Ds^l^iraRNDRA, touHleanty like frendn, i^^,^ ^ ^ DEssiili^uBit w take away , iiifce tgrvir, .,^ .^ ^ ;^ X ;| * Db'tewi*. /ff<^i», iik • ir.. PivIIjH, ' -^; SUBJWCTlrEMOOa lue 'i»:il. i' "' ^'^^^ tocoig ^^g^^d tfter itie P-'^S. Cijr' •waoiia^NH'i (,' ll» v^ A CnAMMAR Of THE DiscoNTEWXJi, to iSsagretf like vstiir, DiScouKiR, fo jconvene^ hke courir. pisiouDRE, to Jhsohof^ like afsoudrt* DiSTRAift*, to dutract, Vike traire. "■i^H ^::[ % '3: r' •>M^ present Ten9«. ' ^^ Singula 1. . Pi/jpeAL. ;v ' INFINITIVE MOOD. : PoAui»> ta ilitfi. J ' Pkksbnt. Pa#i» Bbrmant, tle0pmg, iDormi, j/p//. Ai«!^> V ^^ v| --F^^^ INDICATIVE Mooa f'l^v^-^-yfcf tu dors, thou s/repesff f yi Xous dormonc, we tteep^ His dormeoit, /i^^jr : qii*il dorme, i^ him sleep. Dorroons, let us sleep, dormex, sleep you* qu*ils dorraeot, let them sletp> SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. »: ;■, /*'••*•■■ "y" •*• ■* Present TeBse. ti|«;*".';';Vi^wa^ * *; Plural. edoMe, VJ^i^/lrf/ljr ji^^, tN^oasd'dtinlo^^ wem^Atfi, tu dorities^,. • /^ nu(yi/ #1S»^^ jrou dormiezy you may sleep, il duroie^ ^r|ii|^^i^ [ils dormeot, iif^ im^ /iSn^. que / "'^ T J^terlt. J« d^i94ui^ ^Itm^i^^ Set |^« 78. G. &. x '^ . Pai!^icifls». Ecrirntfy m/riting. Ifcciit, «fW«f«. INBICATIVB MOOD. J'^cris, / nurite, ttt Verity thou wrttestt il ecrit, i&« wriU^ lis 4erivetit» tbej wfht *ai^**^* Iiiip«rfoct. J'^crtf.ois. liHJwtltir. See p. 78. B J*4itinll| Iwfdif* S«e p. 79. C. % ■ , Future;. i'#il'V:.ei**-X JP»dcrUrai, TshiHwrittySm^'rB.W "^ , COHDrmt^t iitbftrf ^^ ^^ JPecrl^rroii^) J should writi^ See p. 78. E. IMPERATIVE MOOD^ SlNGULAlU , PlURAI. EcriTonsy /r/ »x wriVf ^ ^u'it Icrire, /r/ him writi: SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD/ i PreMat . Tense. ' • ifp! qae Sinctular. 'PivtcAV, ^- fl ^ J'ecrife, that J may ^rittf jNoTuicriiioos, ^vemajf «(^r//«^ tu ierWesy /i^» iMy// wri/;, ivouj 66rnrieZ) you may write* ' (k if^cHve* he mmi vtrite. li!i i€f iyisst, ikftnun write* I »> *H^y tnay que Pi^rit J'^firi?.isse| . /i«f / m^/ «trjl^. See p. 79i €(/ ^, 119 A !tt|^MAE^F TRE pt S'Eivr&BMSTT«s, ii 'l i fc rii miiii y like Mrfftvw tv .^.> ,;' KNTRSPiiBimmX) 4r «M^bi;^/ nke frmtdre, •^ Ektrbtbnir, I» etOettgms Hk« Inw*. EnTft'oyviir, ^a ^^ « Mt^ like 0fivrir» Thtt terb It irrtguUr in two tenieft only, «f«. '^^ife*^ ...^****'** '■■■'' . .' .* - J'enTer.rai, / tbaijiend* Bee p. 78. D. •J * ■t ■■■ ' ■ V" ♦ ru " CONmTIONAL MOOD. J'enTer.roiB» / /i^«i^ mii/. See p. 78. £. The other tenses are regular. It*t compoirad rmmjfir^ to send bkck, is lU^ewisciirregvlar only in ^ twa ^onsfaites, yw d§^ 4mtmM TOfTGuiEv Ufais-oit, Qfmu^^n^v) IMdi. See p. 78, B. Ill (a lis, M«» <^/r ' V. J fOttft fiteSy jrotf did^ lis fi peaty #1^^ ^r Jefe-rak 1 shall Jo. Se«p,T8..D; ^ v. CONDtTIONAL MOOD. ^ - IMPERATIVE MOOD/ 'n i »! lij ) TiSn^ do tbmf Qv'Ufassej ht-hUn-do'i- Faisoof, /?/ tfx doiC - ^ ^^ ^ f SiNO:^1.A1l» que' FjLCRAt.. '-'-Ji f if''*'' tu fasses, /^ umph// /JS^r ilfiuse, , he may do. que- Je fisse, thai 1 might do , itn fissea, /i&ofi tiughtst do, pfit) he might do. l^diis faissions, wf may <&^ 70US fissiez, younutydo, lis fasseat, . M^jr may do* rout jQiSicz, you might doy ils fiMent, they might do* INFINITIVE MOOD* .*?-^\ '•*i, * FviR, tojlety Farticiplm** If H aiBSfeNT. fWHi.J^'V- JL.2 ipui, jj;»yr. Past. M ,!■*• H#l A GfUMacAft m^muL !:;i!- INIHCATIVE ttOOD. ^ 81H00LAR. PlvIlaa* t« fuis, tkoujketff Ito«i fu/et, J^Jm, 41ittU» iJr/Mr. lUffttioat, 4%/ir finpeffeet. J#filJfy /j$!^ 8m p. 78. C. % Fttturav , '. » Je/»i*ral» ItMlJSk* 8e8p. 78. D.*- GONDITIONA& MOOtK' Jefni-voif, i^skouldjee. See p. 78. R. • IMPERATIVE MOO0. St3ra#LAB. ^ Fi^mAc; ^oyoQs, Itf utjfetf qu'it^ Inie, Uihimflet, |qu*iU fuient, let them Jfei, lit I&0BJUNCTIVE mood; PreMDt Tense, qae Siif«viAii. PtvRftC. Jefuiey AiOt $ ifmyfiev^ INoQS fujions, wemayJUe^ ta fuies^ thou mtpstjket l^oua fuyiez, jroci mayjee^ W fuie, ir mayjlee, pis fi^ieot, /irifjF mayJUe, que . Preterit. Je fu-issei, $k^ J might fie, See p. 78. G. 3. ¥f^ This Terb is regoUr.: it's irregvlarity falls oolj upw tlte promiaciatlon of the first» second, and tbird person singula, ^ the present tense of the indieatire nood| and of the sefoiiil tierson of the singular in the Imperatite woOd^ Tbtts vie w.fckc aoi pronounce in oiie sjllabtej Jt nuemif TDKdoe. }T5 iaitt r Atte ; iirMr) dios Imlest ; j/j(jtf^, !• hates ; ^wr^ kite Ihoa ; whereM,ta tlf dtlMirtffnsts, tf it |M-onotinced MpArateljr from th^ f<(Hofrlng 1^ mn4 makiM the srflabie by iOelf ; M^ nam Mttmu, we hal»; ««»/ Mtieg^^ yt fn tha tfcoad ^rsoo plural, where Unakei, woiu aunuluienr It doublet - •Iflo the f in All the otker tenets and persons ; as, mau£t^ taatf maw maudUeaiUfje mmuDssois, qaeje maudiete^ Mk'OME #• eUmder. Thii Teib^ii ooejof^ated like dire^ except in tbi» sec«D4i person plaral, where it makes vaae wt^dieeK, ^^l. 4M.iil'*S^i ^x, INFINITIVE MO0D. ^,* ,■..:■., „.v Mentir, to Jki, /■'■y P^AaTlCIPL£8. Present; ..^^ Past; Mentattt^ yy^^ '"'* |Menti, ^/t^^. ^' ' INDICAT#E MOOD. -*•' Pres/}^! Tense. SiNo-utA»#^^ Plural* JemenSj^/^/il^ ^ iNons mentoas, noeUe, t« mens, /^ou Vmt^ • voas nieBtfz« ^o«f Ite^ U meoty i&^ //^#, ^ Us meiiteot, Aey lie. Imperfect. Je melM.ois, I did tu, See-p. 7%f B. - ; -.^ Preterit. Je mtntj^jrtted See p. 78. C. 2. ^^^y ; Future. Je mcftti-ri^!, ,/ ehall He* 6c6 p 78. D. J nadi 'tad. might re. ]ghf readf ibi read* ifl lecoad t doublet secM^^ ■•r---'- lie, t* "in-. FasNCH tongue; i^ CONDITIOKAL MOOlk h nmiii.roif, / eJMJ /Svw 8m fK 7ft. £: IMPfiRHTIVfi MOOa Siy#ULAK. Pi»trtAi. IMeiilOM, let Me lie, iMcMi SetBou^ raimttB, He yie^ Ifv^ilBeitCi let him Us* fiiu*iU meaHnt^ let them Ttek SUBJUNCTIVE MOOa PrtMQt Tcnie. penentey that I mety lie^ INoui mentions, we msy liey% fcu nentfli) thou maytt lie, If ous mentkZy vm may He^ neate^ hemaytte, jils mcbtohty they may tie, !«• Prttflrit. >i < mwUlit9» iken J mhht ^ S«ep. 7l. G. 9. Ss Mk'pibnbrb, I^ mutifht^ Ukt prendmt^si m Ms'vomiR, t» underiidf like £^f>»,vi INBICATIt^ ifeoXI. Presenl TcMe. -,-, SlHftVlAE. PLUlAtV- ■ets, //atf, Hfom iKMf ous, ivefuf,. nets, thoufuttesff Uvu^imm^ you^, \tKty Upue. I^mmmi^ th^ put. netUois, JMdfuti See p. 78. B. Prtterk, oiiibes, tl^peOteit^ N^ Afjkitf;^ ilsAilren^ ^. 1 ■ .1 mm ■■m i> ' .W I ■4r 118 A GRAMMAR OF TUC femou FMture. Je nfCt«nU| IshaUftH. See p^ 7S. D* ^e^^Hi? CONOITIONiWL MOOD. Jo nett-rpify /tb§ulJfMt. See p. 78. £. ' IMPERAtlVE MOOD. 8llf«VLAft. Plurai. IMeHonf, /^ ii//»f, (lettez, fiui youy quMli flietteot, JEr/ them pit, iJe moul ^wa mou Mue * /^ SUBJUNCTIVE MOOIKh ,^ , PriiMiit Tente. v^n*^, ^ue SlMOULAR. Pl«ra|.. . ■i*'^ Jenette, that J ma^ fitty jNoos mettions, we may ft$M^^ ^^^^ il meCtCy hiinajpui, fU»inetteat, thfymayput, que r Preterit. JemlsMy ihatlmighifmf \Sw9mMoi0ym mighty tu missel, Aiou NftfAMr /mt^ i^^' ttiMies, jma might puty iinUf he might put. ^Is miiseiit, they might pvti lOQjaoi .#^ INFINITIVE MOOD. jii. MouiHtx to grind. ^^ V Participles. PftiitftV. . fci, - - — - Moulaot, grinding* V l^NDIC ATI VE MOOD. ^ ■f''^> Prettoi Tease^ SlNOVil^Att. Px/tRAti !"» *'"'*; . \t^ Nous ra<»uloo#» wegrifnc^ vous mottktty ^ ^M llsmottlent, fh^ gtindi tiif iiJUois, / ^Jjjrim^ Sie ^ 78« & ^^ ':^->t..:": Future.. ^■-r^:*-'-^^^ V^u le ffleors, to meurs |1 mfturty h mour. fe mour- 16 01 our- .1 ■ ^e fflouM S M«iirs, < T^ FRENCH TONGUE. lU CONDITIONAL MOOD. i fe Dioud'Toll, 1 tbould grimi. &«« {u 78. £• IMPERATIVE MOOD. Sjxcjulai^. Pluaal. E onions, letutgrmd^^ ^^ i>ti tz, grind ym. riU tnoaleai, kt tbmgr\iuL ^^UBJilNCTIVK MO^.D. i-m^^w . Mue SiNtiDLAR. Plural. be moule, thai J wiay^ /fWJN^ot nnmUoa^, w* may grinds Utt moults, thou mayst grind f poaa moulles, you may grind, li ffluuloi he may grind, yh mottlenty they may grind* l«ie Preterit. * U Bool-usse, that / m{fiS# grind. See p. 78. G. 9* .^ ^ ^^* INFINITIVE MOOD. . ^ Pabticiplbs. Pbesfnt, Past. [oBTant,. dying. (Moif. J^tf t Pr(8««jit f ens«. ' , . .t# Singular. Plural. |e meats, I die^ Nous mojrons, we Mey vous mourt-z, jrot/ //(f^ < .^^ #, ils meureot, they die. >.«,>\ ;^--fi7f1* w i lu meurs, /Aw# . " ■ -^ CONDITIONAL MOOD. I J^^ " fe fflour*rois, / should-die. See p. 78. E. ' " . IMPERATIVE MOOD. ' SlNGULAA, PlvRAI.. M«ars, die tboftf % ^^.vSf'" }mourez, £e you. tmmtti ktlmdu* \iVi.'i\h.miiiax%aty h them dk. M >} {■ .^■ I.' t ^^' I i'l'.' ihS, .i ti^ \ m I A GHAMMAR OF THE V SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD, •^ Presont TMiie. ;- '^ Singular. Plural. M«U8 moarioof , ^^^ f • ;.'-"":^' :?■■>- ■-'■• ■•■■^v.'^i Preterit. . t^g^;':^ V- ;■:.- ^?^^ Jem-US, /moved. See p. 78. C. S« '^^^V^-'^^?'^*-^^^^^ Future. '^ .;". ' ^■:^;' Jc mouf'Tti, / shall move. See p. 78. D. '*' ^*^' '^ V CONDITIONAL MOOa\^\ifer^* Jo mottf .rois, / /;^0tt/(/ iiidv;. See p. 78. £. IMPERATIVE MOOD. SrNGUXiAR. Plural. ,^ , . {MauTons, la us mgme^ M^us, mavtihmy ^v^%^^^^ki him mvf^ -.A-i^ <|fi'iii meurtnt, let them move* may dit. 3. ■^i w movCf move. ;-«Vr1b'--r .!>r-;. FHENCH TONHUE. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. PreMiit Tense. 11^1 H nenrei tkii / My^ mmvt , 3i^ou8 mou Yions, we m^f move, tu meaTea^ thmim^ysi mvyt} . fou" mpotici, wu may move^ il meuTe, he ma^ t^iove, |ls roeuTent, tley fnayi move. qw Preterit. Jem.ii8se, that I p^i^Jl^mfiw* l$ec.p.>7,8. G. 3. •1 INFINITIVE MOOa 5 ■....:> *?iHV V •i^s'I.if PARTICIPLES. ' = >^:x;#||^?f:1^ Present. - Past. Niitsanty beinfhorn, ij^4> ^o*^- V # ; : ^^ INmCATiyE DfOOlX ,*■ . ^. ■ ■ '■. present Ten?p.'t'^^''^«^^''-f^^^#l^*^'^^^* SiVGUtilR. PLURit. * Jeaaiff, lamhoruy i^Jout ncdssons, we are horn ^' tu nais, thou art born ^ -vo^f ntusez, ^021 ar« ^orw, ilnait, he h born. ^- ^l»nMSMnt, they are born* tJtfnuer^fo Je^ai$rWi8, l^fi^ hfit^- S^fl p. fa. 9m ^ .■ .pretiQ^t Je oaqQis, / was horm^ tu naquis, thou wast horn^ |iloaquit) he was bqt^^^ j^ K4)ui aci|iiiiiies, n»e were totn vous oaq likes, you were bom^ lU jpiij^^|rea(| they were born, ^ ■«>,.: move* FutMre. M m^A ,ti ,t. J ,^:i;:-" '■i ^•^ j 1*.- i '"I 'Si :M I r^ i 1 i: m % si.-, v4 ]2« A Gil A MM A R OF TtfE CONDITIONAL AJOOD. * Je n^i.irois^ I ibeuldle hm. See page 78. E, ^ ^; *: / .^ * » IMPERATIVE MOOa Plural. ^fai$son8, ht us h Urn, i»a'i88(Zf h^ott torn qo^ils naissuut, kt ib. be horn. ■^- , Singular. ' y?;.,.'« 1, '; ... ..V i *.-'. . . • , 'V* , ;! ■'* ' ■'■^l' ». ... "• ■ ■.■'' , ' . i:- ,.. '-;;',--• ;.- -i.^ ■• '^'Vi.-* , , ., " ■■ * Nais, ie thou lornj qu'Jl u&is9t>, let him h torn, :'-' SUBJUNCTrVEMOOl^ '''''' ^'^•''" Present Tense. SlKGULAK. pLl!r«AX.« que \_iornf {'^^ Je nats»e, that I may be ff out nalss$M»f , mn maybe ttt daIsscs, ihou may St be born, il oaisse^ he may be born. .,fi'„: f OU8 nais«l^, you may be bom, ils naissent, Aey ms^ be ben. que l_bom. J^ naquissft, that I migit be tu naquisses, th. mtghtst be b. il naquif, he might be bom. Preterit. Nous imqfiis^imtfl, mee migk VOU8 naquissiei, yim mig* bei. lis naquissent, tUy nugbt beb. ,,""■•; OBTENitf />7 obtmtty like tenir. v\ ■ Ofprir, /o ofir^ like cemvrir* • Vi.ivl. Omextre, to omit y \W%mettre, OuTRii) to openy like ^Mivrir. OuiR, to hemr. This verb is very seldom used, except in the past piN ticipic, and before dire ; as, ^e I at out eUre^ I heard it. In this case it is conjugated b^ the he4p of avotr^ through all it^9 tenses. J^nstoid of the terb «««>, we make use of entendre. This Terb il conjugated like naitre, but the two preter| ^^nses, and the past participle, arewadtio^; while rv* ^uiire, it's coss pound, Ihcsgh little used, has thfto all,- iJec Repailre, .. Parcoukxr, to nm ever, like^omcv . i FRENCH TONGUEmV t^PARotTRE to appear. ^^ W3 ■kd^^ This lerb and it's compound are conjugated. like eroUn. "•*'. , ■ . if. .' ^- t , t • '^ Pa&tiii, i9go away^ itke tnentir, VhUvv^NiKf toattain^\ikevenir. ^, INFINITIVE MOOD. Paesbkt. INDlCAtiVE MOOD. - PjietcDt Tense. iiMOVlAR* Plural. PAflTIClPf,X:8. i^ ^.. ^|>:^^::-^^-A Past. ^'\.'r*^'l':> lil^ pleased, j: ^^ .;>*f' '>)-■.■'♦, ■0- ':' •■ft - iX ts pliiif Mm pluuett, . Nous plaisons, nve please, ?ou8 plaisez, ^ou //r^r^; its plaisent) ihey please. lljikiaaii^ IMfkiut, Seep. 78. B. '^"^ 't^^t^^:*!' Jeplos, fpleasedf U plus, th6u pUasedsty ilpiiila btf leased. Future. Je plal-iai, I shall f ease. See p. 7&« D. ).;. :^ Preterit. Nous plumes, nve h rous plutcs, you pleased f lis plurent, they pleased. Ms r ■♦■" •■', ^j'i A CONDITIONAL MOOD. JepIai.roU, I should please- • See p. 78. E. INFINITIVE MOOD. "^^ I. * » S^tKOULAR. phase thou^ '^ piaue, lethimpiease Plural. ^ ' 1 'M I! •It. ♦ ', Pla!';ons, letusple^xse, ^ \A9L\htZy please you y <|U*ils plju&e.it, let them please. j | lU A OD^AitiMAii orr tite: SUEJUNCTIVfi MOOD. ^ Preseiit Tense* v que. Singular. I^luhal. Je pUise, thai I nut^ pteAj^^. |;Nous p(iU8iofM> cMmuijr/Amrr, tu pUises, tkou mayti fkmef f tnisr plaiiies,. pdit may pUatt^, il piftise, i&« jttijr fleMt, (Uf plaiseftl^ ijngr m0jr fleate* l|U« Pi INDICATIVE MOOD. Preieot Tense. SlIfOULAR. Piii/ir*!. J& pttis,*^ /n« ^/*. . i Nous poai»«a»; ^wr cr^ tf#/#, to pcux, ^»' ■ • * ^ PicfrrU. Je pus, / ivas ablet tu pits, Mof/ nuas ahU, \\ put, ^i fvoas ahle^ Nous pcnics, c}a may be alfiiA.conrersalifla ^d in l^etiy* tbcoKtfog' Do 1^6. pr^- nay pleats, t nigh ph. mgttptwt ■ Vv' I are ahUy ndtog' «> FKEHCHTONG©ft-A , 1 Jepour.rai) 1 shall Udbli% See |h 7^\ IX M6^ :.;^ »'/■ CHXHWWTIO^V^L MOOD. ( ^ , JepoiiT^ois, Ishwtdhfu^s 'See pi 78. E^'^^^!^! • The IMPBRATI^B MO01}t|» wauUiig^ ^ S^lJBJUNCTIfVE MOOi). ''* * Preaewt Tease. ,.^ a -^ ' * je puisse, /Aa^ /m^jp he able, U pu isses , thou ma^ hi ahle-y ii puiss., he may be abit, ■ rfe#*^<;i :4mmu ripeterit. je; Iji^sse, J^*rt/^'7'«(g/j/ ^e able (u pusses, /ifett mightst be- able i\\My he might b.e able: Nous ptrHStuTu, rjfg may be ^fous puwuezvjvou wtfjf ^^r abUt Us ptHsAcnt, //w^' Wijj be able, 'v:^x ■ ■■ ':^^■^■• . :. :os^;:e^ :^? [^^^« .Vous pq^siAD^,, «e ptigh( bpi .ons pussK'7., ^£>« might be a. ila, ]iU89e|it, ^tbey^might be ab^ Xk^'dimm, Uh^Jmrn^ -f.'. ^^ ./? Thi»^VQrTb«ij|. coflingmia^ like tliref ex^e^t; in ilie J&rqnii person plura! ^ v?:herp itj DiaJMJS. vtiMS ^t^se^, h . IWFINITFV^ MOOD. t |i Pieaant, /ai%; |Pris, /j^ff/i; "^ ^-: ■: PNDTCATIVE MOOiJ. ^* Present Tei}|^. SiKGULAif. **;* Plural. le prends, I take ^ Itu prendSj thou talust^ il preDd, he takes* j^ous pref\ons, wr/ tah, rous prencz, yon take y (IsprenneBt) iheyjt^^ Imperfecf. Jepre-qoh) i^ 4^ 14^^ Sep f» 7B. B; • ■■ . ■ ; • Preterit/'- •' ^''■'' •■ Jepris, /tooli, l|u pris, r/^oti tooieetp [ii prit, i^ /o •'^%>%;.>:%:>- INFINtTlVE- MOOD. . ^"" f»?r«.f;-'.^;: ■ '' ;' ';^:-4'«'- P H ^' V o 1 R , /.-> forcjee. * Participles. ^ -'it. ■■',^.., PitRSENT, ,^^:-;ri.. ^ Past. VtQ^oy^i^ fiteteeing.\^^^ fl'nevu, foreseen. .5&^^ ^ INDICATIVK MOOD. ^?4 Present Teuse. SiiiGULAR. Plural. J {• pre vols, J foretee^ VVour p eroi'ons, 'tut foretu^ ui piA^rois, ihptt fprtitest^ »ous pravoyez, you foresee^ ji picvgif, Aff jw«^«. V jlis pre/oient, /)&fj>/*-. ^ CONDITfOffAi. MOOB. I i^ Jf prerolroiSy I thwMfarati. See p. 78. E. -iv^^;:^ 'v^ IMPERATIVE MOOD. r SiHouLAm. Plural* ^ P*ei y oe«, Af/ u/ foretee. qu^il pr^f oie, ^/ hm foresee preroy est , foresee you , quails prevalent, /r^ tbemfo. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD: Present Tense. SiNGULAi.. Plural. Q«e , [/^ Je pr^voie, that I may fore- tn pretoios, tbimmayst foresee, H pr^foie, bt may foresee. • Nons pr^Toyions, we may vou» pr^Tuyiez, you may fo. ilt pr^ruieut, Huy may fir»\ H V • 1 ;! ■ •' que Preterit. JepreT-isse, that I mighf foresee. See p» 78* 6. 2, PitX)MKTTRE, toprauise, like rtirtVy^. , Provenir, toj^f'oceedy Mkt venir, S£ R A'ssEoiR, /9 JiV 4/o4&f} «^4i«ff} like asseoir, KecouriA, /o Atfvr rteoufse, like cour'tr. KecoUTrlr, /o fov^i* tfj-^'n, iik« rouvrir. Kecu'eillir, to reap ^ like cuelUir. Kkmettre, to replace^ i\\LQ mettre, "i^-'''k: 'I '•b''*:***-:'**^*^ '• Repaitre, tofeed, '^v . This Tcrb is conjugated like «fl;/r(f, except in the two prefer tenses, aud tti the past participle^ vi'hereia it iU4kee Jc repus, ..-t ..' Je repusse^ . .. . repu, . •»:-^»' ie"..t INFINITIVE Repen^ir (Se), MOOD. to rei}ant. Pre:^ent. PARTiflPJ.Es. li ' I 'AST. SeRei'.entaut, repenting. iRepcnti, repented. t \ ffl^Hffi ,-^ '; ' !< !, I, 'll lit; tm A C^^AM^AR Oir TtE J.. '^-y ■ PrewntTense;. -^^V i»*:5^^i Singular. .- » Plural, i Je rae repens^ / recent, Nou» nous nepentofis, wg re- tu te repene, thotLrtpentgiii ^(MM- WMifPepeotez, jfo« r^^. ilse repent, ht^rtpent*-* hi%n^w^«B^imity t^fepenti Imperffict. '^ Je m.^W^q^tais>' / ^St*^ r//<»»/. See p/ rSi Bt , ^'^■■■, ^iiW' »V»v _ . ■ *> ■ . ..•.s*- VJ'^l*./:^ •■ |*i0Y^' Je me repen.tis, t re^ttfed, See,p> 78^ C. K Future. .1^ IQ9 ropenti.rai, I shall rejfi^r^,: See p. 78; Di Jv nip repe&H).Tois, I^thu/H'tttftetOi S^t^p.TS.Wt IMKERATIV^.AIQQD, ::>^^^^^^ # Singular., n et),en8 . < oi , refient ibou) qu*h se re|»eote, iethim re^^ PluivA^* ^p(;ntt>ns.nous, /#/ w r^w/, repeQte».rou0,^ rtpent you, |m»il{! se repenteijt, &/ /i&w w. " SUBJONCTrVE MOOD. I ^%v^;. ■ ; -a^*^. . Present Tease.; • - •- • • SiNGULAR..\^,r; . ■_ ,iAi,fA^ Plural. que \peni, Je me repents* iftat fmay rei> til te rcpeMtes, thou may st rtp ii se repente, he mays^eptni. \may repent, NoHS notts repenifiouS; vte rotts V0U9 repenliez, you tnqy^ r»s se- raponteiiCi they may re! que Je me repentissn. PreterH. I^tmght r^ptM* See n, 78, G. 2* RE^J^i^HlkRfcf . ff^^he again i like prendre, ? Hfi^V&'^lR} ^ip,re^uestf ii)Lp' acqusrir. 1* «i tis, we rc' , you rep* i^fepenfi M'. •yS^lO ^$i^ *l*' 3^ Bi tnt youy 'lei tlmrt. lay repent^ loiis^ 'Oft rmyf re> iNPiNinrivjes-Mooo. iNDICAtiVE M6'6a ti r^itQS, thk^/^^lwtif tout r6to1VM', Ite nsohey ^;*|'jl': il -it* v*^-S>»T>'^ JentettK^ur/ Im^d. Mp,ft. Ct^ ; V coN0iTtwrAt Mooa SUBJtJmjT^tfi AlOOP. . > PcMCQt TcDie. ''""^ H resolve, h may r««^ o| ' <' ; ; INDICATIVE MOOD,', Pieteot Tense. ?» , SiifouLAB. Plural Je ris, / iSng^i^t JNout rions, tM Anvii^i turiSy Mott /(0»^i&«^/, - '^^'^-^^^Tous riez, you laugS^ ilrit, ii laughs.- Us rient, tbeyiaugh. •>T , f ' -; :; .. i .i,..f Imperfect. Je^isli) JIdidJaugb, -8m p. 78. B. ;tj. t» lis, hAm lutgbedri^ tlfky A« laughtd. Pfeterit. ^ Noil* rfinetf, «w hughedy vous ritcH, jroa laughedt lis I treat, /i&#y laughed. !"M. ^ J ' rf v «' Future. lefl.iiRi, leiaUlaugh. See p^ 78. D. ;., "fcoNDITIONAL MOOD. Je ri-rois, / ehoitld lat^. See p. 7&. JB. IMPERATIVE MOOD. ^^^*^ ^ SiKODLAR. Plural. . .• , IRions, Z^ «x htugJ^^ M^^ii^adm^ Vtie^^ laugh you, qu'tl ric^ Ui him laugk, . . IqufUs r^ot, i^f /Ann /f»^^. ,,;!.;: .:;^HI que SUBJUNCTfVfi MOOD. iIHGULAR. . . , vSi^RAtc v'e RQ, ,f ifMry Axi;^ 1?"! INousirtioiis y.'^inay ttiries, thounutyjiltiafigif UatkB t^t^i J^mdy iIHe, ^^ fy?i|^.^aHsrA •.* ■■«;- ih risat^ (k^ ikdljf i '! l!i rStwoVLAE. ' ?^*¥v^ Plural. llrtt, iimqkki^. fttiVkmt, Aiy mislay fh. IMFIDITIVr liOOO. RMm'ft, to hr^. IHDICATJtrg JijG|01». • jPffCMOt T«IIM. U ronpc, it krmh. itt NNBpeot) 1% #rrail. HI ii< Jeromp.ols, Jdulireai» 9m p« 78. B* j »," • « « ■ ' Futurt. Je romp-ral, lihallireok. i$^p. 78. D. COJ^DITIONAL MOOD. Jeromp.roi8y I ^^^itU hr^^k, 3•V;p^7^. ^. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Singula fi. P»LwitAL. 1 Rom pons, Jep f* krff^y RpmiM, ^eak tkov* rora pez, BreaJt you^ qH%rompe^ litl^tfiif^t J^u'iis ^ompeoJ,i^p/iii5!^^^^*l. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. FRBNCH TONGUE. 131 3ae ' -' Preterit. ■■*" t romp-Use^ thai I might irtak* Sm p. 78* G. .2. »» ,\ ♦' \ ' f mFlKflTIVE MOOD. Savoik, to iin$w, <' '' - ■ Pa&ticiples. PRBSCIIT. PaIT. A Sachant, J^itowmg* "-f s; I !n«a/0. '^ ^INDICATIVE MOOD. **^ ' PffeMBt Teote. SIN0V4.AA. ^ Plural. Je sais, / hmwy tn sais, thou inowest^ V* iliait) ktJiiow*. ,:tm Nous Sat OD8, wi iwWf rous Mf ec, you inow, tia satcBt, y% Mcto. # - '^ ' Imperfect. •■1^ •w Jeiui, limwy ttt lui, /i^cu knetvtti, it tit, ^# i»tf• Preterit. Noss tnmeS) Koe'inew^ 70US Sutef^ jTOK ineto, i\» »ur»'fu, thej knew, . • vA!A.tC%^,#. lnov», t\x susses^ //^oii migStsi im»f fi>4t suniet, jtm mi^^/ >*««>, il fidlj hcmgl^know, pts^vtscat, they might hum. SscouitiH-, /« mecmtTj like Mi«#^* ^fl^' ii'fi : i.£:J^ y^r xrr^, to Mrs, Uhrl^ l^fJ^HiM lAool f»cdtid jp^ia siiigtiar, fii\. . $ SouT^NiR, t(nMppgrt, \\\^tem* '- -r S£ So VVEKI&9 ^» remember y lik« SUFFIRI^ . fp /l^tf. i,. Thif verb is cpnjogatei) M1k« Rre, eie^t in two preter tenses, sad the paH participle^ where is iiHikeJi Jfir ^1^^ _ • » 3* «^' ^ ... ■'Sf^: =*^ir r.. V* *1*, ,Jt('> '« !■?»' : CS *i' p^FINlf l\f B MOOD. jf .;:;^f-.--*^ >' Hf. 4- '•:'' 1 ;7»p^i ..u v-.^ nay Inonu. tay htoiUf ly know* ^; ■ ■' .' ■ Igbi iktWi ighi know* ::— ,■>-' • '' . id jpersld 1^ '^•V ^ .i-t?'^ ^* ro preter fe tuffs*'* fmsm to'mvt. >jr: S} l^' ■ ■.»■<' -.x^^ ^r; Present .Teiis*. ^m,; I i^M. Jestns^ Ifoiiow, .tuta piSf chin BnUoaSy we/oUow, vons suifac, ydu follow^ Us suireat, iheyj'ollo'm. il suit, befolUmt. < ^' ^ Jhraterlt. ^ . J« 8uif^U| IfoUowid, S^ p. 78. C. S» >v^ Jesnif.rai, JsballfiUom* See p. 78. D. Jesttiv.Fois T should foUotv, -See p. 78. E. • .<;«.. ~ \ ».*"' rt V f IMi^BRATlVE MOOD. 5ui?oos, Ut us follow f suivez, follonji) youy w* Suis, follow ihoUi qu'il sui?e, let htm follow. r{u'ils suivBut, let them fqllotu. \ qtie . SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Preset}^ T^pse. Je 8uive, /A^i/ / may follow ^ tu suives, thou maystfolkfw, il suite, he may follow. Nous suivons, we mayfoUaWt ro«8 Srtiviez, you mayfollowt ils suiFene, /% jnayfoHow, que . . - Pi^etcrit. ' ■ }e »u*t*4«», Mil/ 1 might follow. S«e p. 78. G. 2. SuRPRB]»DRE, /o turprU^i like ^endu* SuRSEOiR, to adjourn^ like) ^^^*^* ' SuRVENIR, /6 rowtf «^dft, ftk#^'/««r. ,; '^; Si/RfitRE, to survive i ii}/ie vitnt. ■J. ,. -' TAtRi,, (SEf hholffihi^^^^: This terb is eonjugnted like plain. 'f/,r A GRAf^lMAR OF THB ■'^'W:.^ 4(^-*- II i: hi, :^ %. ''"■■ PtT:sEVT*^- ,;.i>*tL ■-^*Mk^^>' Past* .- "3^ iJ* tu I i INDICATIVE MOOD. Singular. Plurai* ^e fiens, I hold ^ ^^ Nous tenons, we hoU/^ t u t ien s , /i&©« hblJetfy ' ^' •** U tient) he holds. vou s (enez^ jtom i^oA/.. lis tien&«nt, they hold* linpcrfticf. * ^ -«v t^ten.o}?, Ididhbld, See ])« 78. B« <^ '^^^^- Preterit. -- ^^^--^^^^^^^^'^^^^ tu tittfiy thou heldetii V Mtiut, khfldf ■MA' Now ciniiiei, vifi heldf . ^^ TOtti tf oteii; ■* you ield, i ' ^ ih tiorfiit^ tley htld» Piitore* «7i}|1eD(3»raf, I shall hold- See p. 7$^ IX ;^' CONDITIONAL MOOD. .;; vJe tiend-roiF, J should hold. See p. f8, B.^^j^f gfA- ^|:^,^: :;-.. IMPERATIVE^ MOOD. ';i Mh-^ '"^ mi Jatr tu tn iUraJ '4 \^ ^trai *-t ;i^^': • :, Tien 9, hold fhou. 4u'il iienn^y iSrf him hold. TCDOOS, /tf/ U^ W- : • •#-■ '. ■^' «* ^if IN i^i!ft ■«; way fjoUf \may hold^ ^JUBNCH TOKGUBr quje SlVOULAE. PreemVik\ fous trayez, jiott f?j;V Id$ulflmli» See p. 78. S> • ' IMPERATIVE MOOD. ^ ; SiirGVtAft. Plural. '^ "- r:m: ■: '■' ' ''^ ■: ;;^'^-^; TrayOUS, /If/ ttJ m'iiX^ ffais, wi/i /i5o», *-:i^f Bi trayez, milkyou^rf-i ^'il traye, Ut himmfi," qq'ils trayeut, let^hem mM/^ '^ ., ,, SUBJUNCTIVB M0( que Jet ray e, that $ -my tui .J € traye?, thou nktytTm^,' IsilMl Crayife,*" yotf «jy milk, Vh hftfti' 'y mi\ Ik, llrayoQS, tm-may N...2 ila |^ffl|iii|t) they- m^y milk. I '"5 ( [ ., *i?!, ii: 5, .( V f 1 1, :(' III . , ^_^.* '' >.- 1*ail<-„-'ri^i4;:A: v^-ijv r M li h •• .,^. 'Imrtrfecf. -..,. ■.■■ Je tramilKiiSi. JSdit^t, fk« p. 78. E : \|; 7lS^s 'fi \ ••■■ill"'' ,*v*. )■•■'*''• Jfe Ircfsaillwis, 1 0arttd, Sm p. f 8» C. 2. ' ^ * ? ;.;. V.,. .-Future. ~%: - ■' .. •• •■ . ■ , ;, «■.*'' i ' '•''*' Ja tp«9ialtli-rai, tdqU start. Sccjp, 78. JSf ;^ * Je tfeMallli.rois, I should start. Seep. 79. K. ... ^. ^, ■ ... <■ . , . . ■ I J J :?^ The IMPERATIVE M0# ii wantiog. *; t ^ ^1^ m^B J UNCH V E MOOD. ^^ ■.::.;>: ^,w,;..- .at^, Piewnt Tense. ?.^...^..fe.iI^^«r^ r-"- v I' I' ill Je trcssaillcflPil-^jjfiiy\f?»r/, Xcus itrcssallUonf, if* maf Jl (rtssaillc, ^i^^^h^M^. lils tressaillcot, tiej maj starh iI«.Up«s %ji^iwi4htmFf, Saep. 76«i4^. t. i;.fri;.^/~ ^ .,^,. ■ ""^ we sfartf fou starts )ey start* .;'■' ' " .''.kitSLj^' 'itf lis t,*'^;i»AV* «\ r ■8^1 Is, ivt tnaf I i»»a may tt >" >" '.4" -'"'-■■' . tk\M Teib !• cjnjttgjttcd tiko MMnifr^ ; but it b s«{* !•« iH«d te th» iiiigiit»r of the^piiinit teait of the ai4i- P»»i»jiT, '*'-**^'-^ Past. . .■; v ' Yllaaty hthigwoHh* ' lVa!», been wortik •-??>;•;. ■tl, : '.a** lNI>ICAtlVE MOpDi v?^ SiwooLAiir""' PLtrftlL. ' '. / Je Ta^ux, / am tiforti, - ^ tHous votoot, «Mr an vrerti^ ttt fauXy f^pM art. tuartSf voub valez, yi^ti art worthy \ it vaut, he U 'worth, „^,^ pts vftlnl^ d^ arc mtortk, > ■.■*-»A "'» --. ^•. ^-A, ?■■• i;;.*^- T-""^ -^"^ InipeHiect., v ^ le?al«oi8, Iwoiwortk* Setp. TS.JI^^f; ,; i^ ., -^ " Pw^erlt^-" -" ,...., . .' Jl Yi^l.lis^ / iMt worth. 8e« p, 7$. C. 3.^ ,...„^...._^^^;.^ ITuture. ,^ ^ ■ Jc Taud-iai, / ehall he mf&rfL Sw -p. 78; H^ * * * ■ ' '-.":> CONDITIONAL M0OD.^^'T^^# Jd Taud«rois, / j^otf/^ ^r «vortfr. See p. 78. E. j . ■" ~-^^^^'^^ IMPERATIVJI MQOD/-^- ^^^^g^ Singular, .,,.:•,•'>'->'■. Pluiial. :'>^1^^ ' -^ jValons, letttehe niHtrihf ▼akz, he you 'W$rih, qn^lli vi'iWeutf let them £(.«m^ fi Yauz, he thorn worthy qo'ii Tailte» let him he worth, • JJiUBJUNCTlVH: Mooa^i r*-' [^ ^1.. que «^>', ■ ■_ ■ Preterit, v v - ''^4;, .^j^. ■ v».: . ^ / J« YiU.iisse^>fd27m(f^/if worth, S^c p. ^3^ U. 3*^Vv, i I Je VftNiK, /o fom«. -V * This verb is conjugated like tenir. See p. i^^ V^Tin, fi/clotlfey \lk4 revetir, ... INFINIT4VE MOOD, r ^ PAftTlClPLSS. • ^ - > 'V?»c> Present. Past. Yifanl, /»w«^. -^ jV^cu, /; , • Je Tir-oiS) JiidUve, See p. 78. B. ' ?> ' ' Preterit. (' •:i* Noas vecQiBM, fiT.roi»9 1 should live. Seep. /8. E. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Singular. Pi.T}ivAL. Viyons, let us Jive, . '¥iBy livethou^ -^ ' ftrea, live you^ ' ' ^'" ; i«(u,'il f ive, Ut^.^im live* qa% viveot, kt them Tm* . ■ :i SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD, ^itjj^ilf ^'Vl--"^ ^^^i'^v'r'^'^e^ Tease. V- ^-^ - . ;; .;' 'iwr ■ ' \^ ^^i#!ij;i^A». ^r 't ■ . Pl<^ra.l. tu vi^es^ mmnti^ltm^ T^ttS l^ivion*, we may iivtj vott« rivieZy ^«tf may Itve^ ;it vkftit, r% my live. ( St' *'^-' ne Singular. Preterit; Pl vm a u , .^ ; ^ jfl f^euiae, /JM /'might RmfJfHmtt t^aiflGqs, ««» mt^^ X tu vecusses, <((o» iiii^Mfl irtw jtous t^us»Ici, ycu might ft. .■''jfe»..-v<* ICoit) Usee* K'?-'i^ This terb li^ eoajvgstid ' ^HkifrS^r^ eicepf in the fvi tnre, where it- iMilifle yinm>«ri^l aB4 in tt« cenditional^ ,'i .i.'f .'\ * ^^ PreM&t Tifttse;' ' ■ '' r^'^' Nous voiilons, we 0f0 ivilling4 ♦X)us Toule^, j^^^ w*^^« Je f€ux, / am wUihg, to ?euTj /^tf ^r^ wiilingj ilTCiit, Ikismiim, V *? ' ',>/*i .i«*U*n ■ wm^ Jb TouKait, / mat ,wUlinjr. See.p. 78; 11; I ^ v^u^i*^ ^i\;v; Je Toul.«», .'/ 4t>tf/ mWms* Sw p, 78. C. f..' ' ?i/ J6 vou9rr^, JMa^m^. Sec p; T^^i tJ. ^ " eONPITlONAL MOO JiJ vottdr.roij, /fbmliifiWfl^F, See|^#^fi. •*;>.:• ,^v^^-^2MPJERAtIV«,M#MEfe V^ 5i£iaiJI^B<» Plb Vcuille, icthduvHmgt ^'t . ' ,i . veull^ is$Mfi^fe "ff^l I \\ 1^;. I t! ^11 I' ?r ■ :■< ' ir ^ ; \"t !i !■ lifl t I' '! lil I .!*»> r I! A ontiii(|Aii 01^ ^R -t 4(P.# SiVOULAft. ..'f Pl»UftAL« J> rouillt, thui J MMy i# ic^iTv In V«ttiUe», tkmt m^t- be mnU U TeuUle, ht may ht nvilltnj^. [WfAWfj f#OU« tOullOUf, W« Mif voos iroyUev, ytn mi^ bt ml\ J7f: que .*-^ ■ .e QiDiler ihe juriftdictlon of a cuutt ; ^ when it ligoifies to go 4>»t agatii> it is irregular, and cc jugated like mentir» ^- fiRAiRE, to bray : (ftis Terb Is uised onljr'id (lia folloWH ing teoses, il brahy il brairdf ilirairoii, '^ - ; .fft*^ ; Bruirb, <0 bktt» : this ?eib 48 used «n1y in theMJ nitife, and id the third person ti^ i\ke Imperftfet tens«, in^ dic«tir« mood, both singular and plural, il bruyoitj ilt\ Jruyoient ; as, UsJvsfUs ^(ijro/^, tbe'Wnds bln^tettd. ^ ^ruyant, baviilg both genders and numbfers, is byooj mOMS the par^ciple el 4hii. v^^erb, bat ^a adjectife : Vt\ iiujhs br^f^fotUt^^ hluhi^ting wa^ * >. >v;w^ ,. '^'< Oiio&it I^^M^ this t^rh isliardly usea, bot in Infinitive ar^ed|;ai)kd i^ the fWiticiple past, chu» lastMdl ^ tlie f j ^^^fet g ^jutt we foriherly made use of cheA '^^^^^^S^K^^^^'^^^f^^-i^^^'^'P^^^^^^^ niirrtQers of speak/ i»a» ^«P^'»M|cl«Mr,.. ' , ^ ' >V. ^iFAi H.I m /tf 4^^ tp zf^imjm$:tw> wfii< : MtU ▼ dh f in the imperf«cc a^ {yvHetil tft»ii«t, bptli fteftpltf, ^ plural,, tnt ^s kmr\ dyiMry mff^ hn^ im warn* m^f ^ |«9^,onl|r,|pi,tfci9tliMM>ltiv«^ mood ; at,.H»» n4' A«/n.^ tMii^fetipmosi. lcH»iR, /• /;// oui^to'chtim^ : this Teyb is Gon|pg»t«A' ^ idtck9frysw pagt l(^ ; Nt^U^ i« only uiedki the tiblfdr. >* IIOB sinfular of the iodicfttivt mood, ptwent ttmM^ Uir '- pvelCKit and^ fatQiT* teiuM.of the laid nood^ n the ^^ n4ilioiuil| in th« pretetii tense of t^c subjunctive uood, : PATtiapie, pMt, and tbfi pntticiplie of the pfesent, Mn\tmi^wMeant» ihioxiZt to he batci>ed : ibis verb is used - only U thA ird pGfion sitiKiila^ and plnml of U|e preaeni tens<», i«dl« (^^ Uire mood, il ielot, Us edosent 1 in the fntnte, iV ifhtrt^ v/ ^ echr'rmt $ in the conditional, U eclorroitf its eihr* ^i: ; in the present tenve, ttibinnctivc mood^i^^jr^ Mr '; and intbe pnttieipie piiSt^ wherdnril mskM Sckt* ^ ', verb, m ies' compound ftente», h^ c;ei^^tted witli' : uxiliar^ yerb Art ; and i« iMAjef lOHia nJWUj ense, spea^k^u&of our lbiMi|;M%^*dfli«INi«^l to be discovered) after having, b fifomei • Ji-, .. ^^■'!i '■( , 'I I ;k ';;! ^f ■ u f t ft 'I^HHSIS *'S< >m^,^^. i ' m II m A gHammar of^ tne fiiB ; M, Iff dNiiim Morroni ^fgm j^mr j bli dciigai wMl one day com« to ilf ht. Kmovvoir, to ilir 1^ $»m§ve: IMS tcrh.li coiiJi« k ^^■ r, filed like fN«MWr ; It U imnI %«tli la « proper and flga. raClte iriiie ; tii the ilrit, H li laid af the most lubtUe parti of the body, ni htMiiouri, vapoari, btaod, kc, ai) /# toUH fmiut Its vnfeurt^ th« lun itlri up the ?tt|iouii ; In the second It Is api>ltcd to whatatar may raaia a aia* tioQ, or eiclte a plssloB^^ftc. an, r'#// un 'homme ^m rini nUmtut^ he is a man whom aoiMag movas. Thk ? erb Is likaarlsa itted hi a reflactlvo sttose ; as, il t^imut tmegnmdi ttmfitt^ there arose a ffraat Ceinp«'«it. nttCLonsK, #• tnchitf is coajUfUad Ilka tkrrtf uA «Md In the same tcnsai. 8'RN«ui^tE, lo msuif to fiUtHv r this tarb Is aaaja^ lated llkattiivr^ in all it's taases and m««di, bol ussd onlv in fha third person iliifalar and plural. t^AiLLiR, /oy2ii/: this ferb is conjugated to the piiiMt teasa, indicalive mood, je faux^ tu faun, U faut, mw faUhniy voui faiiltn, ils faillent.j !■ the prettrit teoM ef the same ihabd, jt fmiHs^ ke, and In tha participle sc. ti^/mUmt i Uf-arriver h jtmr fuHlanty to arrira at thi clasv of tha day. This ferb i« neldom used ; however, we atlil roak« ase of the past participle ; as, s'il a fiillh '3\ fdHt quHl foit punt $ If lie have dona amis, he luaitt hs paahilicd. Wa likewitic say in conversation, 7r c«ftr sr fauty my heart falls inc.a Falloir 6omf timed signift^^w td want, to come short,! to be far from ; as, i/ trn fauf beaucoupy there wants .• great deal of ir, it cume» far ^hort of it : in this sea8oit[ is preceded by />n, \\m\ oonjugb It tMJt^ la, btti umA {/ faut. M»t Ittit teoit vf rrlvt at tin i/ 4 /»i//^ ^ lie ittttvt bt 1,M ' Ft ftin, /o //Wi^ ; fVii ftrb ii iiftd In the infinUlrfi mood oiity io this )«hrAiie, sant cou6 ffrir, nitkoiit strik.* Irrga bluir. The pn.it \mtUci{)W,Jiruy t» itlll n»t:il in (ho two following oxpiffthioiiii, ft|>eakiiig iit jcit ; ii est feru tonfre un tel ; he if indii posed toward luch a perioo ; H utferu di sHtefttnmt ; ho ii smitten vritli this woman. Krirb, /o/o* ' this Ycrb is used only in the three per. lonn f>int:iilar ot the prencnt tense, indicatire mood, jefrU, tttfrif^ V frit f in the future tenso ttingutar and plural, j« hirui, Sic. in the conditional, bir^rular and plural, ji /Who//, ^c. In tho hiipcratifo mooit, second person sia* giilur, /riV ; and in thu pas^t participle, /ri«. ftK^iR^ to Hi : this terb U quite obsolete, even in the intiiiitif ti mood ; however, we still say, git, now ^itsonsy Vl^'gintttty il gistoit : as*, tout git en eeia ; the whole bubiiiuis iie« l»«>'» the ftjst s)ii.t.>te, is irre^iu ;r, and conjugated like t bt warning Jjair/,v . b„t ^^hen it sit^nifies to share or to divide ^ it takes ^J^y^',i»n acute accent upon tlie tirst syhabte, is rcgu^fi, conjii. Ituvo pt fXi' Med lilii' punir^ and scarcely used, but in a fd^ expres. Hpeaking of an estate, money, &c. rs, repartir tine : • 1 ■■•1 , ij'l ■■F'ii •I!' iff ' ■' I'i '4 :|j 1 ^11 ! \jA\:. 1 i 1 1 '} ]|'|HI 11 Iw iO'^B yill 'win V'^Bim'aH MODS V>nMe d argent f to divide a sum of money "^^ :m [; I'l US A GRAMMAR OF TdK REStoRTit, SCO AH^oPtiAi pag'^ 143. ^AlLi.iK : whtr» this verb 8iiiiii^i'>. to gntt on/, U is rf. ffu!.ir, am) ccnji)y»t:-(l like /imi/- ; but Hiicn it klg'Mfics Hojuf culy it i» iir*-i'nlar, Huiit> lliv pait ixutiriptt;, and n UiQii ujily iu (ho iuriiiitivi' tnood, aisd iu tliu third pi'r^ou of some !( tJii'S ; ai, ce halan^ twife cotniclt^ siutit trop^ tail. /era trcp^ sclUcrfii trn^ In ct)% tlutU)»h Hc fiuy in FortificatioB, Cr^^/r saVihul ; ami in Auhittctutt*, cormche taiilnnie ; but then sailiant la an adjcctivtf. Seoir, /o Jii tuJif to icccAt : this Tfrh is t»CTCr uict, H iieda i7r *iee»t } il sey»it^ lb xeyoient ; ii siera^ Us tiermt f it sUroit, Ut sierdent. This verb 'w still used in th« j^r '*v'\^\% of the present ; as, ceite couleur vous seiunt si iunf ious aurkz tort ^d* en porter it autre ; since th*s colour bccomfs you so welt, )uu would be in the irrong to w«ar any ether: btit it is better to atoid it. Sofneflmes ii is used iinper. sooally ; as, U sled mal a un homme de , , . \ it do«ei oot beconiG a oaan to . . . This verb in t>h4> sease of to sit down is obsolete ; however, In Clunccry of Ii4w, we still inake nsc of the participle of the prcsen,t sianij and (hc participle of the past sis .* the former is applied to a per* son or persons who are sitting or residing ; as, U Roil scant en son lit de justice, the Kin^ sitting on his throne ; i h Parkment est scanty the Pailiament is sitting; the lat. tor signifiis situate ; as, nn heritage sis a , , , ^ an estate! situate . . • ; unc maison sise rue St. Paul, a bouse titu-j ate in St. Paul's Street. SoiiTiR : when this Tetb is used in Law, iind signlfieil to get y to oitainy it is regular, and conjogattd lika/«)NV;[ )t)ut it is used in a few tenses ; as, cette sentence sortiral son plein et entier ejfet ; this sentence will take eftct ;| jentends.que cette clause sortisse son plein et entier effet^ I ex.| pect this clause to take elfect, SouBBE (t^ne quettido,) to solve or resolve (a question.)] This Terb is used only in the infinitive mood, bat it i9 ^^ iuletc, r ".*i ■^M|s^ r^t f< ^ci^!« of the FRENCH TONGUK. 14f PART III. XIIEORV JOINED TO PRACTICE. • -Mfim yORMSf OONTAINIlfO TUB RULES OF THE FRENCH SYNTAX ) V)Vf» MANY Tin LATTtBi TKI nULES AND OWEaVATlONS EXEMVLTFIED SEVATlArELY, . JTftB ?B« , li ■'ii ^ SCHOLAR'S PRACTICE, ATTER BACK PART OJ-' SPEECH. '■^*gi^***iiC-- Cnkk', r. :-.r,^-"i»,->'r:3'^5. Jtules and Oherr>atlons upon the A flicks ^ 1. T HE dcfiiite article is uscJ b?fo c tl:e common nmis, (ienofing mi individual distinction, ui a iotality of oiijects : as, the spring is aa agreeable Eeasoir, Je prlntemps est une saison a^r^abU : Diea are morial ; les l)S.ttmc4 sani msria's. • i? 1?. The inJefitiitd article is vtvi befars nou:»s tal en in an ioj^aits and iudetsrmluate ecnse^ vr in a sease yth'iCh !\ "I I III '1^' 's i^' I ¥ ii/ *.:l nil U9 A GRAMMAR OF THE .-::t;.' docs not denote either an individual distinction, or a specific totality ; as, learned peupio hare approfcd hiii uQtk ; de^ savant ont apptouve son ouvrage* See Rule 18. 3. All common nouns substantive take the de6nite ar. tide ; also namt's of kiii^^dums, livers, provinces, moun- tains, &c. unless in the sense of remaining in, going to, or coming from : in this rase we make use of the pre. p08itiun« en and de i as, I am ;oing to France ; je vah en France : He is arrived from Flanders, il est afrive d? Fiandre, The^ live in Italy, ils demeurent en lialie, *. ;:.| 4. When a tiiper'ative follows worapdiate!^ it's solstantive, the de> finite article is always put before the superlative in the first casc« and agret's with the substantive in gender and numher ; as^ he is the most /eurned man ^ cVst /'/^omtne le phu savant. Yuu speak of the most learned man ; votis parfez de I'hmnnuf le ptits savunt. "Ex^kpt wheu vH or wte is followed by a substanuve ; in this case the riefiniie artine is coiumouly used iu the second otisd plural ; ai, he h one of the mobt learned men j r'« ''f% :e : ai, he has ranch money ; ti a bieii de I'argent ; but btauc0up, and tikewtte nit the adverbs of quantity, as, peu, tnoiris, trap, Ike. taite the preposition de ', as, U a beau coup d'ar- gent ; unless it it dctHrrwiiKMl uud specified by a relative pronoun that followi it ; as. il a (is. of Amenca. A«ia, or Africa, to which we may join la Marche, le Ptrche, le Maine, &c. provinces in Fraiice ; le Man- tvtLin.le Milunoii, it Permtm7i,Siic. dlntiotta of h»Uy 13. Osa. No aiucle is used before cacdmai numberSf. except first* when the iiuuus tu which they are joined have- a fixeJ uu:ubtr, either by liettiselv'es, as, les quatre suisons, this four seasons ; or by a relalioii to something eUe<«kpre^>seil by t!ie circumstances of the discourse j as» les deux lettres que>Jf vous at ^critts, the two letters which i wrote to j'oii. becondiy, speakuii; of cards, or the day of the mouth ; as, le ^11} le iieuf • • de Janvier, •• de caur, de piqutr &tc,- „ 11. No article is used bofufe proper names, particular placei^, towu.s, or villajfcs, &e. exce'pt, first, le Mans^ W^atelet, /a Fere., la Ferte^ U Havre de Grace-, la Rochelle^ hSliiesnoy^ '%c« cities in Frauce,. tu wlii4;fi add le Caire-, tWr'>, la-Haye, the Hague. Secondly, some noui)«, when th^y denote an indi??».Iual ^ibtinctiun, or a particular appeilatiao, us I'^tkalie de lIUciNis, h Aferope de VoLTA^H.^} speaking of two piuys I of these tw,o authors.. tj^^^^.i-fr 'vtZji^-.'' 15.V No aitkie is used before nonns iinraedrately fol- lowing Certain verbs, or prepositions, with «hith (hey froni a kind of adverb ; as, avec amltie^ v.ith friendship ; ybns (ledain,. without disdain: ^arJ!i?|^^, through spite, IcUvmV envie, to have a oiind to. . KjiCrpt, 'Ahen thcsi.! nouns are fcrUo^wcii, |ir^t by the Ifelativo prouonns qui gue/ ^yri^/, '«ei^;fiecoiidlyjf'J»y .a su- jperhfivre ; tiiirdiy, by a notiiv iu lUQifiCsinJ case.. I 16. No articie is used aftiir U;* prepy^tiunj <•«, except " iQ a very few cases, wl.ich vviil be utHiCCwl ia ua obser. - iu i '■' t 'i' a;; t? m A GliAMMAR or TIKE (Hf I An' if m vations about prepositions ; ^hrrras dans altrays r^quifci an article after It, unless it rs followed by a c»»njutlcti7e poMcssivc pronoun, and likewise bf a d4;naoa8tratiTC,*or hidefinite proRoun : as, dans mn chanhre, ki my^roum ; dans cette c'lnmslance ^ rn that circumseauce ; di^ns qu^* ques tnomens^ in a few moments, 17. ^Q article is used bx'fore a noun, ivliidi foUnws ^ofimcdiately ths name of a pnrticiiUr place, iQ which \t belongs : as, I «»« born In London, the capital cUy of Knoland ; Je siiis nJ a Londres, \illl» capitale d* Angle, terre. Neither is the artici^ used after ihe %erh elre : »■;. il est medectn, lie i we mt, instfafl of tl\*» foregoing indcfirute articU's de for the first case, h de fof the linrri case ; as. iw/a rie Ion jwim, that is pood bread ; toild de heilti dames, ii»o,s« &re fiue ladies j and not, du bon pain, da hfilia dame$. N-. B. There ure some eubstan^ves in tl'.e plural with whlrh we use des, not dc, trough precfdeH by tl'reir Hdjectives. This is tlie ca*e when the Kdjecuvr BTid 8Bb$tantiv«»' make but «ioe idea, and the adjective ill used on'v to rf i d'^r the sifinificmiim of Ujc «ubitftntive romplete^ ; fucli* are heUes-lettres, hf.uui-esp'rUs g'-onds-scig^nturs, vibich si^uify, poli:e lit*- Talure, men oi temning^ people oi high rank. ^0. The articles unv me, are u-sed when ihey sigttffy only a Iciud' of indetermuittte intfividuaiMy', or an indWf«[ » duatify in an indete ninate manner : a**, a king onftht fol be the father of his peixple ; un rot dok etre k pert ^ hon pcupk. HoMcye" these artirles nay sometimes chas'ftjjd isit the lirftnito artrcle : as, a 'vvitp man rul« W«| passi ns ; uu hU before a tar»t|ve, we oM. Irst cast', h de fof ; roilA Ae htilii h-!i"i damet. ith wisich we us« 18 tlie ewe when the a> wh les riekuw. lea jm(im»Vi ;,Jlhie tick $.tid tb« poor. iUfias and OtiKMFArjairt upon the Antichus EitMTLituti for the Scholar s Eb,acticb. j [I.] There are nine ptirts II v a rif.uf par^ii-s d*orai&6n : of speech : M^ article, /** arlirle, h nom, h pro- nom, /s vefbe, le par(i- ripe, /adverbe, la pieoo- aiiion, /a conjonctiou, /'in- ter jtctiou. ■^.^■^{r j^;.. the noun, the pninoun, the ?erb, /;5tf participle, //j^ aoV<*fh, the prgposi- tion, the conjuncfioo, t'U fnterjccliotr. The article shows f/6* Object /.'article Tnontre / objet ou la or ihlog. chose, "'"Vt' ^^l Th: «<»'in names the fhihff. Le noni nommc la cho'iC. *The pfroilo»in supplies ihe Le' XMonom tknf As j)lace da j)!ac8 of the nonn. no-t. 7h rerb shoM?^ /^^ adiuTt, XV verfte riiontre /'action ou or pasiian of the of)ject. la passion de /*.>bjct. The particfi^le T»artakta L^ participle tient de la na- cf the nature af the verb (ure du v?rbe et «/« com ; il sert a la conju^uison da verlxis pa^s.fs, et d ceile usr (ifcOjpiifi<;d, to iLc fnd of the FnK.NCH SYNTAJt.- 1 »' •l>i i! tl(| 1^ I ,*^^'- A GRAMMAR OF - . _.j • 111! II" %. m II-' km m vM 4 11 "1! li V 'ilv li I !|1 J" iij'!i;. and YClbs nhkh it gar- onmt^ et /«/ rerbes qu'eiie ^ eiros. 'cgit. - \ 7*ke coitjuticlion joins words La conjonction joint Us mots and ;^hrase». ct tes )nt'^ ^ paiiii. Cuf //jff oi^ar. * Coiipez la Tianu'e. Euiuiation is a ncbie passion. Z^emulajioo est unc nobli: pa.ssic'H. Virtue aad beauty are Citl. La vertu el la bcaute sont finable.. .v,^;.;.,^„v^:. eMliaab^es. . . Virtue is preferable to ^iS^"e^. La terta es>t pieftirab!o aiiK- riciiessirs, . f y^* hfait ofiea ]i\iUm^ iht Le ccetir irompe souvent :: %"'Sniod. ■:^^/--.>^^:-;: /,,,.„5^, 1 like{riiit.W ' t. J'aim# i^ fruits |"j] France is a large coub- La France ciit un pa^s con. I spt'iik of France. ^ "' Je parir de la France. Let us S!»oak of Bn^^ind. Pdrluns ^r / A:igiitorre. He taiks oaiy of IXutlaud. Jl rte parnrj(uii:s /^Jtlico:?, ^.m' / brillante. • "*:' *It is one of the most bar- C'est une des coututnes Us barous jCUAtoms. pies bni bares, lie speaks of one if the most II parle d un des hommes ks tmhappy inrn. '' i>fttS Mfr-,V;;::ux. Hie is one of the best edu. C'est nn des enfans les mieux cated children. eieves. |He is oue of the most pre- C'est un des homrae les plus siiptuouswen. presumptueux. |Sbe is ot:e of the most beau. C'est une des demoiselJes Us tiful aud amtabie ladies. plus beiies et Us p!u8 .'.•■■;v«i.,...^M?iUi;>, alroaMes, am writing upon one o/'/iJr J'ecris sur une roati^re des nicest matters, tliuvgu the plus deitcates, quoiquc det least .sTiining. molns briilaii' r. 5.] Politiciaos disseiable. Les politiques dissimutcnt.'*' ITif ambitious sacrifice every Les anibitteux sacrifient tout thia^ tu fartuue. 'l^^H d la fortune. 'S * ■ • I make usf, on purpose, of the six foregohig examples, to^ render Be exoeptioa to the fifth observation mora obv^as ti ine ieariHir. The Jrticlcs imni£.'ijate!y foiioxving un or une n)a^i£9 omitted, as iti the last pampl? ; ia this case the suhjtantive is pat ih the singular ; as, Cat c^utume « sure. /'agreabie. [6 } Coals aui 80I4 for a I'« charbon »e vend uri ciii> fihilliii^fl Uuiikcl, *ti;M.; i , Ud /? botsscati. '-^^ - . Egg» have been ao'A for cme Lu-s oeufs uut et^ vait^nsJ dne pouikd a bundrt'ii. ; ihat is Hire ^reili.;) b c M ; (:;>t more (iun four fihilling:s 41 plus de «|!mtr& choiiiis/rj quarter of a hundred. qtiAr^.oruA. Caodlcs are bold fuf niu« Los ch.uidelles se Teudcotj f>€UGe 4 pound. neuf sous h Iswre. B«it*icr is sold for ten pence L-j beuric st veiul *3ia s«ujj ^o« He slanders ^womei*. Thin lace cj't OBG g'iJdea e Cette ilentetl« coftto uni y .1 rd . gttinee la Verge. [7.] It lit 4V(i:y. l^i^f* cut. C*4;ttt ia coutumti (k ioui It |lo«i, ;l';€% mond'O, wEwry ^ody ku«>*» Ih Tiut h oiondo !« salt. II*) (fii? the 84Ufie story t ) 11 racurHe ia m^mft hiiieire ^fifry Hok^y. a tout k momk. SU »p«^k8 U) «/*«// men. £i!e parla mal i(? /owr /ir/ homines^ jiU men ^« nat ll^ff, J^^ ?e«; in hcsMRcs lie 84>nt pai JU women are not protid. Tcutes les femmctnc sont pa» fiiires. li ni^dit de tmtss les fcmnics. : -iMo paJdifi// lUe expunst'S. H fiaya touj les de<»ens. [^,j:i fiihhioiis syre iiot lidicu- 7V»/rx /i/- iBodua n« eoat pi {i ■ J01.S. ■■-^'^'}^: -v^.J^''^' ridicules, : ■ J learn tf-D^'y day. j Mh' J'appreuda /o»* iw jours. *■ li \b the riipbrt */ i^£ whok C'tjst leJ)Xttit depute la villi citv. [8.} TV/f ioida of the hwisfi Xc dedans de kjnaison is ?erj fine. fr^s bea.u. ^^ 77>€ oufi>ide of the church is Le dehors de Peg'is : at d« majestic. jesuicux. ^. The wpper part *t qaitcZr dcssus t'.^* 'ou ,.e. spoifl'ed. [10.] M J fistcr piayS f//o« Ma sccur jo«. i •i'-in i"'ta' .^ the gatta^r, and mjr brai,h- et oiou fre« i } >Je <''»' '" — cr fe*.«4^ vioiin. Jon. ?! \h'n Wei ^' Yuu pas TI .y uo Hi? h( ncy [H.i nex He ii8 He is pan Ftoi Heliv [13.] you Of the year me 1 three I lost wrot [I4H from Chef ton, jinhalia ilisto fane Racire' toir*' ;ic a ,.■ ^*. FREXCn TONGUE. 155 ri6s aiivra;<;f9 ire /*utUi> u rcn^ sin chj- tie cheUiis/r I se Tfudcot I £i.«i cFis Musj I coiXtc unij pge. ^A-^ \t Htt* mh:m hlitoirej *■>'■' I csue &«ntpM >cs nc soot pii»| tes its fcmnics, I oe sont pa &/ jours. fe^ute la »ill« la. maison Peg"'- vStmaJ lU\^agonti pHijer o^ bll- C'ost un bon .joucur <^ bif* liAtds, fl/ t^'imis, &c. i&t'd, ^f pauine. Sec, We jJayed yeslerilay /;/ pi- Nmis jouamcs hlcr «u pL r "t. qutt. 'h She p.ii many irkivds. Yuu tiiktt a j^rcat Jeat [ 1 1 . ] He has »»tfc;& money. H » Af«» //* Mikm ' amitie. Jain. p. vec ia plus hain« ^n'il !C le w^priB vec la plus laoabre gar. rcz dans k. ;re (ians /a critoire. . capitate de is, Tfille ca* e. ilie capttale %; PaENCIt TONGUE. 1 Sho^ ftroilUMr, 157 Ires, vilk ca« lerre. n d' Angle tr d'Hano. |de George i&e la vrin. [c, ///-? d" IkUubourg. Elte^## coiffeuse, oa rV// ime coilt'euse. He // the mercbtnt, wbom 11 est le marchand, que tou9.^ you look for. cherchcz. ' ' '^ -ti;- He is (be physician, whom II est ie medecin, que yous you ask for. demandcz. ' .; He is tb* most upright flier. II est le marchatid le phts io« chant. tdgre. Heir thi most skilful phyti. II est le medecin le plui ex. cJan. pert. 8he has more custom than £Ile est la cojiTeuse la plus any other miHiner. ^r- j;^ achalandee. * . ' . [18.J Give ute some bread, Donnez.moi dm paio, Je fa ' some meat, jome wiue, Mme Tiande, du vin, /k la beer, &c. bi^re. See. Brioff some salt, sqms pfpper> Apportez du set, du poivre, jome mustard, &c. ^^"^ de la moutarde, 6cc. There is wine ^nd water, Voiia i& vin et de /'eau. Do you choose beer, or ci. Souhaitez-vous de la bidre, der ? ou du cidre ? Bread and water are snffi- Du paia et dv /'eau !ai suffi. cieot for him. sent. VoQ jaust lay this fruit in II faut mettre ce fruit dans straw. *'< : ; iii/f Ai paille. Lend me soro^ paper and Pr^ttiz.moi du papier et de ink. "" /'en ere. H»ve you thread, or silk f Atez.vous du fil, ou de la soie ? [Mead my stockings witi} Raccommodez ines bas avec I cotton. ■ • ■■^^' %4"y^^ -^ V du coton./- ■''. -'-^ ' ^: A I spent my money in good6. J>i employe inon agent a 4^ la niarcbiindise. ' j This thread is like silk. Ce fil resemble a de la soie. [He compares this stuff to 11 compare cette etoft'e a dn relvet. velours. I She will not trust such cor- E)le ne veuC pas se fier a d^s rupttd men. hommes si corroropus. I This cider is like wine. Cc cidre resemble a du vin. A fine discourse often uis- Tjii beau <|i!tcoiirs deplart pluases iguorant people. soutent ^^s *• ' ' Sometimes of is omitted, and the substantive which it Mould have preceded, is pnt before the other in what is ca'.lcd (he genitive or possessive case, which is commonly »it.'aoted by 's added to the word, when the latter of the two substantives must be the iirst 'ase in French, aitti placed at 'ho beginnint; ; as, ray faiiier's house ; la nuison demon pere Likewise in the English compoun.) word*), the tir^t la l<]bj(Iish iii commonly the second iu French ; aa, a sea port ; un port de mer. 2. Adjectives have the same gender and number as (heir substinfivefl ; as, a good book ; un Ion iivre : a gooil ptn ; ur bonne pl'icue : good books; de bans livrc;!* : peu ; dc 3o/;«« plumes. \ . .,f; Except,— fjr*^, feu, late, deceased, before the article or pronoun ; tm, bare, before hte, fieds.jn ;h:s, &c. ; riemi, half, before it's subslnn- tive. — Secoiieiy, tout, llowed by an a'-ticl?', or by an acJjecuve, end- i.ig Willi an e umte it's masculine gciiuer, befori> tho word gins, which is feiuiniiie j a**, all* people of proLity ; ttnis Its gais da probitc ; all lione&t peo^-Ie ; iou^'Us honn^tes gens. But if the worit tout he ei- ther i(nmetl;«teiy followed by gens, or if gens be preceded by aii ai'jec- tive not eud'ivg wirb un e mute in it's (uascuiine, then tm: word tout tollows the rule, aiid is put iu the icrainine*, as, all old people ; toutcs Ics vieitles gtn$ ; tht*y are all persons wljjm I Ho not esieeai, ce sont ttmtes gens' (^iiejf n^esiimt point. — Thirdly. atJjvctives following gens, as^ tliCy are poiue pt:i)plc , ce sont des gens poii»i ■-' . '-'^•v. 'v^^i^d*.-* '■ 3. When two or more s'ibsfanMves of different genders, and not separated by a di.sjuHcti\e, are the first case to the y ford of measure in English, come before it in Frcncb, and are foMowcd by the preposition de ; as, a window li)rre feet Iroad ; unc f entire large de trols pieds. Or, which Is the muff general practice, the adjc-ctlve is turned into it's substaiii^l^, with the word of measure before it: ia this case tlve Word of measure, or dimcobain, is pre. .«!, . FRENCH TONGUE. 101 pIc, require should agree IV e. as open ; she ellr >a8t, inr])lies , rfttti ; as, iueii tofifth. r enumble. eir Kubstan. iibstantiTes ; iehatUf mttU Mtinfi btiforf» Wfofethdr tittc, or iisa itty ctiapitre qaei tteoni^ loun ta (he before it : rememhratictt Hifiess, pltft* noun in the ^ before it ; f, incllnatmy long^ thlciy le after (he in FrcncJJ, IS, a winilow jAeds. Or, Ive 18 turned le before it ; ion, is pre. ceded by the proposition de ; as, uiu ftiutre de trw puis (Je largeuv. When in thi» constnictioo liie Teib ta L^ happens to precede the word of meaauro or diinonilon, it is ( ummonly chanKe4 into the verb avoir ; and tho prep. Q^ition dcf which is l^efu^e the quantity of measure, is left out ; ai, wie ftnHr( qui a troU ^teds de largeur ; a window which // thrtit, feet broad.^^ -,-.,, -r , - ; -s-^ ■■•e Ri:Li% and QnSERrATiCN^ upon Noutrs sxsMPiiFiSD'fqr tU f. , .' ScnciAR's Practick. ■ '; [I.] The loTC of Ji/e is ti4(a- L^mnut de la vU est naturel ral to men. aux hoinmrs. The study of languages .'is ve- X^'i^wAt dts Lmgues est tr^s- ry cntertaini,t||(. amuKaufo. Ilerr U my fjfbrrS haute. Vorci h maison de moa pcrc. 1 sakT liie |c«nc"fr ht^rses' 'f'ai vu la chevaux du roi. / Have you not seen the king^a N'ariZ.TOtts pas vu le palais palace f du roi ? The (jiicen'8 apartments va I^fi appartemens de la rclnc very fine. snnt ird^.beaax. ft 18 my brother's hook C'est le livre de mon frdre. - ^ho wears a stra^M hat with 8 ^''^ porte un chapeau d^ iUk ribbon. palUe avcc unniban desoie. Is the chamber door thut ? Lu porte ''-.:"; -^j : ■'- ;:r**-w Greenwich. ■ t hauffht a fine siher taift. J'aiachef^ uo beau pot d'ar- kard. gent. lie is gone to his country^ II est all^ i sa maison nL'urc. i^^.iK. . It is half aw hour pasfe-one. I! est imc heurc ct Sem'te. Jll people of honour. Tous kt gens dMiuiUienr. It is the opinion of a\\ peo. C'e.t l»opini6o de tage. Thefy arc ^o//V^ people. Ce sont des gcas^W/x. They SiT< prudetit peop!?. Ce sont des gtna prudens. You must not trust indiscreet 11 nc faut pas voub iii t a df'S '' ■ people. ^ens indiscreU*^.':^:' '■■';■' '-'3' [3] Our maid and man-ser- Nofrc bervante ct notrcTalet vant are very diligent. sont Uks-dlUgens His brother aiid cousin are Son frdrc et sou cousin soat ^ very idle- paresseux. 'jhe vvindow and the door are L.i feneise et la porleswit open. J • . ouvertes. My father and mother a« Man j^rc et ma mtifc soot stci:. mala.'hs, Mj niathor and sister have M >•> frerc et ma soeur sont caught cold enrhumis. ;|[4.] Iter eyes, mouth, and Elle a Jes yeux, la bouche, ' ' Bock, are ^^t)' pretiy. et la jjorae tt^^belle. She siii^^s with u cuafming Elle chante a?ec w uoutet and delicate air. wnv. ile\\ciiivss(} charnsanU' Why do you leave thn wsn. Pourquoi jai t'A-vuus < f- dows and the doo! open f netrts et la pov f^^^' lie louud beauiy, ybuth, ii troura la dp'^u Cir « 1 .tA H TONGUE. It^ one l^mu et demie. dc tow lei e. !S gens Toot j^DOS gens Q de toutes i. 2S gens Toat outes Us mau. ie sou Toisi. ,s /)^/«. ■; ' IS prudent. rout, iiik a^'- ct notre valet i cousin soat la porle swt ma tnete soot ■na scDur so'.U la bouche, ;c w- uoutet ise charmanti' -i-vuus '« f* ov«e ovverte^ riches, wisdom, and even nesse, Ids richesse;?, Tft« virtue ttffiW in her person* s^grsse, et mejiu la vertUy. reuniet dans su personne. It is excecdingljT hot and' 11 txvi dans co pays-ia des foggy in that country. rhi'Mirs ct dcs brouillards excesnfs • ; \ :. .•: The children., father^ and Les enian^, Ie p^fe et la mother united. meri; reunis. Healthy hom urs, ard for- La saute, s h')nneurs, et la tiihe, Joined lo^ether, are fortune, joints ens«fnibie, not ahie to satisfy the ne peuven^ (iatisfairc Ie heart of man. cceui de I'homme. - j^5 ] I have a grten^nnff box J'ai une tabatiu'e verte. Th' English tongue is co. Li langn*» Anglotse est" pious, strongs aud barmo- ahondante. forte ^ et Jjarm nious monieute The French tong;ue is very La iitngiie Frangoise est tres smooth, I ' i •, ' ' ; - douce. Sh 5 'i. handsome, rich, aisd C'est une femme telle, riche^ virtuous « • * ' t' aw. et veriueuse. Gi\K ma a. clean shirt. Donnez.moi une chemise blanche, A llach hat, a green suit, Un » ftapcan noir^ un habit luhiie stockings, r^^ shoes. vert., des has hlancs^ dt'S souiers rouges^ :, . > -'; There is a very ^ne coach. Voi a un carro"»se magnifque. lie follows tiie English fa- II suit la mock* jingloise, shion. ^, Sing an Italian air. Chantez un air Italien, Peo; !e enjoy /)Zi»r^ air is On- jouit d'aft air -pur en France. France. •■ ' \ •^^S/"'::^\ Why' do not you wear yonr Pousqaoi nc por(ez-von« pas black stock 'Ors ? tos has n^iirs ? Site IS a charming woman. C'est umc fconr rharmanie. C'est une charmante tinii »c. She rHifimaudcd him se- JE/le lui a fnit dt severest' vercly. priniaudes, on des rcj)!!- [6]' iie is a naughty boy. C mand^S sewres-^. man dcs se ^e^t xv^ me, 'chant gar^.on. et i'e&prit bicn| ^ad weather w tires jme to Le maunais Kuir.ps m'en m\ niiu'. nute, la jt^"i i-V-*^* 4m} A QM\mim OF THE Hn He dwoUs in a large house. l\ dcineure dans une grandt inaisoo. London is ajitu city. Loadres est unt Belle ?iHo. ' lie is a man ul djtmgHtshed C^eiX uti iiomme d'uu grand merit. m^rite. He is a /^7//yjiir man, -^- X?t^i nn grand hommc blond, [7] The ^r/# uian vias the Lj; premier ttKymoiQ f«t ie jijrj/ siniKT. . :- - premier \kz)x^\it. George 111, kif^g Oi Eng- Gejrge Trm roi d*AHgIe. land, and Lewis ^VL terre, m Luuiii iS^is^*, roi king of France. '' de France. [8] I am contuQted with my Je sui* content dt ma tondl. condition. . ->£.-;' .'.A;.i%' >, tiqn.- 1, , . .„^-'- ,- -. ^ ;V ■ ■?_ It is a praise-worthy acticb. C'e$t une ^c'ion digne di louantics. He is unworthy of your Htst indigne de vofrc ami. friendshJi). ti©. She is incapable 0/* a lie. £lle est incapable j^^ men. ,./\, ■&, ■ songe. . . '•.:'.':'■ Fevr people are satisfied pyiijih Pen de gens sont contens dg their furtuno. leu r fortune. I am fft'e from fear and Je suis exempt //« crainte et danger. ^r dangi'r. * \ was OTCrjoytd «/ that Je fus i(avi de cettje Bouvellc. ' news. She is^not contented nuith Elle n'est pas contente de sa her maid servante. He is discontented nu'tth his II est mecontent de sa fcronie. wife. He is accused ©/"murder. II est accuse de meurfr?. He was loaded nv'ith praises. 11 fut com hie de louanijos. They are greedy of glory lis sont avides de gloire ci and riches. de richesses. I am tired of your dis. Je suis las ^/t vos discours. courses. 7hey are enraged (U his sue- I! sont enrages ^ son %\\t» cess. , res. He is deep in debt. II ert charge de dettos. [9] That is good for some- CeU est bouxa quelque chose. thing. It is a fruit hurtful to C'est un fruit nuisibic a la »anle. «»W ft** " • ..4-^ V.7*.'*.cft. . FRENCH TONG15E. ^ He is too much addicted /o^' li est iropadonu^ <) I'^tlid^^^ study. §he »s unfit^r any thing. Elle n'cst propre ^ Hen. ^^ ' You are iaseasiblc to 9.11 the Vous ^tes inseiinbtc ^ toutes remonstrance^ of your les remontiances de tos fricndsv i ,. fi . v afnii?. -^ .-v ». ^. He is fityor any things II est propre a tout. She is not ta be compafcd' Eile n'est pas comparable a^^ with you. Tous. That is eondformable tb Cela est conforme ^ la Te. truth. rit6. .^ ^ Your<) IF like mine* . , Le votrc est scmblable au tnien. } am ready Joryont orders. Je »i?fs pr^t ^ vo9 ordrea, I am rtty »«ftMb)« ^aokt. Jt) Mi« tr^ft-sensible^^ froid. That cloth is tiii^e yontn, Ce drap est pareil «» vdtre. [10] A carpet six yards Ung^ Uo^ tapis long de six Terges^. f^wdivio mde, . et large ^^r deux; ou tin tapis d5r six verges delon* ; >gueuryti de deux *f A street twenty yards w;^f. Une roe Iarg€ mmc hhnL I me fut le r. [)i d* Angle. is Sei%e., roi fe m.^ fcttndi. sn digne i^f ?• votrp ami. ,blc dji men. nt contens k % crainte et tte BouTellc. [)ntente de sa de sa fcmmc. Qieurtr?. louanuos. de giuirc ci discours. lii^ son sue* lettcs. chose. Vf II! ' >••?• ».•"■ >;f '. 'H ^.■; 1;'®!! ;» ■r l\ 166 ACItAMMMl OF TUi: ' P il! tli ';'*' , at least eight hundred elle* ont an moins quairel ^' yards lonjr^ cens t ists u ever se6n a man Av<^7..vous jamais vu iml**^^'^ eigUt feel kigh I > hotnnie de huit pit-ds i t'' I »f»-; MM CHAP. iir. 1 Rules ani> Ob$erfa7ions upon PkoNovm^i SECTION L ,; PERSONAL PRONOUNS, su 6. Ob! [with an c fore tiie | |loff«r ? Howev I way of a I forborne I the prono 7. W Itowp), \ in iht firsj^'^'-^ ^^ m I. A GOVERNING personal prononn, JoL. case, must always be put before a verb ubkh has Tio other noun, or j^runounj, for the first ease ; as, /I speak ; je park ^ 8ic. , ,> £xcept the second person Sihgwlar, and thfe firfit am second person jx'ural of the imperative cnocd, wbith ar£ liScd viithoat a p unuun personal. S. Obs. There are snme placfs where !he pronoun personal is pnj after the verb ; as when it is joiied wil i each of tht^ seven followj iiig : dire, to say ; r^-pomtre, in answer ; rt'pHqiier, to r»'}>ly ; n7;cr(ir| to answer again ; ccntinuer, to continue j powsnivre. to pursue ; ana s'dcrier, t-j cry out ; and forras with it a distinct niemher of tl e sen] lence ; as, I have none, answered he ; je n'en ai point rcpimdit-il 3. Ob3. The personal pronoun most be puc alter the verb in the* phrases, dussiczvous, though you bkould ; fussiez-vous, though joil were ; pulssiez, or pussiez vouSi may you ; and in auj,' of those expffs ons M^bich foiiD what grammarians call the optalive mood ; as,- tliougij you were rich fussiez vouk riche ; though you should writ* to hmil dussiev-vfiHii iui icrirr ; may yot see hini in good health, puisi'K'i'^ le voir en bonne sante. 4. Ofis It is more elegant to put th^ personal pronoun, even ion ]ow^;d by que, signifyuig that, alter the verb p'tceeded by one o{ liic ccnjunctiojis : aussi, but then ; pent etre, perhaps ; du moins, ait,miit at least ; en vain, in vain ; d peine, scarcely, ficc. as, but tufu !^f i fciVcu Ilia tCWAfUf (iiiiSi rc^^ii-U HA fcQutupcuac. 8. Obs. [wise, wile noun ; as, iBoiieau. iikewis( niorfe elega presented I'dnd salon \riihm, n'es it ; C'est (u 9. A ^ |any nou iieorg-e J lout in an poiin afte jrere ecrii. Exc(>pt tfci? uUcrr !o"N as I Irit P . FRENCH TONGUE. 107 moms quaire longueur, lais vu im uit picds de deux pouces NOVIfS't ■: ^i- : n, in the firs* a verb ubich si case ; as, / the firfit Jind )(1, wbitli are personal is pn Ithi- seven fallow yfi\Ay ; rtpartit to pursue ; aw iber of tie sen It rcp'mdit-il the verb n» then :ons, though joi of those expresi loo 5. In an interrogation, either affirmatire or nogatiye^^i^ the personal pronoun is always put aJter the rerb irifr simple lenses : as do you eat ? wangez-vous ? do you not write ? necrtve%-vous pas ? In cumpouitd tenses it is put immediiitely atrer the auxiliary, eitht r in an aihrma.- tive or negative question : as, have you eaten ? avei&vous mange f" have you not written ? navexvout pas ecrlt i ViV' 6. OBil. When, in an interrogation, we make use of a verb ending with an e route, we put an aeute accent upon the last t of the verb, be fore tt.e (^rijuoun^'e ; as, do I speak ? parie-je i anui1i ^^ \eit foregoitig example ; est-ce que voire frere iltl thi'J idiom, esUce but tufu Le: :nf ; it \\ fl I ! 'km ■i' ■* kl '•;S; }^ A GRAIMI^UR or TH£ S! ! I ;f t^AO. Ferional ipronouws of the iirst and sccbiVd (}(M>soa plural are commonly pnc before tke Terb, if the verb 'liave fojr it's nominative several personal pronouns, or only one perflonal proDouii> m ih& ilrat or second persoo of either number, joined wiih one or more nouns : as, you aixd I are idle ; vou4 et moi nous somme pansteux : your brother And I w«ie present, vo/r^ y>-^iv €t tngi nous Itlpnt ^resens, Except a ijiouo substantive is joined with /jKi or //if, -when the personal ptoiaouD i^ lefi «^tT) an^ tlie verhii pot is the third person plural : as, yQitr brother and h« are idle, voire frere et ltd sunt pwesseux^ 11. Governed personal pronouns are put before the Tcrb in FreT'ch, though after it in English ; as, he told .me i H me dit. Foreigners sbojuld attend to this f ule, against which they are very apt to oiTend. E^ccept, 1st, in (he second pqr^pn 6ii;i^ular, find fiut ^"^di second persons plural of ^he imperative : as, tell m^, Mites -moi . . . Observe, that ttiir, is always put instW of moi, when it comes before the verb, unless it bej»Q. parated from the verb by a conjunction : as, it is to m he gives it ; c^est a moi qu'i! le donne .: 2dly, after the ▼erb ftrcf when it signifies to beiong to, and after the verb se Jler^ to trust, or rely on : as, you rely on me^ vous vous Jieve. a mot : this house belongs to me ; cettt nuiuon at a moi : 3dly9 a/ter the verbs songer^ petuer^ parlety when the last signifies to direct our discourse /«, and a very few others. 12. The supplying pronouns 2?, 7^, and Z^x, are always put before the verbs by whiqh they are governed, and are placed befort- hi and leur ; as, you gvre them to him} vou^ les lui donnez .• whereas they are put after ihe other personal prjuoui:8 ; as, I give' «"/ to you j je vous lej Agnne :; except in the imperatve mood iu atUrp^ative sen. tences ; as, give fV at; / i/on/;^«.le.moi. 13. The supplying pronouns en and y are also placed I before the verb, and are put after all other pci>^oiiai pro. nouns, and en aftei y ; as, I have seat some to them tUA d>er i j&}twr y en «j envoy e. FaENCH TONGUE. 169 )rtd pcrsoa if the verb unouns, or :ond persoD IIS : as, you reax : your uotts him liber. »imI JN i before fte aSf Vctold 10 tbb fule, lar, fiiMi fiHt as, tell UK, pat instead Icsj? it be^- I, it is to nu lly, after the after the rely on me, to me ; cettt ongery penser^ discourse t«f ^j, are always toverned, and them to h'm ; ifter the other je vous lej irp^ative sen. [e also placed Ipcii^oual i)'«? to them M' Except mhtu v and mot* meet together in the stoond penon of the iapcratire nood afimativ«ly ucd> jf n {iUt befor* 11101 ; us, carry rae thkber ; menn y mol. N. B. Till last tbrea obserrationi, with their exceptions, are fullj eiemplified in»their proper places* and in the supplying pronouns. 14. ]/> whioh Mine wrongly call a personal pronoun in ihefollow- )Rg exanplas^ it coninu>nly used before the verb etrc followed by an adjecttTe, where the word th^ng is under!it.ood ; as, it is glorious to die for ear country ; H est gloriettt de mourir pour sa patrie. If the adjective nnkcs a complete sense, ce it coninionly used : as, it is triie ; c'est vrai. U is likewite used when we speak of the time and hour ; as, it ii eleven o'clock ; U e$t lize keiura ; it it bad weather ; U fait maU' vait ttnp*' Except* when a question is asked with ce ; as, quelle heure e»t':e la i the answer it A'est ixn heute. Ce is conmonly used in the beginniiijg of a sentence beiort a substantive i aa^it i&Xpity ; e^est dommage.. >-, ■^., vv' '•• ■ • ■ ''• ■ t^-'-v :■■ ; "- . . * - '^^ , ■ • " ' ; ,^.':-.,. ,■:•>■*. :^:r'j:.:t-:::: * ,- .•> ^ i^:..-'/ ''f ■■ •' ■• rf..!-, 15. IF, el&^ s{n|ii1far, or its, iffet, plttral, hM ce, are in. discrimitiatiely ustA .; Ist, before substantives expressing the sex, quality, profession, or trade of a person : as, he is a.mercbaiit ; i/ est marchand, or c^est un marchand : idly, before nam^s of nations : as, (hey are Freuciiffien, ilt sonf Franpohy Or C£ sont des Frangois. Observe, that in the tvr^ foregoing instances, no article is put be. fore the sabstantive after the personal pronouns, je, tu, a, Sec. IS, Porsoaal pronouns, whether conjunctive ox dis. juocttve, in their oblique ca«e9, are always to be repeat, ed ; as, I say wnd declare to you, je vous dis, vt vous dem dare : take thr hooks, and read them : prene% les livres, et les lisez, or UseiA les. 17. Personal pronouns arc repealed before oacli verb : 1st, when they are followeil by vert>§, In dl'lforeot tt>ulies^' ; as, I say, and !fhall always say ; je dis, et je d'^r^titou- \}ours : 3dly^ when we pass from a negation to an affir. mation, or from an ailirniaiion to a negation : 3dly, siitev the conjunctions, mats, meme, cependant, neanmoint, non~ Ulttant, malgre tout cela, ausst, ainsi^ gu, kc. I^nl Wh^a the personal pronouns belong to the same tense s^i^i pier- son, they are commonly not repeated : as, I say and tit. kUre; je dis et declare. Observe here that the proaoun |o!j ' ' ■ . - - 8 always repealed : cs, people speak attd ait ; cu MM'. r't., I! I ^ I Iparle et on agit « -*^v _r^ :-' V ituuk ■■■ .f^i-^Jb :!). I. a I'V !1 i'l'i 1!^' -m A -GRAMMAR OF THE *. IS. The pronouns /«/, eux, elle, eUet^ /tuty arc uecd at the end of a lentence, only when we aiu spenking of per. sons : as, is it your brother ? // h ; Mst-ce votre fi^re? (]'cst hi. When we ire speak. < of inu.tiiniato things, Me make use of the pronouns /*, /a, Us : as, is it your hat ? Yt'S, it is. Est-ce la votre cliaptau and not, c'esi lui^. Oui, cfNti^ ' '19.048. The iorego'ing^tiih^'hfn fill, itux, elk, /«tr, whya we *k speaking of inanimate things, are sometimos us' d iu ilie middle ofa kcntencet, soinetiuri ia>t : but there is no other rale fur this than custom, 80 that it can be ietfrntd only b; use : for, speaking of a sword, I may taytje /ui tloit la vie, I am ukdrbted to it for my life ; and yet w« roust say, speaking of the same swurdt attuchcz-^n ce nteud, biog ihat swordknot to it ; not attocAn /ui. ■ „, ^ ^^ 20. lifilrs elky elUsy in the beginning of a sentence, aroused, speaking eveti of inanimate things : as, whoi gpcakinjET of a house, I say, elk est belle, . , ^i. Luif kutf elle, &c. governed by a preposition, nre never used, speaking of irrational and inanimate things^ as, yon see that house, he lives over against it; vous voyen ceite mmsonj^ U denuure vis*a»v$fy and not tw* \ 'S&A A, !». vv r. : V* *' " .■ ' . * In fbii case the prepositions become adverbs. Bat observe, that! some prepositions never, or very seldom, become adverbs: as, auc,\ with ; sant, without, &c. therefore, iu such cases, give another tara I to the sentence : as, J cannot do wkhont it, Je ne pui$ m'en paster ; k\ ciivie with it, il I' a apporte, ' I f^ it may be observed, that apres and avec are sometimes fallowed bfj hii, cnx, tile, or eiies : as, when the river overflows, it carries tretjl t^iiig' aMriry with i£ 3 lorsque cette riviere se deborde, elle entraluel .'|||i4,ie en elle-mime. Sp9*kiufL of persons in general, tei ii to be used ; as,/ a man oag^lit not to apeak Qihimtelf, bat with great .deaty ; on nc jioii parler du M. qu'tfvec beaucuap de modestiti. \\* «n we speak or 'a pHrticu'tar person, lui or clU is used instead of iiu' ; as. that aaii speaks of wjbody bat himtelf : cet honirae ue parle que de lui. N. B. Mime is olteii elegantly pat after lui, eUe, eur, idi. he. and mast be put afcer tlica. when they folbw a leAected verb. Personal Pronouns exemplified fox thr Scholar^ s J Practice . ^ y' .. [].] / am karniBg my 1«S' y'apprends ma le^on. soo. • fl* Be i» wrtling hU tiieme* II ecrit sen ib^mo. -^ 1^^^ is cnabroidurittg. £//; brode. i-*?' «T^ bate a holiday. JVbw arons conge. sHi^'^M Totf ar« lazy. FIcwi ^tes |>aresHieux. *• v TArjr make a ooise. '^'^ //x font du bruit. * >^5^ JIfy mo//&^r 18 in the country. Ma mere est h ]i» campagne. She M gmw out. i?//( c»t tortie. ^ff%«^ [tj.]; I have tiofte^ said hn. Je n^tn ai point, dit »/. i had not s«eii i(, answered /. Jc ne J'arois pas vu, le- pondii>\;«. But j^r^ re^>lied, why do you Mais, ropliqun.t.^^. . d£ (xuoi coiiccru. yuurfelf aJ}out vuus mclevs-vou* ^ «:%t|lt : [S J Though ^w sliohid Dussii'z-'yjtfj roc blamcr. blame rac, > ,^ Though vca were s*ill more Fosfiicz-roMx encore fi'lBs surpriheri. surpris. [4.] Perhaps he will izy^ Peute:re diriut-«/ qu'il Ta that he foijnd it. trouve. * [5 ] Have you learnt _your Avczruif.." appria rotre le- lesson ? 9on .^ [6] / scarcely begirt to A poiue commence-j? - raVu perceive it. appercevoir. But than / da not suiTor my* Aussi ae Ao^fit^e r^s qu'on self to be iusuUt'd. m'iHSultc, Da I teii a lie ? Eit-ce que je mens ? [7.] liaa he not been angry ^^?^til pas ei^ -- * s eeslra Eftoi ? I with uic ; »w> A GRAMAfAR OF THE !(fl Ml i ^1' 'fft Has the not been in the }i*M»t-flh pas ste ^ la caoi^ couiitry ' paAne ? Does jiJr embroider ** Bi'od*./.^//; ? pi.] Lore your ucighhoMf Aiinez vutre procba' ^omnie like yoH-^solf, says tSi T«us.ni^m€| cl{,, kiva/u Gotpr' gilt. So tlNt law of GoU re- Aiiisi le v'eut la lot de Dieu. {)iirres. [y ] Is your sis(«r at home i Votre sccur tsUetle ^ lo{*is ? iJuos your brother improve Votre ft^rc fait-t/ ^ pro. in tho French tongue ? grds dans io Francjols ? Is your sister ^ick ? \oUe sceiir est.#22f malade ? [10] Ytttt and I arc good V'oiis et moi n^ut lomaes friciirls. 1)0DS amis. She anii I werri together td Eiie ot moi mm allam«i es. the Park. sombie aa Pare. My brother ami \ go to th9 Mon fr^re at moi hmw ailou play this eveninx. ' ee soir d ?a roin^die« Hi and my Wether are part« Lul et mon frtre fn^Wi otso. nets. She and her French. [11.] She toll! had writt<»f* Do not fall \ them. jvrftr karn Elk ct sa /«ar ftp|»«iinoai la Francois. ,^?, that she Kile m'a dit qu'elle Am avoU ioUfutiy i»/>ci» Nc /r»r faitea pas dc Tio> i:-i^:M .rvv.-r." I,' lence. I gave Zfi'm the book which' Je hi ai donne !c livre fjue yon sent w*. ^^,. 4 tous m'avez cnvoye. I shall tell him ' Jc /w dirai. Have yoAi promised A/iw ? ,Lui avez.Toas promis ? 1 haie not promised her. ' &Je ne A/r ai pas promis. When will you send to him ? Qtand /« enferrez-vots ? Give wir. •:■-, .v?,vw«^-''^ jJJonnez-moi. lilrifrg «w, ^ ^:i>;^*'^?>Mfcf- A'' I A pportez- frtoi. iPofdonnez /i/i, iParlez./Mi, ;^*^''' C'est a «joi qu'il I'a promis. i- -4v .Si-lif.' Forj!ive him*r S^k /(? hvfii He has promised Mto me* Do not confide i/it i&iin. You may confide in me, ' < This hovikj^j^ine. Xhis th&Uli la not youriw •€.' |Nc vous fie/ pas ^ hi. iVous povvez vous fter a ml Ce livrc est a mot. (Cv lie li'cst pas /■•■ : FUENCfH tongue! j^ k la CAtn* I ^^ '*^ ihiok of J^m any Nc sougrz j.lui i /ni. 173 ^ *> dl, . > ivai»- loi do Dieu. fie v^ logis ? il- 4^ pro. ranijoiB ? tUi malade ? re. 4flMf# llIOQI nn^die. V 8«tli 0180. Kf pDeniioai dllc /viafoit pas dc tio» Ic livre que ivoye. romis ? )romis. l-fz-vots ? jl'a piomis. txja*. a)or«. il urn speaking tp ^int, and.L' psric /w/, el ooa pai ii v.ot toynn. m w. ..: *, votu . You gjiTe «/ to me- Vois n;» /avez dom^. [i2] NVilJ you girc it /o //ff /w; ilo«in«re/.-vc'"^ ? Th^rc are fine nra"jr;-^« ; ni!l YoWk dti I Mc tT"''»e8 ; hs ) ou sell //V>n to her ^ hi vcMwlrt*/; vo \ Sh w mr your i 'Ktr : whfn Moulri'z «»o>i roir** ; ' will you sc.id it to her *>r^v quaiid la ♦«rna^ vous ? - ^ There is a fine booli ; I gave Voili n«i beau li , j« it to her le /ui ai di»nfi^. Wnrn uill v(hi give ii /aQutnd n^i^^ /? duuiteroz<< us ? . vans ? Vuu had promised it te me. "('ous me / avkz proniU. < . V Give I/-/© mr. , ,'.v. , ,-;>Jv^ I)<>ui>cz-/f /j/i. Bring tt to me, i'V^j *: ^j*: F A pportez./"^*r.i-' Why have you not carried Pourquo; ne iui y en atez- some U her thither ? vous pa; pofte ? * ^^^^j Carry me thither. ■:.: ' Moncz y ff.^i. ^ ..,^ *^^v>«n i; Oife w^ jow*. Donoez.wV.i. -pi-.^:^ Do not carry me thither, Ne « y meocz pas. f 14] What o'clock is it ? Quelle heure est il f fth twoo'click; > ijv; ;r' //est deni heures«3< j. 4 // is a quar cr after iwo. //est driix heuresetun ^^kl^' It is half an hour after two. Jl est doux heures et dcmM^; // is three quarters after two. // est trois heures raoius ua quart. // is very fine weather. // fait fort beau temps. <.' // is gloomy, i //is rainv weather. 2 fii 11 (alt sombre. // fait un temps pluriou*. ,*f.- ' I 1 i';ti ■ .■^^-^■■. ■■-.L-..'*r ^%. ^. .<^<^ 17^4 A G&AMMAH OF THE // is time to rifo. It is hot ; it is coiU. It id qif book. It it my liaodkordiief. jft is a fioe iiouse. . They are jour peo«. T% are jomig iaOics. // Is a piif. 7%fy. are strange people. Ith eoouyhv //is not too otach. H was without di!sigii>. // is in spite of hiu. £ Id , ] ffg^ is a doaor . J£* is Ai goldsmithk ffeis i learned maoi They are idle. Jfe is a. merchant. // est temp* de4e Ut^I" .«-<■ C'est mon chaud; f/faitfiPoML litres V moiiclivit. uon :.#' Cest tJ'/tfiMtiie beM« ilMiiott. €e soat f OS plumes. O sont de jeuues denoi. seltoii. C7'«!ftt domman* ^ sont d'itraiiges gpm-.l C'est atses £> n'eet pas trop. €t fot sans dessein. (7'est oialgr& lui. // est docteur^ ou t^eit iin docteur. M est orf^vre^ on tf^eit' nn o$^ c ' f^rre. •_;.;' JHest-sat^aittf ov^^lMgsp^ vant'hoiBffie^-..- /Zr son rparesacax^ ou AP sont' des pftfessett:^'. i/e IS. iOO. *I^-,« iB dmou gWK: ^ ott flpstmt 8- Ab yob ir^Sk Off/ honore. •que . • • [lev; r iS.' J !• it T^otr lifter ? faf^ Ett.cs virire sooir f X^|^- Itii* tfeit «&t Are thef jMr boolu i TluRf.SMt«ce voa lirres ? dr i^^- [S9.]?ib|f4o«eUiiidf HI • it &sinour' propreaaot aTeil# ii tlM ctuie of^ tbafictit* $\e ; c'ett Aii qui eef !«- «tt ipAfft of ovr Aiffttr. cauM de la pt4part d* nus tttoei. mtHbenn* Those flower! waat vater ; VoiU dee fleufs^ai out lie. gtveoshe to i^ €riv« mr mf book ;^ i eaa- Doan«i4.moi noo IWre; jip . Dol nio wHIioat i^v toe peox in*f» pifi^r. [2^.] A wis^ laao ^ maftar Le sfge 6ft maitre de Mt. Di^) loakie our own Jiappi. Oo^liliUsa felicity J'M.fSrfi^. aess. A ^ise manr^ taistfufis hint* r> sage so ni^fie de /al^. w/jTi mrft«. $bti ts tooiiauch coeodted of EUe a trop %otftiitfioii iitwy A'elhmime, W« out^ht not to flatter Mr. On ne doit pass se flatter j0l« • Silvtn '■ ■ ■'■":■ jwrfflr«i. ' _ ■ '^■- % . W^\qx9» WkXj himself, IT a*d\mt <^e tui-niejne* Falsehood if odious iu iistif. La faussctie est odieuso en el/e~ ndme, v. The loadstotie attracts iron, l/aimant attire 1^ fer a sot, A man (Miuht not to fpealc Op- ne doll parser de ^r#i of himself bat with great qa'a?ec bfcaucoop de njo- modesty. destie. ^' • That man s»eak? Of liobod/ Cet homme but bitrne^f. hi rnems. fmii 1} ; I f .1* ft m 1 ■ ■' t' n^i lf(i A GEAMMAR OF TIE lwin4 Vi.» * ray themtdves. lis se (rthissent eux-mimet* ir«u livrt n«boi)j^ but jroirr. Vous ne infitit loi^ 4tt*i vm#* stjf* mime. ..'>-««|if:*:. • *' SECTION II. L-DS/ ..1, The fM|\}«iictive poftesi|re pronottiii txitnt m\'»9^ vefure the nouni to wJ^ch ihey are J«lfkid ; «»j it tl i.>y eaiiff-boi^ ; f;*eit ma tabt(|^re* In thii ceso, fW>A^ ftM>, /Ml, «reti««d tattcad of M41, /a« #«« lnofetre f«Mniti^ noiiis beginning with a ?owel #r h muu*., for the spetttifM-^of tioond : at^ my aworit ; inipn fftit : thjr &o>iiI ;. fm,4mi*' h'w frikiMiip ; sm amtU. Absolute pusseeske ^ii^Qvni ore put after 4be novo with the de&okc artic>le) le^Ja^ kt i HA^k nam^J^fnknne. 2. When suit signifies amour in French^ the BvgUsI possfissite ^pronqinB it to lie tendered in ; French hy the disjunctive personal pronoon : as,^ JTwr year sake ; f9ur tamourde'm»iu,.tifkdnqipourvolrfi.am»itr.. ^ ,;s^^ ^. When ihe verb etre signifies to keleng io, t^ «f« lisb postesslte proaoan is rendered i« Freocli by . c diii& jttnrtiTe personal pronoun : as, that house Is mine j cetts maisoneit aMoi,f afid not , at^ /« lafMis^. I^uii wbeo tipe particle ee is joined to the verb etrey the possessive, pro. noun ii comnionly used ; as, ihh is my htnat ; e'esi iHa mtttsm : M is his book, and not yours ; c'^est tonUvre, d Ifl^jof k wine, 4. The gender of pofisessiv« prononns does nat/oUjOW that of the person who spenks, or is 'spoki^ of, b«t ai^recii ^Hith tlie particular geodor pf t^^ty noun it is joihcd to j as^ her father is deadr ; /cw pere esi mort. 5* The posse^re conjunctive prtHioitn is aljivays rtt« peated before a substantive) and after a ODnjunctiun : as, my brothers and sisters ; metfrires el m* tifttri i kH father and mother ; son per e et ta mere* * 6 LeiH^^ itiieity Ic eieft, &c. in tiie masculine ged. der audtHlHtgular number^ scmettmcs signify a person's 'flfr. inin^ noins pnc4i by thfc sake ; /«tfr , ^beo tie t«8Slv« ^0- t ; etat m tonSivr«f rt rREllfCH TfyNGUE* WV due : at, we anist give every (ine kis dte ; tf ^/ntf muire ^ lAmw 4 /ial« Jm ttw f^ofilk fumber •»& Maieniiwe geitf.. iler they loBietimet figntfy i«tl1ioas : as, yoor rclatioaa and hit I* let vAm H Its stem, |' 7. Hl9^ it^^ibairy &1D. aia cennoifly raHl^lia^ ii French, by so^ Mf, sit, Uurt s as, planla have theiv pmpm erto ;- Its pk»lea oui Jemft prnftikati Bvt when it*ft or thdr bel^! ts the t«bttiati«^<|iieeedl«iK» it ia eiNimml^- rendered ia Fcenck by the tilp^hiig pronoun^m / asy tbeeie plant* Me gflMMl, I kneip their i|ualitiaa ; ces plaatea soRt boanea, }m eonBOb les ^uMki^ Thia happena when the profllBlKi faay be tcaolved liilo^aKhstwiaiTe' to which it liatfk at in d» fSatenotnf aamptc : these planta are f^ I k«ftw tb« <|Mtlte tf AcsB liten^. ti Th* conJ9ifteti«» iwsieiiti^a pronoun^ wttib the per.- <||ie dl befote it, ia uiedl iBsteai d the abtohite postessite lioaoiiii «ii jiQ aneh occasloai as the foltawltf ; an ae. giiihll^ il of. iMa; mt it m tmmuamet v* a; friend of ^""* >-/^ W ^W-^|R^S^Sr« 9* tlii Cflii^ i i t j i e tlvt p o ea ae al te pronoun Is used vhen wo tiV ortmwev mMs, relatioiih| &o : as, eone^ daufhter ^ YfttU,aai/flk^ yea,btother^ oniyflMii^fv. * 19. eia. Cwgone tisa^e niei d i i e ptoiaaastjgMBh^ mi legH j ^ e t U r tou v«rk« not iiii^l|iMa.4iMMnp«rf> w« feashH^A inte tim cei^miciiw renoad pieeeiul | aa^ uistiid ni.^-wim^yi^t yfvm^ we^^ die 4Hkitti«e itilde ^ ••» I heie yeitd iw aawi : Jtmtuiifagm M* m* ;fei 1 he has cit-my hinr ^ U^nfim^n^krelmmm- It. Qm^ ^pmmfl$k.0imLmm9vmfiits» a nsvaer a feisene) pr«i- noan «Bft«te«i^ 4sq0ti| «pha| A«a^ ii « ye»«cft tpfeahhukfii; ^ ^f^ sewm wfo^ it^ii|jtes; a^» ss a> - m4r4n«)T«d Mfe li d?flaiti«e wticlf ; «•» f heM^lNWl i^ i^lieth^ in m$- floitiach* in ny hmd^ in 1fr '-^ nat IdWiOW betaRred jaihiidtoj nciion : aa, hli father ?•«.' «%Ti«%(iaaM_., toaMs aie vsiry tti$h^ «, tort of eqvMroeatten er wi^^^mlug^ mbe. ptev^h^tDisie M M :ulinc gctf- a person's ^liH-k,- ..-■jfe. ■^% 199 A GRAMMAR OF Tflfi PofiSMtstFt ^MfMrjff nMMnmsm fir tkt ^It&iiHt^ • - ' Pmjctkm, t ll'} My honse it larfor tktA Ma mtMon Mt-plM^gglpidilt 'HMr«>jroii ifeo Nijr gavdm ^ Come md icv mjr iki>#oc8» Wiiera is^wttr bvoki Show me ^«tfr books. Juend me yomr pe*koifek file At jibMiN^ *'"^ ^^' ' '^- Avti^voui ttt'MMr |ii#tt^ Venei voirmf^ flevfv* €>!^ fikt Vfiw lit ite I * *^* Moiitree*flioi «m Ih^rci^ i'tfr sehool.felkHM aro pk«y» i^Mr coMfWigiiont d*^lii ing in the streets . jaii«iit dtui U tm. Her vprofi if quke black- Sm lobtte? cbC hm%m^K '*•' .A&fT fan is broktm £o» ^entail est «iM|l|k ^iveneitigr shoes, agf slock^l>onae&in0i tarriitl^Meiv^aii^ in^vMj^ hattdhferchief^ mf bat^ Mmt mooAair^ put \ > shirty «ttdiiP|pthai. , xrhfiatse, sl^aMri dHfeiai SWstOtdiiagi hate holes in Foi hu tumlLtaniii. "'♦•therthi' ■ ' •• ■ ■ ' ■■:^' ***- ■ Mlhaf iakceome of Kb pant i Qne sonidet aBueffi^f ^^tnaeft^ How iloes your 6is(;et do i . Commaflt se poiieivMrf MBUr2 I YoB hate my needle. Voqs arrs iom tu|uiUe. I 'H thif^ jft»r ItatJ - llst;^!^ l^AHftrt diapAu ? I I know j^et^r seiittmefits ; aod Je coitnois war seotttarns ; I joa are no aUanger to tt vous n'igooria pas &<^ I initi#. mtjHUu The Thames g9t -^iutMM** La TaiBtte eft Portia deioa «haiiiid. «^' [t. } i>o H for mv. sake. Faites.le iilM^e i^ttinovr de mei. Jo ie leiai ^MMir'i'saMnir'^ P^ r i^Mlfoar d!ii&^ £»t] lliir pen fa wit yiinrs ; tJctte pNime n»e»t ^pis # it iiiuMK. >i^;^^ V* wotu ^}illec8t#«of. Whose bo( not 8Np« I il l» A^^ oc fsatfiRei/ ilBft ^Mou Mks^y0Um(cy aadaot^itt. CsH 'vttrt eoutenu^ et a«» i wiil db it fw ;jraiir sake. joriar'Hlir*;.. % v •^ pas k MM« fRKirCU TONGUE. 179 • ' ■' ■ turn* oaAf* Jt i« f»jr psper, ami I seilttmrtis ; or«« pas /fir ^,5 f ii ii'est m^ et M» Cetie algoiUe Mt-elitf ^ vMt / not Ce |)ftpi«r est a mot, et nM [4. J It It ray opintoa and C^ti mon seutimcot ct iir cfV II a af^faet^aae^inMi la gat. hiititoltilfcr. de ia ett d*arge|it. H^e j?aii<«Hid jMf /book I Is Aeea^voat la nMftlif reiv' not tba ijf|ie v«r|r beauti- earaet^ n*m apt4l : fill. -. bien-beaa?' ■, :i ^':t/^^Oy He fiisde|;ed bia coiHitr;. I! a IbM rebbtiip jn| f^i^ bottse to be re|>flait^v i^t do oMIipag^ ; let cbaai. .. Koe«it^ aad li*t tUaatioiL bret of la silualiaii m sent are fine. bellet. there it a fery lai^e gar. II jt a im tf^t««riil jardiit ■' 1;»: I % i '.; t ▲ on AMM Aft or tm idea b^likid (kit lioiise ; W«ll pUat«d, tiiir fruit Wlwre 4kl you buy this t.j Brother, kiHt Itoe >ir pen. iSster, I eaniHit ; I «ia writ^ ih^urf iheme. [10.]Meioti»faaircttt. He felt from ^ horife^ ind hridceiirt<^» llwy hMne cut dT i(ii leg. He CMiiiot waik out ; the ji^t^ljui «#«Bed ^ feet. fM yM«r hflotids, mouth, mA'Ute, ptkittA xhf Auger With tny needle. Xli.jHiDd%gHrt8. lie ^liMd 6a the htfy to h^oiNiMii. derri^re ft* ttufltoft ; Itf •rbrt* ta fdftt 4f^bice plant^B, les fruits m liiet ($ieelleni. , ' Oi^ •rez.voufl achet^ «e li- ne ? L« feliitre m 4M trdf»bo0Be« Che«]ae itAt A trr agr^meni et M» peineik 14 ee piiltdAhii^ m eltittiion : it ce eoraoU touA }qi ^iAire. li^Brt de lA gAerre a W dnu gett. II 110 ^ pliiH l^is dhiM u •HAAtfcm ; ii iji tok «Q|t lUi^ di|l%etti ^ C'eslitlNipetittliMitd, qti A Mir tWAAMldlllb* VoRI AB ATbii^ 4id <(ind /nr IhrlHilIlN DrIMtois. He Ifl ope Hei fie| n* qii^ J^elM pAlff, Am soHir ; j*ih»h iwiithAiMei |J 8*e8t fait ce»ptt kt chc. tetfx, V6tt*iw ftA««i( Ai t^fe. II tomba de clieval, et m eittia isy'^uJyAe.... . - .\. On Arf a cdhfi^'la JAAibe. II oe pent sorttr ; la goutie Iwaed^i&^piedf. LAf^^tFoa/ 1u lnaiD8,.4f bouilw, M b mirage. 3is ate Attis fjiqiii 7 3fmi-dMBbi iml Afei.vo«i jMfeitt He CMHMt Jtaad ttpoR Aw IS* p* peat it iBMir ««r ut 9W fftVe AM liT 4M Ibr'ft E&lille» « pain l» j?«i liM« Hmm^ IsH' ^ avi^ iV5'-.'\r.-j» fir niii4 i« «#1«teil with » Elto i /'mlgmmmi$mm^ AlW Mgt^ a*cN f at aw9i« ,s*' 1. incd iij • dyidieii tn *«iili»iwiiir6 -,85, tltis aum. tint «r6«bi6 ttt htmno'ty, ctmfilMM* I& th«3p are li&eip»e joiofd io iIm mii* jiaaipj»«r to thj) f^^nofiiiittlf 4. ^rmi^yMi^i^ky «)|i, «idl o^. He. la tie sant of ri^^, ata^ fpaanicdWf the ver1^fH»l>»laa^e i^Jki m rbdefDdln fmutikhf edU^, stlUfpu^ amt^i mt^ ire narcf i^aiate^ :^ 5. Qm. Bt it)Aa. hcmtit lie. whtther tbtf Im sepatatei lift Cui^ or,j2ilt3kfewmetiai*t cfogmtljF wndered m Flreiicii lyr |^ j»f(hpN|i} e*^ 4» e*etf He 1M4. Meotdrng a» tkc ver^feiicei* tiif«ii»|^i|i^^ 'j^ m iMfioUive lbliow«d ^y fMC itai «i«t«r aaed ; ai« Utty wmo paoobtid aribcdiditi «e, If it c»— 1 Hihrt a m l i iw -M0a4 ; ii» ^ f «i fe f cIhv ii^ftt^U Vi*% $m rimk. CSi ful ii mmI iMiCir* neuter WrtM ; M^ It fHl Mc |iMr. wbtt pleMi* «■.: auA befbre i^e ve»l|ii whm it ii the iiomimMlva^of iMr vtitr. ' la otli«r«tMt m ^ b ttstd. f. Omv -Cir i9 net wpMtvd in t)i» befete-iMiiliaiirA CMt btfa#0 an id|iaoli«ey> or ^«i^ pftfU(.'i|»i« ; a0y what i am eiijf big, «» joit b ftttc/^s 4 Qm< CS00i*,(i^ Cflibi tha^jr axe mowtiaief relative te a ftinfiie ilMAb t an; Ob iil aK ag l eiaai, mi tafri ijfwrliie Oik d» "Hmt, tpeek^ug ot' %iy wa^ la ^1% HriiaHWW. ' »8>iaiewiae»- they are liot r«Mlivo lb a aM|^tiwiNii^'4iil^ito»i|Ni> tiiU»» j aa rtrM% t ii» ;tbi«,aaa« cr/et. gencfaUy sig- njfr U» actbWjM t i afa aa ■p ah m. iOf). an we^oAeft •^ealljU.ot abseut ip^l*«b'A pii pattc abuveni nal del abaeav cdeciiu^- "tfliiie. OtHi «{Mltr4tfjp flfnltet- tlie action wMtb it going t(> be li^- ^Mmm k ' litm.jilim'n' immm »a>pri>a jroo* a nan diM a h •! -wH* ■- v tiMllct.: [f.] HM Mitt ii v«rf Ami. Cet bomke est tr^-fantas^ne. 7%0| 4dM^ It *ei^>«n^iUe.' (G^ enfMi est ttdsoiiaia^i^ . De jroii knaw wb^ Ims hap. Satez-voas ee qui lui est pr^ PfMHd t» him [ot her} ? ti%k ? Has she. bhtiirtt ^4Mi w^&^il Vons a-t.eI1c montie ce qui^oxk •1 was fjyreiLher I > : ' laiadoou^ B Tou will oever guess ^balf. Vous ne deivineres^ jamais ce was said of you. ^'on a dit de voiis. Guess whai they are ahout* Devinez ce qu'iXt font. i ■ '\ t 'i y.-^ il i i u$ Jl: QftJiMWAE Of TffC 'I Mow <«fiw- miMi *i lit 22 jp«B !• Mis M! (M» mi r&dic. ««t k«ow fii^ jroa n a« Mil |pi» 4» fMf v^t [3] TldT WM wriiet Mm-C^tr kmum^ti tt W ibnu •cll|>il«i^i41>|it«rybotfjr. de lout If mondd. T&f^ jMf pte pit Ib t|^ iff Hi. O/ §mt99U «iU rali9ir» Ti^tf WMNSB MO very ecu C» Icmom*./^ loat tr^s.^i» prMoM. iMPkitiifef. Thut MM to In th« wrottg. DW huMne^iil • toft. 7'^0/# afifilet are good fotdi poiniiBi./d ae^ talont Qolhiog. rlen. . ., Give roe some of Autpnn. Bcnncf^Biol d^ ^» jfiXmJk {4.] iAr «M&f bttirats lito C«Ai» fw if aMt lOA Mil Ml^ fri«ad, is iHKvoftl/ of ^ iod^d^indtle*. friendHbiif. T&fj^ ' wh doftpito j|e«f»iji§9 ^^nm giys v^fpflsoBl k sdfo. do aut ^oow tJlo v«lue «•« a'ca coMMiMMt pM oflt. . lepHi. iTtf n»ho shoos eompMiy, is t Cthd ytl JtH»tll bde leac ^1.^ wit^ their iot^ am hap. soft, aont heatisiB. He who- does not stndj) wUI Cr/tti f i/t B^ofadfo' pas, as n^vcr be learaed. sera jamais Mtaat« He tuho did it^ was puoished. Cftui qui a lilt isetB^ a fti puBi» :' 'jb/u-;: »^ FRi;N^ iarpriaio/r. r8] Does ihit please you ? Does /W matte you angry H That surprises me. What do yon think of it f Tuereir thought of A&o/. Keep thk^ and give me thai* Did you write that f 1 do not like that. That is wonderful. Ciux qui ^t filit lonrp thftmes, out ite liScom. P«m6s. CeuM qui ptroistetlt dtre heureui) ue >e soot pas tbn J6ffts. Nous devrions toiijours nous •ouflbktif dbi ftoiii ie teus$ par qui nmiA'aroaa M On doit enconraiter lea ef. fort4 de ceux qui s*appli. quent aux aiis et iui sefOnceS;' Ct qui' ie fiehi^, cUti^ si uau* Taisel^umctir. Ge qf$fun hounfite homme dolt rpi^ettor, e'ittU perte du temps. Ce qui le f&che, e*§st )le n*a« voir pas r^uMi, ou c'elt ^*it n'a pas vdussi. Ci qui me lejouit, e'ett de ▼ona avoir vu- et lonte ▼offe fluaiUo co bonaye sant6-. Ct que je TOus dis, tH vrai. €e qu* elliBVOosndit, est ftnj^, Ce que vous aveg dit^ ni sar. praoant. Ced vous plait.il ? £?«/« voas flithe.f.ll ? Cekt me snrpreml. Qu6 peoses.vous de cela f Je n*ai jamais pens^ d ceia^ Gardez teti, et donnez^moi eeUi. ATcz.vons £erit celat Je n*aime pas eela, Cela est admirable. -'■». R 2 ' KM A GRAMMAR Of TOK \-k • t.'-^t*- ''. «' \- " ■ \ SECTION I. JtELJTtrS PkoKOVNS* ]^ The relatite pronoon giti is the nomlaatiTC, aild'^ thraccasative,. in speaking of all sorts of objects ; as, the stone which is here, la pierre qui est ici'j the liouse that •you' see, la maison ^i-TOUs toyee. £xcept Ihatf^tit'is used in tlw accoMtiv« inst«ad'of: fice» when ittig- nifies what person ; aSf je mm (|tti twus atres; Iiknow-whom you lot e, or what person jou Jove ; and when it is gOYerned by a, prefM>sitiol^; 'as, enipiii turqui, avec ^i, &c. Id th* last case, leq^iel, «o* may UU- vi«e be used. 2. When gut is In the second' ease^ 6f eonei After any preposition whaterer, it is applied only to persons, er objects nsed as persons ; and therefore It wdold b^t fault to say, o'est la maison de gut je Ton« ai parldj It is the honse of which I have spoken to you. In this case we make use of duguel; di laquettt^ &o. or dbiil, which is used equally for all objects, and often more properly than tie guif or Juguel^ de laquelle, &c. as, c'est la maison 4fe# je vous ai pari^. 3. ^ gu> is sometimes used In spealLing of animate ob- jects, thud^h they are not persons, or objects nstd ss persons ; but, as we can never err by making use of «s- quel J a /aquelhy &c. I would advise the learner to do so. 4. The relative pronoun, though not expressed in En. iglisb/ooiust always beexpsesied in Frensb ; as, the msn Tou see, I'homme ^ut vous voyez ; the book you speak iof| te liTre J(9n/ vous parlci. S.- i6t. when nui is eoulyocal.i ^'-Dy? noun is in tb^ second case after a substantive as, a coU' ricr has been sent tp court, at whose return* •••on acD- v(j)e lin courier a (a cour^ au rctour daqael'»"Sd\j) cH 5. Lequel, hquelley &c. arc io be used instead of qui, hen *hn rplatiye utOm I -t niBtrCH TONGtnET. im -»•*■. cts as, the le house that irhem you lote, ^ •.prCfMnitioQ'; U fiio. may i&«- net After wf I pertotttf dr r wduld b^a il paridi it is In this ctse jm, which is Iproperly than maison ies^ ^f animate ob* hjects used iu Ing use of M- >r to do so. I; when the relatire proven ei presses a choice ; at ^ will you see ? k^\ or laquellet Touiex-tous voir ? WWCW ressed in En- .as, themsn k you speak istcad of jwi relative {'!"*• ; as, acou. . . • . on A CD- $, Speaking of things, in wkieb, it$ nuhat^ to ^hichf at which t Mt what in the sense of where, wherein, or wheitf are rendered in French hy oii instead of dtmt bquel^ h». quelle^ &c. as, the house m whieh, or where he liVes, Isr nalson oii il demeure ; the end at which he aims, le but 9ii il tend ; the century in which he lired, le slide «d it vifoit. From which^ from what, are rendered by d'o» instead of duquel, de laquelte, dtc. as, the country from which I come, le pays doit je viens. Through which, by which, are rendered- by j^or-ou, or j^or lequelt &c. ,.7. The relative pronoun qudt is used caly in speaking •f inanimate objectsr. Aqud must always be used when it has for it*s antt. tadent ce aad ihe verb eire^ or rien-y and is followed by a noun, or verb gY>Terning the third case ; ar, it is to that I apply myself, e'est a quoi je.m'applique ; there is no- thing, to whieb' 1 am not disposed, il n'y a rien a- quoi |e Be sois dispose; ^.i ^. De quoivi used wKcn it follows immediately r« and the Terb eire, and is folloWed' by a noun or a verb go. vernini; tl^e second case ; as it is that I complain of, rVjf * de quoi je me plains. But after rien we make use of dont i at least it is a great deal better; as, there is no- thinf in the world of wKLb God is not the author, il n-y a rxfA au mondc n I reijt. upon, la raison snr qtioi je rae fonde. ^ However, in nioat circumstances, auquel, duquel, sur lequtl, Sic. aaj, and' even mast Ue used ; but these practices alone can teacli^ TO. Oss. Q'us ii used instead of de qui and a qui. It happens m)t only when the second or third case of a personal prononn comes ira> mediately before it, but likewise after any other noun, when thw stu- trace begins wiih ce and itre • as, it is to you tiiut 1 speak, c't»t d vous que je parle : it is to happiness that I uspiie^ cat uu bonheur que ■ il i .i m im A auKntAt; 07 the ^«t^ : it if fron tUr^iftiMie, that < etycet approbatim; c*eirt tfi-" jn^ 6/ie stte/aUMid» r«p|ir»bai«o». TKc true role for dUtingaishiug tbit in wben que hastha »igniEeatloj| •f the conjoiiction that, not of which, at$ you may see by the tipretfoing •flnimplet ;' kgr'tttut rale 4iere is no danger of bnng uUlalefk. ' nlince k ikay appear* tftiit m auck caaet fu« it to ke i»uka4 «f e« as a'^ei^aiif- tlf n» rather tham a 4rclati v« prunowi . f : ^KLAtm JhioitovirSitttsxtrLiftsii tctk tak Si6wii4Jk^i'' 't'"!-. i-i fl.] U is the Lady, <(;i&o C'r^t^, «»»r tt>^bien^ctrt> I kaow «iy&om you Bieao. Je saisi ^ivous ToulercHrt. You do not kf»ow tuko it ii. V«u8 iw &avez pai |tfi c'csfe |>o you koow whom i love ? Savez-voul qui jfmiae I "^ llLnow atubom she loves. Je sais ^i ei^ Aive. $« Ij^.] He is a friend in whom C'cst ua ami etv qui je m^ 1 put ny coofideiicc, ma confiaupoi He lA » person in whom you C'iest uae persoooe a ^uf^bo may coufide. peut se fier. phe is a Lady against whom C'est nne Demoiselle eoitltt ^r. nothing can be said \vith qui on nepeutnal parler "tHith. H>ii*'^^;; airec%6rit6, I know the person ttt whom 3 Q connoie la personncatx^ you were taikinjf^, qui vous avez parle. It is the Uitfo of whom I C'cst Thomme de qui^ bo spoke to you. donty je vous ai par;e. I Me n b Xlhe TJie The JIM ai< Wf I ki yo Tbea Um IkiiiJ he r ^"^ K wa *hn i wUl There laa you. [3.] The dog of which they Le cbien a quiy on auquelf on ■{^] T f^^rt cut the ears. a eoupe les oreilles. Tli^e is a bird to which it Voi d on oilcan i qui, on is necessary to give some, au^uel, it faut donuer il^i thins to eats mariner, [4.] It is the horse he spok>e C*cst la che?al duqrtely c to you about. dtmty il tous a pa/te. [5.} She is a woman in C*est une fcmme sarlacoB^^* vtJkm- belttviiMr tlieM h Dothtag to ceiiMiM^ . ^ H««i#iiMi€li«ilt wliDte lib« nour and (MrpUlf «iiiQoli [0.] The ciBoamst«i<}ei you •reki* t^ftdotifttrhc isin. The end ske alms at: Ue i«i: tbe fane friUM of mind, aad the sane tealtw Biantti whkh bo Jia* aU ways had. 1 knomr the ^ace wbmc» you eome* Tbeae are die raaBOfify j^nMr vthk^l OHi^Uide. :';^^ BwB are hit dfecouriesy i^ .«NMhe>hwl»iia(ii*^ «uii&^ f ha? e pi^seed; he gained his pokM. {7.] rilt «it&i» i tti thiolu iag aheuti It was v'that he applied hiBi» kul^^ ■ It was wb0 she eihttrted h 4«ei, ' La daagvr el^ il se titoiite. Le hat omc elie Tise. >. idiaiianoD e^ cite defnei^tw II est daflu la wftme ditposi-^ tion d'espfitf h dans teS' m^mes seaijmefis, e<& 11 ar teujoars 6t4. Je sail In idMse ^otf toiie- Tenes. VoHi ka ndieiif ii'dii je pon* eltts. Voili usi'diiMHife <^.«i^ iL iflrtniiek y«ihl te viUiB, /A^ sil j^ Jeiaif ]eiiMjreM^|llN«^ii parvint & ses f»as. C^toit ^ ^ il s>a^^tto{t. C'^toit a ^ eile {"Mhpr^ Ml. C'est a fuoi je penseraf^l ;^ II tt'y a rien «^ fadr Je tie sois disp«rs4 pour V4»us> obliger. VoUd i^ 0ist it s'a^iV '■"''• ■ 'i " Cnest i^ ^11 M plaint ^^^ C^est de quoi je soil fieh«? 11 a'y arleu dbw je soil phis^ fache. II n*y a rien Jont ii se plaigne^ davaotage. H, ft; III: 1. till \ I ii 1 'i IIO A GRAMMAR OF THE not c»|»M« of. ,->'' *i \ he i»Ilfi>«fieiidfai« llrilK; I I 4a m^ fee i[^ itflltf 3« at viii» jpet j)n^ fM ii» liUmdofyommaf teljr en. C^Bit nr |mi vmie HP<0>>^ It is M argumeitt f^^iutiitlK Oest u ftjiowbiwlnl er tiMBek nowMfrec fivfll'A^a. peinifie tl. t if pill Itbf fri« ft is I) Deetibit am efiit, jy mi63^L m mm r^> .mtt^,'^^ mil teyi^ tliemli mr Pemedf . Hi|?||'«F,|P9iat 4e iwlilu. j^iMig {penpte «ie mMch. : ■.. gii^^ t«(^:$m^m: 'jiWi- ifttt iiidined. . liiMildNHb wikil mm p»antAbA* Ja^pI'liMide.;' . j' - «i«epiM» 'ifiil'l^iHifJiAi ' -- ««£tfS I' eottviiKiea iiiin. v :^b^j(^ j»J1li ^^MMMiWee. |l0ij UitftO'yot ^«iii^;X^lei(i^vMi^M^.fMi#4 shatlypeak. Ill^ii»liec^«Eaf II»^f«|4jCSM4 #»§ «9t .^ Hit " mlMi it*. 'Broeilt* It it frtai Jili.^{|N»4, ^^^heVmk 4»tm^ml^*lit « Jltei«fietir«d to jBMiy i»- litot d'eaiUlt. %t is liis htemt^ tkaf he Cm St wt frit* ftf'ii compiains oL pMat It wM by my frieiaidy ^f €• ^ par ttos Msi fpi" I WM betrayed. fits tiabi, ^ Jt is tpi coa^aual study ^ that Omi ^ une «tiid» 'CoaUn year bitkllker «f»«i hit dJe ^^ 9otFe lrdf« diii neat learning. ses grandes connoiQUBCtt. ^^ ltl»t»i)»y sister, iiat ydJaC'^st i ma sseor fM.fSM •^ have givea it. Pavez donn^. Ill is to h&tf that yoa ikafc C*«st i elie ^ug tOui sTes 1. ^* ont f out ? Both ai S'- ': '^' spoken. ^^m^--^ parli. n^it is from ber, fhat t expect C'est jd'elle pu j'attenA tbatMioiir. s^^. „, . cettc grace. ■■r-'Vr 3<,3-y:,'J.a,,.;i ^:r»» ^'1- SfllOt rottsdtc r4 4 isbstint Except my opin «^leT4 5. i« llirsyal n, wide ks voits <-^' 6. »7 iiM inl iKhst? iV!Jl< ;i 'V :S,..^.iJ, jmSIICU TONGUE. m f mr, fM 'tin I 'mm 90tK\ * -^ • ■ ,' . ' [I if fo tnde^ ike It wpm pett «i cMomerce «»1l It b to tb« pffottctfoti of kit Oeat 4 l» prntection de ici frtesdfy tiat ke owa^ kis anit ^*il difit m fortHiMii ft » by the putilic, 4«r,i|r !• C*«9t dv puklic jf*U «>* *P* __^^ppro?ed. C''^t-. .PMM»^«. iX^V'.' ■- ■., ■■ r ""A^^ •^'S:A ?.♦.• ON flaw- P^^ BECTIOH V. r? lutMVtoe^TQMr FMMwirs* ]. ^0| at ltittorr0g9tlT«9 Is applied oDijr to things, and; fu only, to pei«0D8 ; M» what do yov say ? que ditesi^l ISiiiP .^bfttft I v what are yoo gidnndfed ? /ir ^imI tous fiMidc9i«TOtts ? S tfSfli lahbiit wkai do^ott }mf yoarself ? J^ ^ ?«vt nillea* in iieritffil I***** ^ 3. II fMl be ii9t immtd^ely fotlpwed by a Terb, it )aiitf sometiflitt b^ osedia Ibe first case ; as, wb«iit lk«re ? fMi de plus ^f^^ I It fomatictes eip^ef^'o&ly f tflmtiea of the tttbid % "at^ how / yoa are angry ! pn^i / foits fttet ftchAI ,v s A "I -^ *i ■ -*■ Mtt ^ly'tt IV' ^ 4^ qtMy ftr. are said of pertont and tkingt^^- ^ jail it lo be obtertedh^ tlOlt fw/ is always followed by it's •A^ Iptf^ jtlMkltaiitfaro ; as, wbat ommi is it ?• qud honme ctt.ce ? . . ^1 Except wkea tfc« noaa: was expressed before ; as, this is tiidfr '^coBiiMi'l*^ oplnieii I «hat is youvt i i ofli bob sehtimeat ; ^uel tre lrif« di|«(f te Tdt^ f ;oDnoi»iBC(sJ ^ lt^9te. it alto iaidi»f penoitaand tl^ngt ; if# tar ;u« ^r|||wiya.lolift««ci b^r a geniti|^ ei^essed or ood^rstood tt Jtt, which of (he two will you hare ? Uquel da deux y(^||« tOttS sfe»|jj| ^^j ^ ^^ ansaFerr to «*«f ; lequet^ to 4!9i&«fi&. Uw j'atU 4 't; 6. IP%ofe, sigpnfyisg ^ «f^oii» a tiitfig beioiigs, b, trans<^ jb^ into French by the datire, a ^ai ; aSf whotf bousa ii that ? ^ jai est cette mai^a ? '^ li i i [■^-^ It v^i. ▲ GftAMMilK OH Tfltt 3* ni fl .] What d^fon fly I pMtf do you yMMt i Whai do you «sk for I ^ IfW do Tou fSMur ^ What ia the m^Hti f Mat9Mnm^6<^l .^^^ dit«i.toM ? tfjirtQnb«liei.fo«t I ^ < i ii i lad> i>Ton8 I ^M eiirt|iMi»Toat ? "® 'rt^iir|ir r^rf Of f^*ui. etffU;ifmt yf cIlordlitt^iilM! ' ' Who tpoke to you f '^altiii^fl»^^i:jfii^f: WAoiK do yoM «i«pMt.? j(y» t0Um,^^ f miitittVf 09^ iNTMt tvbm )M»e jrQ&^Ija* fi^c fflDMMirilVi Cttll fiewa ? . iioiiv#lic t Who is cone ? $ft «ff.fip j^Mt vcpNi ? 7o «»itow d<^ y«i ^ tlijTfiit doiMlft;«# yroj pest.efle s^altendre \ Qf^hat is IWttflliinfQ ? ihfum pai4e.U} f ^or «nhir is ahe to aogty I ^ qtni att^ella ai JuUo .' * Observf hcrcu that wstPad flffitc. weoflfio mike 1|M^ otftiit^' ce fw. In tfiis case tAe iMirsotfal pronoan cnoe* before die verb. t iMteatf; ^^^- i(^ *^ «nal MxaOak inleHo||iti«S*» «!- ** ^quiUj i pfOps? -to .xtSw f»i £S»- (^s qui iu iu* riuaiirimi^if and .fyi^ m«ce f ^'\ ? nt I; ; if. tx "i . .elfot i |oufti& temps ? i|M^ of f»Vl<' t»Q(6re tK ffvfhat are thej so jcaloui ? 2)^ ^»oi aont.ils si jalonx ^-^ 7 what do you impute the ^ quol attribucz-fous fa fault ? 'X . fautc ? How sliall we ipeod our A quoi nous . amuscrooB. time ?' nous ? [3.] U^hat is there more glo. $uoi de plus glorieuz qnt rious than to die for our de mourir pour notre pa* country ? trie ? How ! would you decoite ^oi ! Toudriez-tous me me? • • t" ^'- ' tromper ? "* [4.] What man spoke to ^tl homme tous a parl6 you ? What woman hare you ^elU femme a? ez-voas Tue ? seen ? What lactf has she bought ? ^elle dentelle a.t-elle ache* , tee ? ' ■ '',."... What books have yon read ? ^els litres a? ez-TOUs lus ? What sort of shirts does he ^lUs chemises porte.t.il I wear ? This is my opipioo l ^hat is Voild mon opinion ; ouelk his? '^:~:':..'-mw-1^'-^^^ estlasiennc? ' •■"*^;!.:-^" This is your lad?ice ; what is Voil4 TOtre avis ; quel est Ic . hers ? sien i It was her sentiment ; what C'^toit son sentiment ; quti was yours ? ^toit Ic vdtre ? ^^ What grammar do you read ? ^elie gramnaire lisez-TOus ? . [5.] Of all the grammars De toutcs les grammaires % which have been printed, qui ont 6te imprim^es^ i ■■' to Kohich do you give the laquelte donnez-tous la preference ? preference ? There are apples and pears ; Yoil^ des pommes et des itthicb do you like best ? poires ; lesquelks aimez- '- ' ; ■' '-^y V0U8 le roieux ? _'^-^.p'":' ,->> ^^ Which 'ot these two oranges Laquelk de ces deox oran^ ^^ will you have ? voulez-vouSi ? ■'■.■''■< -^iJ^:'^^' \lVhu.h of these two \^A\e% Laquelk de ces diiix*^^^-damef do you think the hand- trouvex-vouslaplusbelie,^^ sotnest ? '' ' Which of all thq gramma. Lequei de tcus ies granimai. > |iaas has written most riens a 4crit le plus clai. clearly and precisely ? rement, et avec le plus da i/'i f precision i ■A, . i 104 A GRAMMAR OF THE irhUh o( ' (he books you DcS Hvrc« qn« voiis avrz log, have read do you thiuk letqueb trouvez^vous \m iht most useful ? plus utiles ? ffis] Whou penknife iij this ? j1 qui aai. ce cauif ? IVhoie pen is this ? Whose bat is (his ? Whose garden is this A qui cbt cette plume ? A qui est cc chapQaii ? A qui est ce jardin i \ Jt,; ^>^^«t :-v^^^^ /- InSIUNITS ox IlfDErsHMINATS PROtfohiJS'^^:]^l 1 . Pd> v», aucutty nulif are three negative pronouns, having the signification of no person or nothing, and require the particle ne befote the verb -, as : nobody ■poke of it, aucun^ oi pat un, •r nul n'tn a parte i nobody know^ it J aucutty ot pat un, or nul ne le taii. Nul is never used in an interrogation, or with a negauon be- fore it ; for we do not say, nul ne le saitM f a. Obs. Jucun is sometimes used without a negation, in phrases of interrogation or doubt. In such a case it may be rendered by quei^u'un ; as : of all diofe who know my reason?, is tilt re any one who has blamed me ? de tous ceux qui saveot iQe3 laifons^ y en a*t-il aucun qui ai'ait blame ? .^ Obs. V/hen aucun and nul are followed by « fecond case, or a substantive either expressed or understood, they muft be in the same gender as that second case or substantive, but not in the £ame number ; as : none of them has been Uiere, aucun d*euxf speaking of men, or aucune d*elles^ speaking of women, n*y a itK These three pronouns, used as pronouns, have oo plural. 4. NuJ and aucun are sometimes to. be looked upon as adjectives : this happens when tlicy are joined to a sub. stantivc ; as: he yields to no reason, il ne se rend i^ ^vru^f iftison ; she has no pleasure, elie n*a aucun plaisir. Nul may likewise be used, but aucun in such a case is far better. ,i-im^ -^i :_:.^^...-p.:i' -f:A^ M^frn'^imf h 5. Obs. Nul is a;)so a law term, signifying vcHd ; in such t case it has a plural, if the noun, be in the plural ; as : the pro* ceedings are void, hi procedures sont ««//?/. 6. Chacun^ each, signifies every person or thin^, has no plural} is ladiSiereDtly applied to persons and things; u ■ t-* .»* FRENCH TONGUE. 1^5 0U6 iM B ? .. .. ironouDS, ingj and nobody ; Dobody cgationbd- egation) in ; It may be nyreason»» qui satent icond case, muft be in but not in |iere, aucun of women, 18, have no , upon as I to a sub- se rend a-.- \un plaisir. 1 case is far in such* J tbe ^lo llhinK, has Ind things, and follows the gender of the noun iof which', it is joiUJed, or related ; as, each of these two wula lor 10, The pronoun ftwi/, irsetf by itself, is always put in tbemasculioe'singHlar ; as ; almost every thing is uncer* tal[|^iji>^hia world : presque tout euincertain dahs4e mondo' Sondi^times it has the fti^itification of ehaque; as : every day, tms lesjaurs : every moment, a tout moment,0fc. -^t we say, h chaque Insimit, a chaqtte miuutey every instant^ evv"* -'fy minute. , ifr/'O^s, trSttr sometfiweV signifies althon^h,; fojlowed by a word denotina the quality, ofRce; dignity, trace, caiiing, circum- stance, &c. and mudbe followed 105 A GRAMMAR OF THE •W'^ mood } as, 6ien que, or quoiqu*il soit savant, &c, la. Obs. When the word that comes after the verb does not denote the quality of the subject, theis nofwhhstanding, or aU though must be rendered in French by hi en nue, or quoique ; as, although you make use of this physiciani oien que, or quoique 'vous »vous serviez de ct midecin, X3» Obs. Tout, in the sense of although. Is indeclinable, ex* •ept before a noun feminine beginning witli a consonant. 14. Obs. Tout sometimes signifies quite, entirely ; as, she is in every respect lovely ; elle esf tout aimable. In this sense it is likewise decHnable only before a noun feminine beginning widi a consonant. ': . / * ' •'^"' 'i-' J^"" 15. Obs. When rien signifies nothing, or not any tbing, the particle ne must be placed before the verb ; as,. I have secA nothing prettier j je n*ai rien vu de plus beau, But^ when it signifies any thing, and i« not preceeded by an abverb of denial, the particle ne is omitted ;, as, have you ever seen any thing so beauufui f avez-ifous jamais rien vu de si beau? 16. Plusieurs signifies many or several. It if always plir. fal ; as several have believed, that the World was eternal, plu*ieurs out cru le monde eternel. It is sometimes an adjec> five ; as, many friends, plusieurs amis. It is declined witli the indefinite articles de and a. „,i..voi.^ .^m^., ^^vfA; 17. Obs. Autre f other, is sometimes an adfective t as, another licok, un autre lin^re : sometimes a substantive, wlien it is pre- ceded by en, to which it has relation ; as, fen connois un autre, I know another : sometimes a pronoun ; as, another than you,. un autre que *vous, — Autrui our neighbour, others, or other peo- ple, is more commonly used in the second and third cases ; as,. of others, to others, tVautrui, a autrui. — Ni t*un ni l*'autre, nei- ther the one nor the other, will have the verb in tlie pluraJ; whe- 4ther it*eded by aa Lve you ever u de si betutf ilways phf- as eternal, an adjec* clloed withi as, another en it is pre- usttn autrey tr than you, other pec- cases ; as, \l*autret nei* pluraljwhc- jrthe other la raison : fautre^ onc lutual action It is always \t l*un Pan- el i'autrei itsigni* s, ttoth.arft in the wrong ; /// ont tort Pun et l*autre or l*un et Pautre §nt tort 1 it always governs the plural. Both of these two words are declined with the dcfiDiie article. Take notice that Pun et Paul re comes always after the verb ; »i Pun ni P autre ^ and Pun et Pautre, in the (list case, go indif- ferently before or after, with this difference, that, when they are put after, the personal pronoun goes always before the terb, though not expressed in English ; and, when they are before the verb, the personal pronoun is omitted, though expressed in £n« gjish ; as, they are both in the wrong or both are in the wrong ; tit ont tort Pun et Poutrr^ or Pun et P autre ont tort^ 18. ^eJque^ some, signifies iii (be singular, that (he ob« jcct is talit'U indelerminateiy : ax, he is always reading some good book, il lit toujour^ quelqne bon livre. In the plu« ral, it expresses an inde(crn)ind(e number of objects ; as^ he is addicted to some vices, il est adotme h quelqttes vices, 19. Obs. Sometimes quelque signifies not the indeterminate number, but the indeterminate qaality or qukntitv of things, and answers the English expressions, nvhate'verf although, though^ ever so muchj &c- a?, although they are learned, quetque sa'vans qu'ils soient. ^telque, taken in this sense, has no plural befoie adjectives, unless they are immediately followed by their sub- stantive ', as, though they seem ever so rich, quelque riches qu'i/s paroissent ) though he has pet formed ever so good actions, que/-, ques belles actions qu'il ait faites. Hence it appears, how much an author is mistaken, who says that, quetque can never come fccfore an adjective except with etre. Observe that quetque in this case is always followed by que* or 9«7, which governs the following verb in the subjunctive mood. %o,0^s, Sluel que, whatever, is followed immediately by a verb in the subjunctive moo^ It must be separated into two words, and then quel has kotv numbers. and genders, and que is not repeated in the fbllowing part of tlie sentence ; as, what- ever his intentions appear, quelles que paroissent ses intentions | whatever I am, quel aue je sois ; whatever they may l(e, (speak- of women) quelles qwelles puissent etre. 21. ^elqu^un^ ia the sense of somebody, or any ):iodfl is tsed lu all it's cases in the sineular masculine only ; af!, somebody has told it to me, quelqu'un me Pa Jit. 1 know- it from somebody, je le sais de quelqu'tm : I have given it -y w que ce soit^ '• '- } 44. Obs. %/ que ce soit, whoever, or whatever persod Is used j in all it's cases } as, from whoi ttver he may have learned Ityde qui que ce soit qu*il fait appris ; to whomever he^ may address nimseJf, a qui que ce soit qu'il s'adresse. When this pronoun be- j longs to a sentence wherein ne precedes the verb, it stands for 1 nobody whatever ; as, I shall speak of it to nobody whatever./ nen parlerai a qui que ce soit. Hence it appears, that quoi ^wf ee si>h is used for things only, aod qui que ce soit ior persons. > ' Observe, that instead of qui que ce soit que, in the sense of] wlioever, or whatever person, it is often more elegant " -•> us'- <^r\ly\ iui ^ ; as, whomever you may se , qui que vous *vo*rZf < % efore tkp pronouns //, ils, to avoid the hard sound * ' ^c'-i. ^ "ac,^ Obs. ^ti que ce soity'm the sense of quiconque, whoeverJ €r whatever person, must always be followed by //, ellcj kc. or| qui^ aiid "ometimes by both ; as : whoever it may be, he ^#ill be , discovert; Qui que ce soit, il seta decowvert : wnoever deceives j me sha.' bt. ^Ji-.-Ovc d, qui que ce soit qui me tromte^ il sem di^^owuetf ,'. i, t r^.Eer quiconque, il and qui are omitted ; as> ?«'• ^0. Metne is sometimes an adjective ; as, the same a' thor, k msme auteur i sometimes it answers io selj\ \ iPKiNoir tonqub;. ^9 ntaaie {okf Uid oase of rstood ; or le r hi thii imbers, and iny IhlnR of ; auroitMt or r to an id^t^ ui ; whatever I used only in e used in aU ver it may be) he may speak, lay apply him- pronoun, wh«n yunctivc mood ng example. « ne before the ler ; as he tailc} person is used , learned it» mime, 27. Jt Hi sau quif I do not know h ao, is nsed to at? it'q eases In the. aino^ular only for ^mhtsoas. ^^e nt sai* qfioiy I do not know what, ia u^ed in all il^s cases for thiDi(« only in the singalar. j^g ne eaiequel Is iisi*d in all il'a num- bers, cases, and genders, epoakinc; of persona or thinaSy. and Is alwayi i Jliwed by a sulistantWe. 98. They, i'(on!< , men, we, &c. arc somotiroes ' ren* dercd by r ;'; as, tHey« op people ; talk ; om park c- i»ay I knr>w i,' fi f(.on tavoiinf ;r? »?- v ^--ii^v**.^ f(iwiir!uiiM on ligoifirs tt ; in thh cMe th^f ▼erb, which i«« in Eng- )iire_ vff b must be rliauged into the active, and put in 'he same tense as .h Erglifh ;. a«, great rejoicings have been roiiJcjhu wet'k ; i>n a fait ctttt svmaiuc ie grttniies, r^ouitsuneeit utstead of .dn- ^rauics ji/atuinuuiet oni it£ JaiUi. ItrDETXiunrjirM' Frokovks E'xEururiRD for ihe $cho^ [l.] ATo^©^ spoke, to him. iVb^or/|r knows it.' W(»V^'iiiv: jlucutty pat urip on lui ^ pjirl^'." ■ '" JfucUtt, pas ttftj" ^on' lo sUtlt' ^ueun.poi uny ou I'a vu. jiucun, pfu un^ ou ptiit^s'en vfj.nter.X^ I am a De tou^cs Ics gratAmaires, jty ne m'attacfie J'< air<^ eum. , . . . ' Je u'en ai jamais i\\ »n, jOU Mucutty and not nul. '^ F.ii avi'z.TOus jamais tu .{//«• auc^n niiif ne ■ f ■ . ' .^ nuT, ne nulf n§^ nuly M uoinkT, qtit> • 8e« rtil« %i, of ilie persoual proa^-uns, at the end of page 170, ibo A GRAMMAR OF THE [2.] Is there rbo Y en a.t.ii blame qui puissc aucun rr#is mere any oiUf wnonas i eo a.t.il auci/M qni I'ait 4:' teeait?. ■v^^-u^-- v...'. ,,. V, ^^-'v cointner9ans. y^ \frl saw na«tf of thcin.i .; v'.;. ^^ Je n*ai vu aueOn d*cux,'*j^r " /^tf masaftiim : aucutu _,d'el\c9^ /or the feminine. f 4.] He has no rest. ;^ II n a nul repos,— aucm re* She has na uneasiness* of Ella n'a ttv/ifir, on aueune , in. ipind. / . qni^tudc d'esprit. I ha?e iM interest in If,, ,! ;f Je n'ai »»/, ou Ai/csn, inteifl en resla. [5.] The senteDce was an- La Dotitence fut declaree niilUd. ', nuffe. ■■'.". ^''.M-. ■ t 'i' Ail their priviiegas are an. Tons letirs priTileges root nulled. nuts. -? [6.] Every one lives after his Chacun vit k sa made» ^ ^ own niauner. ~ jIU men are faulty. Chtjcun fait des fautes. ^.JiU men desire to be happy. Chacun veut Stre htureuXr Everyone of them was sur- Chacun d'eux fiit surpn's ^i prised, , ,.^^ , ^ ^br the masculine i ehacuni - d'elles fut surprise, /or /-Jf feminine. I know two ladf^ ; they Je connois deux demoiselles; have, each of themj two elks oot chacune deux miilf ^ tj^oust^d pounds a year. livrcs sterliug de rente. ^.^•jThe two clerks have, each of Lc9 deux commis on ecxil jT themy written four letters, chacun quatrc lettres. each of themf to his owt chacun chcz soi. kuoit). Eac n ID Put P' Pl [7.1 Nobo Nolo nie Noboi Noboi Siiet He m Shed [8.] J ail ter Bid e dou Go( Did e henc ligio [P, 10 AHh ^ Every i to ch [He mis I >he is shado^ |He is ca 'an a r thing. am di you p felsiii ''t^y an see hei 'Wry (i fie goes tvtry e FRENCH TONGUE. iot .'■w 'v t qui puissfl ruM qui Vait m des 11? res rez prates. u des Diiincs L'z parie. aucun de cci hf d'cux, for tf : aucunt \e feminine. OS,— aucun re- ou aucune, in. spril. fiit declaree iriTi^egeS mode* fautes. Ire htufcuXr fi»t surpris, r prise, /or iht IX demoiselles ; t««/ deux Doiil* U de rente* imii on eciit lettres. S6 retirsrent loi. Each of the shires sends two Lcs provinces enToyent i^» representatiTes to Parlia- com deux depntes an Par. ment. lement. Put the books in order, and A rrangez les livres, et lea put every one into it's mettez chacun k sa place, place. V..'- .' -•■•-v *'-..' '^'^V [7.] Nobody tallis of it. Personne a'en parle. i Nobody has seen you. Personne ne tous a tu. Nobody has guessed the Personne n'a deviue i^eoigmtw meaning of the riddle* Nobody knows it^ i; >' * Personne ne le sait. rH '^''f Nobody suspected her. •. Personne ne la soup^onnoit. She told it to nobody, > £lle ne I'a dit vl personne* He mistrusts nobody* II ne sc mefie tit personne* She trusts nobody. Kile ne se fie a personne. [8.] Did ever any body know Personne a-t-il jamais copna all the properties of mat- t«utes les proprietes de U ter ? matiere I • i. Did ever any body eeriQusly Personne a-t.il jamais doute doubt of the existence of eerieusement de Texistcoce God? deDieu? SDftt 1^*^ ^^^^ ^"y *"^*' conrpre- Personne a-t-il jamais com- ' hend the mysteries of re. pris les biysteres de la re*- ligion I ligion ? " 7;/.. ?.. -r [9, 10.] ^is lost. a Tout est perdu. .,vi^ . All is quiet now. Tout est tranquille ^ present. Every thing in nature is liable Tout dana la nature est sujet to change. au changement. He mistrusts every thing, II se mefie de tout, ■ >? * * * "he is frightened at /wry Elle est.epouvanteede/on/. shadow, ;;f-i;;;: ; : ..,-, >^i: i?.;i / -.J^j j* ; ijipk^. '.^" Jle is capable of /wry thing. II est capable de toni^^pi^-' an a man be sure of every Peut-onetre silr de lot//. 1 thing. am disposed for any thing Jo suis pr^t a tout jce ^*il you please, i tous plaira. .} . -ivTi,^^^ e is fit for any thing. II est propre a tout, j^fr ^| hey are against every thing. lis s'oppos^t A /««*, see her, and speak to her Jc la Tois, et lui parle touj ivery dsky, lcs jours.. he goes to the play ainfkost Ello va 4 la com^dio pr^s* ivtry CTcning. que tous les soirs. M tiJU ^^' ¥ .;^0? A'^GRAiMMAR OF THE ...^■''•' ^o|j(j-ftirs ifnto a. passion 4verj II »'«i»porte i #0a/JBomenf,l^^^ {!■..?. jS!.H4«iiWjl. [11, 12. J Though theia rich, Touf rirhe y«'il est, ou ^wJ . >>> -he. is not the more con- y»*il saittidic, il u?cn ty'^'^' Although he seems angry, he Tout f^rhe j«'il parott, is uut realljr so. ^ttot^u'il ptroMse fkhf^^^^^ ; -: 'r-^- f^/i-jj: f-.i.A ; il fie i'cst pas. '^; [1 3, 1 4. ] She was . qmti Ellfc fut /^m/ epouraJiiee. frightened. .:..vi/;.«^;.:*j,is :t«ji.^if!»ii-: ■"^y ' She lives ^t^^oZJr in retire. £ lie v It fo«//« retiit^e, Pekt • nit»nt. [15.] t saw «o/;6/ff^oioreex. Je tdxir'un va de plus eitrl^^^ ' ' . traordinary. ordinaire. £ . ^ * He apiiJies himself to nothing. W ne s'apptiqne 4 rr/*;!. ff »* « ^ ^-Nothing iSiroure siLDprisin^. Run ji'estplus suTprcnantl *"^^' I da not ,ft4)Sji)ect you of any Je ^ w ..vous aoiip^aooe J ^^'^ ^ if^w^. r/>». l»8tru Ti itjs' there '4»y /^'//^ mixrei woq^ Yv a^t.iV eun vtte pUis adncn I doubt whether Any /i&//7^ Je doule que run soit pll ^ "> bo^more useful, .^p;.-«-.:% .*- ,i utile, ^i>^:m^, *>-^^' ■ ;;■. ■** "' [16.] M i;::Nous nous couboissona /*f/A» •y-.v I'autre*- >r r lis se trompent I'utklautrehr hey mistrust ^n^ another, lis se mefient /'i/n //; Vautrei^ is uReoiuinon for two au* ILestrareli deux auteitrs «Ie / ID kttbcr of them studies hey hate one another; \^e kuow one another, t" ;„ r'pi«« i^^^ eke** ««'"^^"-- ....or,^» I thors, toi speak well >oJione dire du bie« / 'vn -. n<:tl« plus a^^ [ou wrong ane another ^ [jue nen Bolt pil !''•- T'; ' '■■ST' ■'"'''*'* tfe*,,'r nesont pasde ion. : -^m- iont -de ce set rtage dt^plusm ifaut Heplus'uurs a plusieurs. lu le livre?. ous uKautrt? I'airacz pas < IjeTOUs Cttilo'' Wr*. ■''^■^ }e speaks /o 5a/A. ^ Nausinous fionB i'un ^ l*auu^\, tre, ' Vous Tous faites du tort /'tut a I'^autrt*^ .A-s/r ^rufi -. yii.}.^t et us not hurt one another, Ne nous nuisons paai /'«» m I ''autre. r.; -■ •atb of them is good. R L.'un et Vautre sont boa&ip V':'^ ' are bad. L'un et V autre sont maiivaiaJ ^h shall be punished. lis seront punis Vun et Vau^ I 19 >.^- I'auroit e !ic£ of them shall be re^>Ils seront recompenses I 'urn warded. et I 'autre, do not Cite for either, Je ne me soucie ni de> Vun niS de / ^ autre. le complains of ^0//^. £I1« s^ plaint de I'mn et d«)V Vautre^ ■•'^^ '• ■ ?= ^•H'l'"^^^^,'*-" '^• c has been cheated by ^0^;^. II a cte trompe par(|/Wtff'i: ^M I' autre. '■*^--'' ""^'^%u|^' confide in both, Je me fie A / '«# ^# a lr'ataifff'^^^% Donnez k I 'un et a V autre, '-t ?j^ £lle parle a Vun eti^'autrt^v^ me J'ai re^w muiewe money. "">''*'«•"'"» hasfeUen into recoiyed i somf r-f 5 [^Mmm^: .#'- ■j;;v.i!r vots. eN II €st tomb6 'dans ^uefjuee er* reuF6, ,->.'j*;;^;.tj.!».'..^.*iv£i4.iiL^k*, ' ■' ■- .^ 104 A GRAMMAR OF THE :.,■'«('■ m ■ t Yoo are mistaken by iomt ihilliDgs. ^ Apply yourself to iome use. 'ful work, t-^^r^iu/v -'t- i ' {19.] Though you pretend to be ever so bold. Though \\e be ever so rich, he is very covetous. Whatever happy talents a man may have, he ought to cultivate them. Howemer far I may be from you, I shall not forget you. However rich you saw tliem, they ai'e now Tery poor. However cunning they ap. p^ar, they are sometimes deceived. Though they pretend to ever ^ much honesty, they sometimes cheat. Whatever friends he may have, he will never »uc. ceed. Whatever small rewards you may give him, he will be grateful for them. Whatever riches you have. [20.] Send me some news, whatever it may be. He shall be punished, whoev* ^ er he may be, ^Whe(mr you may be, they wm render you justice. iWhaiever his sieter may be, I will never marry her. ' Whatever her sisters may be, they ar« not so lovely as she is« Vous vous trompcz de queU ^uet scheltiua. Occupecvous a ^uelgue ou. vrage utile. ■■' u^^^■^■■J ^elque hardi qui vOus af. fectiez d'etre. ^elque riche qtt'il soit, il est fort avare. ^elquee heureux talens ^s'uo homme putsse avoir, il faut qu'il les cultive. ^uelque eloign^ que je sois de vouSf je ne vons oublierai pas. ^uelque riches que Tons lei ayez vus, lis sont d pre- sent fort pauvres. ^uelqui rus^s jrii'ils paroi>. sent, lis sont quelquefoU trompes. ^uelque honndtes qu^ilt pre. tendent ^tre, ils trompeot quelqucfois. ^elquee amis qu'W ait, il ne reussira jamais. ^uelques petites recompenses que vous Itti donniez, il eo sera reconnoissant. ^elquet rlcbesses que vooi ayez. Envoyez.moi des nouvdies, quelks ^u^olles soient. II sera puni, quel qu'iX soit. ^el que vous soyez, on vous reudra justice. Quelle que soit sa saeur, jc n( i'epouserai jamais. - Relies que soient scs sopurs, ^elles ne sont pas si aimi- bles qu*cUc. cz de queU ^uelque ou. r fOus af. soit, il est alens 911'uii roir, ii faut • ie je 8015 de M oublierai >ui . tti TOQS lei soot d pre. res. i*il8 paroii. quelquefoii I pt'iU pre. lis trompeat *il ait« il ne r^componsN mntez, il eo ^ant. vs qae toqi |l DOUTClieS) loient* qui\ soit. FRENCH TONGUE. 90ft Whatever tbese conditions Relies que sment ees Gondi^ may be, I Avill neter sab- tions. je ne m'y souniet-. -I> init to tlieni. trai jamais. Whatever tbese goods are, Relies que soient ces mar. rhaudises,enToyez.les moi.- Ne Tous fiez pas aux pro. messes das hommes, quellee ^tt^elles soient. seud them to me. Do not rely upon the prom- ises of men, whatever tlicy may be. '' -*'^^ He will not hear of any ac- II ne Teut entendre parler commodation^ tvhatever it d'aucun accommodementy may be. quel qu''{\ puisse &trc. I do not care for him, whom Je ne me soucie pas de loi^ «tvr he is. quel qu''\\ ^vHt, [21.] Is any body come ? ^elqu'un est.il vena ? Somebody ioid it you. ^elquun vous Pa dit. Did any body speak to him ^uelqu'un lui a-t-il parle ? {or to her ?) Did you see any body there ? Y avez.TOiis vu quelqu'un ? She knows it from somebody, Elie le sait de quelqu'un. He took it from somebody, II I' a prls de quelqu un. ,#- She mistrusts somebody. Give this to somebody. They s poke to somebodjf. He wrote to somebody. Some people say. Some believe. "^ 0'' Elle se m^fie de quelqu''un, Donnez cela k quelqu un* ..^ Us ont parle a quelqu un* .^ II a ecrit k quelqu'un, ^elqueS'Uns disent. !^elquesmuns croient. /|f' ^'^ I have this news from some Jo tiens cctte nouvelle de persons, quelques personnes . I told this news to somebody. J'ai die cette nouveUe a queU ques personnes. p2.] Some of the prisoners ^elques-uns des prisonniers made their escaj)e. se sont evades. ^^^ I know it from some of those Je le sais de quelques -uns de who were present. Ceux qni etoient pr6seas. He has given bread /o jom^ II a donnc du Vidm ^ quelque^ of th • ^^ - ^y of it. besoin. rez, on vous I of those who were in need uns de ceux qui en vpoient quelqi Mi # sa5ur,jeM ^aVs.' ■'•yi' it scs soRars, )a8 si aioDit* Some of the robbers have ^elques-uns 'dcs voleurs orit been taken. cfe pris. #" ' ^ uns d'eux scroot ^lelqi pendus. -^ ;•,»>:;: ^!f I X i I.: m m mm I I' 'Ft •1 ?• A GRAMMAR OF THE w Do yoti know any uf tho&QCcnnoissfZ.'voni quelquet-mff radii's ? de ccs Oames ? I know /omtf of then. "^ J'eii connois quelquesmunet. , Will you ha?e ^iw/ of these VouU'Z-vous quelques.utut de oranges ? ^. -g;,;; tes oranges .' Oive me some. Doiinez m'en quelquesmunes Uny some of those apples. Adietez quelques -tines tie ces pomnici. Will you taste anj of them ? En touIcz.vous goditer ^»«/. ' [23.] Whatever may happen, ^wl qu'i\ puisse arriver, il he is always the same. est toujuurs le mime. Whatever you say, it shall be ^ot que tous disiez, il eo so- so. ra ainsi. Whatever he may undertake, ^oi quW puisse entrepren. t he will never succeed. :,, • dre, il ne reussira jamais, know every thing he is able Je sais tout et qu'W peut /aire. to do. Do whatever you please« Faites tvut ce que toi?< i ou* drez. I do not care for whatever Je ne mc soucie pas de tout he may do. ce quW peut faire. ^ Take whatever you like best. Prenez tout ce que vous aimez le mieux. I am ready for whatever you Je siiis pr^t a tout ce que toqi please. voudrez. She applies herself to ^v^ry Elle s'appUque a tout ce qui things that may be useful peut lui Ctre utile. r>;t,H4;;« to her. ■-,. ., _ , ;,;>.,;^ ■:.;;;. ,^ (N^; ^ Anything he writes to you, ^voi que ee w«/ qu*l! voiis teil it me. ecrive, dites.le-moi. Do not talk of any thing. Ne parlez de quot que ce soit. lie succeeds in whatever he 11 reussit a quoi que ce soit a|>plies himself to. qu'W s'applique. .^ ii& ^h- . 1^4.] They will tell him the On lui dira la meme chose, « same^yng, to whomever he qui que ce soit quW s'adresse. may4^ress himself. Hei|oe& not care f|>r any per' II nc se soucie de qui que ce son whatever. soit. -. \l I saw nobody at all. -. Je n'ai vu qui que ce soit. He knows nobody. >*^ II ne counoit qui que ce soit. i K '■•rv'J- '«' .^. i^ .'.i: FRENCH TONGUE. *?';^ ;■••■ f jK)7 queS'Vpet fmunes. . s.utus de tmunes s tie ces iter queh rriter, il , il eo so- ntrcpren* \ jamais. ;>eut faire. OVM fou* )as Je tout ouB aimez ;e que TOUl tout ce qui le. ,i SUHA. lu'il vous loi. te ce soU. jue ce soh cbose, « s'adresse. qui que ce \e salt, te ce soU. that hiin Jc ii*ai parl^ a qui que ctroit, Ne parlez a qui que ce soit. ^u que nuus soj^ous, pcu votis iinporte. A qui que voos paHicz, no dues rien de cette affaire. J^« que vous soyez, je no vous crains ]ms. J^« que ce toil qui vous paric, reuondez lui. i/, he is io the J^i j-wr ee soif^ il a tort. ??:> ■* * • ' ^iconque par lera Anglois. s(-ra mis a I'aniendc. 'tl? ^ticonque ne saura pas sa le^uii, sera marque. Le meme autcur a fait d^au- tres ii vires. Jc lui parlerai maumeme. Ecrivez Totrc Icttre vous. meme, ' lis se font tort ueux-mm^x. On dit, on parle, on croir, on s'imagine, on ne sale pas, &c\ Pout.o/f savoir ? ,|^ u^, Vous a.t.on parje ? **^^ ' Peut.off vous demauder ? Vousa.t.on vu ? Peut.ofl passer par cette rue? , Peut-o/t voir les apparte. . mens de4a Reine ? \ ^ On dit, on rapport^lMM asf^^^ sure, 0* doute, o/TlFpTpl pose^ Off I rasolu, &c.^f I spoke to ;ko5tf£^ whate'ver. Do not talk to a/^y body. Whoever vfe may be, it is nothing to you. To whomevet you may speak^ do not mention that alTair. Whoever you may be, 1 do not fear you. [25.] Whoever he ii speaks to you, give an answer. Whoever he isy he wrung. /^/6o«vrr speaks Eaglit^h, shall he lined. Whoever does not learn his lesson* shall be marked. ['26.} The same author has written other books. I shall speak to'hi..i^ or to her, lay self. Write your letter yourtelf. They wrong them«/wj. [27] People say y people talk, people believe, people fancy, people do not know, &c. May / know ? Has any one spoken to you ? May /ask you ? Has any one seen you ? May w^ go along this street? May we see the Queen's a- partmeots ? It is said, his reported, it is asserted, it is doubted, it has been proposed, it has been resolved, &c. the letters have not yt,i hem rccdved. i'i Gn na pas e^corc re^u les kttresji. , V '^'. ■ t ^ ^M 908 A ORAMMAE OF THE :ii It P- Great pr(>parations have been made for the rueeptioQ of • • • • 3rcat rejoicings were made at St. Jaincs'8 on the Queen's birthday. Great news was received by the Jast oiaii. ,/> i;^.v- •.' a. A courier /&«x^^^ff dispatch. cd to the Flench court. // is beliered, that war nulll be declared against France. // was said so, but contrary ncrs has been received this week. .A ^y-c ':: :4.; :-- •'■ ■■:' On a fait de grinds prepa. ratifs puur la reception de • • • • On a fait de grandes r^jouis. sances d St. James, lejour de la naissaoce de la Reine. On a rc^u de grandes nou. velics par i'ordinaire der- nier. On a d^pSche un courier k Ii cuur de France. On croit qu'on declarera la guerre a la France. On ie dlsolt, niais on a ro^a des noavclies contrairei cette 8eiuaioe«ci* > ^'■'r '■' ''■i'r ■ . ^ :, SECTION VII. ---'V^:-^:^ V- *'•*■*' ' ' ■ i ;ih'J' ■'ti^hf > SfffPirjifQ pRONevNii le, en, r. k..\\ 1. Ay or soy is fometimcs rendered by k ; as, give it fo me, dounez ie-moi ; I will give •/ to you, je vous k don. UjTierai ; I think *o, jc /Ip crois. Vs^? -^^v- In some instances tlie Englirh for le is not expressed. ■■^'■- '''!•' ? -■I ■ I Jr» !t.'- %. Of, from, 5X>/M, ^r, ^out^ tifc himy her, it, tbmy sotu^ sny, ^e. and thence by en ; as, do not speak efit tome; tie m'cn parlez pas. 3. To iX there, therein, in it, Jn them, about it, ahout them^ Isfc. by y ; as, i will not be agJiinst i/, je ne m'jr opposerai tf^as. Ihese pronouns are called supplying, because tbejr - fctai^illibot only fur one pl'eceding word, but sometimes for Hhole sentences, and are chieliy used instead of the pro- nouns, Jut) ell^filhtji eties. 4. Z.^ and ^fl are supplied either to persons or things, i aisd y to thiyn^s only ; except in a few instances, and in] ' ail answer'^ a qutstiun ; as, Do you think of me ? Yes, 1 do : PenseZ'Vff^s a mot ? Oui^jy^ensc^ y.'W^ iux. 8 pre pa* reception s r^jouis. s», lejour } la Reine. ndes nou- inaire der- ourier k It iclarera la on a re^a cootrairei i. ■*.■_ " ":t Sj give it fo otts k don. sed. : J,yi/ tome; \j op po serai )ecause they imetimes for [of the pro. OT things,! ices, and in I me ? Yeij t^Rmn tongue/ 909 * if, ^"^ put aftor ce\ when we speak of things, is declin. able ;, a«^ ^rc these your horses ? Yes, they are : Sontmte Ih votcoevduM f Quiy ee let tont. I say when we sptalL of thio£ii ; because, when we speak of persons, we make use of the personal, proDoans ; as, Are these your bro. thcrs ? Yes, they are : Si»tt ceJa vot freret f 'Ouij ce ionf iuxyAna not cehssott^^^^^-^^ . .^ ,, It is tlie opiniofi of several, pat /^is declinable aifteran a^ec^ tive in tR& If^iinint singular only, m the following and similar expressions spoken by women ; I was frightened, and I arti so still ; jefiisieaisy^iet je /^i'SUis encore : of others, that it would be more proper to say, et je le suis encore. Vaugela^y the Abbe Girard, f^jMut, tjb^ Fr&kch ACADEMY, &c'. are for the latter ; so that tHere can he no doubt, . iUTTLTlifG PRONOUNS JEXEMPZIFJSD FOR PRACTICE, i a*i«>v-?^'»ftH*» ^\^ THE SCHOLAR S ■ ;\-\' [l] W»]] you gire U him X^ lui donnerea^^Tous ? [•rhpr?]^ ,,..,. ^ ' lUv^.jQU jgi^t^f M ^^^ [j>f ^^ ^^^ ayez-ious doone I her ?]-.?■■;■ fc,|^j.|^;.,^ i-, ^^^:-"^if^Hmii &^. i- I have promised U him [«r Jei^ lui ai promiSr i^Uts^^ir her.] . I have not promised , i^ .i^im Je ne k lui ai pas promts* [or her.] .,: , ,\ Have you, sept it.Xo then ? JL^ leur a^CK'^ous envoy^ I I have not sent it to tbem* Je ne le leur ai pas envoys* Have you toW #/ him [or Z« lui aveauvous dit ? A^'n:'' I have oot told it him \or Je ne k Ini ai pas iMW'^^-ti her,] Ifli Do not tell ft ;him [or her.] Ne U lui dites pas, - Do you knovv it ? %, t-ti'te' {, Le savez.vous She does not kiio w it, , ,|i , E I le ne /4(Hii||tPas. I do not know tt He told me somethi you know it ? Je ne le sais pas. ag, will II m'a dit que|oue choie, U You>ez.rous>i)Rroir ? Ask hlin, I will ao| ,teli it Demandezwf^-i^i, je ne Teui -you, ', pas ¥Ous /f dire. „ T 2 l'J';r afl) A 6RA>/r pUint. ::-^n^''^'} ' Hois ov»«rjoyfdfl/ //. II sV« rtjouit. ^' ' 1 will not hear any mi&re Je nVn veux pTtir entedrfre /ihoat it. parfer. What do yon say /o it f QuV« dit6s-Von^ ? "\ "I I wonder at it, J'en suis surpris. /.v^-'^ •vS. vShe wili repent //.. ^« ^ '' Kile sVn rcpentira; jl am sure of it. J'en suis sAr, llavfyou any money ? Yes, Avcz-vous Ab I'argent? Our, llavcxow/, ' jVw ai. • ' She has no^e.' ||r« ;^'- ' Kile nV» a points " '■^^^' ' Will yon join '^with us ? En voulez-vows ^'.(C ? :iH; t 1 comv tien Do you kEWW any thing ©/' saveziybus ■ - -c^« ' it ? .^Hfi :%^m ii''^ ^i V. X chose ? M qijcfijue W'9 it. FRENCH TONGUE «• I fcnftw nothing o/i*./ Je ti^m lAii ricn. ^^ m / avez-TOus ete ? , / .„ u 7^ av«z.vDU9 pcn«ie r. v ^ Je ny al pas encore 6't^* Ellet a ^t^ forc^e,~, . ^ T a.t-il conseoti f 3K f/. Je n'^ consentirai jamais* ^ it, lis s'ji sont opposes, -^ More, N*/ peosez plus, .*f^ f^ ,r He shatl know nothing t>f U. II nVn taura riea. Have f ou any ^ . , ' [3.] Ha? e you been there f Hare you thought of it /, _. I have not yet been there. She was forced /o iV. Has he consented to it t I shall never consent to it. They have been against Do not think of tt any more. The government have wisely Le gouvernment y a lagC' providfed/onV. ment pourvu. The King \«ill not be against Le Uoi ne 8*jr opposera pas,. it. I am prepared /or //. ■<'*-- J*y tms prepare. ^r'-'^' * Will you go thither ? T voulez-vous aller ? You pay no attention to it, Vous n'j> prcni'z pas garde* Mind tt. ' - ■ , Pfenez-jf garde. ' ^ I shall mind it. ■ ^ jt^ prendrai garde. I have added many new ob- J'^ ai ajoute plusieurs nott* servations to it. veltes remarques. ' '^ [4.] He is a traitor ; do not C'est on tiaitre ; ne vous y trust to him. , ^ fiez. ^^as. * v»». , He is an honest man ; trust C*tst un honn^te bomm^ ; to him. fiez.vous-jr. Do you think of me ? Yes, Pensez-voub^ moi ? Oul, JV I do. pense. ! [5.] Are these your books ? Sont.ce l4'vos livres f ttu*y Yes, /^fy are. co sdnt ri7«. i'Arc these yoiir brothcra ? Sout-ce U vos ff ^r^ 2 Oui, ^> Yes, fhey are. *"*^^ « "* *^ * ' Ce son! «/*. ^Z ^ ' Is it your couftio ? Yes, iV is. Est.ce rotre cousin ?. Oui^ •v. ... /'• j»«a .tajm >W'f.>r:|^^^tit-;tfr,a«; " /■■.k»Mr-'--tHAP. IV. V -won ^i;>«>,, •- • .t,:ja; .:' ^ icWII Jf^D UBSEHVAtlONS UPON THE DsGtEES Ot » if^JJO^ ',/! * grees of comparison we mean different manners of express. , Inff the Quality of something, there are three ; the pusi* ' tifr, tlkf comparative, and the superlative. 1. When the adjegtive is compared in an equal, higbftr, pr less degree, it is called comparative, which companssn is made in Freo^^y placing before it ^/u^, more ; mo'iM) less ; 4^, (6 \ mam as, &c. 2. .^«x an4 woi/ix are commonly followed by the par. tide gu£y jtM] when a verb comes immediately after it, that verb Ifas the negative particle ne before it ; as, he was richer than was belicTcd ; il iioii plus riche ju'on 01 eroyoit. '^tirW' *.'; FRENCH TONGUE. HiS ^;r3A.>«'r},fi«' Except, wlicn the following yerb h io the Infinltl?*^ mood, or preceded by a conjunction, m must be left out ; •ft, ho finds himself more uiulisturbtd in the country than in tovrn ; ii so trouve plus tranqnille k la campagne| qui ietre i la tille, or que /'il v i?oit k la ville. '' "''' '*''*Z 3. Sij so ; /an/, so much, as much, as many, so many, comparatircly u»4!d, are always used negatively ; as, yoa . are not so rich as he, vous n'ctt pas si riche que lui ; he has not so many friends as you, il n*a pas tant d*amis qui Tous. In other cases, aussl or autant^ is to be used ; ex- cept in an interroj^ation, where st and tant may be ascd either with or without a negation, according to the in. terrogation being aiTirmatlTe or negative. 4. When ///«, mains ^ autant^ tant, are immediately fol- lowed by a substantive, that substantive must be preceded by the preposition dg ; as, more money, plus J argent / less credit, moins di credit ; so much paiu, autant dt peine / 10 many rings, tant de baguet, • * * ;| b. When the verb avoir ^ or etre^ is before ^/tf/, moins f iutanty ^c. and the same Terb follows que, the second flvwV, or eircy is more properly left out m the French, though it may be expressed in the English ; and we are contented with qut and the nrnn^un ci:!}', cr S"^ other noun ; as, you have more money than I, or we have, vous ave% plus d'argent que mol, or que nous ; or some. times vous avez plus d'argent, que je n'en at, or que notu nen avons ; IVliss ^. is as sensible as she is, Mademoi- telle A> est aussi sensee qu'elle, and not quelle est. Ex. cept when que is followed by a conjunciioo, or by Jhe tame verb in the infinitive mood, with a government nter it, or a preposition \ as, you have more pleasure, than if you had great riches, vous avez plus de ptalsir,, que si vout aviez beaucoup de richesses, or que d^ avoir btf^Hcoupi^de richesses ; yciu are more happy, than if you were married, vous etes plus heureux que si vous etiem marie^ or que d'eirt mrii* ^ - i"^ 34^ ^^ 6. When plus and mvins are acIve^|jC&Df jnuuDitity, or meet with, a noun of number, the word^^tr, %Iiich im. mediately follows more or less, is expresse^L^by the pre* position de ; as, he has more than tea guidpit^ U a plm ^dixguinee*. >..*! 314 A GRAMMAR OF THE n s ^ /. Whea the quantity is raised ta the Mghest degree, t . depressed to the lowest, it is called superlative. ^ 8. The definite articles, ky la^ &c. are put before plus .'^ moltu^ melUeur^ plre^ &c. ii\ the superlative degree ; ant ' E | nfhen the superUtivc is followed by the noun with whic 4the comparison is made^ this noun must be in the sccon case, as : he is the best of my friends ; il est le meilkur wus amis, or c'est le meilkur de mes amis. > .^ 9. When the superlative is followed by a verb, tha ..verb must be in the subjunctive mood, preceded by ^, lyJont^ or qve, as, the most happy woman alire, ^ Jtrm J^ la plus beureuse qui soit ; the most happy man that 1 know l*iomme le plus heureux queje connoisse, ^; 10. Sometimes a quality is menttoned in the hi^^hcs f: i^egree without comparison ; and this is donie in French , ^by placing adverbs of ex.a^'geration before it ; as, vctj * jrich ; tres riche .• very politw- 3 tufj^oli : extremely ob]ig< 9d ; ittfinimifU cbligS, t> S C n S > id > H H *: -"-^ tiu ■< '•' * . ■■;•■;■■ u «^t . <\ h t- ^^t 1i ■.\'\ '\''i ';' I s'iV T •»,.A. '1**; -.:*?:^ » V • fV (6 ?.B ' «• e r a •t H ► H <1 H •;;:ii>'ii-»j ?:•*■:< I'A.rr FRENCH TONGUE. V'., r !:.':—> A '.,pTj. ^•^>^ '*imi^^' '■'%5'*»:| S K O tlW r 3 91 s H. H g ^1 <4 ^ ?5 • 5- -'',:y^\ ;*#*!: t> g • ir 3 ? O o S > > HI t4 .1^ 5 2.B n I- r on a ♦• H pi H H !JS ?1S ? s- 2. 5 B f' 5* 5. o 5 q ST sf S "• o » - s 8. 1 ^ B a p ■I E* 5" v> -tm TS "O s s 5 S ^3 *^ ^5 ^3 ^« ^M* C C (S C o" S" w cjD CA <0 e s 5 3 5 9 n ^• e B o o 9 o s (4 v>> i^* »•• s;' s = i^ r»-^-% 5 o D ») (« (B n 'S.'H.'H.'H. B* e e* B «> (A OB M S^JT 3 B S S B C ft ft m p p ^ B S (A M re re '""'^ I" St. 9^ ii$ W §, O)^ '11 \!-kJ g.iHJ^irf:ji.r* ''^f^ •I ^ . .A\*' .^i^^' ^'^^ •■ ■ ■ . ' 4* i*,»-. r ^ji }'l-:- .1 ■■11 ■I ■{ n 'am'^ S15 A GRAMMAR OF THE .i^ ■?*•"> ' ' r^ H ^' ■"' '-■ 'K;" .'<^ • ^';'^i:^ ^^:Xl:r rjSri LSGRMMI »F €0MPARlS01f SXEtifLltlED tOR tSM teM§. lAWS PkACTICE, «y'. "^'Vfifu^it; [i.7 London 19 mtre popu. Lend res est //(// peuple qut lous thaa Paris. Paris. France is larger than Eng. La France est plus etectJag land, Ireland, and Scot* que l'Ans;lelcne, I'lr- land. lande, et rficos^e. The streets of London are Les rues de Londres sontplus wider than those of Pariti. Urges que celies dc Pans. . My snuff box is prettier Ma tabatt^re est plus belie i^ than yours. €'^ ^ que la votrc. My books are dearer than Mes livres sont plus cheri tyours. que les vdtres. He is more idle than his bro. II estphs pare^seuz que son ther. fr^re. Your father is richer than Votre p^re eat^/vf richeque ':"'.' his. ■ *::; '.' ■■" - le sien* '^ ^t''.^ His house is greater than Sa oiaison est plus grandt| yours. que la T6tre. ^2.] They are more forward lis sont plus avances quej|| than I thouji^ht. ne croyuis. He gave me more money, II m'a dunn4 plus d^argcntj than I asked for. :'. que je ne demandoig. You have met with more ob. Vous avez trouve plus d'ob h ■■- stacles, thaikvou thought, stacles que vous ne pen sicz. I have found it easier, than J'y ai trouve plus de faciliti I foresaw. que j<* ne pievoyois. They have more friends, lis ont plus d'amis que votti than you believe. ne croyez. He has lost more^ than he II a perdu plus qu'il »*< has won. gagne. Tou^J||v0 asked lor less^ Vous avez demande moiu than was your due. qu'il ne vous etoit du. She has jprked m«rf than £lle a fait plus d'ouvragt iier taflF ., > «' ^ qu'on ne lui avoit pres? fc- • €li •" crit. ' . ,^..-: «/, he is n( toyoi have n thoug w*. FRENCH TONGUE. 217 •t rsi ieg§- u peuple qut plus etecdaa leUTiG, i'lr. Icosoe. indres soriiplus relies dc Pans. est plus beile I wit plus cheri '6S« esseui que son it plus ricbe que It ^/tt/ grandl] le. lavances queji plus d'argcnt smandois. >uve plus d'ob. vous ne pen«i ^/«« de facilllAl |ie?oyois. 'amis que toiUI \plus qu'il «'« I Idemande »no«« 18 etoit du. \plus d'ouvrag llui avoit presi I did not ask for fROTtf, than Je n'ai pus dcmande plus was my due. qu'il ne m'etoit dik. Have you not undertaken N'avez.vous pas entrepris more, than you were able plus que vous ne pouviez to perform ? exeeuter ; She is happier, than if she KWe est plus lieureuse que was roariied. tl etre mariee, ou que si .',.'. elle eloit marine. He is more content with It est plus content avec elie her, than if he had all the que s'ii avoit tout Por du gold of Peru. i-'erou. I am quieter in my romn, Je suis plus tranquillc dans than if 1 were in com* ma ehambre qui ^i j'etois pany. 4>j. '^' ' •■ v *>^ en compagnlo. . You look more sickly, than Vous paroisscz plus malad« while yoii' were in the que lorsque voos ijticz k la country. * campagne. They are less troubled in lis sont mot/ix derang6s 4 la the country, than if thejr campagoe, que /ils etoient were in town. a la viile. |[S.] He is not so rich as it II n'e&t pas si riche qu'on Ic is said. .y^j*?. ,;;>:} .--j dit. .r^' - the Is not so old ai yoa be- Elle n'est pas si &g^e que lieve. vous croyez. |I am not vAi idle as my bro- Je ne suis pas si paresseus ther. .**' que raon friire. e are not so much sur« Nous ne sommes pas si sor- prised as you think, v,, ^i^ pris que vous pensez. i,>i;|?;w 00 ere not xo brave, asyou Voiis n'etcs pas si bravis pretend to be. que vous ditcs. hey arc not. xo learned, as II ne sont pas si sarans they would make us be- q4i'ils voudroiunt nous le H2ve.,ir.fs&'is iirii-n , %A fairc croirc. ' ' ''*^r'f. \ . .:^ hey arc not eo proud, as to Eties ne sont pas xf fibres despise your praise. que dc mepriser vos lou- anges. Iheis notxo vain ^ as to listen Elle n^^pEt pas si vaine qoAl itteries. ^ d'ecouter vos iloittdin. ^ oyour lia have not w thoi ght. oa so mucff as i J e li'ul pas tant ;hc qua , K. ;-v jd pensois^ ?*■? •* , ■•#; U f' JV'- 'I ih i. '■ , iffli! W\^ J ;;-: X 'I i i -i.>' 218 A GRAMMAR OF THE m lie has not lost so much as i.-,," ,. you. '"" '*'.'■,■'■ *'•• ^- - f4] She Kas not so much njoiH-y as you think. We have not so. much silf- Jove, as to prefer uursilvcs ■■ to you. '.•■■'3'-t^'''?.*!:(;*^ ,3Kv:,i>i-;n- W fst ausst savant que too fr^re ain6. £Uc est ausst almablc que % Sflcur. Kous soromes oiusn trao< quilles que vous. Vous ^tes ausst vlf que lut. lis sont aussi riches que vqtri p^re. Elled sont aussi spirituclji que ses sceurs, J'ai autaaU ^'amis que vou II a autant //avarice q jamais. Elie a autant de beaui qu'autrefois. Nous avons autaU de pe« que \wx^;wi-*^W' Voa'"havQrf^^f jBfjfjy' booVs as Vous avez avAant de IJTi hav^, u que moi. P< th She he We Tiiey tli( fie thd fie ten lam ed My tW( latn ttan 1 hai '\ Wm f>t.v FRENCH TONGUE, 2ld pcrdtt que ant Jargcnt stz. pas iatit . nioi. ..v % He is older th?»n you, II cat plus ilge quevous. She is more lovely than he. Elle est plus ainiablc que lui,' YoJi arc older than she is, Vous etes plus aze qu'elle. [6.] My brother has more Mon frere a plus de livrcs hooks than vou. que vous. ' ' if^Uife We have more pleasure than Nous avons plus de plaisir th-y. qu*cuxr I hare lost more than ten J'ai perdu plus tk dix gui. {^iJneai. vea?. She has broiight bim for her Eile luia appor't' ' :» n aria?© portion more than ten plus de dix. miile iivus thousand pounds. sterling. v She has less vivacity than Elle a moins di vivacite que her sister. « sa soeur. We have less troaUe than Nous avous moins de peine p yott. que vous. They have spent more than a lis ont depense plus de mille thousand pounds a year. litres sterling par an. He owes more than four II doit plus de qiaatre mille thousand pounds. livres sterling. He has written more than II a ecrit plus de diz Icttrel ten letters to day. aujonrd'hui. I am more than half pcrsuad. J'en suis plus d"^ moiti^ edofit. ,■■ persuade, i^;;,,, 4. ;.,,,-, ^ .-^ My brother is more tJ^an Mon frcre a plus de \i%i twenty years old. adfk ^^ ^&. lam I hav e tbau twelve Jc n'ai p?.s pi ans. more friendship for J' no mure years old. plu douze le pour iui him, than he has for me. y.qn'ii n'ea a pour moi t^i sso A GRAMMAR OF THE: m She has more money than I £llc a ^Itu J'argcnt ^uc moL , have. ' •'; •'■•■^''j-a<.-T H-^ - ■'■.: •:■ '' a^icx^r^rv I have not more cunning Je n'ai pas j>lu* de finesse than they. q^u'eux.. I take more pains than yoy. Je preuds plus de peine que TUUS. You hare lese pride than he. Vous arcz mows ^'orgueii '*' '•>' * . quo lui. - .vH'-'ir - [7.] He is the most skilful C'esi le plus habile medecin ph^'sician iu the whole de toute la ville. , cify. He is the idlest of them alK C^^^i le plus paresseux de (OQS. She is the loveliest of them C'est la plus aiwable de all, tOUtt'S. "•'; n^ ;• >?' , . l^.nuUnd has ^iven birth to L'Angk'torre a donne nais- th^ most 5>kilfiil philoso- sance aux plus hablles phf j'Ueis in Eiif^ope. losophes de I'Europe. [8.] She is the most lovely C'est /a />/i/j aimable demoi- iady I know. sclle que je connoise. It Is the greatest piece of C'est la plus erandc sottise folly you can ever cooimit. qne vou» puissiez jamais }aire. lie i» (he greatest ninny you C'est i'homroe le plus sot qut ever saw. rons puissiez voir. The French is the most use- Le Francois est la langue lln ful language you can pos- plus utile ^»'on puisse ap- slbly learn, piendre. » . [0 ] I am very glad of it. J'en suis lien aise. * 1 am very mucii concerned J'en suis lm..*nortilie* at it. tie is a very polite man, C'est un homme fr«-poli, ile is wry diligent. • li est /^L^r.diligent. ' ?. m SI»o is very lovely. Elle est /rfx-aimable. 1 am much indebted to yoii. Je vous suis tres-Tcdeji- 5: ble. tint i njiM fly obliged t<%ou. Je vous suis infiniment oblige. Jlis ^her is «^ery rich. Son prre est /r^*-riche. We are wrjijjtfcA persuaded Nou> en sommes trh'^ii- «, He nt ^uc mcL ! de finesse k peine que ■ » *. S)., ■ . f IX d^'orgucil lile medecin e. ^resseux de aiaiable de donne nais. r habiles phi liurope. labic demoi- >n noise, andc sottise sste% janiais fus sot qut roil. la langue £1 in ^uUii ap- [rtifi^. )>: fw-poli, •t. ible. '■ \iment oblige. ...•,,•■>., TRENCH TONGUE .. «21 a* l*.«»V<« les /rt'x-pef' I am your mo// humble ser- Je suis votrc /r^x.humble. vant. serviteur. Your most obedient servant. Votro /m-obeissant scivi* '■■-'' •- . ■ . i'-r:7 ,<« teur. , ,/•."- .■ * r -V- .-1' THR EXCEPTIONS F. 415, JTXl? A/PI /f/W» '_k 'Si' ■?; He is the best man in the C'est le metUeur homme du world. mondc. Your pea is better than imine. Votre plume c^t meilieure qae ^'■.■'- :: 'i :;'■■', ^ '- '.'t'l ' 1* mienne; -•'-■ ■■f.-'';»^'^<*^ French fruit is better, than Les fruits de Traftce iovx English. meWeurs que ceux d'An. ' i ' • gktt'lrrc. It is the lest reason you Van C'est la meilieure raisOn que give him. , ., vous puissio/ lui donner. They are the best people in Ce sout les meiJleures genn da. ,. the World. monde. His theme is better written So theme est mie:ix fait qu« than yours. le vdtre. The least th\t\g makes roc La moWrf chose m'cnrhume. catch cold. ,'/'"-: . ' ' Kis writing is Tcry bad ; Son ^fcfiture est tres-mau^ but yours is tvorsei . vaise ; mais la voire est pire. - . u Let the worst come to the Au/ix aller. « -: vi, *. -.^ ,}" worst. :' -J- " -^i--*- ^*' I shall do it to the best of my Je le ferai h mieux qu'il nra power. - sera possible. ^W'^ He obliged me tbe least of II m'a oblige le moins de tous.. any. * It \h the hast thing you can C'est hmnnf que tous poiai' do. ^ siez faire^ 1 III •V ■ - — -'f u^ ^M- ..u 1 ^^ list's- %& f *>.»"*• ^vj;> » s4" 5*::^? ^:;|« Bl© 923 A GRAMMAR OF THfi i^ !i; ■ ■m^^f^r^imj^' ■Hs^^k^*-' ;^:* CH^p. v.^,:K- ^^>:;':'' I Ai *» -ItV^^k RULES AND OBSERFATlOVS UPOtT rEKSU ' l.flPlHE verb agrees hi person and number ivith ir» ^Jh^'^ subject, or noaainutiTc case. AH nouns nhaf. ever, in granimatical construction, are of th« third per. son ; as, (he air prepossts, the behaviour engages ; lair previent^ let manieres engagent. 2. Two or more Hauus in the singular number have Tcrbs agreeing \\ith them in the plural number ; as, the father and the mother have consented to it, k pere et U mi'^e y ont consenti. Except when they are joined by the disjunctive con- junct ion o*' s as, OH le pere oa la mere y a consenti* 3. ihe Terb following the c >njunciion »«', is always ptit in the plural ; as, neither mildtieKS nor force can move him, ni la douceur n't la force ne peuvent I emouvoir. :; • ■, 1. •"'4. Ods. If many nouns or pronouns, singukr or plural, be se- parated by mais, r'len, toitt, &c. then the verb agrees in numbet and person with the noun or pronoun which follows these words ; as, not only his estate and health, but also his reputa- tion,, has suffered by it ; non seulement ses bi&ns et sa sant^ mais encore, sa reputation, en a souffert. 5. Collective partitive* nouns, as, (nfintte, nomhre, la pluparty quantite^ troupe^ multitude ^i «iic. foil owed * They are called partiti've, and not general, because they denot-:: some parts of a whole. For want oi making this distinc- tion, Restaut seems to contradict himself ; for page 34 or his French Grammar^ 9th Edition, he says, that /or t/, pcuple, armie, are collective nouns ; aru;), page 174, he fays, 'that when the verb has fer it's nominative a collective noun in the singular, used by itself, or followed by a noun in the plural, the verb is put in '.he plural, which is false ; because foret, peuple, armee, always, govern the verb in the singular. -'- Ex'^ept from these, /a moitiey le tierSf le quart, wluch 4" ways govcin the verb in the singular. 0. FRENCH TONGUE. Mi ^1 -yfik: 1-v .^. '» r* with if* >uns ^'hat- third pcr- iges lair imber have r ; as, the 'e pere ct U incti?e con. always p«t 3 cau move plural, be se- es in numbet olloAvs these io his reputa- et sa sanU) {":■ i/Zt^} nomhre, I because tney this distinc- re 34 of bis lat when the 1 the singular, the vevb is armie, hy a noua in the plural, require the rerb in (lie pi oral ; as.; most men are of that sentiment ; Ir plupart da hommer tor^' de ce tentimeni. When they are used by themselves, they genei-ally govern the ' verb in the plural, if they have a relation to a noufi in the plural which is understood. La plupart, according to the French Academy, almost always governs the verb in the plural^ wheth^ er the noun to which it relates be in the plural or nof* 0. When ce is the nominative to (he verb rtrey tbis verb is put in the singular, if it be followed by the personal pronoun hdus or vous ; as, .t is He, tUsf nous i is it you, my friends ? est-ce vaus, mes mmis ? but it is always put in the plural, when followed by nix, elleSf or a substantive in the plural ; as, it is they, ct soni euxy theso are my books, ee sont la ma livret ; .were ihesc } our reasons ? etolenUce Id v§t raisons ? 7 After the determining pronoun qui^ the verb is put in the same number and peison, as the word to which qui relates ; as, you who speak, vous qui parle» : we who study, nous qui etudions. 8. The verb is commonly repeated in French, Vst. wbea the first number ot ht to be empiuycd iotttcod of the' imperfect ; as, thia iDiin altered his mind three times, or, fur three d.'tys, cet homme changea de dessein trots fois^ or, pendant trots jours ^ and lioc changeolt. Levtis X( V loved vrur too much alt hii life, Louis XI y aima trop la guerre pendant toute sa viV, and noiaimoit. .„.., ..,,, ..v .-.v ».- 'i' , , . h\ B. The imperfect is used after si\ if, instead of the sub^ junctive raood, expressed by should, could, v/ould, in English : as, if you would come si njous r*^ '■- bt iiluSi UO i usul 4. The future is used as in other languaj^ . , 5. The conditional is used as in Ens^lish, but neTer^. ter the conjunctions which govern th« subjnnctivfr mood, ^hough it has been errcncoasij^ placed by some grammari* ^os among the tenses of that mood. ^ "^ :[^ ■% !' It ■i '1 C2« A GRAMMAR OF THE Tmm Tmmsss or P^ERBs ExFMPLinno FOR rat Schour'* PlACTlVS. •' ^' 1 • ' ' ;, r , n.'f • 1^ UU' t J '< ' I . Ul' » , 1 » /, T-i 'I [Chap. V. 1.] The sun shines. Le solcil /miV. Th<* Humtnur iV a rery agrue. L'eie <*// utie saisOn trds.a. ubie season. greablc. Winter does wai pJease me. L'hiver ne mppIaU pas. The stars ^rj'm tu appear. Lrs ctdiles commencent i pa- * ,. /,. , roltre. The days are very much Lcs jours jowMres-alonges. leo^thoned. Ihc meadows «r# Tcry beau- Ces prairies tout tres-hclles. tiful. V''-^ ,.::;,,. . . ..H^' [2f I The brother and sister Le frere et U soeur s'y soni were « iH^ fi< paile. spoken to him [or to her.j i » ^ ^ • t^ • i. Either your brother, or your Ou votre fr^rc, ou ?otre| sister, has told it you. sceur, tous Va dit* [4.] Prayers, threats, noth- Pric^res, ipenaces, riennepeDt| ing can move him. Temouvoir. Honours, riches, pleasnres, Honneors, richesse?, plairn^j every ibxag disappears at tout disparuk a la mort. ^*'deatli, \ ^xnt^^'^ .'.... « £^] A. vast number of pco- Une infinite de gend sont Ic ^.. pie are duped by one an. di^pes Us uns des autres. ' other. A great number of ships are L^Q grand nombre dc vai»»| ready to sail. seaux ssnt pr^ts a fair« *^ ^"^ ' voile. r » "^^Ji'Iosi part4Milc goods haite La pldpart des marchandiie * tj^ecn soltH^ " ont ete vendues. , [6.] // »utes I who saw it. CVj/ moi qui Yaivw. It imf w« yiho hindered bim, C'est nous qui Vavons eoJ // was you who made iite C'est vous qui tfv^^ fait I was noise. '^EB^^ bruit. 7; Jft Wi 1 Vo h le> He • She SI I «f. di He, th Wh( K in He t yc He A in Ho w) old His oh , t nw ScHoiJk't .\i «. . • ', siisdn tr^s.B. pIuU pas. ntnencent i pa- tre8*alongei). nt tres.bclles. jceur s'y torA m^re y e»/ cob- ae \\\\ Mt patle. J;re, ou Totre Pa (lit. :e8, rien ne p«ot :hoP9eF, plaUiff, ^ ^^^.j^ :- ■'mM^mB^'^^ .M 't ;j ,['?. *? I «8 A CRAMMAll OF THE If you should write to him\5x voai l«i «r;v;V«. t*; fe^ti- [or to her.] f%'< .^i If ahe would he angry &t It, Si eWe h'clifachoit. dv^':^ If I should go dO(i see liim. 5r je V allots voir, " * ^ he would employ half his ^S"!! emphyoit la iiioitie de ion time. ^ * "*'\ temps. .**4^^ fi# yjT she would apply herself to Si elle &*appliguoit 4 la mu. music. ^ siqiie. -,. ' « v Jf me could know. ''"•^ Si nwia savions. If they would apply themselves ii'ih %' appUquoient tt quelque to somethinu useful. chose u'urile. i''****W^; If ihey would listen to ^AttC' Si eUe'ali4''> ^^ }dtk^:. FUENCir TONGUE. boitJ /.'^.v-'vC e$e aujour. Jte cette se- it has been exceediog co,d I ? .^"' .""'^^ ^^ ^ou.d, his month « ^^'^ ^' ->/ tr^3 froid ce moislci. T% >5aw W a plentiful o„ '^'"^ hmest this year/ "'*'^"' ^^n* « una mofsson aboo. ft»vo„rable to me. ,. ,r^ ^'iff /""fe-ci „e m'^ pa, ^ f » f^ave been f ery Jock v Vn ^''*'-^^^o'able. ^ this year. "^ ''^^*>' Vous avcz hi tr^s-heureux They ^^, /,,, ^ ^ cette annee-ci. '*"'' ' money this ye^. *^'*' *^' '^^ ^«' A/-^« beaucoap d»ar I ^^t;^ ^/.« in France this t, *•''"*/*'"« a^nee ci. * QK^T- ^-- V^ ^" ^''^"ce cette an ! She died this year p "^''-«- «« J^'.i^« fery aick this L i^?i fT^ *^''*" «"n«^-ci-. y^ar* ,,.,; , "^ "»" ^' ^^/ jr^3.maladc cette an^ PV^r'"^/ rrom the West J/ ?"''^* Mnd.es tiiia year. ^''^^t i'^/ r«,,«« de? Inde. Oe bv . '^'^^'*''' "'^r s»x iettfes. ""^ »»« '""* last week. 1/ "?!"7'"*««- ^* = . " ^/w/a pas la CO*,.: ' -^ * " »ein4me passee. . * ' i hi »-J» I<^. ■^I'tf *nH^^^--'^teS!rffl-^^^* W 'gible to tbe learner. «30 A GRAJ«MAR 0*' THI What did ya» «k^'> vlut^^w^ek ^ Qnc /i/w-voos ia . jfniairt* .ta paiibec . ? at7 Ia6t week, t '? '^ v d»rgenl U iJOwaiiM} fiaju You JiW more work than I Vous fUei piriv d'ouvr^^e laftt we«k. qac Bioi ia ;/VH'^.ii S \Mi*\\ ''%. i Last tiiooih «ttf/ not Very L« fnuh paste ^ 'fin pii« sharp. •• tres.ni^.' -i i\ikiutK\4,*.\ B m ;? > It ivas c^cccditg hot la&t 11 Jii frj^.(dii4td' 46 «t<6Jt month. ()assc. U rained 9.y\ last ntoniji. l\pkaUtti'^^M«ik pMie/ > It f ajifil .raontfa* 1 hey had a plentifal ) hairfest On ritf arte HioimAn ^«b(yDJ last year. dante Tan nee uassee; h^^ year ttau not lery fa* Zii'air^^f paw^e, > m «i^ B Tourable to me. •' ' pas tres-fattfrable.^ '' "4 You «i;r/y verjr luckly fast V'oin funs tret.hlR»vit . year Tanree passec. They lost a great deal of [Is pifdirtHt beaucoup d^h money li«t year. g«^>t l*aaii4e pas^ee. « I went to Fiance last year. J*a/Iai ea France I'aadeej . .A^;'i.'.r^: . rv-^^"'«vv„iiivi\,u-t/ -•: pass^e. . m>t^kh ^^'"^ ' She died last year. > Rile jhourut t^amnee pSisHfi: >He was very sick l^st yeir. 11 fut fer^ls-'makide ' I'antfeij passee, ^0 He arrived from the West II arriva des Ihdes 0«cl. ,: J Indies ^ast year. dentales t'Atin4o posw^. How bavi you ^oa^ ^^^^ I Comment ?ous ^tesi^v^oi ,iiad the pleasure of seeing porte^ '/SJ^/tfrr >^utft jd ^n'll you ? V en le plaisir de tous voir ' 2 Sdw im^^fy^i^iiHeei'^ //tf tr^s^alade, f I arrived /roDi the £iiit. que je suis arrire deti ^ ^ Indies. '**^^ 4* dcs Oilmen tales; ^ w^ I lave rsctifoid no tidlnos Je u'ai pas regu de ses n«ii of him, sinca ha went vejles •,' ...,ii, .liti , . „ l**.l ^|Uj id' JO ?M^ i.^^£' 3ut, lerr that 4< cfon Uyg mm/ niofx 5. pus hhiti H sec sion, AJEKJa .ir? I'iliiN.CH T0N<5UP. ft»i %\ fCT^Ut I jy^Htf* jr<&M -rwu Hiw> ^&<» Ko l.W«»»0«i, tW d^pms fttt'fl ins d*^irf»*^e iTtoU p»iie/ ^ ' . n«8 to ^ '!*<>» i le mois • w*iii oot ? ? '^i^ H ii^'V YQys eti-s lorti ? :.:-^'- :'^'-'-c^-k'^^[^ ^ SECTION' II. '-'"^ '^'-' ■ ^ <»:"Vj,sH>-Tri'><» .1,,. annee es Ittd€8 0«ci vous Stos^^oi ir de Tous TOirf s arrUe de» recu desesB*" $0 $^2-5^ >?•'■ ;#i?,f0 yVj 27jie Of TMg SvBjVHUTirs Moop. 1, The subjianjfUve uiopd is used after f «^, or yv/, preceded by a verb denoting dqubt, wish* fear, CQiDipand, projiibition, &c^ liiQh arc YW«4frtf, prier^ doufer^ tox^haitfr^ permettre^ commander, defcndrey 8ic» as, ms iaUier has forbiddein hinu to go thither ; sow |i€.re a defindu ^uify ullAt, But whejn any of thefe verbs gov- ern a noup qr pronoun, and the action of '^.e verb following he- iopce to the^ersoq designated by the noun or pronoun, it is put i^ the in6,rHtive mood, cojiwnonly with the picpositiop de before it ; as in the foregoing exaniple, son pere luia:d(fendu d*y allcr, a. Thesul^ffunct^vp njoSd is likewise used after yairprectdcd by mt impersonal vert '"'^t demotes a thing ought tape, or to bo done ; as, I,mu3it i. .^ thex v Ufmit ^Kf.fyaiUe. Se^ thw' ^lii ^hserv^j^n on iiTJi .:^aj v:erbs.- ^ '; 3- Tfiereare sonie impersppal verHs, which gpyern the indica<- Jke nj,o.Q4> ?uchare, irptiir9it,il y a (ipp9far^e. Sec, and thofe wriicn denote any thing as more positively existing or being done . 8ut, when ib* same iwipersonal verbs are used negatively or iii- fterrogjttively, ttij^y govern the subjunctive mood j-as, it is true Ihat you ^T% J^iarwed j /7. est 'Vtai que vous etes marie ; is it true tb3.t youare nwried ? esj/il 'vrai que 'vouf soyea marie ? 4' The subjunctive mofed is used after verbs preceded by ne or sjtvszdi in a doubtful' manner, arid followed by que or qui ; as, I do not bel;i£.v5 that he has done it x-jene crois pas qu'il fait fait ; if yovi thin.k,^ t aip ,an huaest ^an, si J-/^'i 9«V/ w^^^. ,, ^^T^hp SluVyunctive raood^used after ^i^-verb /V seritblft it sceios,, lyhei) \% implies a doilSt, when it means to logk as if : as, angry |l seeips tJiat you a/e.angry^ or, you lo.ok as it you were iherffSle q^.$ h^ws s^esifacke.'Eiutit that verb implies a persua- sion, or has a pronoun befoie it, or a governed word after it, the {N. J?, l« this Ust iflstafte«) sJ has the import of puisque, inA 8ig9i%9 «f« j 4l M^ i3l.'.i 2S« A GRAMMAR OF THE indicative mood is to be used ; as, il me semble, or // semile d fa tompagnie que vous ites Jdche, "• ■*;t > aus sojics: riche % though you are ever so rich, quelque riche que 'vous soy ex. Se**. the 19th and 20th obser- vations upon indeterminate pronouns, page 197. adly. After que used inste*iid of Repeating the conjunction si W in the second number of a'sentcnce ; as, it you study and take pains ; //* njous Hudier. et que nxius prcniez d' la ^eine. See the 5th observation upon the conjunctions si and qu^, cli; x'. 3dly. After the pronoun ^«/ or 9;/^ preceded immediately by a superlative ; as, it is the best news you can tell me, <:V^/ la me\U teure nouuellc que vous puissiez me dire, iftiily. After que used instead of de ce que^ which governs the indicative mood ; as, I am sorry he is not <*ome ; je sutsf&cbi qu*il ne soii fas venu^ or, de ce qu'/l n*est pas I'enu. • *^ J-;^ ;*; \.^ , jthly. After the relative pronoun qui or que bet'ween t^ verbs, so as to express some desire, need, or necessity ; as, I seek a woman who is h.mdsome, rich, and wise, je chercbe une fcmme qui soit hcHe^ riche, et saga. 6thly. We elegantly make use of the compound of the preter- it of the subjunctive mood after j/, instead of the compound of the imperfect of the indicative ; as, if I had been informed of it sooner, that would not have happened; si yen eus%e he averti plutCtf ccla ne seroit pas arrivK 9. The verb which is in the future in English is put in the pres- ent in French, whenever it ought to be in the subjunctive mood ; as, do you tliink, that be will come ? croyez-njous qu'il 'vienne ? 1 do . ot believe, that he will write, y«n^', gee the FRENCH TONGUE, 3d$> immediately ^t , cli'. X ediatfcly b Tie. <:V« /« fneiu lich governs the le ; j^ suisf&cbi nu. • le between two necessity j as, I »^ je cherche une id of the preter- le compound of informed of it eusse he averti pat in the pres* >juoctive mood ; qu'ii 'v'lenne ? ^as qu'il ecriye. re si, signifying (u know whither d rules, is put in ;nt tense of that or future tense, ill guess it, f ro)'* fhat he has writ- the first verb be eteritofthesub- you have him lichisinthdsub- land a verb is «t. 1 ^^■'. iaiperfect tens-s^ or -a conditional expression, though the first vert*' is in 'li ' present ; as, do you believe that he could guess it, if you, would not tell him ? croyez-vaus qu'il le devindtf si vout ne le lui Jisiezpas ? I doubt whether he would have succeeded without the \id^oi\\\%ir\QX\d%fjedoutcqu*ileut rftiSii sansle secoursde sesa>nts^ N. B As there are some conjunctions, which require the sub- junctive mood, and are every where the same^ it will not be amiss to set tliem down here, hs I have met with them in other grammars* '.fH^ I C0NyVNCTI0ff$ GOyg&NlNO THIt SuBjVNCTirR MqOP* Afin que, pour q'le, ' • ' — tkai^ to the end that. {j^ avail t que, — — — he/ore ?» sans que, — — -^ ivilhout thaU ■ '^. :^w:^ qtioiquc, bion q jo, cncora qau, thugh^ta^mir V:!n-yi<; :^ soil qijf, . — — — nvhether and or. -^fA i 8!ipj)ose owfupposons que, suppose that ii;'^*. V-. ' y\ — tn case that y oi if. — I grant that-, — not that. — It Is not that J si _-. - — provided. _ unless. — i/evtr so littlf>, t — for fear, that » ' -r; >^lest. • ■. ■ .-^' ■ v^ ^ — far from- .t^ — "oery far from, — for all that, though'* — notwithstanding that^ ~- God grant — ivould to God* \ ' ■ — God forbid, " ■ ■> — save but, , *' «» an cris, otf .en cas que, a la bounu ircucu que, r«)«i q'le, . ] hon pas que, ^ CB n'est pas que, pourvu qoe, - ' ■ -• ^.moins que, . pour pen que, ■ —• d« peur que, — de craintc que, loin que, — ' — Wen idin- que, , — laalgre que, — — Donobsliint que, ~ Dica vcuilic que, -— Pjaiiic, oti pliu a Dicu que, i Li.oK lie plaise que, fiiuon quo, '^ si 00 n'e.st que, j X B. Tlie last two g6v*ern ttie subjunctlv6i(ndod,'whenj^y ar^-- preceded Ly a verb expressinftcommand, desire, or uncertainty. in other cas s.they govern thfrodicative mood ; as, I want noth-' ing ot you, u'lt to do your duty ; je ne nieux rien auirg c\ose de ~0'jUi sinon »//.v, ou, si ce n'est que, vous fassiez vitre devoir \ I anowcred him nothing, but T had executed his orders, y^ witui ai n^onJu autre chose, sinon que, uu si ce n'est qu/^ j'a'voif/extcute ■' set era res. > r V, 11 % 2S4 A GEAMMAR OF THE I •ti'- * ■•^,*ii\*;« iv lii >j(f' '^A> *>>-XW, A>L FMACTICM, [ I ] I was ftfrdtil he tv^oW Je CTftigBois qu'il ne fl^ji/. I suspected he «>0»A/ «;n/« Jc doutois qu*il Tous /mvftf. to J oil. I did not doubt, bnt h« Je nc dontois pas qu'il st noould be yery g^ail to sec fut bien aise de ?ous ?olr. you. Her mother commanded her Sa mdre a commando qa'dle to marry htm. Vepousaty ou lui a con. ... 4%; niande de Vepouter, His father had fvrbidden Son pdre a defendu qiiMI him to/Azjr. -•' .v.- i joudty ox ltd a d^feada ^ Her husband permitted her Son marl a 'permis qu'eile /o ^0 to the play. allal-X la com^diey ou Im a permis d'tfZfer iia €o. ttt."ir medJe. ''^^ ' '• '•^/■.••■^ > . [2.] I must fl»>ri#r to fchn. II faut que je lui ieiivi. Ills convenii'Ot iot }oa /all convient que tous lui speak to her. parlies. It is of conseqaeooB fur him II est de coftsequence qu'il to keep good «om^pany. frequente la bonne coo* - . ■ . * pagHic. -'^' ;>;.•'■■ '•vi^^ ,,— There is no way for iter f^ II n'y a pas moyen qti'ellt escape. echappe. It is surprising that she has II etit swrprqrtaiit qii'elk tk succeeded. reussi. It is just that he should he II est juste qu'il jofV recon- '^ rewardell. ' ' -^^^^^ pcnse. ■■ ' ■ :^ It is^^njust that he should he II est injuste qu'il soit piai. ,'> puntlhed. , ji . : \iM fit that ydu ^iv^ him fiNftst k propos que vous Va* nvammg. 'oertistiez. It is neoch^ary for him f» ^o II est Deoesaalr* q^tfU y siik, . thitber. -fW- •>;■ •■ :'^- ^ :. >i-.;:»i:KWi.x';^-v,.'ti^^:'. . It is impfoper for you to go II rst hidl&ccnt qucTOuSi/. alonejE^ ' , ; - /w» scul. g£ tCBOtAM'f Ul Be '&inf. I Tous tsrivU, pas quMf sc de TOUS voir. mande qa*elle u lui & cooi- 'pouter, defendtt quMl a d^feada Jk 'permis qu'dle iom^dief ou Im aUer i^ (ft co* ,> >" lui icriiJi, ^ue TouA lut sequeoce qu'H bonno com- loyen qt»'ell« jant qtt'elkoJ^ 'il j ^^ It is true that she wrote to II est trai qu'elJe lui ir^crit. him. -'.w./- "'- 1'" -J-'*^- ;••• It is true thjKt my falher II est yrai que motf \^tt \% knows him. eennoh. It is certain that he ts dead. II est certain qu'i! atititott. It is certain that he is come II est certaiiY «; u^il est rercnu from Flanders. * . de Flandre. '"'^> #!"'^i^ It is certain that he doeivcoi f I est certain qu^il ne fe eoiiL know him. Woit pas. # It is certain that he told htm If est stir qu*il fui « rl||^cet|» that news. ^ nouveUe. ^^^ '-^^ j It is certain (hat he wrol^ II est siir qtHl lui ^ ^cflt. ' ^^- her. . ^ .■''*. ''-:.^''*'f'^. "■"■" It is certain that lie under. l\ est siir nu'll /a/A le^^nJ stands his lesson. It is saed thart the kiu^ of On dit que I^ f«)i il'£ispagna Spain is dead* est vanU >i I . '■' %\mf ^11 ifi,.' I ;'jt«i C'f ^« 'y>. »-.■:!.». if fell V* I- iswi A ORAM M All OF THfi Vi '*i l) '8 ! i" - It iti thought th«t he has On croit qu'il a fait fi.i fur. 1 1( made his furtune. tune. I • [;4]^ Jt does nut teem that II oc parott pa9 que tuus If I le you inotu him. eonnoutte%. I U docs not leem that he 14 ne yMiAi pas qu'il dlte I [d j;/)^^ai#< truth. vrai. I li (loeii not seem that ho h \\ n« paruit pas quMl mit 1 1 an huncst man. ^ •i hutiudte honinjc. \i doeii not 8eeua that she m II ne parent pas qv^'cll" so'u I Tet surprised. ; svv.Iv>« surprise. ^,{^ I j It ducit not teem that she k W nu paruit pas qu'cile tvUW fijc autjrjr, fiu,l cc. I , li iii not Ukttlj tha^ h^ijitfftr II n'v a point d^apparenee I Du ... hor,. ^^.v^r^^'^H*.' - 1 *^ ;., ?^ que ?ous /flj/r« vu. It is not likclj that he ^rote II n'y a poiMt d'apparence I Tell Vo hur. q'l'il lui fliAecrif. I Tell It is not likely that, she U n'y a p lint d'apparencs lovtdh\m, . i%. . qu'elle i'ai/ aiiDe. It is not true tlitt 1 spohe II n'est pas vrai qi|e jii lui /, to him. v; ,1 4nV parle. It is not true that h6 i'a^ II n'est pas vra! qo'il Vak her. Tue. . j,, It is not trQ« that she wrot* H n'est pas ?rai q^'elle Ini I Tell Tell, Tell ou Tell S SI I 8l I sl tut 6crit. ' to him. f ,;- ■; ;■• - •»• i.v<»». ; It i8 not true that my father It n^eit pas vrai qne mofl iuczfj him. •tv i?. p^re le connmse. It is not certain i\u.t she is H n'est pas certaio qu'il icit dead. mort. — ..«u It is not certaii^ that, he jMiln'estpas cer^^n q.^'il,/oif I 'fell come from Flanders. . ■ venu de Fiandre^-f * ' • * I It is not certain that he doM l! n'est pas certain qu'il nc I Xe]] j , jno^kno^him. ^^^ le fonsM/j-^ pas. I Jt is ^t>t ccriaiu that he toU II n'est {)as ?\^r qu'il lui ««^'l Xell him jbhat ncus. dit tte'te nuuvelle. I p^,. It > nut cetl^l^ that lie I||l'ei^t pas s(^r ^li'illui altm Jdi i wrote to her. ' y ecrit. ■'."ts i.c is t>i}t certain that he II n'est pas s{^r qu'il Jr^<^^' ^ 1 1 shal tindersiands his les&ov., kqon, , .M: i <..rj^ I yoi ■ * The -tweafy^ne ^receding example? are varied here pur- 1 1 'hal •poseiy to render the third rule, ^nd the eptccptiona ta it, more I of j imelhgible to the learner. a fait 8* for. If que Tous If pa9 qu'il diu pas quMl mt nnic; pas qv^VIi" soil pas qu^oile iv'u it d^apparenee >nnue. nt. il'appafcnce aye% vu. lit (i*apparence ecr'if. ■ nt d'apparenc* aiiiie. rrai qqC je lui viai qo'il I'^' ral qjj'elleloi Trai qae moa ertaia qu'il ^0>/ • i . ',;;; IT ■ • ■• . lerVain qii'i? w^ lertaiQ qu'il nc )as. Ir qu*U lui fli' I Telle. it qu'it lui aii qu'il lachis;^ laried herepur- lona ta it, more rilENCH tONGUE. SS7 tti/ mrsald thai'^'{he klog On ne dit pot fve le roi of Spain it (lead. d'Espagnc /oi/ moit. It is not tiiought that he btu On ne peustn pat qu*il aii tirade liis fortiifrie. fail sa fortune. [5 ] rie told jn0 tliat h« II m'a ciit qu'il vott« ^rr/w. would vf rite ioyo^,' '«» v«» . .. I shall tull him that y&tt^-*'i»»ii::r^'tMi£,»riMtiir Teil him to come and see me. Dites.lui, qu'il vienne me voir. Tell him not to call to day. Ditcf.lui qu'il ne vienne pas aujourd'hu*. Tell him to write his theme Dites-lui qu'il mette sod< out fair. thi^me au net. Tell her to hold her tougae< Dites.lui quelle se taise. Vl Tell him to bring his books. Ditcs-lui qu'il apporte s^s ' ,v'i-;' ''■ ■ ■■■-■■'" lirrofi. ■■•:*.4i'. Tell him /o /if Himon caniftva %V*j* ' / Tell him to give you pap6i>< I)ites.lui qu'il lous Joj^if^du - ' ' papier. > h. I shall tell him to write to Je iui dirai qa'il^si^iv^ yon. t shall tell him ff, /«itf care Je lui dirai qu'il «i* «oin ii^ of you. :i im •»%U-W'-' T«as« .I" .■«»-r,,u.js:.: ;, i'A. I 'fi> 1 V - II I I'. '*■■' riiAiifiiAA oEv/rpB Do wok Ml llkn If i»mr« Nplul i|itofrpfi^« «c«4r*. )>iD»ot tall her f wrift to Ne lui (liiM pM ^M.'clii Ml). in*lrr«M.' Will: yon tell kim /a M^f Lui din^.fQDS qH*il «)^^P»r(f bit WU 2( , . son iiiefuiiife ? Will you tell hioi not Jo /ir Lui diruz^t ou#« 4^H| Jim^^mf I shall talLliifli not to Ariin- Ju lui dirM (|U>'ii /oi^: tMo. ««'j^ d«ii. [6.] She SKoms to U AAgfy. II ' semMe qu'elloi toil fi» Itaeeaw^tbat yoii iasnr hiiO. J^l s«i«b1e; q^ ?oi»« Je c^ noutie%^ . > tt JeeiM ihat ht w ie the 14 seaibici qii'U ail mUqii. itauems thftt she £r in Ue,|^ «e«)l}]|0 ()tft^41odMr tort. wrong. It seems that you or;, older. l\ rantble que vons eUi plo It does oott seem tiMit aWtiV Il.ii»tf>,s9iDt>l« pa^ qu'ello ;i sick. ,^i^.4ii^if^»my malade. lit seeme to the (haft y oil air » XI lyr s«)m]t)U q^e vpus ti sorry. lache. It seeotf /v iKtf lb«A heir vttiy 21 nu. sei^ilt 4^ili^;iii)ri ftvi l6at(m>du ■. '-'■ ^«i , i|9;?9fit; ;•■ v'-^-; >», r'i'^ '^ It seems to him that shie is I! /»i scuahle qn^elli tit fori •l^_. very |MH-ttiy. > ■ i<^^^. c:iiW»^ii4\ ft)i4 Jl A covetom^nutn i)\\i\}i,i,^c nvm l\ seoiblc a i/n avare q(>'' ver ^tfy enough. n'a.iam^U as^^z. Xour brother^ thinks he irrjich II seQ»J^4K ^ %)9^/> /ri«r^^u'il £8] If he come a.fid 4W(i for S'il vient rt qu*il deman^ inmp. \Q SuaS waS au (UK'S. if ycMf ttiwd^, Anf ^ffyoy take Ji voVrS |tud«cj(, ^t ^# vi) «; pea ito fetnpl. » lU 14 »he moft tonedfccf^tfa C'tnt I'lMuottie fe pl^t ttfffi. I iff0. saMt ^ue je coi^tmttt. She tft'lhu ImndsodiMt hld^ (>0M hi •t)lli« heliu d«moi. you ever saw. ' sdle que ?ou» 4eti% Ja* 9uaU -viH!. . *^^^» lamiorry Iic^iiiick4*'< *'^ Jo «»)a finM (^ 'Wl tna, ' ''^ ttdt}, oti «i^ v# 9kr^)i «i^ m^t iad^. ■• ' •• • ' I aM«lgMd'%ft« ti %mtt^V^'^^^^ 'suift UHI diM ^*«Ut fe I am surprised that he is not Jc null surpris juTH 'ile-roi( V •■ '■.'»•;,,> yrV/Z-p^^t^u. -'^ lam overjoyed /iW 'ife 'Hat Je suis ra?i quW mt'^ii^ttk gained bis lawsuit. son procds, ou 4e ce g^'Xi ,1^ Aagi^e s<'n proems. I am surprised that ihithddit suls surpris ^v'elle VaU married him. ^^pou^^e, on de ce ^u'elle Vtt 8^ is grieved that yoiii,j|^Cne est diagrine ,^ vpua li«r Au Bplrs. ne ful ^nl^s point d« ^ . i- ; nouvelies, ou . de ti qu». ' ' ;,; i;,^ y , , ' Hrousneiui donnix p^s d« \,^; .fe^?^>'?,:'v'^v: :/j " lionvelles. lam 9tt#pr>«M'Jitf 'his l^7ii[gr.^!e «ui& iviprJa /f»*t!4Mf f^it made itis foftttoe jn^/i* • s^ f«ftuue «(i st pai do Ad« A l^iUJ. "' * ^^ ^^ 4ei»ps, ou dt tt qU\i M T >Jc^,v^;T^^^u> «^»f #fi fj^lt sa ifbitauettt si pcu dt Give I*!" 4 hawk^rcnii^ /!^«/ Daniifz^moi > tia , tuouduiir is clean. qui joit blanc. I took f or » *enti?iit'vSbm^t39 chei*cliis ii>«i dotiies^i^ile « may itpust. [ ^' jf j>tAjfiff md#er. He looks for tt^Mikaii Wiio II cherciie une feoHBe j^' *f -rtch.H. v^^ ■ vw ,;-a?'ti/^>;-^jfi. : , jQff rielie. < -''s^. ],''^'^ ' She looks for a husband w^&oElte cherche un mar! qui Hk is handsome. beau. .J Is 'it certain that he £st.il sdr mu-% viams «fi& J \ 'i^.[ •■■ -It*-* v.i ':,.^.":!i t.t^J^'^ .'i^,.*;;. ^40 A GRAMMAR OF T^^E [10] Do you believe t^at the will go to the play ? I do liui believe^ thut she €uill U angry with you* I suspect Itiat hi will write to you. Is it certain that be will go to Franco ucxt spring ? It is Dot certain that h^ will iome back this summar. Do yoa thiok that he will learn French ia /our montbt I po jou think that he will li in the country ueat , ireek i 11 » '„■: >■>.■■ -iili. «i.' y,'':-/'^ ' '■- ■■ Croye«-vout qB*t)Ile eiiUe la cum^die ? Je ne rrois pas qu'elle /a//| fftc'heo centre tous. Je duute qu'il vous ecrive, Est.il sAr quMl aille en France au priiitaiiips pruchaiii ? II n*t>st pas sdr (|u*il reviennt cet 6te. Croyfz-vous qu*il ttpprenm Is Fraofois eu quatre muis ? Pensez-Tous qu^il soii 4 la campagne la lemaine pro* chaine ? , ,, . . rvi eorMxvMSNT or FiJtif. vmn^ ii* 1. Active verbs govern the first case; as, I read tW books, Je fu fe Vtvree. Passive verbs fovern (he s<> sond ease ; as, he is esteemed by all men, il ett estime de tout le They also govern the first case with the preposition par, speak* ing oi'some bodily action ; as, he. was, killed by robbers, il a iti lue tar des ^voUurs, In speaking of actions, wnich partake both of the sentiments of the mind, and motion of the body, we com* monly make use of par, though we say, il est entoure de gent I ^nnuyeuXf he b surronnded by troublesome people ; here entouri\ 4:xpr9S8es only that troublesome people Are round about him. 2 Verbs thai sifntfy to gi^^ot to take away ^^ gov ex^\ the first 43fle of the, thing, aiui the third ca^c of ihe person ; as, I. have given him the hook, jtjw ai donne le litre ;{ they have iakea his sword from him, Us lui oat pte Jon\ !^ 3. Manj Verbs |;overn the infinitive of a verb, Vithl the preposition S FRENCH TONGUE. Ui qftVltc MtUe 4. Many TerY)S gOTcrn the infinitire with the prcpoaw lion a before it : in this ca!>v, to^ in English, almost al- ways may be changed into in, or for ; a^, help mc to do it, or in doing it, aidf% mot a k faire. -:- L ?'-t ^ ^ d. Some verbs have the prtrpusition pour before their IniinitiTe, which occurs when io denote the design, end, ur reason of the passion or action of the verb. In this case, to can be changed into tn order tOy nvith a design toy to the end that ; as, 1 came to sec you, or In order to see iu*il attrtnui III y**"' ^'* **''•*•* design to see you ',je tuts venu puur vous voir. ouatre muift ? I ^' '^'^^'''C are life verbs after which de ami a are used ' indiscriminately before the infiniiiife ; contraindre, comm tinuer^ discontinuer ^ essayer^ forcer. aft qu^elle /«V| >e vous. vout ecrive, aille en France IS prochain ? r qu*i) rtvientu qu'll soh i •emaiae ik hi pro*' ■ <;* «■ »i .' <- *' '+" '^M Tlie verb obiiger, in the sense of to force, to excite, to en- gage, is followed by the preposition l*obUgerai i !e faire : when it is used paflively, it is followed by the prepofition de ; as, he was oblig- ed to do it, ilfut oblige de le faire. When the verb tticher means simply to feek or aim at some- thing, it takes the preposition a before \hz infinitive ; as, he seekt to injure me, /"/ tciche a me nuire : when it implies cflfort, it re- al, I read tW l^l^Jires the preposition de ; as, I will endeavour to please you, je H mberai de 10 us plat re. VVhcn the verb s^'fforcrr is used in the sense of to strive, to [strain, to make use of all oar strength, it recjuires the preposi- tion a before the next infinitive : but when it is used in the sense of to endeavour, to make use of our industry, it requires the pre- position de ; as, he strove to run, /'/ s*es/ cffor.ce a courir : he [endeavours to please her, // s^efforce de lui plaire. ^yhen the verb tarder is used personally, it requires the pi > [position ^ : when imperfonally, the preposition de ; as, cio not lern tVc s>«und tstimi de tout le nd sition par, speak* robbers, il a iti ich partake both e body, we com* entoure de gets I ... ]e • here entouriW^^Yy "^ tardez pas a re'venir : I long to get rid of the business, nd^ about him. B'''"^' t^^de d*etre hors d'* affaire. In this sense it is always join- (;«;(:> B^d to athird case, and rnay be followed by que, with the verb ia-- away^ gOveraBtlic subjunctive mood ; as, il me tarde que je sois hers d^ affaire.' of ihe person ; I The \txh fommencer is sometimes followed by de ; Sdcording donne U //i'«;B^ ^'"^2 French Academy, the ear is the ju(;lge in such a case. lut ont oti tonW^^^^ ^' signifies to begin by, it is followed hy par ; as, he beg{|||( ■,y reading ^sop's Fables, il commen^a par lire les Fables d'EsopJji The verb manqucr requires the preposition de before the infi- * itive, when it is used negatively ; as, I will not fail to do whaJ: ou please, jV r,e manquera'i pas de faite cc que I'ous )1 .i^.,;.*^' -A a Terb, Vithl rs wheH to. iai or wiMi ; d9)| de travailier. [Iways 1 -^ed affirmatively, and in familiar discourse. !l' \ 'i l« III! M 242 A GRAMMAR OF THE But when it is used affirmatively in the sense of not to do what we aught, it is followed by the preposition a : as, he has failed to do his duty, is a marque a faire .son devoir. *' 7. De is used before the infinitive of verbs, to which certain nouns are joined without an article; sitrh arc avoir conge, permission, envie, coutume, besoin, siijet, raison, droit, tort, occajion^ egin, or to set ; quatid je and is com* es it is not ex- ch verb ; as, ir cela. ouns governed be a person's to drink, c\ii _n requires the )Ugh to believe :s It takes the ient, ce n'ewt on at all ; ^as, assez. ou c'ei^ ■ammarians are ys require the iifferent case* ist follow lh« ; A [I.].! iilji 6'. Pope's works. J'aime ks auvres de Pope. ^ Ifou Viim tuples Ati^ pears^ Vous aiuK-z ies pom "j e( !,s poires. Heis-.beloveid iy all his rela- II est aim^ dif tous.scspa- tioQS. rcns. He is resj)ee( having written.. ' » v = v -■ - . ? /. • '"« Cease to rcpioach me w///6 Cesscz Je xv^ reprocher mon my foible. foible. »,, fh I tu A GRAMMAR OF THE ' I W»rn her to take care of her ji reputation. I ad?ised him fo ask her pardon. Why have you deferred pay- ing him ? I wrote to htm, to send me my books. I was frightened to see him. Kxcuse me from learning my lesson to day. Do uo^t ivndertako ta unde- ceive her. Try to persuade her. lie was constrained to pay. ifti deserves to be punished. ile has neglected to study. I fiurgot to bring my books. He presiiingly invited me to dine vvith him. » Pid.you promise to go thr- ther ? I advised him to be more diligent. She refused to speak to him. I intend /o go to France next year. " " / -i-.} v^- ■; Kudeavour to please her. Take care not to tell her, that you know me. I repent of having sold my , book. She cannot forbear lying. IVfako haste fo prevent him. Make haste to write your letter. Ho flatters himself, that he knows almost every tiling that happens in the city. Avcrtissez.Ia efe prendre soin de »a reputation. Je lui ai conseilie de lui de. mander parfion. Pourquoi avez.TOUS diflere dg le payer ? Je iui ai ^crit df nt'envoyer mes livres. Je fus effraye Je le voir. Dispensez.moi i/'appreudre ma k'^on aujourd'hui. N'entreprenez pas Je la de« Essaytz i/e la persuader. Il fut contraint Je payer. 11 merite J*Mro puni. . »; t II a neglige ^'etudier. J'ai oublie //'a.pporter mes livres. li m'a press^ ^ir dioer arce lui. i.M-u. Avez-vous promts J'y aller ? Je lui ai r^comaruide d'6trt plus diligent. Elle refusa Je parler. J a me propose J'aWer en France I'anncu prochainc. Tach«.z^ le voir. J'apprcadre nud'hui. las de la de« ?rsuader. Je payer. puni. H «' tudier. aipporter ines ^tf diner arce nis J'y aller ? aruide d'6tft ark'p. 5 e Jailer en 20 prochainc. lairc. '' lui c^lre quo loisscsi; avoir veodi* 'cmpfe^cher df pr6»enir. J'ecrire ¥0- ivoi.r presqiie |c passe d^u^ ^ 4. J lie learns fencing, uu love to play* He seeks to vrroiig me.;;< Give me some drink. ' I take upon myself the care Je me charge Je lui eo pafw o/'spcaking tro him of iU ler. :J■^^?:i'^ v. «<-i. ^j^>vf V II apprend a faire des annes* Vous aimcz a jouer. II cherche a me faire tort. V-^ Donnez-moi a boire. * I ani disposed to obey you. Jc suis dispose a vous obeir. He has eocuuraged him, toll Vi- encourage a entre. undertake that work. prendre cet ouv rage. *»♦»*> Sh« has engaged-him ta play. Elle I'a engage a jouer. Yuu have iuducud me to eat. Vous m'avez excite a man. ger. I have exhorted him ttr be J^ I'ai exhorte a ^tre sage et wise and dutiful. obeissant. Help me /o write my letters. Aidiz.moi ^ ecrire mes let- tres. Think o/ paying me. Songcz a me payer. You •xpose yourself /(?• fair Vous vous exposez a.tombei^ stck^^ malade. He prepares himself far his 11 se prepare a partir. ue{)arv!tre. She delights in tormenting £lle ^e plait ^ me tour men. me. ter* [^.] I did not do it to make Je ne Pal pas fait pour vous you uneasy. faire de la peine. I told it him to inspire him Je le lui ai dit pour lui don. with emulation. ner de Temulation. He came to see you.- II vint^o«r vous voir. h order- to be happy, yre Pour ^rre heureux, il fauf must be contented. etre content. I shall do every thing to Je ferai to\it pour vous plaire. please you. . - [6 ] I shall obligo him to do J9 Pobligerai a le faire. it. . You will never oblige him, Vous ne Tobligerez jamais 4 to submit to her. se soumettre a elle. Oblige him to see h^r. Obliatz-le ^ 'a voir. He was obliged to do it. II fut oblige de le faire. .^5 ; m I was obliged io so our. J'etois ohliiie de Mortlr, He will bo obliged to see H scia oblige fi!r la voir. her ■X^2 34(» A GRAMMAR OF THE He aims to hurt me. It t&che a me nuire. They aim to deceive you. lis tichent a tous tromper. I shall endeavour ta briag Je t^cherai de le ramener i him to his4uty. son devoir. Do not stay. Ne tardez pas h revenir. Do not delay to speak to Nc tardez pas it lui parler. her. Why do you delay going Pourquoi tardez.vous h f thither? ' \ aller ? : ?<^-; ..^^. .;. I Ion? /v'See her. II me tarde Jg la Voir. I shall begin ta apply myself Je commencerai a m*appli. to the French Ip.nguage. quer au Fran9oi9. Ji begin to undersiiwd French Je commence a comprendrt ' a liiilc. - '- -. un peu le Fran9ois. He began to take more care. II commen^a d* avoir plus de suin. We began by breakfasting Nous commen^ames par de. ^ before wc went out. jeilner avant de sortir. r shall not fail to do what Je ne manquerai pas de faire '' you please. ce qui vous plait. ■' ' Do not fail to be in such a Ne manquez pas de toui place. trouver en tel lieu. He has failed to do his duty. 11 a manqu^ a faire son de. voir. [7.] You are in th^ wrong Vous avez tort de TOur to complain. plaindre. You are in the right to be Vous avcz raison ^'^tre ii» angry wiih hiui. che cuotre lui. . Have you not a mind /o take N'avcz.vous pas enTie k a little walk ? fairs un petit tour de pro. menade ? I-havc lenve to go out. J^ai permission de sortir. I want jfo see him, and speak J'ai besoin de le voir et if tr^ bid. lui parler. You have no occasion wVous n'^avcz pas sujet k trbmper. ramener i renir. I parler. oas h f oir. I m'appli- 19. ompreodM qots. avoir plus les pur de- sortir. pas de faire H. 18 Je voui ieu. re son de* FRENCH TONGUE.> illy is 24T? Je T0U8' d'etre ii- cnTie k mr de pro* sortir. Yoir et k 18 sujet k\ |c moi. fairs i^ot"1 ie Tous Toir| )r«Ddre m thai all jOQr family is touieYoirefaniUeseporie well. blen. Itm soFTy /i0 see you sick. Je suis fiche de toiis Toir- malade. He is very near his death. II est sur le point de mourir. He is very capable of teach. II est tr^s.capable ^/'ensei- ing mathematics. - gner les mathematiques. He is capable of wronging II est incapable de faire tort any body. aqui que ce suit. She is worthy to be loved. Elle est di^'ne dhixe aimec. I am tired with writint;. Je suts las ^ ecrire. Are you ^ble /o walk ? Etes-vous en etat //« mar- cher ? Are you sure o/* pleasing her? Etes.vous sftr de lui plaire ?• It 18 easy to guess. Tela est aise a deviuer. This fruit is good to eat. Ce fruit est bon a manner. He is much inclined to s!an. II t%i tres.enclin a medire. der. ■■■■■-'. . ■■^ " > ■.. \\-^ ■ "- You are not exact In learn. Vousn'^es pas exact a ap. ing your lesson. prendre votre le^on. Are you ready to go ? Etes.vous pr^.t a partir ? She plays upon the harpsi- Eile est habile ^toucher da chord very well. clavecin. L am assiduous in reading Je suis assidu a lire Telema- Teleraachus. que. - He-is first in. prattling. II est !• premier a babiiler. [9.] It is to no purpose, to C'est temps perdu que de lui Speak to htm about it. en parler; It is a misfortune, <& have no C'est un malhenr que de n*^* friends. voir point d'amis. It is a folly /a despise others. C'tst une folie que de m^prl*- - ser les autr(>i>. [10. 1 I have jW breakfast- Je viens de dejeAner, ouje ed. ne fats ij ^ : Elle venoit i/'arrirer, oa etl« ne taisoif que d'urrher. We hat jt«j|>gotout of the Nous Tenioiis df sortir'ja coach, , carrosse, ou nous v>& hL » - '' y - : sions que Je sorVit 4u crtr* ^ ? ." -^;^ •.. .; :' rosse. . -'■ v . •-. ■ -f They had jufi finished their Its venoient Je finir Jeur jf'si, play. . . - ou ils ne Hiisoiei ,t quc^ ^ finir !eurji.i'. [U.] When I began /j Quand ic vius ,) ecrire ma write my letter. lettre lie began /o speak of his LJch. li tint a pader de ses rU es. chessea.. As noon as sho began to speak Des qu'ellc ^ int a parler u* ofhi'j iii?i./oriunt'r.. ses malhturs. Slie wa:; very msrcf urprisiil Elle fut fort surprise quand when we bfi^au *;? rciate nous vinmes a lui racont9r ^ to her that stury, cette histoire. When ^ije hth&i skull know Quand son pere vtendra ^ of it:, savoir cela. If his wife should know hit; Si sa f^mnie Tenoit a savoir lihestmism. son libertinage. a }0u should speak to her Si vous veniez ^ lui en par* about U, tell her, that I ler, dites.lui que je n« am not ignorant of it. I'ignore pas. f 12. 1 It is your part ta obey C est a vous a.m'obeir, me. It is your part io play. C*est a vous a joucr. It is my torn to v*a!k out. C'est a moi ^ sortir. li is my turn to stay at home. C'est a jfii a rester au logis,- Whose turn is it to drink ? A qui est-ce ^ boire ? It is her turn to write. C'esl k elle a ecrire. It is your turn /o read. C'ebt a vou^ « Jire. It is not my business, to cor» Ce n'est pas d moi ^ le cor. reet him. "ger. it is not yonr business, to Cen'est pas a vous .) vous en meddle with it. m^ler. li is- not her business, to find Cc n'ei-t pas d el! trou. fault with^. vera reds It is not their ! icss to Cc n'est pac : -^ ^ vous take you from your work, , distraire »)c \ :lre ouvrage. I FRENCH TONGUE. ^\9 river, oa etie f/'ar river, dt sc/itir'ja nous ue hu iorfir du Crtr- finir Jeur jf'si, oier-J: quii de i .7 ecriro ma cr de sei rU ni a parJer u* lurprise qiiand a lui racontdr B ire viendra i renoit a savoir ige. z ^ lui en par- i que je n« ;.m'obeir» Ijoucr. lortir. ;ster au logis. Iboire ? icrire. lire, raoi ei le cor. rous v vousen lell trou. .;iE a vou» -'re ouvrage, [ 1 3.] He lias too much pride, li a trop d'amour propre to own liis faults. ;> nixv fiour avouer ses fautes. \. She has still beauty enough, Ettea encore assez de beaut6 to please. pour plaire. Yea have not money enough, Vuus n'avcz pas assez d'ar. io bear great eipences. gent ^0«r fairo de grandei depeiises, H:» i too proud, to ask her II est trop orgueilleux pour pat'don. •' ^r' lui demander pardon. .;^' It will be sufficient, to i^rite Ce sera usscz ds m'cn ccrirc. to me about it. , . ii, uih be sufficient, to ie\\ it Ce seroit assez Je le lui dir* him in t^o words. j en deux mots. Ii is sufficient to warn her. C est asstz de I'avertir. < ^ It is too much to ask of me. C'est trop me demander. It was insulting him too C'etoit trop Hnsulter. much. It is too mucfi,"' h deplore GVst trop d^plorcr TOtre your misfortune. malheur. Cease froth conversing with Cessez de hit parler t c'est him; it is doing him tuo lui faire p-op uhonncur. <-^ inuch'hononr,"*"' * ' .>. . -j^. [14.] I Saw /jer^ ^iidi spoke Je I'ai vue, et /«/ ai parl^. - to her. jThat play pleased and Get te comedie plut a Idr charmed the ^ueen, ' Re'tne et la charma. :^ he pleases and: cliarms him. Elle lui plait et /!enchante.] |o. '^ ! ti ! 11 .;9;' ^^< f! ■■.--,'. "m ii, CHAP. VI. > J,l!U> Ii Rules and OssERt^jrioifs upon the luFSRSOffJi J^erb-S: IMPERSONAL erb- are tjsed pnly in the third person singnJ- , . Theyvare of two Hinds : . some are lajpersonal by t^ir ■ nature ; .and tlv«se arc n^ver used but |B the third perso?i singular i as, ilhei^ef ipleut: others |re sometimes impersonal, sometimeJ persona?.. Tiiese are oersohal when i7,' in French, has a relation to sbtti^ forc- |[olng noun ^ as, drawing is a genteel amusemeiii, it be- )mes )our£. ladies ; le detsinr, est u a amusement honn^k?,^ •I'V Mi' I' i • ■yn'ir^^ «50 A GRAMMAR OF THE I 5 ii h\ \i a cotivient aiix jouncs demcisclles : here U has a relation to dessin. Th^sy are impersonal, when il ha:j no relation to a fofi^uing nuun ; a», le dessiu e&t un aovusement honnete, il convlent que les jeunes demoiselles s^y appliquent. " ' a. The verb il pleut^ beside tiie use made of speaking of rain, may be used impersonally in a figurative sense, speaking of sev- eral other things which maybe supposed to fall like rain ; as, // fleut des pierreSy il plut de la manne dam le disert. And in fa. niiliar discourse, to express eagerness for departing, we some- times say proverbially, je partirai demain. quand il plewvroit da hallebardes. In this case, when it follows the substantive, il agrees with it in number, according to the French Academy ; thus, speaking of a bloody battle, we may say, les mousquetadei y plewvoient ; thus the relations of cardinal Mazarin, who used to send diem a great quantity of money, said, 11 faut croire que I'or et 1 'argent plewvent en France. 3. Sgme personal verbs aje used impersonally in the third per- son singular, though their following nominative is in the plural f ^s, many qccasions are found ; ilse trowve biendes occasions, or flj> a bien det occasions^ ^ - 1 4. 11 ya^ therq is, there ar«, son\e are, many ^fe, mvf be followed by a noun in the plural ; as, there are fev people, who a'pply themselves to their own language j iV) a peu de gent.(\m s'appliqucnt d leur propre Uiigue. Sometimes en is added to it ; in this case it has a relation taj some preceding noun ; as, parmi ceux qui apprennent les langues etrangeres // y en a qui negligent leur propre langue : among those who learn foreign languages^ there are sonie who neglea their bwn tongue. When we 'speak of something present, as if pointed at with the finger, there /V, is rendered in French by voila. j SiSf there isi handsome lady, voila une belle dame. N. B. Vaugelasy and, after hiro». the abb^ Girard, will not al low, that il est might be used instead of ily a. However, they agree, that il n*est may sometimes be used instead of il «'^ a, and sometimes not, as in the following example ;r there is oodung_ which pleases me more, // n*est rien qui me plaise davantage whereas it is not used in the foltowing-^ there is nothing buthoo' our in serving our country, il n*y a. que de Phwweur h servirsi patHej and not i/ n^est qUe ; but, as grammai;ian3 are dinded here among, themselves^ I advise th^i learner to make use ofUj^ instead flrf" // est^ and paj ticulariy, of il n*y a instead of /'/ «'v's/j until heisjiierfect enoui?h in the French tjono'uev to know in what circumstances the one may be used instead of the other ; and even Vaueetas, Corneille, and the /ab(>6 Girardf do nc*; agred about sucn circomstances-.. 5. Tl of time. French, number, ve;irs ag impel sot Londres f ttf . . . 6. Vei properly gular ; b parle, 01 pronoun orje vol ceded by as, for c> 7. Th necessary. is commi ing verb we must 8. II fa I ceded by write well 6crire, il plumes. English,.; Iffut ; as. When that want: which is livres a n 9. The duty, an noun, an ilfaudra, ghsh ; ill the prone is put ill guefaille As the : French vei noun is is plies an ab foregoing ■"'.'' '\ FRENXH TO:iiGUE. %5l relation to ulation to a it honn^te, lent. king of rain, iking of sev" ; rain ; as, // . And in fa* ig, we some- plewvrolt da lubstantive, it [Academy : mousquetadti in, who used ,ut croire que the third per. in the plural \ r occasions^ or \y are, m\} here are few iiiguage ; \1:j iigue. s a relation t» :nt les langues igue : among I who neglea )inted at with J ^.Sy therein (/, will Dotal- owever, they _ of il «!>, «» ere isnodiing davantagei ihing but hon* ;ur K serwir si are dinded use of i^/* d of il n'^h know in whaJ e other ; and do no'. agre» 5. The impersonal ily a is likewise used to denote a quantity of time. In this case, ago, since, these, and for, are rendered in French, by iiy a beginning the sentence ; afterwards comes the" number, ful lowed by que ; as, I have arrived in London three vears ago ; ily a trois ans que je suis arrive a Londres. If the impeisonal be transposed, que is omitted : as, je suis arrive i Londres ifl y a trois ans. In an interrogation, combuny a-^^S yttf . . . is commonly used. ^ " . ■ l««tf » . 6. Verbs construed with the indeterminate pronouDo/r, are not '' properly impersonal, ihough used only in the third person sin- gular ; because on may be resolved into a substantive ; as, on parle, or les bommes farlent. It may even be resolved into a pronoun ; as, I will see you to morrow, on vous verra demain, orje vous verrai demain : consequently all verbs may be pre- ceded by on, except those which are impersonal by their nature ; as, for example, we never say, o« neige, • ' ' v'. -K A \ ,^ 7. The auxiliary verb to be, followed by the adjective ntcestary. or requisite y when it may be resolved hiti; wr must^ Is commonly rendered in French by U/aut, with the follovr- ing verb in the intinitive mood ; as, it is necessary to, or we must Iqv our neighbour ; ilfaut ainicr son prochain. 8. Ilfau/f signifying a want, is followed by a substantive, pre- ceded by one of these articles, un, de, des, du, de la ; as, to write well, we must have good paper, ink, and pens : pour bien 4crire, U faut de bon papier, de bonne encre, et cie bonnet plumes. In this case, when a personal pronoun is expressed in English, it is put, in French, in the third case, between /'/ and jaut ; as, he wants books, // lui faut des linjres. When a noun is expressed in English, signifying the subject,5\5 that wants, it is likewise put in the third case, but after the nouit bad weather. Jt is clear weather, w'w^ /^ It it dark weather. ^"^"^ The wind blows. It has rained today, ac fast as it could pour. // sno'ttis in great flakes. The moon shines. ^ It is dirty. ^ What o'clock is it ? 4- Tell me, if you please, what o'clock it is. It is twelve o'clock (at noon ) // is a quarter after twelve. Jiis half an hour after twelve. // is three quarters aftc. twelve. // is one o'clock. ..< /'/ a quarter after one. // is hal#in Jioiir after one. // // three quarters after one, &c. Itjait trds.beau temps au. jourd'hui. Quel tcmpsfait.il ? Ilpleut, il neige^ ii gele, il de. geie, a tonne, il grele. I! fait chaud, ilfaU froid. II fait mauvais temps , II fait un temps clair. II fait un temps obscur, Ilfatt du vent. Jl a plu a verse aujourd'hui. // neige d gros flocons. II fait clair de lune. li fait sale. Q idle heure est-il ? Dites-mo^, ^i'il vous quelle heu"*^ il est ? II ei-t midi. // est iridi et «n quart. U es. .nidi e* demi. 'est une licure moins un q art. II est une heure. Il est une heure et un quarf, II est une heure Pt dcme. II est deux heurcs moins un quart, &c. plaif, ^5.] FRENCH TONGUE 259 but when the tCiid of falluir mist help one u French by it in the sc- with you as ^ERBSy MXEM* :e. II temps au. .a? il gek, tide, il greie, [fait froid. temps, i clair. } obscur. aujourd^hui. iocons. lunc. t.il? vons plait, 1/7 est ? quart. Ire moins un It is not late. // u early. // u time to go // fCest pa tard. // est du bonne heiire. // est tomps de partir, [3.] Reports arc spread in II s est ripandu un br«it par the city, that la vill e, c'est que. ' tmuvi oc€asiooi. pportuolties met with. [4.] There are occasions, on It y a des occasions, oi^ le which deiay is of the ut* d^lai est de la darnidre most consequence. consequence. 7bere are few people, who II y a peu do gens qui so Icnow thcmseltes. cuunoissent euz.m6meB. There are handsome women //y a de belles femmes 4 ill Lundon. Loiidres. ^> There is some danger in if. II y a cfu danger. V , 7here is no doubt of it. II n'y a point de doute. > j^ There is some profit to hel/ya^a profit ^ csperer. hoped. Some books are very useful, II y a des livxes fort utiles * many are very dangerous ily en a beaucoup de dan. for youth. --m.. j^ereux pour la jeunesse. Some wc ;en are very c^prf. II y a des femmes tcds.ca. cious. pricieuses. There is a h».ndsomc lady. F'oila une belle deiRoisclle. "' " Voila do belles oranges. Foila d'etraiiges raisons. Foila uue boutique itkim ^•. .:* There are H^'f" -ranges. These are titAngc rrasont. There is a very ricii Sgp. riche. vks^^ et un quart, et dime. Ires moins un 5.] How long have you Combien y a-tM que Voui been in Kngitod ? c't< s en Ang;eterre ? Hsw long is it since you saw Combien y a til que ?out him ? > , . '' V 4' ne I'avcz vu ? ';?i^<^- '^ low long has he been dead ? Comhien y a t-ii qu^il €$t mart ? ■'^ ' , \^ :'*-Ax-. '■ * have been in England these II y a trols ans qtfc" je 6ufi three years en \ngleilerre. le has been dead these two II j a deux aus qu*il est years. . . . ^ mort. have not seen him these II y a quatfe four years. s q«e je i ai vu. m P '■■fe* I: A.-Vjt» ^. ^ V, i: < f: il I itl ■I \m* M ir?i I 1 -ii ■ ■■ t-y A , f R 5 ; liMii: i Ill L I 1 36i A GRAMMAR OF THE She has been marriid ilae II y a dix ans qu'/lo c-t tell years. niarivr. Her hnsljaud has been sick Jl y a cinq ans quo son oari for theu fijc years. est maladc. ,^,i Jiiy brulher oiudc his form fi y a viiii^t ans que mon tunc twenty years ago in fr^re a fait >a fortune daas thv Ka8t ludicti. U>m IndcH. Where were ^vn ten years Ou cliez-vous ilj a dli ani? agof ^i .x\, '■■ ' .. ' V- ;'V •-- v^-^- . [7.J Every maa should lore Ilfaut almor son prucliata. his n. Ijirtbour. f8 ] I tuant pens. II me faut dcs plumes. V vi jfl/ nothing noir. // ot- me faut ricn d present. /.'« 'Z£;a>r/i it/W to learn bis // luifaut du temps pour ap« lesson. [p.] You wi.. ' go thither, hhc mutt speak tc him. lie mutt know it. she mz/j/ learn French. They mutt study. prendre sa le^on. Ilfaut que tous allicz. Ilfaut qu'elle lui parlc. Ilfaut qu*il le sachc. II faut qu'elle appronne li i^'ran^ois. Ilfaut qu*iis ^tudient. .■»^-^- Are you not obliged io go ^ a faut il pas que tous sor> out ? tiez ? It he not fbliged to accompa. Nc faut il pas qu'il TOiis ac. ny you ? compagnc ? lie must not go out. // ncfaut pas qu*il sortc. ^ You must hold your tongue. Ilfaut que tous vous taisicz. You should go and see him. Ilfaudroit que vous allassitz Je voir, ou vout devriez sl- ier lo voir. rjh' It 'svculd he necessary for you Ilfaudroit que Toua le con. to know him. nussiez. Would it not benecettary for Ne faudroit-il pas qu»ellen her to go thither ? aliit ? i f Would it not benecettary for ^e faudroitil pas que nouJ us to knaw your reasons? sussions vos raisous ? I :// ftvill le neeettary for you to Ilfaudra que vous parliez U spefik to his lather. son p^re. // wil^e neeettary for her to Ilfaudra qu'elle s'appliqo^ V appll^giieli to history. st I'histoire. I ^'^■'- '\-:>Ltf.. FRENCH TONGUfi. 25» quo ion mari in« quo mon i fortune cSaai \ly a diians? m procliaiu. ilnmes. en 'X present. pmps \iOMt ap- IS allicz. lui parlc. sachc. . c appronn^ li studient. ,s que ^Qus son s qu'il Toas ac qu»U sortc. ^ >UB vous taisiez. Le Tous allassU^ | vow dcwic% al- le Toua le con. 1/ pas qu'ellef 1/ pas qucnoui ]>8 raisous ? TOUS parliczi ['die s'appViqoi Win U not he neeesiary for her Ne faudra-t-it pas qu'clle le to profciit him ? previunne ? My bruthur must go to Ilfaut que non fr^re aille en Franco. " " "* France. ' My sister must stay at home. Ilfaut quo ma sccur rcste an lui^is. [10.] // is with pouts w II en est des pootes comme with painters. des pcintres. // u with you as with me. II en est de fuus comme de ■ . , , ■' moi. •' '.v :t''. • ';- 1 CHAP. VII. 'N. '■*'■,■ HUZSS AND OaSERFJTIOlfa UPON TMS PARTICIPLES, P\RTICIPLES are cither actire or passive ; there- fore 1 shall take notice of them separately in the t^o following sections : SECTION I. ^ ^'' ;.^%'"V.. ^ ' Tbe AerirE or Present Participle. r-i"*'. ,^vv i 1. The active or present participle is always indcdlnan, b)e : as, a woman fearing God, and loving her husbanil ; une femme craignant Dieu et altnant son mari. Except in a yaty few law terms. tv a« We now seldom make use of a participle active, exec. itant and ayanSy used before a participle passive ; as, having met with his brother, he spoke to him j ayant rencontre son frere, il lui parla. Except too when it is preceded by en ; as in going, or while I was going, en allant ; in eating, or while 1 was eat- ing, en mangeant. Some call this a gerund, and they are in the right. ^ However it matters very little what it is called. „ £», in this case, may be translated into English, by whilef or nuheny which may likewise be rendered in French,by commey- lorsquet or quand : the first of these requires the fol^tving verb in the imperfect ; the other two reqnire it in tH^Ri|Bpent, or in any other tense ; as, I never speak while eating^ vr while, or when, I eat ; je ne parle jamais, iorsque, ou quM^y je mange, and not comme je mange ; but we say, as I was at dinner, he <*mc to see me ; comme je dinolSf il njint me voir, ' ■'»■ 1 i'SVi'"?!!? ' " «f.^'!>"'#'.'''''-f **-,"'■? --'' 356 A GRAMMAR OF THE 3. Some participles are, by use, become adjeeH?(>9, •nd some substantives : ar, a detractini; man, a detracting vromaa ; un homme medtsant^ une femme med'uanie or un mg, dhantf une mediiante, la such a case tliey are declinable. 4. According to the present usage, the present participle gov- erns no case whatever, but we resolve it into a tense of the verb, with the pionoun relative preceding it. Thus, instead of saying with VaugelaSf in his remarks on the French tongue, these stuffs are not at all like those I saw yesterday, ces €i&Sti ne sont pao approchantes de celles que je vis hier ; or, his temper is so re- pugnant to mine, son humeur est tellement repugnante a la mi« enne, we say, ces etoifes n' apfrochent jpas de celles que je vis hier, son humeur re^ugne tenement k la mienne. Even in the case of the first rule, mstead of saying, c*6toit une femme cragu nam Dieu et aimant son mari, it is better to say, c'^toit uce iemme qui craignoit Dieu et aimoit son nari. « SKCTION II. ' 7Vr« PAsstFn ok Past PdnriciPit* ' To show exactly in what instances the participle pas. «ive or past is declinable or not, is one of the greatest difficult'es of the French tongue. The following obser- vations will set this nicety, hitherto so perplexed, in a clear light. I. The passive participle is declinable, 1st, when it ii used adjectively ; as, men despisr^d, des hommes meprises ; they are loved, ils sont a'tmes oa elles sont aimees. 2dly, It is declinable, when it is preceded by a noun or pronoun which governs in the first casti ; as, the letters which i have received, les leitres que j' at regws. ^dly, When, with the auxiliary verb t'/r?, it forms a neuter, reciprocal, or reflected verb, not governing a first case, or fol« lowed by any other word making but one sense with it ; as, they have addivElcd themselves to trade, ii se sont adonnis au n'egoce. But we do not say, she put herself to death, elle ;*est donne la tnort ; because la mart is a first case. If the verb have no gov« erned wor^^br it, the practice of the rule is still more certain. The diflPIB^ is to know whether the participle, followed by an infinitive mood, ought to agree with the foregoi» " noun or pronoun. As no gramniarian explains this mat*^ ^ in a clear 4od -* •fl'? \i ik ■« vhekch: TONGUE. «5t 1 '' le adjecttres, , a detracting; itite or un mh s declinable. participle gov- ise of the verb, stead of saying 'lie, these stuffs ffcs ne sont pao emper is so re- ^nante a la mi" elles que je vis i. Even in the le femme cragi- iay, c^^toit une PXf. ^larliciple pas- f the greatest lowing obser- crplexed, in a 1 st, when it ii nmes meprises ; by a noun or as, the letters [forms a neuter, Irst case, or fol* Hth it ; as, they \nnis au negoce, \e ;*est donne la lb have no gov* III more certain. ]le, followed by ;goir '^ noun or ~ in A dear aod intelligible itianneh*^ aad^it istbesides 'of great use, I shall ;pve soine observ^ons aj^ain it iir* the iolUwing; ruk. iti The ^^arricip'Fe, followed b^ art in(^nittve tnood, k decli^^hli^; 'ifit govern the foregoing noun or pronuun ; if ffce notitt or pronouu be gorerded b/ the infinitive mood, the paTtiripie is indeclinable : thts ru!c is plain and oeriaK Kow to'khow whfctlrcr the paTtictple, or the inw finitive'mood, govern the foregoing nou'Aor, pronoun, at- tend to the fom)W?rg ohscrrations. 1st, If the infinitive be preceded by a preposition, the^v parflctple jjovert^s the noun or pronoun, if the noun pr / pronbnh may bw put, without altering the tenses, between the *yarticipk' and the itifiaitive ; as, the iohliers whom they hiiTc"eK>mpdled 'to march, Jes sotdats qii'on aeon' traints 4e marcher ; for we may say, they have compelled ihe soldiers to march *; on a cafdraint ties soldnts da marcher. A^ain, the history whjch 1 .gave you tx> read, I'histoire que j« tou« ai donn^ A Jire ; ' for we may likewise sny, I gave you ti»e history to rca^l ; je vous ai donne 1 hhtolre a lire. 0^1 the tcowMary, the itiiiMiiive governs the lorig-oing nouu oir pfouou4», if tiiis canuat be put between the par- ticiple and the infinitive : as, ,we never ought to swerve from the t^ood way, which we began to follow ; il ne faut jimais ^'^carter de la boune route que I'on a commence a tnevre ; we caauot say on a commence la bonne route a sul- vre ; but,, we may say, on a commence a suivre la bonne route. 2dly. If (he infinitive be not preceded b^ a preposi- tion, the participle governs the foregoing noun or pro. * Gramma/ians give false and inadequate rules about this mat- t«r. They say, commonly, that the participle passive is iode«i clinable, when a pure Infinitive follows it ; by a pure infinitive j they understand an infinitive used without a preposition or any other word. . IIow much they are ia the - wrong appears by Uic I examples of the second rule. ^ Some say, that "the participle is indeclinable, when the pro- I noun is governed by a verb coming after the tense compound, and not by the tense compound." This rule is not clear, and leaves a learner in darkness : neither is he able to know when the pronoun is thus governed ; consequently this nde is very inadequate. ... ^^fr According to others, the participle is indeclinable, when a verb [in the infinitive immediately follows. This rule is false io many m ii: Iti ^.-ffl i'ii In 1 cases. y2 ^?; ifi II >t':' 25S A GHAMMAILOF THE V noon ; if tho infinitive niay bei turned into th« present ])artlci|)lc in I'^ngilsh, ur rendered in Kretich by out, antt Ihe imperfect of tiie iudicativo mood, without altering the sense ; as, I saw her painiini; ; je I'ai %ftie pcindre : I heard her sin^ ; je l*ai entendue chanter : the ladies whom I saw passing : Ics dames que j'ai vurj passer : the so). dicrs whom I saw going ; les soldaf^ q(|e,j'a|,i;«/ partir. In all the forej^olnj; ciainpics I may say^, without altering the sense, jo i'ai vue qui pei^Aoity je Tai entendue qui chaun toit,t Sec, On the contrary, the infinitive governs the noun or pronoun, when the infinitive cannot bt; turned into the present participle, or rendered by qui and the imperfect tense ; thus, speaking uf a lady, whose picture was* drawn, we suy, I saw her picture drawn : jo I'ai im pciu. dre : of a song, I heard it sung ; je I'ai etftendu chanter. ' Tlie verbs /aire and laisscr, followed by an infinitive, form M^ith it a sort of compound vcmB, and the participle is indeclina- ble ; as, that woman whom you have put to death, cette femnie que vous avez fnit niourir ; that opportunity which you have suffered to escape, cette occasion que vous avez iaisse ^chapper. III. The passive participle is indeclinable, 1st, Whea it is immediately f lilowed by que or qui ; as, the conse. quence vvhich i intcMidcd that you should draw from it; Vx conjequcnce que y^x pretendu (juo vous en tirassiez. 2dly, When thy jiiiiicipie and (h« auxiliary verb are usod impprs • laily : as, the hot weather we have had ; les thAleun qui/ a/ait. . ,^,,: ., ...-ya 3dly, VVfifc'ii it cannot be joined to a Sitibsfanh:' as it's rfdjectivc ; therefore the [>articiplcs parle agi^ eie, craint^ plaint^ &c, are never declined. 4thly, When it is foliowrd by il's j?overned case ; as, 1 have received ihc letters ; j al regu les lettres. V J ' ' 5thly, '}'h« participles ^M rrom pouvoir^ voulu from w«. loir, either beca isc they are not used attjeetively, or he. cause an infirnitive is understood, wivicfi governs the pre. e(Hiinj noun ; as, I matle all the endeavours I could ; j'ai fait touy^ eifoj?* qae j'ai/w ; /aire U understood after /». . • ■ . . I. ' '.««^ i , iFRENCH TONOUR. «5J^ ^ 1st, When h*ve had ; les IV. It is the opinion of some grammarians, that when the; subject or qominative case of the veTbxomes after i% the partici* pie is indeclinable ; but good authors, such as the abb6s Girard and d^Oiivet, Messieurs' Duchs, Marmotifel^^ ^:c. make it de- clinable ; as, there is a good lesson our misanthrope has receiv- ed ; voil^ Uiie bonne le9on qu'a re fur notre misanthrope ;; Marmontel : the impression v/hich the recital of your misfor" tunes made on me ; i'impression que m'^ fait le r^cit de vos malheure ; ibid. The nartjciples in the foroffoing c?campies as declinable, be- cause, according, to the second observation, the foregoing nouns arc governed by the participles. ,/.j,,^^-- . . , .t V. According to iUe actual use, the participle is de- clinable, when it is followed by an adjective which it go- Ternllow€d by a verb in the infinitive mood, the participles alle and 'venu must agree with the person to which. ihey reU:e t .MS wc write, she came to see you ; elle vous e jt nfenue voir. But il is better to transpose the pronoun, and put it inmiediately before the word that governs if:, elle est mcnve vous voir. A'. U. All the preceeding rules are conformable to the present usage ; all the grammarians and the beft authors havinjj agreed respecting them for the last sixty years. Every rule inconsia- tent with th?se is generally deemed erroneous. if \\ , r* . :\ ',:< '/i . J ** ;§'^ 1 ! . 'i « mi A. XIR^MHAR. 0f XEE vi^Jihi^\a^tj!ifo' *sJi^r¥^ff^rf!jrf*»i*>i«eK %; «mi«i3> ■ -sill' M '^1 .5,13^f ': ^ »^,ts"-j^ f^^r ,- ■" •^'S SCHOLAR >* F^AGtl^S- rf ,., ^\i> -h'! .;; [TSect. I. li j A man fearing Un hoftime qMi4;r^inf Piea« God. '• ; A woman i«vm^ Jbec bus. Ua femme ^' ai^M 90a raan. band. . " .*,t .mv.u;:-'--' . ^'H- •■»'^-,*,j,^?'*?iid*f^" srifj^l'. A lady apj^ykg fttersdf ' f6 tTfte dmoiseflt^^w '/ajM^i* .study. ^^^r^twde ■ ; [2 ] ffe died wA/7''-i', I 8aw hitn wA/^ / walled in Je le vis en me pr^^menant au the Park. . . Pare. iti/^ Q3..] Fortune \^Jickle. , ,, La fortune a^t changeante ' She is a <:i/2f /din^ lady, C'est une dam^iiuilp : char* mante. " ; '^^ She is 2l slanderous woman. C'est une femme medisante. [4.] His [or her j temper iV so Son bunieur rtpugne telle. repugnant to mine, that* • meat a la ni.ei»ne, qiie«» These are reasons proving Ce sent dcs raisons qui con* the same thing. cluent la ni^me chos.t'. fSect. JI. 1.] The idle are Les paresseuKSpnt meprUh, *' ^despised: ' -^ - r ' You do not know the trou. ble I had to persuade her. Bo you know the reasons he told me ? jlhe lace yon hugbt is very fine. |I have not learned the lesson you guve me. |You speak to him of sci- ences, which he has never learned. |You speak of a woman I knew, , , IThese are things I n6ver foresaw. Vuu talk of an affair I have ^oi forgotten. This ib da good fruit as you have ever eaten. , ,, Pbis is the best liquor I ever drank. [he$e are the most honest people ^ou ever knew. The jewels you showed me are very rich. Hie woman he has marrkd. Avcz-Tous Ih les livres qua je vous ai/r«Vi^/ ^ 'L-<'^> C*cst une nouvelle que je n'ai lue dans aucun papiei' de iiuuvelles. Je o'ai pas encore lu les pa. piers que vous m'avez «n- Je Q'ai pas en le temps d« faire reponse anx lettres que vous m'avez ecrites* Ce nc sont pas les m6mea chapeaux que j'ai v:u. - -i- Vous ne savez pas la peine que j'ai eue a la persu;»der. Savfz.vous les raisons quMl m'a dltes ? La denteile que vous avcs achetee est tr^s.belle. > ' Je n'ai point appris la le^oii que vous m^avez donnee. Vous lui parlcz de sciencet qu'il u'a jamais appriui. Vous parlez d'une que j'ai connue. . Ce sunt des choses femme que Je n'ai jamais prevues, Vous parlez d'une affaire que je n'ai pas ouhliee. Ce sont d'auss! bons fruift que vous ayez jamais manm. ges, C'est la meilleure liqueur que j'aie jamais hue. Ce sont Ics plus honndtes geus que vous aycz jamais connus. - ,.,. , ..«5,. \ Les bijous que ^ous m*aveg montres, sout trds-riches. La femme qu'il a epousle^ M ■i4l!' t ■ ■ •: i ' !■ nm^' «52 .% A'GRAMMAR OF THE We f M The t( r ^.. ''"lias brought him a hand, lot a apporte un bien con* some fortune. siderable. Ther^ are the books you Voili le§ liV^res que tout 'lent me. '; ' - "; m^artz pretei, ''■"•' ' I have found my gloves J'ai retrouve mes gants que again, which 1 had hst. i*iiv oh perdus. It is a thought I have read C^eat une pensee que j'a somewhere. ffte quelque part. She has allied herself to Elle s'est appliquee ^ ia Ian. the French tongue. gne Fran^oi^e. They have applied them. lis se sont adonnes au con. selves to trade. nicrce. They have ruined them. lis se sont iumee par de fol. selves by fooIi»h ex. les depooses. penscs. " ' They have drowned them. lis se soot noyei. selves. The garrison has surrendered La garnison 8*e8t rendue d dii> at discretion. cretion. She gave herself up to de. Elle s'est ahemdonnee au spair. '• ' sespoir. ' ' '"' She has seen herself le- Elle s'est vue trahie de so| irayed hy her own reia. propres parens. tious. They havn found themselves lis se sont trouves environnh surrounded by their ene- par leurs cnnemis. jnies. " . [2.] The soldiers whom Les soldats qu'on a contraitik\ they have constrained to de se soumettre. submit. What is become of the Que sont devenns les livr 'books which I gave you que je vous ai donnei to read ? lire ? The lesson, which I ^jw La le9on que je tous ai i/«jrct the ladies, whom I J'aittends les daiues que j< ttLvited to dinner to day. priees de veair Uiuor aa- -^ %_ jo\jrd'hui. The vi The to in I sa> \hei The Id The go 1 sat I tan It is SUl Sever doi to The I to an( What This hea Have suit ordt him n W" ^^RENCII TONGOD. S6S te un bten con< i^res que toui I mes gants que ius. .ensee que j':ti 3 part. tpliquee ^ la Ian. oKe. adpnues au cob. mnh par dc fol ies. , J 8*e8t r^ff^uff 4 dii"! Igndonnee au d^* ])ue trahie de sd >arens. \rouves environnh cnnemis. u'on a (onlrai^ nettre. venus Ies livr( ous ai donnh e je Tous ai 9on que j'ai commandi que vous apprissie^. j'ai ti. La consequence que pretendu jue vous en rass»ei. J'ai et6 malade pendant lc8 chaleurs qu'il a fait. La pluic qn*il a fait cette semaine.ci, a gite les che* mins. ■ftH;-.'.^ J'ai lu ces livrcs.ld. J*ai regu votre lettre. ' Avf z.vuus vu la Rcine ? Pourquoi n'avez-vous pas traduit votre fable ? £ile u'a pas appris sa Ic^on, Elle a fait tous les efforts qu'eiie a/tf. .< Je lui ai accorde tous les plaisirs qu'cile a voulu. LMmprcssion que m'a faitt le recit de vos roaiheurs. La peine que m'a donnet votre proces. Lcs lettres que m'a ect'^ei Monsieur votre frere. Les amis que m'a procurei Madame votre m^re. La surprise que m'a occa* sionnee sa presence. Les Anglois se sont rendtit maitres de Quebec. Vs se sent rendus famcuxl dans la guerre. SI Tl Sh Th Th 1. J good are ( iles< 2. a ver him verb it ma is bet E.Yce partic Th, ioujoui uxifi: ours I ^i W' m^- FRENCH TONGUE. 3$fi I j*a{ ordonni j'ai commandi irisslcz. ice que j'ai fous en tU e pendant Ici il A fait. I a fait celt« I git^ les che> She has rendered herself ce. lebrated by her wit and beauty. The garrison has surrendered prisoners of war. She is eome to see us. They are gone to see him. They arc come to see me. Elie b'est rendu cei^bre par son esprit et par sa beaute. La garnison s*cst rendue pri* 3onni6re de guerre. Jtitle est venue nous voir, oa cllc nous est venue voir, Eiles sont allees le voir, o» clles le sont alleet voir. Eiles sont venues me voir ou elles me soot venues voir. cs-ld. 5 lettre. la Heine ? vez-vous pas B fable ? ppris sa Ic^on, ous les efforts xorde tous ks uilc a voulu. que m'a faiit ros roaiheurs. ic m'a donnei luc m'a wr*^«* lotre frere. m'a procuret lire m^re. J lie m'a o^ca* [•esence. se sont rendui Quebec. Irm/i/J fame"' rre. 9 CHAP VIII. XVlXf i^JVC OBSERrATlONS VPON ADrSRBt. 1. A DVERBS, if simple, are commonly placed before XjL adjectives and participles ; as, (his wine is very good, ce via est tres-bon. When they are compound, thoy are commonly placed after ; as, he is arrived seasonably, il est arrive a propos. I 2. When adverbs, simple or compound, are joined to a verb, they are commonly placed after it ; as. she loves him tenderly, elle Jaime tendrement. But when the ad- Ivcrb is simple, and jotiied to a verb in a cumpoci tense, lit may be placed before or after the participle, though it lis better to place it before ; as, elle Va tendrement aime, lExcept davantags, more, which is always put after the {participle. The following adverbs, hien^ mieux trop- mal, fort^ ioujours^ jamais y and some oiwcts, art piact d bi iweeu th« puii'iary and the parlicijile ; and whoo jamais or /«/. *iours meets with another adverb, it i^ alwa)'s> |/! urd first ; as, he always spoke well of you, il a toujours bin parle le vons. 3. Beaucoup^ peuy frop, asse%^ and similar adverbs of juantitj', take sometimes lu tore them the particles de Dr a, in the manner ofnotitis; as^ it ii the custom of any people, c'est la coutuune de beaucottf> • 8i$P^ 5 of few people, de peu.^c. gens ; that happeus loO many Z r1 li 1' If ■'it %$(> A qRAMMAH OF THE ^ pcoplp, c^}a ^jtr'hc a trcp de gcos ; to too f(}w. peripic, «) irop peu Uw g*'0.'^. 4. til a lu'^ative icMrcnrc ne ptncrally makr nsv» of two i;('gati«vc »tkiii» ; A'^ nepluj^, uo mor^ ; ift ; «<• rfc-fl^ lunliin^ ; ne-Jamcif^ W. ' t ; «^. tiu//cu\t(uf, liy no ihVUii* ; ue.personne^ tn pas un^ ^ ifi^-wu, uobuu^r ; «:«;c. 5.. A(/, which is the fir*t negation, always followi \h% iwHjftct f/ the vpr.b, ap(l whauv«r lUpends < n it, if the subjici be a noun ; as« ra^n, bciD^ bocft fecbl«, v- n«iver free from trouble \ Thainnn ^ta^t R^ t'oibUj hU^\ jutfia'n exempt de peine. If the subject be a pronoun personal, and the sentence interrogative, the sentence begins with tic ; as, do not you know ? ne savez-vous fas f In compound tenses, the second ncgition is always put between the auxiliary and he verb \ as, 1 have not read your boc^k, je yi*a\ fas lu votre livre. If the verh be in the infinitive mood, the two negatives come befoie it ; as, not to tell you a falsehood pour ne fas voiis dire un mensonge. 6. We make use of the particle «^, without it's second nega- tive word fas, or fotnt, in the following cases : ist. When the negative ni fohows ; as, 1 neither love nqr hate him, je ne Taime ni ne le hais. zdiy. After the conjunctions ^ mo'ins que, unless ; de feur que^ tie crainte que, Ust, or for f^ar tt\ai; ; as, unless he coiBes ; i- mains qu*il ne Vicnn**, .«»• y \ -.', . . : vi ' 34ly> Aftct qi'C [u'ececded hy the words emfccbery to binder, or keep frcM. ; crMndre. to fear ; and others expressing fear in mentioning an ffFect not desired j as, he is afraid that he will cfomt to day, il craint qu*\\ ne rienne aujourd.'hui. Bt)t if we wish, that the thing spoken of should happenj then the verb that follows craindre, or any other verb expressing fear, mu&t ba attended with two negatives ; as, he is afraid, that he will not come today, il craiftt 5«:M ne vie,ftipe fa^ aujo«*rd'h«i. 4thly, Before.y«r, taken in the sense cS sinoHt beside, nothiQ^ bijt, only I as, I desire no recompense, only, or bur, the pleasure of obliging you, je ne desire pour recompense que le plaisir da vous obliger. 5thly, After que «f, taken in the sense of why not; as, why do not'you answer ? que tie repondez-vous ? [ . 6ti)ly, After fu sazioir M.K«d for ne fewvoir^ or wh«>n,it impiiM-j an uncertainty of the mind : as, I do not know whether h£ will r Sjuccecd^ je ne sais s'il r^ssira. But, if it implies a full ignorance of the thJKg, it common,ly re- quires two negatives ; as, I do not know, whether he be come, je ne sais fas s'xi est venu. Vthly^.jj^ftef the verbs oseVf cesser, and fwvohr, ufcdnegt-l lively ; is, I dare m\ write to him, ]^f}!foss>\\\\ ^crire. In a W ^ ' : -Jt*- peopi* «{ p WR^ of two .^Mfl/, not «t , u r ; i»r- « th? swbjact ()' ct be a noun ; the subject be e, the sentence voun pas f In ut between the bo{'k, je n*ai • mood, the two sehoot^ pour ne i second nega- •r love nor hate IS i n at 'etc \ Par s : even if IT be I'ollowed by any other trme, the second ncgitivi * stiK omitted ; as, I had not been m Paris for a year, ;"/ I'vah un an que je n'avois ctk a Paris. 9'hly, Wuen, itj a negative sentence, the pitti''' ' part of time : Qt| I will not s«« him fur a yt ^t d'un an. lothly. There are ftofrve exptc8*ton«, in 'vht* ^ • ately make use of a single or doable negative, s'l : as, si vous ne voulez m'y conduire, or si vous m'y conduire : if you will not carry me thither venez cfitte s!;m3ine, of" si vous ne veucz pas cdte you do not corte this week, &:c. He sirn'fits a « . ;:rrai ■'tiis<'f"'iin» rk after Uz par vous ne scmarnc ; if JIUIRS AMD OSSSRl'ATiONS VPON ATH'ERBS^ EXEMPLIFIED FOU TUS SCHOLAR 5 PRACTIUS^ [l.] I save him very ofien. Je I'ai tu tressouvent. ^ Voa are hi ^r?^ hasio. ViJus etes irh.\it^%>Q. [2.] You arc come very sea- Vuus ^tcs arrive trh ^ pro-. fonahiy. pos At present^ let ns Sec. A present^ voyons. For the presetit, I atA o^/^ Poi/r Ic present, je suis trh- eaGj. traiiquilie. Ncntf, I will tell you. Ma'mtenam^ je to»is dini. Oome to day and s«e me, VerRz me voir aujourd'hul. i^flnVi, make haste. P^tte, d^rSchez-vou's. 1 v?c»t yesterday to the play. Jc fus hicr -k la com^dic. I saw her the day before yes. Je la v 5- avant-hier. terday. '"' I have known him formerly. Jo I'ai cttrmi aufrefots\ Ue HtrheA lately. l\ SLtriva ilcrftiererHeiit. She died tnf long agp. Elle mourut depuis pen. ' Yon must write to her before. 11 faut lui (fetriic auparavant. I shall speak to you to mor* Je vous parlerai demaiu, rof •^ iifll ^ IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) 1.0 I.I Uit2^ |25 m JS^ 112.2 ^ m Hi ■ 4.0 1^ 1.25 j|U |,.6 < 6" e» <^ v; Photographic Sciences Corporation 23 WEST MAIN STREET WEBSTER, N,Y. 14580 (716) 87il-4503 '^ ^<•*> -y^^ % ^' !> <\ S6S A aRAMMAjfl OF THE Hmetfirih it will alwtji be DorgtutvaiU^ tt «B lera tou* ■o. jours «le oidnui* Alfrit he spoke ^bos. D'aUrd il-paria mi^sL i iMte been W?fff astonished. J*ai et^ j&uvent ^tonn^* She dle^ \ndi^. Elitmontui iMePkeMS, Do you fomeiinuirtM ro. Lisez-vous quelquefiis des ro« maoces ? mans ? I very, seldom read *n7» J'^o 'is Iref-rarmeni* Ontundden he presented Ibim- Sovdain il se pieneoia de- self before my eyes. vant mes yeux. I shall come back, mt theJe rev tend rai 4 dix hearcs, /a/tfi/, by ten o'clock, au plus tard. Ran thither wUi all ifeed. Coirrex.y aupba vUa, I mver consented tu it. Je D'y ai jammf ponsenti. . I shall always be faithful to Je tous berai ioujottrrSLdhle* you. It is ail Of er. Ceo est fait /o»r /»i»/0«r/. She t(|rme9ts him eoniimtally. £iie le tOarmente tontinuem lemcMi. I shaii speak to him ai let- Je liii parlersi k louir. I cM»moff(|F breakfast at nine Je d^jtAne trdtnairenuta ^ o'clock. neuf ht'ures. ' At what o'clock do yon ^OM- A quelle heure dtnez toui motdy dine ? commutument ? We diue almost always at Nous dinons fresque toujourt three o'clock. i trois heures. I lardly tver go out before Je ne sors fresqite jamau dinner. avaot k.dtuer. I shall meet him OM time or J 9 le rcncontrerai t$t e» etben^ • tard. , You go to bed ipo soon. , Vous allez irop tdt an lit. Yuu r'netQO late, Vous vous levez trcp tard, Kise betimes, . Lefcz-vous de bontu heure, J^aTe you not seep him ygt f Ne l'avez«vous pas encon '%''-'-■ , TU 2 We shalt be in the country Nous serons «/or/ k la caoi- thea. pagne. . < 7>^ra we shall make ourselYes Po«r A?// nous nous diier. menry. tirons. From th^, time I perceiyed DesJors je m'aper^us de itf his cheilwig tricks. fourberies. 7F lera tou* i>iiii(6. 'fait des ro« 4moU de« dix heiirtSi ginsenti. QUff. iid^lfl* ite toniinui* louir* dtoez voul ■V, esqtu jwHUM » rerai /a/ o» M/ an lit. 1 trop tard. \ntu beurt' pas entot* rs ^ 1ft c&^' InottS difer. per^us de ic» raEffcfl toNcjUB. wm ThaiNB not Mm her iiike: Je ne I'ai patf^f tie d^jpmt, - /i^ii wHl you'cdoitt ? ^MMuf Viendi^.TOtts ? //(p«r mmI ilftm' w« plij^^ at^ous jouona an*' caries d^ cards. tempi in impi;' We faateA inade* oiin^rttit Nuu» nous sumaiM dtvf Hlif merry d^l&in^Ar/ ^^y^y UuteUrndt/ *^ jBe has been robbed 41^ ff#iNi»Il a k\k vole en fhix jour, ml dmy. itn plim fhuR*' ^ FshatI S2Qd it you ik^jk^tJevou^ Vaumrnl auprmiif efporHrnkji jpyfi ^^'^, f'Slmii be ready to serve you Je serai prdt in tout timps Jk atwStmiit: Whin are you poiagf ^ * Wbenci do you come ? Which ^ay did you go ii- Com^ hithn^ Go hinci. ' Come ib'U way\* Suv theft, ^ 06 Botvtk i6mr«4' Gu /iW «Mity> Look up. Go up ttaifi. Your pen is down hen* See y finder' that flower. Tous servir. (^ aUea^vous ? D'otfven^Z'' volts ? Par.o» a^ez-vous pass^ ? Sortca 4£sx She comrs^dm ahdve EUe vient i/*^ ^&a«#. I eoine^i^^ft^'&w.' Jty^ntJ^hai^' Take it /^y the topi Preoez»le par le haut H«id l( if the bottom, Tenezkle p^tn ku*, Thiso'd house is very fine Cette viei*ie maisoa est (fll. within. htMe en Jedani. ^ This house is very &wmati' Celle.ci est trds belle M lft« out here, iHowfar ahaiX we go ? Jutqu*ou irons^nous ? 11 iiuvu read this book 0/yar J*ai In ce liTre^'iM^'ia. ^ at ihiK^ ^ ' Wit us reikdai far as this. hlions jusgui-l^' UQtt wUi find buii i&rrc*4i^9fi^. Tons ie trouTcrcs MMf m*' 'i ':-^ !i vtrons. Z2 :»«»''" 374 A GRAMMAR} OF TaG I You go v€rff$r. He li?e8 hurd by. Xhoii%\ii\ijuU by, i hare folluwe^^l9i<%^ Com^ ntavtPm ^■f- Vou* al U^z 3tM ^». fi «^^ 1 1 demeu re /««/ ffche, ii"ii\ v. Je I'ai achete mpreu.\ •^♦V Je I'ai suivi de prh. '•* "» Approcjh«r-vou»ir /&//«#. Go before^ \ will fallow jrofi. Allez denmit^i^ loitf sutrrai. 'Wallc^^W. Marchjifz i!rrit«». irr w /^i- Yoa will flo and down, (^ii on the right * ■ y, k ,.- . Do not go o« the left, .* rs .tli0 diri. II tuniba tout d§ mOmlongiMB^ ■ la bouc. They went psy Vous mettez tout ms dessuf» iurty. ill:. - dessous. And he iihwhe. " Et lui ai/x^/^ on pareiUement, Gife hlui «v«r JO /////if of it* jDoanu-lui eo tant soitpeu. rRCNCIl TONGUE. .Wl* rx. . iephifreii Qitf ButTitai. iTerez nuUe mi^ ei cela I mllturf* content ntdh lii? ■'' • ; B partwK ;ord^ <& pari et iautr§. enumdk aa kttoos lotw ^ meh \n foult pour It ans dtssui* treilkment* \ant sott^eu. You give hm agrtai /kal* Giro her but lUtU. 1 hA%%mtifmck of il. ^ ^^^l' Hate you enough ? I liuive «aten imfiekntfyi* You gav«^ DM /«». imrciK Yott g^^ve hiAti iM /i/^; m; V»U8 lut en dnenea Uaucmpi Ne lui eo donncz gueret^ J« n^tti: ai /dv betncoufs, 4^ Ea a?ez Tous a/i^s f . J'ai daAA^«>«w|f&u»Mi«»#. Vous m*e» ftv^^- Ynt^ domi4. Vott» l4jA ea. a«e» ditwie /re^- By Me anJ link ha willbe- Pbia./^ il d«f 'Usiuka doc» come a d/jctor. , ,i teur. >jQ i'aurai aiflriwv 4 jQ^Z/iiPk -t^l l^daiTG been ^ mo// twice at J'ai dte deux fois chez ellC|^: her hoiiire. tout au pHu* 7- Do oot fail to write to her ^u mains, tie manqnez'pas'd•' . at leait: lui ecriMk Yott bought it tw diar. Voua P»r«z achete trop ehert I hate not sold it him deai^i Je ne Moi ai pas tcbUu cher*. I am M;f$ffiA^^ obliged to you. Je tous %\\\%infimmenl oblige. He waii«/mox/.luHed« I »i II ImX. presque tiio. . wv.,j- Vou must ask it of huta hyW faut que vour l« lui de«- (dl meant. mandiez a^xoAirmrn/. She is l0Zrria% wtf//. < / £l)e se purte Pflsmbkmen^^ Iiri&j> do you Doiaoswer me?'Po»r^ttoi ne me repondez* i 'lami Ml ' jsr.i." ■ A'?! ".V4_ w''-"' vous pas^ J >v":-/';* ; '3rfV;'%^A jSTow Is yoBT Biatei ? Ml't Gomment se perte- mademtu- ^ ; '; Je Die ^H9 parfaitement Hn*- My. maihef a very iUi, IVla m^re se { ut te /r^/.m^/. Vou have done ctiwf/)^. U' » Vous avez a^ /^p-^mm/. * Itou accuse mc falsely. * Vous m'accuscs ujfwn* Ik thoroughly understands the II salt le Frau9oii) a/Qnd, French- iaagu age. *. .t.r M " '^^ 4 Mi hill :■: i !l I ^ I J ^. »ft <\ ii ,J**J«^je.«» fl Bii ^IPSr. "ii" ;4.V' ■SK 9n- :" her. rill A GRMMAR OF THEv ' ^anffj persuade j1 peini\2k persuaddr^z^TOas: Site consented to it miihn* Elle y coMenttt ^r^jv^' luctancy. She weni against her wUi, Elle y «8t'8ll£e a contre-eoflti I agtce tu it heartily. She is sKurefrom all danger t J*y consenR ^ ban cteuri a convert de tout Elle est danger. LhaTe told you my senti-Je tous ai cHt mon terti* nu'nts openlii ment a deeouvert. He has i^jven us a descrlp. 11 nous a fait uoe detqriD* ' tlon to the life. »- tion au naturel . sm ' He fell upon his backh ^ I -' 11 tomba a la renverst*''- r/^if^i' ■ Thvy went groping nloti^. Us all^reiit a idtons. ^^^ ' You have put on your stock- Voiis arcz mis ?os bas a ings the wrong side- out • I'^nvers^ ward He did it on purpose, I -did not do it designedly; Do you speak in earnest ? I tell it you seriously^ I did it in a joke, I said it in jest. . , She said it in jest,' II l»if^it «c^r^ i^£i^i£ift Je nc I'Vai pa:* fait a dessAtu i*arli'z»vous dt lonnefoi ? Je voos )e dis serieusementv. Jc le Us pour rirt, Je I'ai f dii pour badlnen' ' '^ Elle Ta du en iadinant. You baTe done it in a hurry, Vous i'avez fair ^ /^ j^^/^/ I have done it unawares, Je I'ai faiJ par megarde. You speak at random, V'^us par:ez it^;v> H m r^veilla en sunauU -.A^^^^ Let us live in peace, "^ Vi?on8 en paix, ' ' You may sleep qmetlf4^ «>t ' Vous poures doilnir en repot* Will you return empty band* Vous en retoorD€rez-*Tout ed f a vide f yjstjt hltike freef as if yon were at Agiawi tibrement, comme il home. Tous eticz chez vous. She has resisted him stoutly £lle lui a resia(e foriet femifi* Did you c:u thithwr o«ybo/ ? Y ablates. vcu'. ^/t;'^. Y:,"^,^.-vi-' ..vv>C ,. mieux. _ •_ _ -.^^j'^- '^..p^fni He shall pay dearly for it- 11 me le pay eta eber. i i 1 am thirty years old^ neither J'ai trente ans, m plus nt more nor less, , moins, ^bove allf do not forget to Surtout^ n*oubliez pas d*ap. bring paper. porter du papier. shall speak to her inpri" Je lui parlerai enpartieulier, vate. -::^Mk' ^"i'^.-^i ■::;,i*.<:i:i:^--^i w::'^-^-ii ^■^■■Mr".. 3.] It is the opinion of ma- C'est l*opinion tie beaucot ny people. de gens, t is the custom of few peo. C'est la coutume de peu. d« ' pie. gens. ? hat happens to many {^eo- Cela arrire a., beaueowp.. d&-^ pic "*' g/ens. 'w i lU ■'■<:,'&iir "^^ v% •^If 97* .A GRAMMAR OF THE -«• [4.] I htfe not Uftrntd mj Je ii*ai/«f. «pprif flit le^oii. lesson. v,i;H& tft .««i>vi * ,*»^t>vv I tflMili «p«ak to mm no mort. Je m lot futHeini pfut* I htf e not seen him at all. Jo m t'ai folnt ?«. * He knows nothing, > » II ne salt ri^n. ^/^ i tuwr knew tittn. •■ ^= ^ Je mt VaijamaU cowtill^ >*-' J?jr 110 HMm/ conM>nt to it. N^y conseiitiz nuilemeul* 1 did m/ tee Anjp body (here. J*' «l\v tti tii pertonne. [6.] Hate you «o/ seea my JV'atfz.trovs /or to moft brother ? fr^re ? Have you not written y«ur iNT'aTfz.vous pas ketXi tutre theaie ? thdMe ? Hate they no/ yet breakfast. JV^ont.ils pas encore d^jefi. Has she not consented to it ? N'y a.t.ellr/^7^ consent! ? Has he not spent all his mo. iS^'a.r.il pas il^pcM^ tout ney ? son ardent ? Has he tto$ sent for him ? Ho (*a.MI pas eatO)^ eher* cher ? [6.] I neither lote mr hate Je ne Vi^m m Ae to hais. I neither tee her nsr speak ile no la vois fil ne Ivl pwrhj. to her. i/if&v/ you codie with roc. ^ fflMfx que to us ne tenki arec moi. i>j/ he should die. ' '' De craintt qy\*i\ ne xaoutfii. 1 sku&i hinder him from play- J'emp^cberai qa'il mv JMie. ing. ' '"■ • ': , v~'; ■ ■ ■ 'c^,-r:r<:'"'-:\^'y^' I am afiaid be is sick. ^^ ^ Je ^mkyfn^'fmim Be sure that he does a^r go Prenez garde qti'M wr 90^. out. •;:»•;''::•■. i^' .%f^;'jsi* I am afraiiA he will not come Je crains qu'il m ticone today. •■^;3^^:=^H-i^.*'^-\..'^*; atfjouri^hul. Why do you fear she will Pourquoi craigncz - V%m "^ mot write to you 2 qu^elte ne tous eerUnepoi' She fears he does not love Eile craint qu'il ne Vaimefati - bw. ■*■' '^'K ■^'■■'^ "- She fears he is mt. in ^ood Elle apprehende qu'il nesoil fssi!; .J* , liiilietii. I desiro no FRENCB TONGUE veconpenae, 97» d^tira poor \plttt. totine. u ^flttotre encore d^jeft. s consent! ? the pleasure of obliging pcnso qui le plaisir de yaw, f uttft oUiigtr. It is 01}^ tbrQii.gk idlttseu^ Ce nVst que pM piift lii. i\ii; iriii^.c Y ♦* •ineaotlie* I know only -lim. vikVV Jc m connois que lul. it wa& ^11/ a fakM ^larm. Ce n'etoit yji'Moe faastt ■•■ ■.; 4,w,'«i».-j»f»»', larine. It M ott^ a jest. vi-i r v i Ce n'eal qn^a bad)iM«rat. lAT fO nOtt I We are hut fw4V ^:' "^ '-^" Nous n^ aomints juirdmiv. ( spolte &v/ two» words to •fo ^ taiai (bo ^ den* Mm. • I mots. j i . . I ha^e learned French hia Je ii'ai apprie lo J?raR^» threes mootki. '^^r^ ^iw rroia mois* I heard only that Aews. >^^ Je n'ai appris qui oettie Don. ▼elle. il^l)efH>6 tout I We staid there only one Nous n'y restamcs ^*uiii I hour. ■ "V •^' ^ heure. " ^ eat 0) h tfher* | She wrote only six lines. . £i((ii«*aicHf qui six Iignes. Why do not yon answer ? J^|«^ ne repoodez-vous ? ^' lib k bait. | fTiiry do not you study ? J^« n'^tudiez.Tous ? ^ W/yr do not you write ? jgw^ i^'^crivez-vous ? \ no lul paff)e. l/f^'/^jr does not he go thither ^e n'y va.|.il lui*m^ine? ous ne "fetMt^Why did he not come sooner ? ^^^ nVst-il Tenu p1ut6t ? Il^iy does no/ she rise ear^ ^e ne se l^?e.t.ell«. pi 09 fitf mourtlt. I Her? matin? ^^ ^• m'il i«tf jw»e- |l fa««o/ go thither. *' ^ Je iir /«« y alien • *^^*'** ^ * I raasoif Icpep pace vit^ yov. Je..«ur/iMf rous tenir. pied.r H iM soiC hM'Iiou iankot spealL to him to vous tte pouve% JLui fVtfkfv V t'^*' I day. i: L . t aujourdhui. |it»D MP 9one. |l cannot skt&y auj^ Um^iftr. . Je h^/nvk rester plus inNig]*. tomjiS. • «,- ?ieoav /^Canno/ you fotj^ Itim-Xo M ? iVir/o»«ff%-TOU8 l*y tamvtl • dare not &}^$9llt- to ko^ JiiMi«riiM< purler. ^^ .^ atgnez •▼«">■> ;!ii> are yott, not W£il« tA'hin^? N o*e%^%Qui ^as lui ecrire ^' li! i 37fl - A ORAMMAR OF THE Doet not he dart to go to the Noti~u\\ pmt aller i la co. play ? > v^ %r fe medio? Doii noi the dan iQ take the iVo/tf./.elle pat prendre le inoindre plaisir ?<;^'^'^ ^1 ai Jeast pleasure ? y , w t4 "*h I 1 have 110/ teen him then ten II y a dix am que je ne 1 years ▼11. I had 110/ spoke to her for II y avoit dcuz ans qae tvro years. lui avois parl^. jeiu I have not been at the play II v a trois ans que je n*al these three years. hk ^ la com6die«i| • ' I had not been in the Park II y avoit qaatre ans qae je for four years. n'avois ^t^ au Pare. I shall not see him /or a year. Je iit le verrai ^'un an. I shall 110/ speak tu them for Je ne leur parlerai Jo deui two years. - «h>? -^^uttc somnre d'argoot, fir a eum ofmitey, nonobslaot, dS^ jij^^^^ -^ ( <«i(^/ 1) fmr- i« . labauttbe evening. , par de^k . - > lea iHljieBy ^^ >.it a travert, uhitk gofciiift ilio lir»t coO) ^ as abqvQ. ■ .!•(• • •• I > 3. Tbe following prcpoi»i(ions o^otcrn Iho third rase : Coiiforipemcnt d I'usagc, cjuttiit . • k moi jusqu'aux - nues W u •,••1 ■; if. par rap))orl^^^^ ' ii\ics pratiques, V Riitjnxs vfov PRKMstnotfi, ojfor my pan.nixyt. to tbe jiigt, ,,,o;/r( as, il^er having talked withdiit knowing any thing or the ntatter) apres aroir parl^ tans sa'voiftt qa'il disoit. Those which take the prepnsipon de after them, be- fore an infinitive, arc, borSf bormis, except^, ^ la reseH>et ^w« «« lleUffatitef a force, aup(nl^ and perhaps some others ; ^f, far from blaming you, loin de vous blamer. Those which take the partici* pie dt are sauf and Jusque ; as, I can but begin again, sa^fd recom* mcnce \ v a. Ell is never followed by the article, though we say, in a fam. iliar wny of speaking, .he is dead ; tl est allc en TautK mond< ; mpon what account, en. I'honneur dc quel saint. , ^ i' Dans is always follovyed by the article, except before p08te^iT<( pronouns, proper names of authors quoted, and proper nam^s of towns ; as. I have read it in Cicero ; je Tai lu dans Cicfron } search in my pocket, cherchez dans ma poche. We indifTerently make use of ^ff or dans before personal pronouns ; as, in himi en lui, or dans lui. But we say, penser en soi-mime to reflect within ourselves, 3 . £«, before nouns of time, signifies the time employed in doing Hfttiing} and dans^ the time after expiration of which the thing liall be done ; ps, I could do it iti a week,'i)r I would' spend ho more than a week in doing it, je le ferois en.buit jours \ I wrll do it a week hence, je le ferai . ■%'■■ .*.•■ w- -aa.: \ • -:! ' FRENdll tCWtfuE. «79 avert iJ^^^^^ bird vtw : J parhnivi^' n of ifii/i*i' ■/. A * iiy. • MwelU«b«for« e no prepo^iltww e the prepo»'u»ott tore an Inftnitivf, talked wiih6»it 1^ tans savoiriit ir after ihm b«- I rrsef^tt '•*" "• jer« i V. faf f»?'!* 1 take the partici. «n, M«/'^ »''<^«'"' weiay»tt»»fa™- » Vautft monde; before po»»t;^»n proper nam^i of iCichw i iearch idifferently make tnWm, ^«'l'^» Of within bur«eW«s. Employed in doing Ivrhich the thin^ would" 8pe"t|tnieaytfi0M'aif JT roiV sont mortels. 0,^Sd^y which Mgnifiei an exception to something, governs the first ' case, speaking of things ; as, without prejudice of hit claim, jauf son droit. It Mverns the third case, speaking of persons ; as, tauf au dti- inandeur'H M pourvoi^, but the plaintiff, or petitioner, is at liberty to sue, or make application. A law expression. Id. Whitr before signifies opposite to^ or in the presence ofy it muft Be rendered in French by devant f as, oppoiTite to your hoiue, dcvant voire maisoft ; in the presence of the king, devant le roi The oppo- site to devant is derriiret behind. When 6e/ore signifies to have prcce^ det:cyof^ it is ratidered in French hj avoir Upas sur S a«, dukes are be- fore earls, les dues ont le pas sur tes comtes. In all other cases, brfore }i ren^fc red into French by^ ai;^^/ ; as, we were liaf4)y before the war, nous ^tions heureux avant la guerre ; virtue mui^c be preferred to every thing, la vertu doit aller avant tout ; it's opposite is apres^ after. 11. Avant followed by quey is a conjunction, which governs the sub. Junitive : as, before you were born, avant que vous fussiez ne; fuUow- •d by V/r^it governs the infinitive ; as, before death, avant de mouHt, 13. P'r^jy <«/^r^/, near, govern the second case, though we may say, in comn)oii conversation, near St. Paul's, prej I'^glise St- Paul. Prh raast alvvUys be used instead of auprej, speaking of time or age ; us, it is near twelve o'clock, i/ est prej de midi ; bhe is near thirty years old, die a prh dt trente ans. 13; As custom will not always suffer aupres to be used, when speaking of pUces, particularly after trop^ sit asjezypluj^ bieny I ad'vho t))e teai;ner to make use of pres ; as, he lives near the church, il de> tdtyxrh pris de^i'2yiU '' thoueh auprh may be indifiereiuly us^d ia sacha^cise- ^y^^'^^^^-'t:^-' v-^ --■ .- ' . -; . ^ ; .. .4.^ 14. /'r^.r, in the sense of save, excepting, governs the thfrd case, and a«t be nlaced hf^er the noun which it governs : as. except ens c C«a. ecu prei •;• iatc^tliig that, a eila prcs% % fi80 A oiiitJWiMAR OF THE .V . IS* jfuprh must always be used instead of prcs^^ y ^t, w|i he is in ifavor with the lining, my }ord, that lady ; il est bien aufris du roi, de m^nseign9ur,i^c cette mme : he can do what he will with him, il a tout pouvoir <}0|»r^j 4^ loi. .Idly, When we mention by whom a person is entertained, sheltered, ^&c. aS) he is gone to live with him, il s'est retiv^ ttu^rh iiBivA\ lie is ,^uitc safe with him, il est en sfiret^ i7{(^r^/ ^ fill to God and men, il est \x^%xvx. tn about the beginning of the spring, •ivr/ Ic cummen<;enieot du printemps. \., • li. When from and to denote simply the distance from one pliice to 'another, they are rendered in. French by de and a ; as it is frv^ ^1^ from Lond^ to Greenwich, il y a cinq milles de Londrcs ei Greenwich. , When th^^y denote the quality of the distance, they are rendered by de- puis titid Jujgne i as, he walked from London to Greenwich, il alla^ fietidepuh hoT^dresJusqu' a Greenwich. When they d^pot^ soccession of place, they are rendered by dt and enjj as, he goe^ fHxn town to town, il va de ville en ville. . . v* ; ^ , • \{t 18. ^, each, and ver^i before a noun denoting distribution of -peo- jiV, time, or place, are rendered in French by par ; as, ,two crown»a pete, deux ecMs par tete : three giiineas a week, troi$ gwn^e? jpiar se- ttiaine : four slulhngs a mile, quatre schellings ^^7r mille. 19. Vis-a-vis and a ('opposite, opposite, goverri ^he second cai though we should say in common conversation, vis-a-t^is l^h6tel" de ville, opposite Guildhall. The first h applied both to persons and things, tie | other to things only. 20. The participle active In Englith, preceded by without^ is render* ed in French by satis, sometimes followed by a substantive without an article ; as, he spoke to him without fearing, il lui parla sans craitik. Sometimes by an infinitive with a preposition ; as, il lui parla sans \ traindre. Sometimes by que.t and the following verb in th0 subjunc- Vive mood ; as, il lui parla sans fw'il craignit : nnd this last' must bsj UKed when the active participle in English is preceded either by a pro* noun, or any other noun. V: 21. Aj, in English, with a verb in the indicative mood, or on andl Upon with an active participle, are rendered in French, sometimes by tur followed by ce que, as : as, you wroteto me that . . , sur ce qut\ ' vous m'avez ^crit, que... Scmetimss by,ro.»i.^»t?t.*s 5 as I walked I imo the Park, com me je me promenois au pare. Sbmetinw^ by a fol- lowed by a substantive ; as, on my arriving at London, W moit. arrhitl a Loi^dres. I 22.i'J'rhe prepositions de, eonire, sur, SQUS, and sans, are comnjonlf I repeated in French, though they are not, in Englisji ;. ^s, t^ere were! ^. ^."}•, •■•rf- ,<.,■'«. - ^Kif FUEiVCU TONCXTE. 5rst have place4 WOr rvfUh fb« Vng, fo\T aupr^j4i^' rtaiued, sheltered, irhdeXwi fee Is lify in regard to^ s, he w ungrate* r ley di^note snccesMon listribUtion ot -peo- . as, two crown* a •oh gu5ni«J#|^r*** rn the second case i.«>ii l''h6iieldevilk, f»on»anwr la table et j«r.U shaiee. 83. A^pati podr% avee^ dans, i^c. are lommonly repeated when the noims are nor i>yiianymoua, or pretty nearly the same signification, as,, by mildnesk arrd reason ; pnr la douceur et par U raison : par is re- peated, bec^nte douceur and raison are neither synonymous, nor nearly ef the saAie slgnlfitatfon. Bnt in this instance, in luxury and voluptu* ousiiiess, dans fa moOesse et la voluptii tli? preposition, for the contrary, ^easob, is rot repeated. ^ . .., '■ ._ '•':';■ iV. J. The piieposltion dift zb6 the wtitle te, arte contracted into du, dfUnd i^ikita des • of >h* Ciither, hte,de Us pere«i, the same contraction of rhe article in mad^ wi«fh tb* pwposition- d t to t4ie father, a»p^i to th« fothtsrs, «w.^ perea ; instead of a /- pere, r wbielihit is dsMgfoed* tb« first a»ut^t be the second in French, with the preposition a before it, or it must be changed into a verb in the infinitive mood ; as, a dJning-room ; pne s*^ i mangef : a patch-box, une boite ^ moucHes. But, if the first, express the maftf£r of which the thing spoken of is made, it requires the pre- position de ; as, sitk stockings ; des bas de soie : a silver pot : un pot d'argent. ^. ^ is sometimes used, 1st, instead oi at., or to, before names ©f ptscM, which admit of no article ; as, vivre a Paris, allei: a Londres, t'arreter a Amsterdam. 2dly, Instead of with >• as, to paint with oil colours j peindre « Vhuile. Sdly, Instead of /^r ; as, a coadi for six persons ; un carroise a sis placeSk ,v •,;•.:, ., .-, >,.i\-i,., ,r > <•.-••! •■ ' 4tMy, Instaid of ttft0r ; as, to live after the English fashion : I'ttf ^ « I'Angloise. Sth!y, Instead ni 6n i «»» o» »l»e ri^t hand, a main droite : on tba left hand, a main gavche. 6th ly, Instead of in ; as, a suit in fashion, nn habit a k mode. Tthly, Insteadof i>y .• as, step by step, pas a pas. *€ 8thly, Instead of according to ; followed by the subitaiitive avis / %. at, according to my opinion, ^ raon avis. *- ^ ■.'■'^ Pthly, Instead of to ; as, to judge cf him by his looks, • jugcr d« ^^ lui par Ja mine. ' ^ ^ A a 4 i-^* , ^x^ "-^Vr^ ^82 A GRMMAR OF THE lOthly, Instead of «/ ; u, at two o'clock, a deux heurw. le is ftometimes used without being expressed in English. 9. De is often put after a substantive instead of jome^ expressed' or Anderstood ; as, a bit of bread, of meat ; un morceau de pain, da Tiande. It is sometimes used littewise, Ist^ after the indeterminate pronouns, quelqu'utit personnel rleut quoi, i5^c. before an adjective ; as, there is nobody so lucky as he, il n'y a personne de si beureux que lui : there is something inexpressibly gracious in his discourse, il y a je De sais quoi de gracieux dans ses discours. 2dly, Before the proper names of places having no article, which we are going or coming from ; as, revenir de Paris, partir de LoAdres. Sdly, Instead of in ; as, he went away in the night, il partit de nuit. 4thly, Before a past participle in the following.and similar expres* sions ; as, there were ten thousand of thenv killed or wounded, il y en eut dix mille de tu^s ou de blesses, 5thly, Instead of by ; as, he is taller by the whole head, il est plus grand de tout la tite. 6thly, Instead of wkh ; as, he ran with all his might, il count de toutes ses forces. 7thlj», Instead oiiffy afiert instead of ; as, he behaves- in, or after, this manner ; il se conduit de cecte maniire : were I in your stead, si j'^tois de yous. 8thly, Instead of OA / as, to live on fi«b,vtvre de poisson, > t? ,', \ '-' ^ It is likewiae Used without being expressed in English. ; 'l \ Ther^ are Some other uses of the prepositions de and a : But it vrould be too tedious to relate them here, as they have been sufficiently ex* plained in the foregoing grammatical rules and observations. :-fe«*-' 1. JRUI^S AND OBSSUyjTlOifS 9fOlt pRSPOSfTIONSy MXil4Pli' riRD FOR TME ScHOLJu'i PRACTICE* [1 .] I. was here ie/ore you. You are come after Die. Get out of my si^ht. I saw it leJ^inJ the house. He went *ufith bis brother. • I have been at your house. Have you beeu at his house ? I hare not been at her house. aWhy ditl you not como to Me has succeeded against all Jike'lhood. J'etois ici avant vous. Vous etes veuu apres moi. Otez-vous de devant moi. Je l*ai vu derriere la maisoq^ 1! est alle avec son frere. J'ai ere che% vous. Avez-vous etc chev. lui ? Je n'di pas ote chex elle. Paurquoi . n'oles.vous fasj veuu cheii nous ? II a reiis:bi tontre toutc appa- rence. *w '':4a HIENCH TONGUE. ■V^' <: son frurc. vous. e che% eUe. dies. YOUS fas I IOU9 ? \tre toute appa / Ton vriU fiud my stock' ^? Vous- trQuverii ine»ba« dbur ix the closet. le cublDctt . - / He is in' Eugland; .r} j:-ni . II est £v>^- An(;lel(rre.: '■}{{ Since his arrival be 1Ul9 aU Depuis son arriv^ejii a^ton** way beeo ill. jours ere inala4e. I foresaw the consequences J 'en previs les confteq^eacea of it, from the begin, i/^^ le commt^c^ein^sQt* ning. My l^niffc is over or utitkr Mon couteau tst dejttut Ott^ the table. , i-j dessous \a table. Let us share between us ivio. Partakiuuus entre nous deux. het us hii^e charity toward hyon% de la charite ehvers- our neighbours. notre- prochain. I have spent about a thou» J^ai depeuse environ ipille sand guineas. /i ,, v J'' guinees. ;!,', . nf- .* «;i ' Thoy are all dead, v.vr^^A/ my lis sont tous motU^ emcepte father. qu bormismou \i!^Te. He will do it for a sum of II le feral moyennant une money. somme d'aigent. She likes him, notiuit/jstand. Elie P'aime, nonobstani soa Mj his humour. , ,; * humeur. ,„f (. kj<. .,, •■ f She would marry him in spite Elle vouiut l*epou8er malgre of ail her relations. tous ses parens. I spend two guineas a week Je depense deux guioees beside my lodging. outre ^ mon We travelled by land. I left it among my papers. par semaine, iogemept. j? r ' . Nous ivoyageam^fi j^r;tc^re. Je I'ai laisse partni met pa. piers. '•,-,■ ■■'% Vfe take a walk every day Nous nous promonons ttfus Jtir//}^ the summer. ' \c^:}onxi> pendant VM^, The people suffer a great Le pen }Ue suuli'ie bjauc9up deal during war. durant la gutrre. : \-\t^^ I gave itybr you. Je I'ai donue^^atr vous. ^v; ^ He is tvithout fi lends and II est sans argent et semt nvlthout uioney. amis. I hiive acted according to J'ai fi\lt sel^y .^m suivani your adfice. votre avi§. '^ iuricu »;i. Huit bomnies ont ete ensQi^ der the rub^bish. . ^. veils sous les decombres. ^ Eiahf ■m- t^.. %u V^ A CltA CirAMTMAR OF TflE "'f LM've that dish u^dtt the LaiMc% cfc plat /w' I« table. table. He spoke to me cmcernint II m'a parl^ toiedaitt €e(t« t '*' coup d'e;:ee a body. fraverf Ic corps, f^.] Hres d« moi. *^^ Keep yourself »aik the' fire. Tenez-vous auprh dn fen. She' HV«tf opposkf the £x^ Kile demeurei>»-^.i»ix de hi -'■'ichwitge^ •'. ''■^-'■'' t' ■ "- Bourse;- ;^' jmr.r;.ij *>■- ; /ffter which there was S ball. Ensuite de quoi il y eut un f ' bal, I have 8tiffn*ed a great- deal J'ai bean coup sou fivrt htause Ok' her account. * d'elte. , She died, to the grei^ regret Elie mouput aa grand regrei :; 0f atl hfer family. de toute pa famiUe. i^r; • •Cot them dost to the QiiVi^^Ae& a Jleur de terra. ground. ^%t down itr«r my brother. Asseyeffvtoms ^ f«l//' de moti frere. tit tnadc bis escaips hj favour l\ s'^chsppg a la fofveur de 1^' )i' Of tlic night.'* ■■■''■ ^''^^ ' ia nuit.-"-- -^* :^''i->'"kfe^- ,%-. H.'. ♦ •m Mlil^RDJfQH TONQi;« «■ 995 U9' la tabl& wclant cetU \%tri le Mir. rps. .^»«t» les nults 0t/. isan. on meurt df ong de U h^ie. X b&timeits U imise. us h long d« je fires du pa- rx de la tilie. ion pays. ■ |€ moi. ^ * >rw d« feti. ^i il y eutun [tf grsml rtgrei [amiUe. feur d€t tcrre. b co/^ demoti Hi9;: pretends to, bfi 4f^ , tiie right, in spite ^f io*r jfs to what you say, I heard na talk, about it. >^c*^ . She has done it without the th«f. ,, -; «[':• M'^":f ' -i Yuu shall not havji il iM^/^^r Itftyliguii^eMfc; ti'tiv it • He , |mi so^it iUl liis estate^ except a &i|iaU.hX»uA«» ,. iWo are shiktred here from L? popf fut blti de la ?iUe« U feuiafoic ravt^u, #11 du b'on 9eiii«t <* 'j'UND }<;»n <£r/vi». .' * ?i lis s'habilleni, ^ hl'^ode de Ffaiwtte, o^.ibJii ^riio- ^oi^e* ..V , •; rv'i'---.'r>,- >^ I egard de ce que tous . ditud, je Q*^ ai pAS en- teodu parlei. •. Elle I'a fait ^J^mMfsOti sa )-: #*^'' the rain. 'fti'j^>b-ih >Vf^ s(vi*f^ iThefe has been a battle bn thji tidk qS ih^:A][)s. Illc went to the other side of tlieP^r^nfts. |NuUo Ic was stopped in the mid- dle of thc^tmttLui itii ;}\, . .)f9erc.v .. .: V r , './...: Voiis ne Paurez par>^ moins !: de clni|«»ute I AuiuetfK. i II a Tcndu toMi 4on btiena la reserve d'une patite mai. • »o*.. .. 1 ., -v* Kous somrees ici a lain de de la pluie. fie^'Wiiit "■ 11 y a eit une bataillem-)ar son tcstavtent, a /'dk- ctusiou de sa femme. i'# Nous en somnies Tenns d bout k force de bras Je Tous defendfai, m pefif« dt! ma vie ' '■ ' !! fill arrute au milieu do Ip «.i •IV"' i! 1I Jill i ■■| 288 A GRAMMAR OF tHB f ,#'■ He lendf money Af //^ rate ll pr^tede I'arg^f 'J^Va^mwI^ of five per cent. de ciriq^ pocrr omiW V' »[d»}^' j'^*' '"y ?*>*♦> I <^» ^^* d mot, »j(e n« Tni'iBn nut care for it. • - ' " ftOnHac^fja^. ' . • . They have been purfcued At On les a puursuiviff iliii^ au A 'Xi far m the wood, !i .kvIjoIW' ' * ^Jt »'i1i ;/ild# not like to rcmore onJt n'aime ])oi^t ^^i^^ogerj account of my customers. par rapport -X ines pra(i. -[Rem. 1.] After ha▼^nJJ talk- jfprh avoii^ p«rl4* »2mi> sa. cd without knowing any voir ce ^u'il disoit. m i«hin^ of the inaUer. ^'^H -^ \i* \\ ul? tl Si'fvfi -c; To show you how much I Pour tons montrcr eombi(i| ; am concerned for all your je prcnds part a vos in in^reies*: t^r^ts. • • »' J givv you leave to do what. Je vous permets die fnird '\i iStet yoiT x^ease txcepi gb^ ■ (otit ce qu'^it vouS'- jilairu ,Mi4nf out'. '• hormh tfiiOiftU. ^ 'i'^i* JFar from disapproving of Lotn ds desapprouver voir ^^ki your conduct, I would conduite, j*aurui8' fait'1^ have done the same. mCtne chose. Vk» do<'» ntthia^ but prattle, 11 ne fait (jue cafuser «» /!n instead oi jlcarping his lus- uv ^krdrcz votce ofgrtij money. M .•» Th Rej I s (J Till tl ds Voi th it. . Sy dtni of walking we ar- A force de m.irchcr, doJ* sh rived before night. airivames arant la nui{. I ^a He'^has) entered an action II lui a iotente un procil' ^h against Iwm, at the risk of au peril de perdre to« ^€ t : i' iosing "all his estate. sou oieu. " ■;: - . % shall lell her my senli. Je lui dirai mon sentinienj •stents, at the risk of dis. ^7tf r;j-^»f pu SMrc, tljtat lie U not Ltcs-vous siir quMl ne loit in the city ? ~ pas datu la cite ? I have Mt it.in the..cbam..J(e i'at iaU/ie dam la chain. bcr, , «. .nfK(( bre, .. ,*>J j*«j I Kafvei sl|iit U jup m ny^J^-i'sli enferme ^iw mon jtruivk. ; <;ai i,coi(re. •. .... Put that iWo my cUset'jt?^ Mettcz cela datu mon «iu •VI. btnet. There it nothioi; in the bot. II n*y a rien datu la bou> *«;.^ cnmliitifl ^'««^^fl«^ Slf«!x«C»j( « ,1 U:jn ; -^eilfe. ni?V /«>«-: U^ {J^\ montrcr «J>y J Refl^cf well w«*Am yourself. U^'fl^chissez blen tn toui- ( part » tos in« ' ,.,a„« ^ «s ^ "ftirl ^ *^" jaothitig' in him, that Je nv Toio. rieo <» lui qui me ^^'^^r*.,..,.^ *iWrJ %?V* 5sapprouTj:r^^^^ I j^ t*»ere any .||iing i« thew,a; n-t^ilvquelque chosH »rf^^ ' \**^ iiSR f*«^ I *^** can gite occasion to eux qui puisse donner lieu lose. •• ■ youj- angpicions ? [ d vos.iiou peons '? , » 4f days, ''i' i'-^ - ^' x--^*\. / ■'•'': :- '■'"' ■^^^■'=4 ««i«»/ ,^ V»u» (ne 1e feri«i pas m quinze jours. ; sMM''i\-\ idre 6ft iicon. ^drct TOtr« ocs^J !^«» »'•"""«'" «'M« nl shall haTe done /• four J'aurai fait dant quat^e U marcher, no«| [es arant la ""'^' ii days. ■iv .(ti jours. .r.Jf#' 1* I lite un proc«* *^*'* 8®"^ ** t^^ iai a Je ?ous I'enTerrai iii^tiM hnit r^ perdre toi ^eek>tlnie.u.b ui.Kr ». jours. ^ ^.i M,m! '..^>.^ * :!r,;5, ;i ■|4.] I come from j^r Je \ieai de ebez "voua, yvi ^. * ^H n A II fid ^ ' S^ ^ ^'// lui deplaiw.ff ^^^'"^y'**'" ^" or b^r.^ome. Je venois /i!p cheM lui, ou ^'*'. * ■ . ;i , ^^^'B *"'^'* *°^ wi/Ao«/ the ^orx la maison. • 5':^ i Ji^a^oUtn^^tlX^®"?^' ' •' .'^•>.'^^ ^ r>^ .. . '.. m';v j-rU'u? . v«(' J fc! ? •'•ere is" Spanish: leather 11 y a du marrcquin c£r>xirx r 'tnriyne. ■ "^^^^ i'^* AQ<1 tfff^^r the et <^/xo(M les chaises. f^,.\irg!ie. I ch^iyg/ > ■t. SSS: A GRAMMAR OF TIfE Ha dreirllini W/^«tt undir the'il le tira di ikiM^ la ttfUte^ tabic. *. .'1 ' ■'■ > '■ ■ ' '•" [6.] Tiie tfHtaiif of' ihltLe Jebon 4e^M vaxihon dh. ^ ieaantry buase it very' cauipagii^e^i thft be«u. pretty. • .•.,.'.•; "i ^f^ -tlM^.**' Gire mc the >»/^ /«ifr of DonncE-iAli 4e" i;K^iJr«/ du^ the bread. pain. You wHl obHge me^ iryWVfMs «imfobi|ger^«« sf *V - ^44;?Hfi,Ji. : [7.] I shall Io?e yaiu^liilJe voug aimerai jusqu'a h [8.] All men, tveti 'k^gs Tons les hommcs Juimi*ah» -themsabei^ :tkre>- IMW't^^ rois, sontavfets tk des ma. sickness. i v^m ' ' ladies. All iB^n.4let|iife him, i«m Tout je moiida'le. -: » i'r.i ^ : .A.ij,''f ift-x "-.w viiiMr the ^lalntif if^ [lo/i MmySM/au Afoasmdtnt^i^ftoHr^ [10. ] Why (do yma leave Puurquoi 'lalASVxltouB^e las that he^p ifef >diist t^fift 'de.lioue dinuivtf '^dtremai* ,. your house ? son ? iThcywre net tot^rdkiin^^tii^Ottmt 8^ itmvtdt'pm' decani presence of the king.' ' j ii««o»i^ i i jiinlict .j i:. . You have the fretedeiuy of Vous 6tc8 ^^. • ■«• ^ilavjiuufif^. '5 '^-i- -y ' j Virtue should be preferred T^a vurtu doit'^Klt^r •A^^^n/J /o every ihhig. * tout. ' * [H.] It is near two o'clock. II est pres de deux heuves. Sb^ is ff^^r twenty years old. 'K^le^a^jj^r'i^vi^e i^bgt aus. . Ue lives nMr St. Patil's^^^ II demeure pres de St. Paul. [ t-S^O Doe< he live so' near^iytrnmrek^^i^priif i&t iom^ SYou live very netin-- odc an. Vous demcurcz hienprhV^^ ^^;^ ^|.:ff •»A..i«>v.. hiJii y.M,! ! » 4%'''V« «i •*• ''^' -.^■.-"■J ^. ■s FRENCH TONGUE. m i i H r«f t beau. f I ' ' ' I U destdus du era! jusqu'a h **[,',' • ^ 111". nines jus^^akt Cooie nearer me. ' *'; Approchea-Tous pht prh de •■*'.*-.,'■ '♦■'":, moi. You are not near enough ^'Voub n'^tes pas aesezpres de- me. moi. [14.] She consented to Elle con8ei.tit i tout, h. eclftu every thing, that except* pree, ed. He has paid me all, except sii II m*a tout pay^, i sii gui« guineas. nee»pref, [15.] I have put my daugh-. J*ai mh ma fille aaprh d*elle. ter under her care. He is in favour wUk ike 11 est bien aupree du Roi. .mg. -'-^.^ '" ■ He can do what he will with II a tout povvoir at^ee de ' ■•'I ■J if m ''■•■ \ Ml ;„# ;■', nd|>li^^pfi%{ parettffti" '»'•/•' )it. '•'••'' '»/'•• ' indent iBelro«^ Uvr(^'j7tt>'4Jn^dRf heureux ''Aw»' I deux heuves. ;rwdeSt. Paul. I lez &v« /r^' *'<^" him. .^ ':*^^: :*.! lui. -^^!-- She N i^e ^o iifvf wiA Etle est all^e iitf/r^/ ce lui. him. y,^:^. , . You. are safe «piVi& hinl. - ^^Tons ^tes ,e« »4rete aapree- • *^^'' . ''V-^' ■ de lui. ■ '■ ■ ^^[''^ [16.] He is ungrateful /o II est ingrat MVfrx moi^ ^^ >^' I havie^ not been ungrateful Je n^al pas e(^ ingrst snveri'^ to you, < vous. I intend to go to France, J^iii dessein dialler en France' about the beginnifig of the vers le commencement dft 'Sprin^^r kv^^ t^-^H:'''^KSi^r' P^intemps. Come oBout midnight. rlH/lV^ucz vers minuit. She went out about noon. Elle sortii vers mkli. [17.] How many miks is it Combiun de miiles y a.t.il from London to Windsor ? de Londres a Windsor ? Greenwich is five miles from II y a cinq miiles de Loo. London. dres a Greenwich. We walked from Londou to Nous ai lames a pied depuh Greenwich. Londres jusqu'a GriiiO*. wicb. '% We came in a coach from Nous vinmes en carrosse' the Tower /o /^tf Park. depuis la Tour Jusquatt- Pare. He goes from town to town. I! va de yiiic en vilic. They go from house to house. lis vout de maison en maison. iTN tm i-.p t h h m* aoo A GRAMMAR OF THE [18.] Wc spent ten bhillings Nous depinsamcs drux ecus a piece. . ' par fete. They givu him two guineas le has made her a present II lui a fait present d*une o/*a diamond ring. bague h diamans. Bring the vinegar- bottle. Apportez ia bouteille a vi- uaigre. Where is the powder box ? Od est la boUe a poudrc ? Glre me my gold fringed Donnez moi ma jupe a petticoat. f ranges t li ^t hoonftte hupme. - man. .* , , , « . . • . ■■■' T was here at tea o'clock. J*etois ici ^ dix heures. MHi yr^'tLTE silk Stockings. II porto des bas ^ »oie. lie has i fine marble slab in II a dans sa chambre une his room. belle table tfe marbre. Give me my black velvet Donnez-mui ma jupe Je ve* petticoat. lours noir. Give him a bit o/* bread. Donnez-lui ua morceau de pain. Do you choose a bit of Soiihaitez.vous un morceau meat ? de viande ? A bit o/* cheese will be suifi. Un morceau de fromage cient. suflira. There U something iiicx- II y a jc ne sais quo! de gra* pressibiy gracious in his cieux dans ses discours. discourse. Somebody will bo puoished. 11 y aura qoelqu'un ek puni. is there any thing more beau- Y a-t»il rien de plus beau tiful than the sky ? que le firmament ? I shall leave London next Jc partirai de Londres Tan. year. nee prochaine. u. I cwne from Paris, Je viens de Paris, lie went. away in (he ni^hf. II partit ^^ nuit. \Vc shall arrive there in (he Nous y arriverons de jour. day time. 1 shall set out to morrow Je partirai demain J!? grand early in the morning. matin. She, is taller hy the whole Elle est plus gt^s^'Ic Fan with all his might. II courut de toutes sesforces.l 1 io. > ou qvitb all my heart. Je vous aime de tout mooj coeur. Dofs ii& '>e?ip*ve h that man- Se conduil-i/ de cette ma- ncf mere Vv'ere I in your stead. VVu iive tn fiah* ^p^ Si j'etois de vous. JSou. vivoos de poissoii. ♦«!», FRENCH TONGUE. 303 ) n*a pas tort. par la niinC| 3 huinine. c hcures. i de boie. chambre une t marbre. a jupe de tc« \ morceau dc s un morceau de fromage 1*13 quoi dt gra. si>8 discours. Iqu^un de puni. L de plus beau iiiDeiit ? Londres Tan. ioe. iris. it. ; L'rons de jour. lemain de grand ■ ,\. toute I git* -M fl itvi ue tout ton tesses forces. te de tout moa| de cette ma- rous. ie poisson. Thejr lire m nothing but lis nc se nolTrrisscnt que de meat. ' ^' «'' . viande. . . It is the greatest fully in tiie C'e^t de la dr^rnierc folie. world. My raftcaliy servant told Mon coqnin de valet lui a him every tiling. - tout diu I shall not come back these Je ne rcvicndrai de quatr« four months. ' ■'^^- mois. There is n ^i. :h thing. II n*y a ricD de tel. llo goc;> <»4> i*e:<;r and better. II va de tuieux en micux. She^'V'S v>'i worse and worse. Kile va de pis en pis. 1 lof'.a .'.:usic every other J'apprcnds la inusique de lay. deux j^urs Pun. (nay meet every third year. lis s'assemblcnt de trois ans ■* V V' ' • eo trois ans. " I shall be married a year Je serai marie dans uu aa hence, ... did. CHAP X. J i" ■'4^'^ OBSERFATIONS VION TUB CONJUNCTIONS SI AND QUE. * i.n|"^H£ verb following the conditional «, when It signifies (/*, X. >s never put in the subjunctive mood ; and it is put in any tense of the indicative but tile future ; consequently tne^fu- ture in English is changed into the present in French ; as> you shall be satisfied if you call to morrow } vous serez satisfait si njous n^enez dcmain. The conditional is changed into the imper- feet of the indicative ; as, if you would call to morrow, si vuos 'vciiez demain, or si vouj njouUez venir demain ; and not si vous 'v'lendriez^ nor si fvous n-oudriez w whether he will come to day, jc ne sais s'il tviendra aujourd'hui.* ' ***■ * See the exception to the 9th tbicrvat'on tn the use of the ui'^junctive mj'vd, page 23:. ■.', ""^iHI* Bb V»M1 A cnuMMAit or Tin: 4 I'Tom the U^it ohicrTAtion h fiJlowii, (hnt tUt conjuncitu»» I'/r/^rr uiu) or «ir most comitumty reiuicicti in Firnch by •*', dttutuii uiui «M ( its, AKK hiiu wltcihci' ho htiit ih>nc tha* or not, tittutuii* •U-/-hii jV/ 4 Wux (rU «n non. They nic knmetimoi rrniUr«d in Krciich, 'xvhtthtr, by «/»/♦•, %iul or, by «<# fw**, or oMf Mlon« i Mi, you will uot be tnihiabcd, whether you havr tlntc tnnt nr t\ot ; yr/^ vouK nyc/ f;ut crln. yNf*, or cm unt noun nc t'liycx pni fnit, voui ne Kcrc/ pHi puni. li may likuwiov be re ml c red ihii vvmv t vinm n« j>cvcf \\M puni, .(0/V y»f* votiH «yc/ fait icb, 10// uhc^ or «m ^m^' vouk nc I'ttyvA pnii ii\it. It iHhriicr not in repeat xofi, ut )e«tit in con- vcrsution. Take n»>tiir, thut '^vhitbrr niul or, icitdcrcU by y/<.', «r soil out, j»overn the Niibjunctivc m««Ml iu the French. 5. We luttke tititf oC yui*, initertit of repretiii^g the ronj\iiKtion si, or Komc of the other conjuncti«»nH, but more pwrtlcuUrly ihup i>f which ywi" lo^kcs a p«rt. In the fu'iil Crtur yw^ iit followed hy the Nubjunvtive inooJ : no, ii he cowci, And if you ipettk to hint, ,«*/7 vitHty rt <^kf 'X^oNs Jut />tir//r«. In {be tici.ond cruc, the verb is put in the hubjunciivc mooil, when ywr lupplicH the uUce of » conjunction which requiien tln!t mv'od : muiI in the intlicniivo mood, if it supplies the pittce «)f »( conjunctiim which requires ilir imlictitivc : so thiu it tollowii the miture of the conjunction ot whivh it i* A p.tri.* «* h\,unplcii where tjuf povrrni the indirNtivr. When I hurt told and A^Htllcd you, i/uittui \€ vout ni dit, rt yMf* jo voui tti md ••uii^ ; u<, lu utitintMincd it, Mud .1 diJ n«ti bchcvc it iommtit If soHiiHtit, ft tjut jr fft le • nnff/i /»i/jf Kx,im,d«N of lUc tiubjonctivr. He U very Uv fiotn rrstdinu; and « ruinp. well ; /'/ s\n futti hitn tju^ii iht' it tfn'il #Vr*«tr A/V« .' provided he comrs, wncl in in ^oud hrnith, pttktn>N yw'/' t'it'Htitt it ifu^il init fH honnt' s,tnt(\ Miinv n)or« instMnceii will be met wuh in the tuljowinji exivinpic"*. A« ttic li«st three oODcrvMtions hnvc been utiilicienilv exempli* lu'd in the trnseH and moods of the verbs, I klull lierc e>('ii\. plily ot ly the f ((fxr J\i ne enU /SI vhiidiu m ho vull ('OHIO Of not nuti Do you know whdhtr ho Suft /.-voui j'll ft fnit ccla c has ihuu' «h •♦ vf not ? nun ? |VII mn nA'r.'hcr iiu hill Uid'i-moi ^'11 I'A frtlt (H (lone l( or iu>t. noil. '^ Tltb di^<'inc^ion is very »\icf, vet nr[',Iecttd by nil (♦t'flinmfti'i' .»ns I ^\\\\< k\ lUen '.ivt inuli .)(i.»te and t n't. dictory rules. u eoniu«cuo«» French by ", qnf «lon« ^ Ml tUttt or «»'» ' V''' l>ft» fftii, voui «c k vvny t vt>u« n« ♦, or OM ^*»«' v*^^'» rtt lcrt«t i" ton. cnJcrcU by mmti\ U rr<>n> rrrttlinu ftnd i«'<7 «'« ritr A/V« ; inccn will be mci llTiclently exempli* fchrtll nert <->ri»>. conjunction yw*^ s'\\ vUndra «« 'II (I fnlt tclrt '11 Pa fait i« t:tl hy nil RrftinDuiri- llictoiy ruU^. rilGNOJI TONGUK* iVA f da tiOi know whtihir It ho Jo no nkU ^i c*t'kt A droKo om on tlio right hnuU or tho 4 gmicho. Iitft. 1 do not know whtlhtr ho On no tait #*ii dii vmi u^/ •peaks Iriio «r not. non. 1 doubt whfth*v dho will no- »lo doiilo /j rlio Arroplorii ou copt (if lh« oU'or i\wy mako noii PoHVo qu'on lul fMlt«> hor or not. I A. I It mAtiom ll(tl«« Mfhflher II imporlo pen ^iiMI pnrto o^ ho ^ooN uwAy (7^ Dttt^ii. r/w'il dcinoui'o. Whttfnr ho wini or Uint^fl, ho iSV// tjn'W gituno om «ik to l^im 7'/f vonM liii (ft*i'« ptirlo. /w ^M4r/> a m*iHHfi\ ihtit yon iir manirrt qur voiid «iii^<». huvu Hold )onrgi>otU in vciulu v(i>« nmrch.tuili!4oii timO| Aud in«do « ^\cal A (empK, rt yr/r voun Atvtt pi'oiU. ^lit iiu grauii prolit. /!K^M I NAW tiitn, And toU I^Sliuitui \v \v siu^ vt tfuf jo lul him my icitnouH, ho a|u f//V iiu*h nii<4oiiiif n apprott- I rovod of uky hchuviour. va ina ('omtiilto. H'hUf you pl.»y» Aud /«mt Pftitlmt que ,vonH jouon, ft your (iuic, ho loAnu iiiN qur vuui /^r^/r^ votro ^rsMou. u'ltips^ il iipi rvnd hA t('<,>riHi|J!^ our diMMHiuo (inil uv« i(, uti nccidont waa KudtltMily in((*iiup((<«l impii^vu iitlorrompit tout by nil uuloii"V oo.ip notro dlHc.ouin. fiti'ttuse you wtiuhl uot fviiM voulu sniwro mou Mvii)) vt litiiou only to your o^u whim, you do iu>t d«'. Mtrvo, (hilt I ;4iuuid imii. corn uiysoH luithcr tibout vou. t'coutor i|uo votro ruprirCf vuuH IK I' oriu/ pus (|uo ju nriuUrt'iitiO dAvuutiigo. ;l VOUM. /fs soon as I hatn •II'm*!^ a«td /)^f f/wr j'.iurni liiuo ft yK(r wriKcu a lottttr, 1 ^htill go jViM/wi i»crU one lotiio, und spouk to hiiu. J iiai lui parWjr. I tt ; M If ii *>. 996 A GRAMMAR OF Til E jis JOOH as I saw that I could not make him listen to reason, and that he was ' too n>iich prejudiced a* gainst me, I went away without saying any thing. H^hy do you not imitate your Slitter, and afpfy ^ yourself to the French tongue as she does ? Is it not because you arc lai^ xy, and you shum labour and pain i /Ifter -WHB had drank tea and played at cards^ w« went a, walking. ' *- Perhaps he will come and see you to day, and give you an account of his reasons. Beside that her brother does ' not study, and that he loves play too much, he has not i * so much wit as she. \^s long as we have wealth, and live ei pensively, we # nevnr want friends. /« proportioti as you study, uuU learn the French tongue, you will find more beauties in it. ■Since W^ are together, and it is very fine weather, let us go and take a little walk in the country. God forbid that I should uhssit^ que je x\% que je ne* pouvois tui faire entendre raison, et qu'W eioit trop pierenn coutrc moi, je sortis sans dire mot. .^ D* oit nnifHt que tous n*imites pas votre see or, et que ?ous ue TOUS applique% pas au Francois comii;e eUe ? N'est-ce pas parce-que Tons testes paresbcux, eX que tous evitez ie travail ct U ' peine ? J^pres que nous eumes pris Ie the, It que nous eumes jo«ie ' aux caues, nous aliames a la promenade. -h* • Pcut-etre quW riendra vbus voir an jonrd'htti, et qu'W TOUS rendra c >mpte d»' scs- rai^oas. Outre que son fr^re n'^tttdift pas,* et qu'''\\ eume trop a jouer, ii u'a pas tant d'es. prit qu*elle. Tant qu'on a du bien, et ^u*on fait de la depense, on ne i'iunque jamais d*amis. A mesure que vohs etudleroz, et que vous (ipprendre% Ie Francois, vou.s y (rouve. rcz plus de beauies. Puitque nous sornmes enscm. bic, et qu'W fait fort beau temps, alioDs faire un pe. tit tour de promenade 4 la csmpagne. •. i yf Dieu fie piaise que jc > x\% qu€ je nc faire entendre rii' il ejolt troj) i>utre inoi, je lire mot. e Tous n'imtteE eor,«?t qut »ous ppUque% pas au ^iniise eUe ? parcc'^ne tums iux,et ytt« TOUS travail et la , , .' I .' ■•'' • • ' us eumes pris le nous evmei jooe , nous aliameh a ade. I Tiendra vous nd'htti, et qu'W a c )inpte d«' scs- n fr^re n'^tttdie u'W ernne trop a 'a pas tant d'es. le. (l«biei»,etyM'on depense, on ne imais d'amis. voHS etudtefoz, »u9 apprenein% le TOUS y troupe- e beaules. 5 somines enscffl- il Jixit fort beau Ions faire un pe. le promenade i ne. phut que JC FRENCH TONGUE- S97 know him, cheated you, you converse with him. blame your befaarioor, blime rotre condurte, et and reproach you with it. que je veuiilr vous ea faire un rep roc he. Go J grant that jou may Plaw a Dleu que tous tous be in good health, and ) ortiez bien, et que vous succeed in all your enter. reuss'utie% dans tuutes tos prises. ' - • entreprises. Notwithstmtdlhg that yon Malgre que vous le connois. and he has bitz ia quW vous alt trom. still p^, vous ne cessez de lui parlor. He is far from being happy // s^en faut bien qu^W soit and living contented ia the heureux et qu'iX vhe con. midst of his wealth. tent au milieu de ses ri. chesses. Go and speak to him, lest Aliez lui parlcr, ik cralnte he should be angry and qu'W ne foit f^che, et ^u'il reproach you. ne vous faste des re- proches. Unless you go and see him, ji moins que vous n'aliiez le and speak to him, be will voir, et que vous ne lui not be pleased with you. parliez, il ne sera pas con. tent de vous. I shall go into the country J'irai d la campagne la se. next week, provided I be maine prochaine, pourvu well, and it he fair. que je me porte bien, et qu'il fosse beau. ^ Not that I praise him, and iVbn/zij- ^i/^ je le loue, nl qu( approve of his arrogance. i^approuve son arrogance. ^1 In case that he comes, and jIu cas qu'i\ vienne, et ^u'il asks news of my brother, demande des oouvelles de tell him fhat he will be mon frdre, dites-lui qu'il here in a week. arrivera dans huit joucs. though he denies it, and de^ ^oiqu'W le nie, et qu^W S~ dares that he has not seen dare ne Pavoir pas vu, je it, I can assure you of the puis vous assurer du con. contrary. trairc. In order that you may be ^Jin que vous soyez covitenr, contented, and have no ei ^tf^ vous n'ay«» pas sujet occasion io complain of de vous plaindre de moi, me, I will give you more je vous donnerai plus que ri'. \ Il !i:t m W\ than I promised you. je ne vous ai promts. 298 A GRAMMAR OF THE Though he told me of it, and Bicn qu*\\ me I'ait dit, et qm his brother coafirmed it, son frdre me Vaii cuii.j 1 bolieve nothing of it. firme, je n'en crois rien. Though he is young und Encore qu'il soit jcune etl 1 rich) she does Dot like ^^'il ait du bieo, ellent| him. i'aime pas. Be/ore yon give yoar opin. ^v^in/ ^u^ toui disifez votrej 100, and determine, be sentiment, et que tous pevention* / PART IV. ' v.-.v PRACTICAL IRREGULARITIES OF THE FrENCH ToNfiUEj ALPHABETICALLY DISPOSED, WITH THE APPROPRIATE US* OF ^ PARTICULAR WORDS and PHRASES, APPROVED BY THE BEST AUTHORS, AND ESPECIALLY '^-^ /. •'■ : - 1' '' Iby the DECISIONS of the FRENCH ACADEMY. It.- X V \ .1 Abandonne, IIHIS word, in the masculine gender, comiQonljr sig. JL nifies forsaken, gifen over ; as, un homme ahandonney inan who is forsaken ; un malade abandonne^ a sick lerson given over by his phyhiciaas. When it is applied ^ n the feminine gender to persons, it always signifies a "^ lad woman. Affeclionner , We say affectlonner une chose^ to love, to lilie a thing ; but we do not say affectianner une personnel to love, io like person, if the persua be of an t?quat or higher rank : |i)c genius of th» French tongue does not ailow it. How. |Ter, affecttonns^ in a passive si^niiication, may be used, jpeakintj of an inferior, with regard to his superior ; as, itivtteur est fort affectionne a son nwitrcy this servant is tush attached to his master. # 4. i::f ?!'i -i 300 A GRAMMAR OF THE Bouhours and CorneUle obserye that votre affecttonne tirviteur, your afi'ectkmato servant, u used only toper, sous of an inferior rank. v jltder. When the verb aickr governs the first case, it is taken in the sense of to assist a person with money, counsel, or some thing ; as, iV l*a aide dans cette 4iffairt^ he assisted him in that aifair, v/z. with money. But when it governs the third case, it is taken in the sense of to help a maa overloaded ; as, il lui a aide a porter sa charge, he helped him to carry hb burthen. |>' ' Venlr, '.in Mr. »i%> A- The first is said of the place wher« a person is, with re. latibn to the place where he is not. The second, on the contrary, is said of a place where a person is not, with a relation to the place where he is ; as, supposing; the^ person speaking is in London, he will say, un courier etl] alle de Londres a Paris en iroh jours, et li est venu de Paris a Londres dans le meme espace de temps ; a courier went from London to Paris in t&ree days, Hud came from Paris to{ London in the same space of time. This verb is likewise used w^hen speaking of the place | where a f)erson dwells ; as, meeting somebody, I say toj him ; je 'vous prle^ Monsieur^ de venlr diner demaln che% moi,\ -i l^^Yi ^'""y come and dine with me to morrow. However, there is a distinction to be made here ; if itl be another person's house, al/er must be used ; as, ifJ meeting somebody ; I say, Monsieur y^. vous prie d'allerdt-l main dtner chez hi. But, in this caso, when the personl ''wi'ho speaks, is likewise to go to the other person's house,! venlr is used ; as, Monsieur A. vous prle de venlr dema'm avec mol dtner chez lui. This verb aUer is likewise usod to denote what is, orj was to happen imnediate'-y ; it signifies to be going, tol be re'tdv / as.Jg vols ecrire, I am ^oiiu. to write, r/ va sor-l tirj he is just going out ; il alloit rendre lame, he wa ready to breathe his last. Veniry on the coutniry, signifies a thing just done ; asJ ^^ votre affectlonne d only to per. asc, it is ^alten py, counsel, or Ir/, he assisted wfaen it governs f to help a maa argCf he helped erson is, with re. ) second, on the mn is not, vith, s, supposing the ay, un courier «<' tvenude Paris a uirier went from le from Pans to| [iog of the place lebody, I «ay *? tr Jemain che% mdi) ow. ,1 made here; if [t Ibe used ; as, i'J }0us prie d'aller dt- Iwheu the person r person's house, \rie de venir dema^ FRENCH TONGUE. SOI je viens de lui ecrire, I hate just written to him ; Je venois de diner ^ quand voui* • » I had just dii»cd, when you* •. Ne faire que 4* may be used instead of venir in the aforesaid sense ; as, je nefals que de lui ecrire ; je nefaisois que de diner quand vnuf • , These three verbs aroused in this sense only in the present and iinperfect tenses of the in^iici^iTe mood. P^enir^ followed by an infinitive with a, signifies, as I obserred elsewhere, Part III, Sect. 3, p. 34^, to begin or to set^obt ^bing somethirg ; as, quemd je vins a lui parler, vihfstk f^wjfftxk lo apeali to. him. This verb mdy be uEcd in all il'ctensel, r Again^ though the fei^b ^Sisr iar neuter, it seems to he, in some cases, an.acttirti one, 'cur, at least, to have an ac. live, signification ; as, idler son ckeinin, to go his way ; alleriM train, to be the same, to. continue in the same way j aller stm wUme pdtf tp go„ on in the same mariner ; but in this case il preposition is nriderstood before tba substantive. ' . * ■ " - ^//tfr, joined vrjthrf he parltci pie ^,' fend used imperson. ally^ 8i;^ttifics lo ba at stake,^ to be concerned ; as,, your fortuae is at stake, ily va de voire fortune ; your life waa concerned in it, «/y afc lloued by que. f .-f C c 4» 'III m m 302 A GRMMAR OF THE ••^4'^Hr;^'', jlnclcn, VI teux. tintiq HC. The second is commonly used in spcakinj; of old pcr- loiis, uiid things worn hy uhe ; as, this man 13 vtry old, cei homme est tret vleux ; thia suit of clothes is very old c0t habit est trts vieux. The first has a relaion to the century a perron lived in ; a?, Aristote est plus anc'un que Ctcerun^ Aribtotle i« more ancient than lull). It i.'gnifics, likc'^ise, hh advantage acquired by time ; as, fVx/ une ma'tsett aucicnne, or, une familk anciemu^ it is an ancient family-, but, when we speak of a building, "We say, une vleille maisottf an old house ; and not une mat son ancienne. Though we equally say, le i)ieuxy or l^jlnc'un Testament^ iTic Old Testament ; d' anclmnes , or tie vieil/es histotres, old historiea ; de vieux, or d'anciennes tnanuscrltt ; de vieuHj or d*ancient remansy &c. howevsr we do not tquaily say, /e Jeuneay d'anciens iivreSf ^''aneleas tableaux^ of books or pictures which the authors juid painters of antiquity nade ; and vleux Hvres^ vleux tar ■which immediately precedes that we live in ; as. Jefus ma- Jade I'snnee passee^ i was sick last year, L' annee qui *v' ^ of old per. in '\9 vtry old, 3 is very old elaion to the est plus anc'un tn iull>. It t>y time ; as, anciennty it is of a building, and But une ncitn Testament, vieil/es hisloires, ;crUs ; de vieuH^ lot tqually say, for the others ; ich may b« used Ji vleux Kvree ; d'anciens Hvres, lich the authors eux Ihres, vUux and spoiled by is, statues, ami luments of anti- some pieces of iws of the Vlsi. antiques. But h laws, we say, tes anciennes, la lion to the year ; as. jefus ma- ir. L'afiHee qui FRENCH TONGUE. 303 n ^ent Is used when we speak of the year immediately foL lowing that we live in ; as, j'irai a Amsterdam l^annee «/tii fientj i shall go io Amsturdam next year. ■ .", ' •'' jiti cas. . ' ' ' r; *'■■■' '■^' This word, signifying in case, is always followed by que; as, au cas qu'il meHrc, in case he should die. Wu fquaily say, en cas qu'tl meure. If after #ax a substantive foilows, He make ube uf en casy followed by de : en eas de rncrtj iu case of death, and not au cas de mori, Meaucoup. This word, signifies many^ is seldom used alone ; as, we do not eay, il donuoU pen a beaucoup, he gnve litlrie to many ; w^ add^ i beaucoup, de penonnes^ Qt a beaucoup de gens. When a personal pronoun comes before beaucoup ^ in such a case it may be used alone ; as, nous sommes beaucoup y •oout etes beaucoup ^ we are many, you arc many ; because beaucoup h4i> a relation to the furec^oin^ prana un. The same is to be said when the indetcronnate pronoun en is before beaucoup ; a?, il y en a beaucoup^ there are many. En is in the place of ^^n^, personnes^ or any thing mentioned before ; as in the fareguiug ex:i(u. pie, il y a beaucoup de gens.- When ^rattro«^ is taken in the' sense of mucb^ a great Jeal^ and cinios after an adjective, it must aiways he jirf- (U'ded by iho particle de ; as, voire bouquet tst plus beau dc beaucoup que c elm da votre frere\ your wooe«ay is much liuer than that of your brother. 13 ut when beamoup is before the adjective, de may be left out. We suy il sen faut beaucoup y to express, that there is ayey il s'en faut de beaucoup. 1*'hench Academy. "•-»■!; Champ% This word, in the singular, sii^nifies a piece of arable ground, commonly not '.^ncompaHseo by walls. Hut when it is taken in the plural, it is applied to all sorts of ground, such as meadows, woods, &c. taken (ogfther : thus we £• y, to lead the cattle into tiie field*, mener Us besttmuM aux champs, it likewise ^iunifies evory other place, winch is not III the cily or suburbs ; thus w p rtpially say, vnt maison de campagne^ or uns raciiton des champi^ a coujrtry huu^e ; howcvci} the liiit 'a ui luotit ui4)t ■\V«!1' Maur, When this word is joined to the verb av«iV, and pre- ceded by the arncie, it signifies to have courage ; thus, we •ay of a man who is not a coward, il a uu ceetir. When 4t is preceded by the proposition^, it signifies to espouse an aHair ; avoir une affaire a caur. When it is preceded by the pre[)osttiou sur^ it signifies to resent a thing, a'-joir une chose sur le caur. When we make use of the word caur to express gene- rosity or goodness, we join to that word an adjective, or «ome other word ; as, il a le caur bienfait^ il a le caur bori, s'est uu bon caur., he is a good-uatort IS a deficiency returned mo [!, vous croyni ^ Fhbnch icce of arable Is. Hut when jtti of n round, ther : thus we ^ner les lestisuM piace, wl))ch IMully say, vnt p}^ a cou?.Mry FRENCH TONGUE. 304 <•» II jera punt comme ics autre*. :' He ehiilt be punisheil like othurs. Cela paroit cumme v'teux. Tiii» itecms as if it were old. • ' Comme il arrhoit. -► ' •'> As he was coming. Comme il a toujours ami U Inen puhlu^ il n'ajama'u V9utu consentit^ SiCt ''^. ' Ah he always loved (he public good, he never would consent, Ike. II est con;me le ressort iL- toute cett$ intrigue^ '* • ile is in Home uicitsure \\iv. s\jt'u\^ uf tins iutrijrue. < It is likovrisi* ubcd instead of comment^ fcignifyiiia how^ or in what manoir, after bome other phrase ; a», il verra comms ji; lui parkiai^ he will t>ce in whjit manner I shall fi peak to hiin. iiiit v\ hen how, ur in what manner, be- ijMis a plira'^t', comment mu^.l f)e used ; as, in what manner did he aiitcccLd ? comment a-t-il reusii ? and not comme. ■ i ♦'k 4\ ;h;.Vj*<^' v6iV, and pre. ri»ge ; thus, we 'u cttur. When ilics to espouse it is preceded t a ihing, a'ooir express gene- |n ad i active, or iVfl le caur bon, I signifies he is a the word caur^ |ar, he is a veiy it is used in- nup.' 4>nr pxfm. I"' |/yi/^ sorte ; as, >le] because, ia '^ Davantage. PIus^ ■ .■,x<^-'^ Plus is never used at the end in an afRrmaiive sentence j as, give me some more, donne% men davantage, and not plus. Unless it is preceded by de ; as, 1 will give you something more for it, je vous en donnerai quelque chose du plus. Plus and davantage arc used indifferently at the end of a negative sentence ; hut plus requires only ne before it, whereas davantage requires ne HQii pas s as, je n'en veu.^ pas davantage^ or je n^en veux plufj 1 will have no more of it. Davantage is never put in the middle of a sentence be- fore a substantive, but plus may be ; as, the Romans have more plain dealing than the Greeks, les Romalns ont plus de honnefoi que les GrecSj and not davantage de bonne fo'u Davantage must never be used lo the iniddie of a sen. tencc before que ; thus we say,, you are in the wfong to reproach me with beinj hasty, 1 am not moie so than you ; vous avers, tort de me reprocher d eire vif., je ne le suis pas plus que vous y and not davarJage que vous » . _ ■ c C.2 • .-*i:.^;! ■ H vV- -4:- -: :■% ^•:fe 306 h- A GUAM MAR OF THII Durant, ' Thi^ preposition is somcUmcs indiflerently put fillior before or after it's ngiuicn ; a*, Jurant tkux moh. or JeuK molt Jurant f during two muutlis ; duriiii; hm !ift:, sa vie du» rant. But wo always say, Jurant lejour, durant la nuit. t-. JEnc/ii . ,\ im This word signifies incflned. It is Hsed in morals, and ronimunly speal^in^ of something bad ; as, il at encl'm ai^ jeuy he is inclined tu gaming. ihough we say ending ytt we say incliner. intimation. • *^ :• : : ;' Ensuivre (t'J. ' ' - Thif Tcrb is used only in the third person singular and plural ; as, tout ce qui s'ensait, all that follows thence ; les accident qui t' ensuivroient, the accidents whicb would cusu<». V • ) Evitalle, Some French authors hare made use of this word, and \i has been inserted in thc'ast edition of the dictionary of the French Academy, but it is very seldom used. How. tver we suy inevitable^ unaAioiduble. We have in the French tongue several compounded words, which are used, though the shnplc words from which ••v.if., ;' \y put I'UIior moh. or Jeu» 'I ft:, sa vie dw 'ant la nuit. in morals, and , il est encliu an . inelination. on singular and follovws thence ; ,8 which vfoulil this wofd, and le dictionary of n used. How- \a.\ compounded [pic words from ibUy inexorable j foncilable ; insa' labls ; inejabl^ il is a prepos!* [pte ceux la, ex- sister. B"t past particii)le, consequently declinable ; as, ma iceur exeeptes^ my sister uicepted. rjait^ fh^'^-y •it- When this word h used to signify the fabulous history of the eods and demi.guds, it has no plural ; as, un poelt dolt tavoir la Fable^ a poc^ oueht to kiiow the hiMury of the gods and dejni.^ods, a Fable est fart: amusante^ My (ho!. o%y is very entertaining. Hut if we say in the plural, Us fables sont agrealles ei utiles J fahlo8 are pleasant and ustt'iii, we uiidersi.ititl tliu fables of JEsop, PhadruS) la Fontaine ^ Gajy and oiher au- thors. ' v . i J The W(ml fable is sonietlmes used In A fiifuraflrc sense ; a«, le pauvre fjomme sert de fable et de rise* a tout le mondcy thu puor siit:|ik'tou makes uimfetf a- coinuiua taiii and a lau^hing.btock^ This verb may be taken in a proper or figurative sense ; in the first, it signifies io blossom v in the bi'cond, it signi^ fics io flourish, to be in repute. When it is u>^ed in it's proper st^nse, it has no irregularity, at all ; but when it is used in it's figurative sense, it hat- an irreguJ<»rity in all the persons of the imperfect tr»nse, and in the participle of the present ; as, une armee Jioris " sante^ a llorishing army ; Horace florissoit sous yhguste, Ho- race flourished iu the time of Aui-nstus. •|i: In the present tense we say, fleurissent r as, les arts et les sciences fleurissent dans notre siecU ; arts aud scieuces iluurisii iu uur age. GAGNER. Though wc say gagner une kaiaille^ to gain the victory in a battle, yet we do not say gagntr un combat, to express the same thiug. We may sa^ etre victorieux dans un combat. GENS. < s There is scarce another word to be met with, liable ta ... •■4>^ m Tin 'I 308 A GRAMMAR OF THE ■,','';A. ,1. SO many irregularities. See page 159, where notice U tak- en of some of lliem. Ji;;iw;,v^*v G^ns is uttver said, as in lilnglisli, of a determinate miniljer of people, unless it be attended with an adjec. tive ; as, two honest people, Jeux honnetes gens. How- ever, wo say, a thousand people believe it, mrV/^ ^tf«x /^ v^.^" *' Gens sometimes signifies a person^s retinue ; in this case it may be used with a determinate number, but al. ways followed by the preposition de ; as, I see but four of ray servants, where are the oJiers ? jejie vols que quatre d« mes gens,, eu sont les aulres ? • V- V'^? »r <;^:f*a:v Gens sometimes signilies people who are of the same jMriy or club ; in this sense it is likewise used with a df- terminate number ; as, four of our club are come, quatrt de nos gens sont arrives. , Oens, in the sense of nation, is only used in this phrase ; the law of nations,/^ droit des gens. It is still used in the same sense, in the singular number, in some pieces of poetry, such as fables ; as, la gent aquatique^ to express fishes, and w ha. ever lives in the water. La Fenlaim. n ri Grace, When this word is alone with the ?erb fdire and an article, it signifies favour, kindness ; as, do me the fa. V ou r, faiteS' moi la grace. Wieo it is without an article, it signifies to foraivc, to remit j as, the king has forgiven him, le roi lui a fait grace i you owe me a hundred guineas, but I remit you the half, vous me devex cent guinees^ mats je vous fais grace dt la moitie. When grace is used in the singular with de before if, it signitiovS pray, or be so kind as - - - - ; as, pray, tell ipe, de grace ^ diics-moi. Grdcey used in the singular, alone or with the adjcctiye lonne, sij-,nifies gracefulness ; a.", he salutes with grace* fulness, il salue de bonne grace, or avec grace ; she is very graceful, elle a bonne grace ^ or elle a de la grace. When in the same number it is preceeUud by the adjt-c- ■'ki^ 'V notice 13 tak- a. determinate ith an adjec- getis. IIoW- it, mille gens le iudeteriiiinate iniie ; in this mber, bat al. 1 ste but fovir vols que quatre •e of the same used Hith a do- .fe come, quatrt •■':*i; '.';,■ ; -i ;; . in this phVasp ; Is «t»ll ust't^ it« \ some pieces of \que, to rxnross La Font aim. .',:,. ' ■■'if'- ^i ■■- |Tb pnre and an L do me the fa- es to foTaivc, to k rot lui a fait I but I remit you \)0us fais grace dt |th de before if, as, pray, tell lith the adjective lites >*itli gfarc- ice i she is very race. Ld by the adjt'C e- f'FRKNCH TONGUtl :809 t;;; T- ,- tive mauvalsey it si^nines quite ff)e contrary ; as, admtro his awkardness, admirem sa mauvaise grace. Sometimes, in this latter sense, it only signilies what is contrary to pro- priety, to reason ; as, there is no reason to cum plain of me, vous ave% mauvaise grace de vous pla'mdre de mot. When graces is used in the plural, it signifies the Graces (three goddesses, who, according to the Poets, were the companions of Venus) ; also« (he beauties of language j as, ks graces de la langue Frangoise, or the gracefulness of a person ; as, do you not admire the 8;race< f illness of that lady ? n' admirex-vous pas ks grates d$ cett$ if, in the same number, the word lonnes be added to it, it signifies good vvill ; as, he has the good will of his master, // a ks hmnes graces de son matire Bouhours observes iu;re, that, though we say gagner Us Unnes graces de quelqu'un^ to gain the good will «1 a per. boii ; yet we rto not bay, to express the pon.trary, either gagner or encourir les mauvaises graces de quelqu^un ; custom, says he, allows the ouo, aod not the other ; ia such a case we &-Ay perdre les bonnes graces de quelqu^un^ to lose the good will of a persoii. Eire en graces aupres du Prince ou de que f que. personne puissante, bi:;nihes to be in favour with the iv.iug, or some powerful person. Eire dans les bonnes graces d une dtime^ signifies to be be- loTed by a iady. .1 .h y ai ete, je suis alU . v ■., ^ A ^ *, 'H-'^ We make use of the first expression to S'gnify that we are not, or were not any longer in the place we are speaking of ; as, Madani went to the play yesterday, Ma^ \^dame M cte a la come die hier ; bat when somebody is or iwas still in the plage we are speaking of, then we use the 1 compound of aller ; as. Madam is gone to the pl«iy, Ma* \aame est allee a la comedie. Moreover, if some word denoting motion be added to |il, we make use of the compound of aller, though the person is uo longer in the place we are speaking of ; as, jhe went to Paris in two days, il est alle a Paris en deux iours. Wo likewise say in coaversatiou, jaurois r/ Dinner de main en main, to hand about. Mettre la main a la plume, to bepio to write. Mettre la main au chapeau, a I'epee, to put the hand to the hat, in oidcr to salute souiebody ; to put the band to the swurd. ^^fifettre le ':hapeau a la main, to pull off the hat. Mettre I epee a la main, to dra,v a sword ; also to figfitj with'a swuid. £tre en main pour faire une chose, to be at hand, or in a| eouveuient 8ituuiion to ilo a thiug. ^ ' Lever la main, to take aa oath before a judge, to lav our hand upon the Bible, to lift up our hand. Avoir les armes lien a la main, to ba skilful in bodily a- ercines with wi'a|)on6. Fdire credit de la main a la bourse, to trust no farther thani ^C lail BCTC. •I J : Un coup de main signifi■''. L: "Kt^- Un homme de main signifies a man who is fit for a bold i; and bazar Jous entei prise. //, . ,. ^. ;- , ' ' Des coups de main, blows vrith the han or fist. '.^. >/ * yl pleines mains. largDiy, phritil'iiilj. , •., 2 Sous main, undcrhaod, secretly. v. Combat de main, a close fight. ' . i ' ' Sous la main, I'.nder a person's nose. / 1 ,. Ccla est fait a la main, that is done in concert. . (' |t1 1 <6 hi with the cue- Mai aison. i\ SpeaVmg of people of quality, or of gentlemen of an aocicDt and nobi« extraction, vre say, maison ; as, he is of the house of Moatmorency, il est de la maiton de Montm morenci. Hut spcalding of citizens and people of business, we make use of the wovAfamille. .' Sometimes we make use of the word familli^ instead of maison^ when some followivtg words heighten the sigui* ficatjon ; as, the royal family, lafamille reyale. Take notice that, when we say, la famlAle royalty wt mean by this expression, the king, the queen, their chil. dren, and grand-children. But, when we say la maisou rayakf we commonly mean the other princes and princess- « of the blood. La maison du rot signifies the kingVs household, ser- vants, or troops. Take notice, likewise, that, though we say la nt£^ten royale, or la maison du roi^ we never say, lafamille du rot, Famille is used instead of maison^ even speaking of an. dent nobiiity, when we mention It with relation to me. dais ; as, the consular medals are distinguished by the RoTran families, les medailles consulaires se disiinguent par les families Romaines. It is tor this reason, perhaps, that we :idiy, la famtlig des Scipions., la famille des Cesars^ ^c. jutd not la maison des Scipions, even when we do not speak of medals. The word famille is likewise used, when we speak of a person')* nearest relations ; as, he ha^ fallen out with his I Xela^iooft) ij s'esi brouille avec sa famille. i M: # M2 A GUARMAU OF THE :'^ir,-- Maison and famiUe are somcitaies used promiscuously speaking of a pc'rEOii's servants and liousfhold ; as, she i*f a woJnan who takes care of her household t'*est une femme qui a soin de sa maitofty or famiUe. However, the iirst seems tu have a more exteiiMve siguiflcation, aad to relate more immediately to household allairs. '.a% w A t. We always sav, etablir sa mats on ^ 3Lttd faire um bonne matsoHy aud out familky nheu we would ei^press to grow rich, , r% ■n*.-' This vord is ioff {n It's proper, aod elegant in it's figu. rative sense. According to Balzac'^ painters are offended at this word, for we do not say, k metier de peintre^ the profession of a painter. Howcfcr generals of the army boast of their calling ; a9,)the profession of arms, the profcBsJon of war ; le mi- iler des armesy le metier de la guerre. We likewise say, speaking of works ; b«:ndtcrattsmea. '",, .^-tj-?.?, ,r,'-; ■ .-:' v.--'x^''i:Ly''--L . .'{;.:, MonU i>; '^1- .-Jf' Tliis word is never used alone, except wlieo we speak of ijie mountains that separate Fraoce from Italy ; for we say les AU^es,, or les monts only, after some prepositions , but Tery seldom ; as, .m this side the Alps, en dega des monti. In other circumstan(es we say, le mont Olympe, le monl Liban^ le mont Etnuy le mout St. Gothard } but we say, h montagne du Cahaire, .^^•, ^ ^••■^- ;"?"n' >f't 'v-V'^^-f'^;'^ '"'^'*^'' . r» .. ' , — -■■i- . .' ■ ' '^*' '" ■ \-:- There Is, perhaps, nothing where variety of custom \i more visible, than iti the uames of some nations and lap. guagcs. Arabe, Arabesque, The first is applied to racn and f^-' w ■4r FRENCH TONGUS. Sl» jrom'wcuously u)'d ; as, she ;hold c'^est me However the cation, and to fairevn'i bonne press to grow ant in it's figu- rs are offended " de petntre^ the f their calling ; of war ; le wi- there are only 8 vf it ; il tiy a definite aHvc^e, ►ther thing, vi». wfe^^e speak joro Italy ; for \e prepont'wtts , but \n dega des monti. \t Olympe, le mont ibut "cve say, Ifi --'■'/P; fS' ' Ity of custom i» l»alions and lan- to men and women ; tfl, utu jlraht une fanme Arabe, The second is never applied to persons, but to the Arabian charac. ters. Speaking of the language, we say, Vjirahe^ or U langue Jtraie, We say, une Jigure Arabetqut^ an Arabic figure. * - ''> »' ■ * Bmrbarit, We use the word Barbatesque^ to express a man •f Barbary, or something belonging to that country ; as, utt navire barbaresque^ a Barbary Tessel. Un Barbar* is Always taken figuratively, and signifies a barbarous man. Barle signifies a Barbary horse. ^^< •;>« wa Va : :f Chaldeen, Chaidd$que, The first Is said of the personf and their language ; the second of their language only. Dorietiy D^iqne ; lomen^ lanique. The first is applied only to persons ; as, ler Xhtriens^ lei Imnetu ; une Do' rieikte, une lonwnu* The second is appiieu to the Ian. guage. Speaking oi archttcctare, we say, trdre Dorique, 4>rdre lomque. !>-.-vr/»i *. .-. »v<'^. l '• -.;ij ^ b >;; Hebreuy Helrnique. We say apeaking of the people. un Hebreuy les Hebreun^ This word is nu«t nsed in tha feminine gender ; thus we mast aay, h femme d'un He. hteUy U file dun J/einUy let femmes et les filet des HSbreuxt Speaking of ihe language, we tskyt I'HeSreu, or la langue Hebrodiqtu, Speaking of manuscripts^ we only say, d*t manuscrks Hebreux ; but, speaking of Hebrew ■ty4)es, we say, des carac teres Hebrdiques, Juify Juddique. We say «n Jitlf, 4me Julve, speaking of the modern Jews. We say v'tvre a la Juive, io 11 ?e like tk« Jews, with relation to ttioir manners ; andj^rtf i in j^tf^n^' Morey Mcnrrque* We say an More^ a Moor ; utti Mhresquty a Moorish woman, and not une More ; though we say, une femme More. We say le More, speaking of the langnage. -Moresque signifies a Moorish dancCi also Morisco work in painting. Per St ^ Persany Persien, Persique, We commonly say les Persesy speaking of ihe ancient people of Persia ; and Persansy s peakin^^ of the modern . mm. In the singular we always say m Persan^ and not un Printed doth of Persia is c^lletl de h Perse ^ and BOt Ptrslemte. The latter is applied io Tcnetian blinds. However, when we speak of Persian stntts, we may [MjT, une eiife de Psrtey as we say, itne et^ffe de k Chine, ^ 1) d '•■ * '^% ^^ "eric* i f i % w M- 914 A GRAMMAR OF THE ,11 We say, lalangue Persienne, or /g pen'tm^ speaking of the ancient language ; but we say, la langue Personne^ or k Pcnan^ speaking of the modern language, y.ai. ;>;/:•-, . * .i ^ We always say, a la Persiennes to signify after the Per- sian manner. Persique is said of the gulf that separates Persia from Arabia ; as^ U golpbe Persique, It likewise sign a lies a species cf architecture. Speaking of the ancient kings, Cyrm, Darius, &c. we call them indifierently rot ek Perse^ or roi de: Perses ; but of the moderns w^ say only le roi de Perse. Syrian, Syriaque, The first is ustd speaking of the peo- ple, un Syrierif une Syrienne ; the second speaking of the language, le Syriaque, or la langue Syriaque. ^ Teuton^ Teutonique Tudesque* The first is faid of the people and of the language ; the second of the language) and when we speak of the order ; as, Vordre Teutonique^ the Teutonic order. Tudefque i& only used speaking of the language of the ancient Germans. These are the irregular nouns relating to nations and languages. The rest are equally applied to the peoiple and to their lans^uage ; as, Arx Ethiopiensy VEthiopien ; leu Moscovites^ le Motcoviti i les Crecsy le Gre^ ; Its t,ai'wti k 'Ml-^h'-:. Dtf Nombret cardinaux. '•.Vr, V^h: •a\'- -^ 'tber cardinal naDi< ber ; as, qvaire-vingt'trois, eighty-three. To know in what cases the other numbers are either d^J Qlinable or indeclinable, see paf;e 30* Instead of sepianie, se¥ei»ty ; octaniej eighty ; and m\ nantey ninety ; tre alwayi^ say soixante et dixy quatrt' vingtsy quatre vingUdin, Lxcept when we speak of tli )oter])rcter» of tht Jiibie, we say h sept^mtej thou^^ s n ^: FRENCH TONGUE. 315 saking of the ersonne^ or »<« aftcT the Per- , Persia from Fise Mgnsftes a Darius^ &c. oi dc Ptoses ^ ing of the peo- )eakiag of the ; is said of the )f the langnag«> rdre Teutaniqvey ed spcakiug of to nation* and a to the peopie 1 VEthiopien ; 's, a pair of stockioj^s, &c. une paire de gants, une palrt de manchettes, une paire de lasy &c. and not une couple de gants, \:c. Cou- pie is likewise said of persons united together by lovu or inarriai^e ; in this sense it is always in |he masculine gen. der ; as, ieau couple, couple Jidele, VVe make use of the word quarteron, when we are speaking of things which are reckoned per cent. It sig. nifies the fourth part of a hundred; quarteron as, a quarter of a This word is like« wise Slid of things which are weighed ; it then signifies (he fourth part of a pound ; as, a quarter of a pouriU of butter, un quarteron de heurri, v _.. ^.' • ,1 1" ■ 1 'A m 'if' % li'' '1, f)ii I I -:^..v^ ■•>■« 916 A GRAMMAR OF THE We rnake use of the word quint(il, to evprew a hun. dred weight ; it is used only when we are speaking of loihc commodities that are weighed. MiUler is said of a thousand weii^ht ; as, a thonsand weinrht of iron, brass, &c. un m'tllier defer^ de cuivre^ &c. When we sfieak of time, we say huit jours^ or unr se^ fnatne^ fur a week ; quinxe Jours, or deuM semaimt, for a fortnight. Howerer, we always say trots semainesj three Weeks ; un mots, a month ; "It^ ''^9 *^ sema'mest fire^ six, seven weeks ; deux mo/x,t«v« months ; neuf s«mauu$, nine weeks ; deux mots et detm, ten weeks ; trms mots, three months, and not un quart d'an ; fUtUtre, c'tnq, six mois, four, fire, six months, and so on toun an. Thence Me commonl)' reckon by months, as treixe mots, quatorzt, qt/mze moh, &c. to deux arts ; though we may say for this child is one year and one month, or eighteen months old ; eet enfant a un an et un mots, or un tfn et demi, in these two ^asefbnly. We never say il est douze heures, it is twelYe o^clock ; hui il esi midif ii esf mmuit* Des Nomhres coUectifs* Tho numbers which grammarians call collective, arc huttaine, neuvaine, dixa'ine^ dou%aine^ quin%ame, vingtmne, trcntaine, quarantaine^ cinquantalne^ soixantaint, centaine. Huitaine signifies eight days ; it is used in law \ a la fmltaine^ eight days hence, Neuvaine signifies a nine days devotion ; it is now never used in poetry, as it waS' formerly, to signify the nine Muses. ^ Dlxaine and douaaine signify a roi^lection of ten and twelve ; as, une dizaine on une dmtKain& di ppmmer, half a Fcorc, or adozen apples : douzaine signifies a dozen, and deml'donzaitte, half a dozen ; but we never say demuhuitmne^ demi'dixaine^ to signify four or five. .^inzame^ vingiaine, trentaine, &c. a coUcction of fifteen, twenty, thirty, &c. . . ^tarantaine is likewise said of the forty daysj which ''i^''' ■#■ a» fnii^CH TONGUE. $n press 8 hun. i speaking of I, a thousand cuivre^ Sec, /, or unf se^ emaines^ for a emairtes^ three temainetf fiw> neuf sfmatMif^ 8 ; trots moh^ atn^ cinq^ six « an. Thenc« WW, quatorzty may say for ghteen months demif io these clYc o'clock ; collective, are I centaine, in law ; a /<» ; it is wow to signify the n of ten and tfwmmer, half a a dozen, and Jemi^huitmnei Ition of fifteen, day 89 which |rH9fi5, cottkig frota a place Whore the plagne is^ are obliged to spend, before they 9te admitted into the town^ t* which they intend to go^ in K'rglish quaraniim, < >.iTt M/ HI There ore seme other oolUictiire ntimbers ; as, tircett quatrain y sixain j huitain, dizain, quinzain, trentain. The first dre a^ mcd oiily in spealciag of s^me pieces of poetry. The firfft signtfics a (rtpiet, the second a Mtania. of foilr verses, the third at»tanxa of sii rerses, &c. H) ^hituvu and trenfatK* are* used at tenoi». ^inzain is aahi when both pttyor»ll*fe fifieen^ und trentain wheik they hav^ f hirty. lit this seoise they itre ittde«Uaabte ; as. they an ia^ia^a 6\% ii* sofU qisiftzaiu, i :; ..., i\,i.-r.i ■ ■ '' ' 'u ^ ■,• • , /■ M'*i!W i^Aty M^: JDts NoMrfS ordittaux, '5 •: *, •'.i4 Thtr ordinal tiumhera stre prgmieYy stctmd.. troisume^ quitm trie me f cinquieme, tixisme^ Sic J'iiough we dti not say uttiame alone, it i8,< :however, iM«d afttr othvT aufhbers, instead o^ premier ; as, we do \iiA 9^y niingt f,i premier t twenly.fitst; tfend et premer^ istjihitt wrsay n>inp et unihu^ trente if tmieme, 'to 'MeitMur do we say vingt et second^ treMe et second i but Wifc d^r th^t^Jittxtemtti tretlte-deuxieme. Sfieiikiii^of a sovereiga, we make use of the cardinal numbers ; as, GuiUaurm trois, George troit^ L(^is quinze^ and not Guillaume troisietne^ &c. as in Boyers Grammar. Ilowerer, for first and second we make use of tbe ordinal numbers ; as, George pfimhir, Ftediric second. Speaking of the emperor Charles V, and of the pope Sixtt V, wa i^fCheirlis'.^nf.,8ixft*^imt^ We commooly say H-vte iro^, chapkre ^atrtt article ctnq^ ^MTHt huk, iMiihre dht^ patagraphe einq, page soixante ; however, Bpeatding' regultHrly, we make use of the ordinal tiuniblrryiosikch cases ; My Hvrt tfoitieme, chapitre quatrim Whetr twd' «nee#ta!n niiiifbers foHow one another, the iktsit is » caidittaly the SeciMid an ordinal num6er ; as, this * These words quinzaln and irentaln are formed by corrup- tion frdm jttiiize'a,jreti»^a, to signify quinxe^a-quinsiCf trenut^ «^trent€, '> i.-:*-*u iur?K > *.. . -..-i a ^f . , ; •■ ,-i» D d « • ' ^ il t '] ■ I •:•?.• -J#' 318 A GRAMMAR OF Tfl£ I 'J is in (he third or fourth chapter, ceia est Jans te iroh t$ guatrieme chapitre ; lie is the lerenth or eighth earl in the kingdom il est U sett ou huiii?me Comte du royaume. Eicept ptemier et teconJj which are always to be used in such cases. After moitUi half, tiere^ third, quatty fourth, we use the ordinal numberi cinquieme; s'tKume^ &c. .,**/.vi^i . When c'inquieme, tixieme, &c, are preceded by the in* definite article un, they signify the Afth, siith, &c. part of a thing ; as, I toolL a sixteimHi in the lottery, j'aiprk on seiademe a la loterie ; but when they are preceded* by the deftoite article le^ they must be followed by the pre^ position dt ; as, le cinqui^me, le slxieme^ the twelfth part of sixty is fi?/e, k douxieme de soixante est cinq. When speaking of the divisions of an ell, we say un demi-tiers or un -v/x, un demi-quart or un huit, un douxe, mn seize^ un vingt-quatrey un trente-deux. ^ When we ask for the day of the month, we commonly ••ay quti quantiime nvons-notts du mots f or quel jour avons" nous.du mots ? We likewise *say, le quan(ieme hesmvous de votre classe ? what place have you in your school ? When we speak of the day of the month, we always make use of tht cardinal numbers ; as, it is the fourth day of the month: ; t^est le quatre du mots, except for the first day «f the month, cV// U premier du mois^ ^ ^■,K^mk'- jyes Noms propret% \->t'%: y ti' It would be too tedious, and to no purpose, to rdaliB all the proper names thkt undergo an alteration in French. Vaugslasy and particularly Menage, have made a com- plete list of thum. They who are desirous to know such irregularities, may consult these two authors. I W4ll lay down here some general rules concerning this matter. lst.(Froper names of l^ingdoms, empires, provinces, kc, commonly take the French appellation ; 4hu8, £ng. land is called tjingkterre ; Wales, la provime de Galles ; IreiAndy I' Irl4nde,1^C9t\tind, I Ecosee, ^diy. Proper names of cities aad towns have commonly BO lariatlon, thou|;h sometimes pronouaced in a diflereot * -■ ■*i|. * FRENCH TONGUE. S19 ^ li te iroh •• jhth earl in Ju royaumt. to be ttted in ... 'A -■r\ I, we use the i by the in- ith, &c. part tery, j'tfi/H* preceded* by I by. the pre. ; twelfth part cmq. When f un demi'tifrt u, twi jeizet un we commonly rue/ jour avons* erne ites.vous de school ? When ^yg make vee of th day of the the first day of [po«e, to Tdate \tion in French, re made a com* Is to know «uch )r8. I will lay iiis matter. [res, proylnces, In ; 4hu8, Eng. \in^ de Gaiies; lave commonly iaadiSereiit manner ; as, Bristol, &c. Eicept. a few of the molt tc- nowncd places ; as, London, Londres, Neither are foreign proper names of men erer subject to any alteration of the whole word ; thus, Mr. White, in English, is Mont'uur White^ in French ; Mr. Biack is MonsieHr Blacky &c. and not Monsieur U BlatUy Montiemr U Noiry &c. 3d1y. Such ancient foreign names as ans much celuftrat. cd are commonly adapted to the genius of the French Ian. guage ; as, ffomere, Pindare^ VtrgiU^ Horace^ &c. jYMu*^ 4thly. A compound name commonly does not thangle it's termination ; as» Pttramus Priscut ; Marcus Varrtt^ &C, But if one or other of the two names be much cele. brated, it commonly follow, the genius of the French tongue ; as, JulesmCesary Marc-jlntointy ^tunte-Curctt &c. If the name be composed of three, the two first never chanf^e their termination ; as, Marctu TuUlut Ckiron i CaiuS'J^uJiuS'Ceiar, Sec* ,...,),. »; j» i {iifc^i.. «i*^^ #">»r| Nua^i, Ku^e^ Nue* «w i.u; These words, taken in a proper senle, signify nearly the same thing : hut, when they are taken iu a igurative sense, they are not used Indift'ercntly, !^nd aj synonimous eipressions ; for we say, to citol somebody to the skies^ elevtr quelqu*un jusqa'aux nues, and not nuaget ; and we say, trath dissipates the clouds of error, la viriti Jisslpe hs nuages de Verrettr^ and not nttes f the clouds which dark* en the urtderi landing, let nuaget qui cfi/tqueni lUntenJement i a cloud. of dust, un nuage de poussiere* u / ^^l. We say figuratively, he has a mist before hit eyes, f/.« ■vn nuage devant let yeux^ and not nue* To wear out a man's patienc^, to put him into a p v To be extremely surprised and astonished, tomher dft nues, and not nuaget. We say a persoji who is out of countenance, not know- ing to whom he is to address himself in a company, il stmhle itmier des nufs^ and not nuages ; and is not kaowQ to^ or owned by any body dti nuei» ^^., I who '^' >. ♦vl 'Hi. % 993 A GRAMXIAa OF THE - Wfl IfkcwlM My, 111 a b«d seaic, of • mm who^ in liii writings or discourse^ siNirf in tufth »> manner as to lose Mmsalf, ani oMiktf others losa ^hc manr •tisbjcce of his mrNlnKS or speech, il wperd d^ms ht ntetj ari4 not mMff*, Wa say, in a iipinitire seiike, oar aw^ se fAm&y lunuk gttmrBf aadnotmrd^ nor nue^ (o c\pvena that an enter- prise, a plot, a conspiracy, a puhishmeoty or Eririur, Stk^ U residy, and near briealiiTi|c o«t. ^rr* \ *i\:,;'%, r t^ .^ih^., •('•We likewiae make u«e of 0f irovd na/r, fd express a multitude df persons, l»trd», 6i^«9linal9i, that are snpposrd to be in tlorlctf ; as, there caaNr a cliMid' of barbarian.*!, irho laMi wMte all the ooantry ; iV vint lum nuie it Iktr* hares qui dholemtt- tout li poffs ; a ninltijrvu 'j 'Generally speaking, we make use of the word ffan^i*, when w* speak of what dims the sight, atwl Mmiers it frvnji stoeiog objects distinctly, ft is likevtisv ustil t# ex- press the dottbty the uncertainty^ or ignoranoD ul the mind* ,5 Orlg'maU VV" . '4t ■%U I I TMir#»rd) iiBflIadJ0GtiTely^ Hiaidof tDmething na#^ not doneafter a model ;^ a«, an origiaal pietnn^, uHttt*> ibaluorigimtl ; .that is not s copy, It is original ; eeUtiCat fat imtif ceh eat oYipnei, v,' . ... 'tX'. We likewise say ptnnt ori^ale, a nc«^ Ihoagbt^ a IboUgivt not taken from any aaithor; Wkear thi» w^ord •» nsed snbatavtivelyfy It isi said tff things which are the first in tbeir kimi^ atid ari» nio< copi. Rafter otbera ; rach arc maeter*pie(?t » of art, ancient ifian. uscripts, or letters written ov signed by those who ars • the auChovs: of them ; 8», this |>ictarc As an orrgifiaJ ; ce tableau exS um orig'mai f I'ongimtl' ffeirHt> ; /''originltl \ d^Uffi hare. \ Wc likewise say, speaking in mockery^ of A niilny and IjdiculoUB ft^low, fV.^ i/;t o^i| said df Lft, ancieat iftan- tboto wiio »t< ail Ofl|**^«^ ; « of awiHiy •«<* 'senffif> sp These two words, signifying a part^ ^ sfcira, a porti... . jfu ■'.■.v,'. s^^ • ., *l As these words are ascd« Several ways in a proptr setse^ it will not be aniiss to set the most paiht down, without tk# English annciad to them^ as these words, are easily un* derstood, wbeti a learner comet ao lar as t# J|)9ia ^if part: ■' ' '.' •••♦r"'- '. . .^-fu, A ,, r lu tant pour sa part tff portion. Donnex-moi mm part. Prendre su part. Le plus fort fait la part au plus foibk. II en a eu tant ^ sa part^ tant ^ur sa part, Entrer en part avcc quelqu^un^ itre de p3t avet Im. S'U y a du profit^ fen aurai ma part ^ ^c.j and not pfirtie. Wc say r partie d'Un tarps politifut. Le tout est fhs grand que sa partie. Les patties subtiles., grot» sieresy hvmogengs, heterogenes,^ life. L^umon dei parties^ ^arrangement des parties. Les quaire parties da monde, Ce prince perdit une partie de son royaume. Cette gram» maire est en quatre parties. Une partie de tmrmie etoit encore campee^ Vsntrs eto^ en marcoe. Il ff'avmt qu'une partie de ses troupes. II avoit tant d argent^ mats U in a donne une partie, II a vendu une partie _ de ses KvrtSr II a employe une partie de sa vie. a cela^ &e» and not part* .i \J I' <\ i> j^ #- _^g #►'■ s^ A GRAMMAR OF THE w Wc sajr if(fliffereRtIy /« plupart^ U plus grdnJe part^ la plus grands partiei to express the greatest number, the most part. Beside the foregoing irre^Iarities, part and pari'u are used, both in a proper and iigurative sense, in Several oth« er expressions, the chief of which are to ht met with in dictionariei. , ' &.. , . i\h* '(* -*> This word joined to the izfb prendre has many significa* ^ons. Prendre parti signifies to turn soldier ; in this sense it IS commonly foliuvred by the word regiment ; as, il a ptis parti dans un tel regiment. It lilLewise signifies to engage in a person's service ; but then we express with whom ; as,, he has engaged himself in the service of my Lord N. // a pris parti avec milord N, . *• k mk j;. Prendre son parti signifies to resolve, to take a final resohitiun ; as, fmpris mon parti y I am resolved upon it. When it is used in this sense, it is followed by no* thing else, «nd the verb ^r^^r^, and the possessive pro* noun which follows, must relate io the same person-; but when they relate to different pcrsdns, it signifies to de- lend, to take a person's part; as, I took his part, jji fris son parti. Prendre un parti likewise signifies to take a rcsolu. tion, with this difference, that it requires always after it either an adjective or a personal pronoun, to make a complete sense ; as, il a pris un parti avantageux^ or m^ parti qui est avantageuxf he tooH an advantageous resolU'j tion. Prendre le parti signifies to take a resolution, io choose,! «nd. is commonly followed cither by a verb in the infini' tive mood preceded by !«/ prendre k la in the secon* FRENCH TONGUE. A Vtt case, likewise signifies to embrace a calling, profession^ &c, thuM we say prendre le parti de Peglhet le parti def armes^ k parti de la robty to tMro clcrgyma^} f oidier^ lawyer. ' ; <■ , .'.u^^*^., ,/ .." - Tur/- y",^' .I'.'t h^* --X^- "- it Vh'. ... r.--i- .*>■ 'i*^' Passer, ;,«, i-'i<' ; ■ 'iw/i *j|juji This Tcrb is liable to several irregularities. We say sometimes indifferently passer and se passer ; as, U tempt passe^ or le temps se pat^ey time passes away ; la beaute passe f or la beaute se pOfM.bien vUe) beauty fades very soon. In this sense it is conjugated in its compound tenses by the auxiliary etre s as, le temps est passe. However, the one is sometimes* better used than the other. When we speak o( beauty in general, we say la beaute passe ; but, when we speak of a handsome person, whose beauty decays, it is better to say, sa beaute st passe, ♦/ We say des coukufs qui sepaisent^ pteferahly to de* coum leurs qui passentf eo\o\xrs ihsit tside. When we speak of time, merely to express the rapidity with which it flies away, and without mentioning in what manner we spend it, we say le temps passe ; let jours pas» sent ; les annees pasfent, ; ^ii* s4i#f| 3ut when we speak of time with relation to the iise we make of it, we say ee passer /.one part of our life flies away in desiring the futuu-, and the other part in lamer ing the past I une partie de natre vie 4e p^sft ^ dedrfr Paveni^ /' -.■•.r- .....,.;.. r.,.\ ,/ fc^i,v.,'.,. «^.«; *; We do not s^y iudifferently iV ut passe and il a passer ^^ is gone by. ^4 -ri^> .^m^ . When passer has either a ease governed, or relation to places or persons, we say il a passe^ either in a proper or figurative sense; as, he pass^ this way, il a passe par id ; the troops have passed through Garmany ; les troupes ont passe par l^jillettuigne, s: ,' ,^ '.v^'i^im pJ hvy^P pif' f Passer is conjugated in it*8 compound tenses, by the help of the verb avo/r, when it is used in a figurative sense, and has a relation to something * as, after his second part he passed to his conclusion ; apres son second point, il a passe aita conclusion^ V - \ m ': t ■■■^!i if! «»^ *. •,« ■w » y. ■ "k I A CRMSIAR OF THE r^'^^ni fas'4r lias aieither a case goretned, tor relation, it is coujugaUMl hj the help of etre ; as, the troops hata passed by ; Us'triH^s ^dnt pasties. The two follow iog expressions, a passe ^ est passe ^Bfitak^ ipg of words or expressions used in a language, hare a 4iuite contrary signification ; as, for example, ce mot a passe^ signifies that this word took, or was receired into ttie ; wlicreas the other eipression, ee tMt Ht passe t signi. to tiMt this word is ob8oleto|iMd qaits out of ai^ Oenerally'thtt wori passer ^^Ajugated in it*a cMipoand tenses ^tlh ttte teH) avotr^ wniint is used actNrely. '^- ^tJALtmiu, when it sijg&ifies to be reputed, accounted for, though in tlU» sense it is tiot used actively ; as, Cvdmwell was repute^ the greatest politician of bis age; Cronmell a passe fottf ie 'plus grand pvHt^ue de stm steels \.*i PaSsiontUl\ - \J^'^>^i ■.^.Ji:fc:.»G ;>;;, -.i- Passksittiy tised adjectlfisl^c, is Mid 4)oib of persnni, and things which have ration te ptilrsofis ; as, uuhommepatm sionne ) ebs sMimens passionnh ; ides estpressious passumnhs ; Mn mr'passk^m. When this word is said of things, it never has n castt governed after it ; as, des sentimens passhtmes, &c. But If it be said of persons, sometiines it has a case, sott^ines not ; When It Bais no case, It is coanDonly tak«n in a bad mn^e ; as, an honim ptosionnSf a passionate man : when it has a case after ft, it signifies fond of a things nnd then it has a good or bad sense according to id OMB ; as, un bthnme pmsiottile pont ia v^htpiif p^ur h gldirey pour I'honneur^ &c, A uvm fond ofc^^l' - ■• honour* •'^ '^■*^' ,vr>mj9«:^-^<^', n tm ^ ^ - ■■ •■ '-^':.-\i^ P&sf&nnajre, » 7i '^ '.■.1 ^ \'\ \\ ileasure, of glory ?f of 1 i') i-.i ^>. ;vj,-- ' I. »'* i?->-4 ■•s- This word is applied only to aien, not to women ; as, the greatest men df antiqufty, ks plus grands per- soiinaga de Vanti^nite ; he is' one of ihe most illustrious men of thif age, c^est. um dcs phts ilhstres persmtitiges de et,sitc1e* .*."^^^r *■" '■ ■■" •"'■ *r' ^ -i^*— .■•'■'-- -■* > ••■'•■ --i - ■ .v:> »% JTRENCH TONGUE. ^ MS tor relation, • troops bafo ^xj/, speakw uage, hate a pie, ce mot a reeeired into tfMiie, Bigni- t of ni^. U*« compoand :twclf. d4, accounted actively ; ai, an of bis age; ^ pm s'lecUi .■ j s;fc;»G >»;ji • a K ,1.VV of pcfsotii, tnd , un homme fai'> om fatiionnlts ; jevcr ka«* ct§tt Ltf'x,&c. But Wse, 90ta^i*)M [tak«n in a bad e man : ^^^n ^blng, nnd Ihcii ^ CttiB ; *s, un ^Utire^ four of i\ory, of ..iA ** , M ♦ i\j ''^'■•5« ^t to women ; it grands per- ml illu«trtous tersdntitiZ" ^' * , - We say, in ffUhiliar discourse, in ridicule of a person, €*Mi un sot personnagty cUst ua ridicule pcrionnagey he is a sil- ly fellow, a ridiculous man. When fers9nnage is preceded by the definite article, without some moiUfying word before or after it, it is com- monly ti^en in a bad sense ; as, 1 know thef^^w, J4 t9ffmmt kpertmmge* , Vi fit Pitnturty j^0r^ty TMm* i' These three words, wfiil they are Ukon ^uratty^ly, luif e the same sense, ai^d signify a description, a pictui;e of 9opie person or thing ; bnt vt\^tk they are t^keo in a proper sense, they ilgniiy different tiungp. The first is said, 1st, of what is painted upon a wall, wainscot, &c. Sdly, of the art of painting ; Sdly, inf t^ colour in geueral which is made use of in painting. The secc*> ^ said of a picture, which is drawn to rep- resent any ^f^^;^ after life. ^ The third is said of any pictur^upon ,WQQd, cloth, brass, &e. representing a history, landscape, . hut)i|iug, bunting, storm, shipwreck, &c. Even what is df^wn after a statue, bust, medal, &c. is called toMeau^ and not portrfiitf the latter a).ways signifyii^g a picture dr^wp llftfiriife^ \ ; :. %:^^ -.«• Pfrsuofh'* '/^':f-i_ '«- «isi' -^v 5f- When this ferb signifies to convince, it conunonly persuade . , cerity of his intentions, Urn' a persuade deJa sincerite de se* intentiotttm " fiut when this verb sigai^s to advise. It governs the third case of the person, and is always followed hj^^A verb in the infinitive mood, preceded by the prepositioii- iR? ; as, I will advise him to go tJiither ; je hi piriuAdermd\y aUetfx: I have advised him to study, j« hi aipertvad^i^6fudt4r, i i £e -4r ■K '-: !«**■■ liiif I I M fi IM v;t' M6 A GRAMMAR OF TiiE '? ■7''^::. ■ ' : '■■■ ''^^f'. .' -.:;■"' ; * This word is not joined with all sorts of tubstaa(lf«9. "We say, un perturhateur du repos public ^ de Vetat^ de Veglise / a disturber of pubiic repose, of the state, of the churth ; but we cu not saj un perturhateur du psupUy a disturber ol the people. Likewise we say trouhjer le repot puhluy Vwdre^ Vetat, VegUse^ un royaunuy to distu|l^|ublic repose, order, the state, the church, a kingdonl^ipKt we do not say trouhler iepeuple, un etat^ vne provinee^ todisturb the people, a state, a pro?tnce i though we say exLtter des troubles parmi le pen* phy to excite disturbances among the peopla ; exeUerdes troubles dans un eiaty dans une province^ &c. According to the Fbench Academy, perturhateur is scarcely used but in this ^phtasef perturhateur du repos public, i. ^ Fiquer fsey* , . ''^ THis TC^rb signifies, 1st, to be offended, to be angry at ; «s, he is offended at the least thing, il se pique de la moindrt chote, ' I Poliksu, H' ' This woid is used in a figuratiYe sense only ; for w« say: i^e politeness of the court; la politesse de la eour ; ^aod we do not say, la politesse des perlesy la politesse du\ marhrey but le poli ; though Vi 6 s&yt ifu mMrbrepoliy polisb* ed marble. What we hate said of the word poUtessey may be sp* j*iicd to many other substantiTeSy which are used only ,; .7.. ^,v ;<-.,, ' lubstantlf «>• fat, de reglhe t I the churth ; a disturber of Vtrdre, Vina^ Be, Older, the lot say trouhkr people, a state, Us parml k pen* pU ; txcU&diS ptrturhateur is r du repos public* ■■'-".: ':^i^ \''-'^ ' to be aBgry at : Ique de la moindft i up for ; M> * and pretends to ait touti et ne St speak iwell, m <* bis generosity in ieur. This^erb, llowed by thJ -It? V ■ Leonly; fo"»«' Mtesse de la eour; |«, la politesse i» \rbrepolii l?om^ \esse, maybeap. are used onif FRENCH TONGUE. $27 in a Sg'iratire Bonse, though the adjectifo from which they are derived is used, both in a proper and figuratiTe tense; such are, among others, tendresse, droiture. Though we say, du pain tendre^ new bread, and cohnne droite, a straight coiumn ; yet wo do not say, la iendresse dupaiuj la droiture d*une colonne, ^ , ■ - ' . rects. When this word is uslil^jectively, it signifies precise, fixed ; as, a fixed time, temps prkis ; a lixed iXdyf jour precis ; a fixed hour, heure precise. We say of a mau who is concise and exact in his dis. *i courses : il est fori precis dans ses discours ; what you say 13 very plain, ce que vous ditefJa est fort precis, , But when it is used substantively, it signifies the sub. stance, the summary, of what is the main, the chief, the most important thing in an affaii*, science, book^ &c. as, there is the whole sulbstADce of tbU book j iioiia tout It precede ct iivrt. '*T_ ^-^'^ ^ M% Pires de, Fret a* If # - -" 'I* These two expressions followed by a verb, are very often mistaken one for the other, even by authors of re- pute, ., ;j^'';' Fres ^signifies nea&*, at the point of : he is at the point of death, // est pre s de mourir. Fret a siguiiies prepared, disposed ;. 9tk^ he is prepared to di^ ilest pret a. mourir^ *^H Fropre,. ' ■./*-'. .•«^ When this word signifies fit, good, apt, it is foflowec! either by the preposition a or pour j as, a man fit for ■war,, ua homme propre a.la guerrey or, pour la guerre ; aa hei 1 good for healing wounds, une herhe propre aiguerir des plai. ? ,^ or, pour guirirdes plates. However, when it is followed by an active verb having a passive signification, it is always followed by a ; as, a truth fit to be preached, lau *verite propre a precler ; fruit good to be preserved, du fruit propre a confire, or, a iire cenfit, # , i '■'ll t^ II ;^.(6^*-f .^1;. ■■v;hv\"- . :,•"'- '■ -1'- 3^ A GRMMAR OF THE When propri is taken lubitaatifeljr, it stgmfies' a par* ticnUr quality, which distinguishes a thing from all oth* ers ; as, the property ot birds i» to fly ; k proprt det •utau litest dc volcr. Raillerle. When this word is used* without any article, as, , gtve a good interpretation •Tany thift^. When it is used with the satne vefrb entendre^ and with i^t definite article, as, enttndte la raiiUriej it signifies to the rerb entendre^ and raillerU^ it signifies to tery, not to be o^ended bt! {^qoafrtted raillerie. with the art of raillery ; as^ it entend la We ioiR^i\(iKii ftky^ taUUfk ipatt^ serioiiilyi In eanresti 4^' «-- %■ Reehirch* This word it not ^tially applied to all Mirgr ; forwt »lo not stiy^faire la recherche dune chose perdue^ d*une chose Sgaree^ to inquiro after a thiir^ that is lost or mislaid; though we say, ./aire la rechsrehe d( la mo de ^tttlqi$^$m, to maUe an Inquiry into the life and actions of a person ; /aire la reeherehe d'une Jille^ to court a girl for a wife. In ihis sense we likewise say, rechercher une JdU en tnariagcy or only la rechercher. We do not say, in a proper sense, the seeking after the treai^urds which the sea encloses in it's depths, la recherche des iresors que la mer renferme dans ses ahimes. However, we say, in a figurative sense, la recherche des biens de la terre tt des tresors, the pursuit after wealth and treasures. W* tike#ise say les rechrches de Ventiquite, the inquiry into antiquity ; il faut tonjours travailler a la recherche de la verite, we should always be occupied in the search of truth. It is applied likewise to curious researches ; as, tMs book IB full of curious inquiries ; ct livre est plein dt re» cherches curieuses. Though we do not say of a lhin|^ lost or mislaid, faire la recherche j yet we mat make use of reeiertiet^, to FB^NCH TOJfaUR* m goifies a par- from all oth* k propre det entendre, ani it signifieB to to be offended iJfe, and Willi it sienifies to 08) S entend la iHyj In earaesU Mtigf ; fur wt /«#, d'une chose &t or mislaid ; {e guelqH*un, to of a person ; or a wife. In lU en mariagey iekwg after the hs, la recherfh les. However, buns de la terre reasures. i, the inquiry \ recherche de la the March of fches ; as, this est plein de re» |r m^sUld, fake reikerJu^i to m}f^ j^ll pvery ^yhac^ y^v |i^H.7t^k ^^^^n 5 vp^ «*«v« pas blen cherehe partout, ilfaut Kficlfefflfer* ^.,ii, A i\V;i 't- Rfglf^.y J^Jigulier, significations. ^* ' Wef^y jfin^ if^gi|l|^ ,^|$ 8itp.dy aiid pqi^ct; un Vyp ^kftyvi^ say iL^ rgi^urt K^gUes.^ gpod n)anpcr^ ; une vie reglee, a pure and tnn6cent life ; unehorloge ^if t$r glef, 9 f^locli jtha^ gogs >v«ll ; vn repm r^gle, a repi|?^ pot tpv exp^cpsj.ye j Ve do not ^^y, fji,this sensjB, c est u^efemm r{glk i tU* JI'T>rd Jij^s fj^itg ^ different meaning ; however, we s»y^ cest uri Jioqyfie regl/.^y Jie is a fisVi^f*-!"" IP^n- '.'A^'^'^^:!'' .:'*$ \Ye s^y regulkr of things done In % pnifojlo aii^ r^ulai^ in,ann^jr, ^i^rticujarly ojf tihos a regular pfocerdinj ; une lea»i^ regtilifir^f 9 regular bjE^aH- ,ly ; ufl nfguvemetft regulier^ a ^r^at and uiiift^rip inp^ipn ; veties reguhers ; Idtiment regvlier, let t^qitfueme^t regufifrs rfajson of som.p rn.ihj m,eaviwur, >'jnJ)B natural defect, MT &on\?i eccl,e^i4Sti^al Uvy, p^aiipiH M^ d^M^i^ed into prder^, or olHi'iate if he i)e in ^urdvrs. Wowfiyfir, irrfguikr is frequfa>jtly us/yi in 5i,)j?si|^ifig of ' E e 2 rtl t 1 1 1 /: ^:.. ■*f- 310 A GRAMMAR OF THE ihfhgs ; as, une procedure irreguUere^ utv bdtiment IrregutieTy nn d'ucours irregulier, des mauieres trregulieres^ fortijicatiort irregulterey poeme irrtguHer^ Sin* -^ , « ^v "^ ■ Rendrt. ^ Rendre juttke a quelcpt'un signifies to dd a itiaii jastice, ta give him his due. Rtndre laji^ice signiiies to ixercire or to administer justice. This verb is never followe(^Ni{l^ participle passive ; as, for these are the means to maltl you known, we must not say', c^st le moyen de vous rendre cnnnu ; but, de vous fairc ttmnoitre. -.■■'■■■ Some French authors have put » participle after this Terb, as, fpr example, one of them says, la vtrtu rend chert de Dieu, virtue makes you beloved by God. SUch expressions are very faulty. The verb- rendre, in rthis sense, is to be joined only with pure adjectives ; as, hortf aitnable, tUustre, ridicule, odieuxj celebre, &c. or- with- Sttbstantives, ^ Neither do we say, with a certain French author, rm^ dre laguerison^ to cure a person ; because people had no cure before they were sick ; and we nse, ia t!»L sense, the Terb rendrt, only speaking of things whiefa are lost, or of which we have been deprived. ilett<;e it follows, that we may say, rendh la sante, io restore ti^alth;. retidre la vie ^ to restore life ; because wo enjoy health and life before we are deprived of (hem. Thus too we say, rendre la vue, lesforc^i, lalihertcy lap' petit, * ' " ' Ridesse,^ \--i. Th:s word, used m the singular, signifies sometiines op. vlence, riches ; as, commerce makes all the riches of that country, le commerce fait toute la richetse de ce pays-la* Sometimes it sig^iitie?, in poetry, the exactness and Justness of the rhymes ; as, the exactness of rhyme contributes a great deal to the beauty of poetry ; la richesse de U rime contrthue heaucoup a la veauie ai la po'esie* Sometimes it '^'^nifies the copiousness of a language, as the copiousness of the £DgUsh language j la tiidtesse de la kngue An^kise, ■*a; .*>iSif* •*/ ■* - FRENCH TOKGUE. *'* SM t trreguUery foruficationr m jastice, to- il ttxercips or . ■ ' ' " passive ; as, we must not de votufairc- pie after thi» la vtrtu rend iJod. erb' renirtj in idjectives ; aSj &c. Of with- h aolhor, rw- people had no t'ula sense, the are lost, or of f/r la sante, to le ; because we Irived of thein. lalihertey lap' sometimes op- [e riches of that tie ce paysJa. less and justness |e cootiibutcs a \idesse de U rime a language, as la riobem de la Sacbesses^ in the plural,; Mid in a propefv^Bie^ always aigoifios sreat riches» , ^ i . - ■'. v.;^ -Jt ■' !.t .i^'r«> ''^ This verb someHmcs governs the first case,, aadl sorne^* ^mes the third. There jm some occaaioosy on which k governs the first ca8e,.jM|j| not the third ; as^ all tho wealth of the world )s B^lilbie to satisfy the human heart,. tow lee blens dit< monde ne eont pat capakler de eatufaire le aeur outnain. i- We likewise say, satisfdlre set parsionSf sa colere, son am* hUlon^ sa vaniicf sa oariosUe, Sec. ; and not satisfdire d sei' passions, Sec. ; to satisfy, to content our passions, anger, ambition, &c. There arc some others, on which it governs the third, and not the first case ; as, satisjaire H son' devoir^ to dis. charge our duty ; sathfalre d une obligation ^ to acquir, an obligation ; satisjaire aux personrih qu o,i a ojftnsees^ to> make reparation to persons we have otfenJcd. However, we say, in the first case, .f«/ij/iz/rf Us per-»- jonnes « qui on doit y to pay people to whom- we are ia<»- debted.^ » -- The general nile to know whether satisfaire govern the first or the third Ctfse^.is this ; when it is used in the sense of to pay or content, it governs the first case ; ^nd when^ it is used in the sen»e of to make reparation, or discharge* a duty, is governs the third case.. '*f ,^^f Supplier; ?Sv Though this word be more respectful and submijssive' than prier, yet wo do not say suppiier Dieu^io beseech God ; we say prier Dieu^ However, speaking to God, we say with propriety, je fe *upplie, o mon Dieu ! nottj^.ti' supplionr, 6 Dieu de msericorde I ^ siucit is the caprice of custom in the nse of this word, that we dare not eatploy the word prter^ speaking of a kini;, or of persons of a much higher station than ours^ though we use it speaking of ;Crud ; for we do not say, prier le roi, hut supplier leroi,^' . ^ .^ , ^iJl- iPr Home personi lay faime toyj let Bom livruy UU qu^tu soieni ; I like all good buok§, whatcrer they may be. But this is wrong : wo ouj^bi to say qutls qu'tU io'unt ; for teh qu'tU totent would signify surh as they are. Moreofer it gofernf Ihe indicative, aid not the iubjiino tif« mood ; coosequentiy^Jt^koiiid ka^ tek quUU jgnt. *.'•»» These two words arc subject to the caprice pf cuslom* yhcTis arc some cases v^Vre we pi^lt^e uat; pf tl^e ^fst, and .pther^i wh«rp we make use of the secpnJ ; f^Sj fpr *'J1AV^' pl^, we say .: if cent miUe ecus vqillan^iy Kc is wpHl^ |i hundred thousand crowns ; il a en tneubUs dht rniUf ecus mf^Ufintt bijs piTAonjil est^^e i^ wo^t^ t^n ti^pus^nd cjrowns. |iut ^e SflX) jf itfi tii dfinne dlx tableaux va/aift deux ^ufnees Ifi pieccy ^nd ppt vaillmt I 1 baf^ givei^ hjm fl^ |)icturv5 wprtb two|p^|.nea$ a piecCf When it si^pj.ties wb^t a map is M^prjtb^ ^Uhj^r jp ^|s re^l pr p^rspi^i^l est>»,te, we nxal^c usjB of vail/^fff ; but, >vh^n it injnlies ^l|at Althing i^ worlhf ^ u ijii^ke ,v^ yf valant. This rellectioQ may eaaity be applied to i)^p for/^- KoiMg ^^^mplM. , , ,, .M"\^^r FelHcr. ,. -, ..--^.■- -.■■-■:^^ JTe^lfffipe fifrs/m^i tg V.^tt'^ « WW5on, has two Mcrj ent significations '; it sigpifi^e^ tp spfptl .a pi^bf wMM ^ tick person, to take care of him : it likewise signifies to watch, to observe, to have a w^atchful eye upon a person. In this sense we likewise say vciller sur une personne^ tur les act'ignSf ^ur la c^it^ftite de Que/gu'wi. ^VeiUer governs spiuetioies the tnifd ca Itities to taVe care things : as, je ve, Hf dur affaiis. casp ; it th,cn sig. are. and }^ properly applied only (o ^eiilerai fi vof affaireff 1 wril take care |)f ,:.^. ^ <> ,*,». #1.'* Venir a lout. .1 ^- Whftn thHvfirJMS.ftppliod to .ihVq^g* j »*, as, ilest venn a lout de ton defsjem* .veitir ^ lout ifi ju^ficd ; v-^ FRENCH TONaU£. liey may be. ks they are. the •ubjuDO ice pf cuslppi). tl)e (irs«»*nd li.e i3 ^prtl» # <&* ^ii//f ecus ousand crowns. gWeii him ^ i/ pvthpr |p Ms ltd to iVf? I^f^- bas iyfo ^iff^^f ise signifies to upon a jiereon, w per Sonne ^ suf (7 it th.cn s|g- pplitd only to /ill take (jare.ff 1^, ,wf«/r ^ hout liMy tp 8u«^fl<^ ; Whra it is appltod to porsoai) it aigoifiM 1 0»etiaea t» ItecUim a person ; as^ this child caonot be reclaiiiied, on m swtrok nemr ^bout tk (s$ enfant. Sometimes it sianiftoe to of et come a maa*a eaoniw ; •§! t/ vtendra a bout at towt ses ennemiim ♦V •^ > X^^fli^ Though we say, wiili iM^iCclCy vent du nori^ norti^ %lnd ; ventdasudy soo jpinild ; yet we say ^ with the preposition ds oa!/) vent'd'ist, east wind ; vent d'otust, west wind. . r'* * -'t'«J We say in familiar discoarse of a person, il est i la- viile^ to eipress that he is not in the country ; and $i gsl M nnlltf that he is not at home, when wa^ara spealting* , Vm^ .7^ ^. ''J» '^f Vr^99kfnmdi Jkwffigne, d» Ckmf^(ti»^% ^Sd9m% it Ifmugak de Pmmh 4(e. v and we sajji, «•« ^ kbtny and not vin de Mbin* This word) which commonly signiiies t<^ be w{II|ng, to have a mind to, has several jptjier signifia4t|oDS t- it signi- fies first, to commaod ; as, the kin|;; tomitf^^ds ^ou to obey, U rot veut qtie vans obeissle%M. .t . *>,# f ,t^ « 3ffiondly« to desire, t9 wish ; as, they wltl give yoju whatever you desire ; %n vous ^Mnera Uufi fe quf yqt^s llfOudrez, f< Thirdly, to consent, to agree ; las, yes, J con$eii4^to it, ouif je k veux bien ; if you a|;ree tq it^ hp ir^R |i^^ wise ; st vous le vouiez, il le voudra aussL - ^ ., ^^4*.-^ Fourthly, a necessity ; as, this attair mustbe conddc^l with prtidence ; cette affaire veut etre conduiti avee pru* dence ; this picture roust lie seen in ij;*s proper light, ee tableau veut etre vii dans son jour. When the wurdf bien, prece^ by the article, is added to it, it sigoifies to have a repS'd for somebody, to wish him well ; as^ il vous veta du bien. When the word -tmX SS4 \'> A, GRAMMAR, Ac. ma/ U athfed to it, U iJgnifiM the contrarjir i n^ U vomt vetudumal, — •' ^ We say tn vouloir h auelqu'unj to eipreei • desire of hurt;ing- soiiiebodj ; as, i knov thU he aeeks to injure yon^Je fait quUl vous en veui, Wc say d qui en voule%'VOus- ? Whom do yon ask^ whom do you iouk fur ? A qui tm^ veuiM f What ail* him ? What does he corpul«M>t ? •. ' " - v - - ^ veui dire cet honllSf^^\wi%^ what meani thia naait ? What does he want ? And, to express mere sur. prise, we sometimes say que veut dire cela f What ia that ? la the same manner, we say, of words or fhin.js, whioh we do not iindersUiul, que veut dire ee mot f ^ui veut dire a precede ? This word, bcsme it's various sighificatidns, which are to be met with ii dictio >aries, has several others. Per- dre une chost de vue, sfgriifies to cease to see a thing ; as, li vaisxeau s'eioigna en feu de tempt ^ et nout la perdimer de vue. We likewise say of an ailai^, on la perdue de vue^ to ex* press that we do not know how it has gone on^ jivoir vue sur quelqu^ua signifies, in a figurative sense, to have a rii^Itt to observe somebody, in order to rule and conduct him ; imd avo/r la vue sur quelquun signifies to have Bt'^iivatchf 111 eye Upon somebody, to watch his con. ' A\x9ifyy^^J^^^, avoir del mues pour quelqu^un^ to have a design^ to procure somebody an advantage ; avoir dei vues sur quelqu*un, to have a design to employ him to do something ; and avoir des vues sur quelque choset to have a desigo to ojbtaio a thio*|f ; 'YW^' 4./ ii .IS # ■ '^■■; ^■ JS. ' "There are some other (practical irregularities ; the great, tr pa^t of vrhicb have beeo noticed io the thini part of tlii& C»uuDmac.. IvA^ '.> &A\\ a' Vni IDMU 7/ . // ;, as, U vowr eei • desire of kIls to injure do yon asky .ii f What aila at meant this •rest mere sur- ia ? What ia rds or thin.j.s, e (etnot f J^m idns, whtcli are I others. Per- « a thing ; as, f>erdimei de vut, de vue^ to eiL- J on. ■ t-v 5''«i igurative sense, iler to rule and lu/i signifies to ;vatch his con. fqu^unf to have ige ; avoir des iploy him to do chostf to hftve a ties ; the great, tiinl partof this^ %'. "■■' V '■ > // ^.. ' .*. -^^ '■■<«- • 4^ '. ct ^'M ■■''^>^- >'.s^' '-P'^^ 7 -*" *•■--< ^.?*^ ..*'■ ■si' 'U. ^ :■'•»*■ 'It-- '• ■i y * *- / •--r-'Ml^^ W'. t I X,- T ,'tii'l ,r i !>M.. .>■-': -.,-»*« --»,...■*« ■Mi I #^:/'-^ii?** Ik f V m k /'■^ r Kdik , .*^ ^ i*. ■ ^'# r ?^i.. vA :'■■